v   %     NEW  PRACTICAL 

HEBREW   GRAMMAR 

WITH 

HEBREW-ENGLISH  AND  ENGLISH-HEBREW 
EXERCISES 

AND 

A  HEBREW  CHRESTOMATHY 

BY 

Solomon  Doutsch,  A.  M.,  Ph.  D. 


NEW    YORK, 
LEYPOLDT    &    HOLT. 

1868 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  186.8  by 

SOLOMON  DEUTSCH,  A.  M.,  Ph.  Dr. 

in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States, 
for  the  District  of  Maryland. 


/ 


C.   W.  Schneider  cith,  Pr.,  Baltimore,  MA. 


I  £S   / 

PREFACE. 


Although  many  and  valuable  Hebrew  Grammars  have  appeared 
in  this  country,  which  in  completeness  and  critical  ability  have  left 
little  to  be  desired,  I  yet  venture  to  offer  this  work  to  the  public, 
with  the  expectation  that  this  result  of  my  labors  will  still  be  found 
useful  to  the  Hebrew  student. 

jjjfi  has  been  my  aim,  divesting  the  Grammar  of  all  extraneous 
detail,  to  present  it  full  and  complete  in  every  necessary  particular. 
I  have  especially  had  in  view  the  wants  of  those  instructing  them 
selves,  for  whom,  as  well  as  for  schools,  I  have  endeavored  to 
make  this  volume  a  practical  introduction  to  the  language  of  the 
Old  Testament. 

I  shall  briefly  recapitulate  the  distinctive  features  of  this  man 
ual. 

1.  To  facilitate  the  commission  of  the  rules  to  memory,  they 
have  been  expressed  with    all    the  conciseness   consistent  with  per 
spicuity.  ^ 

2.  Believing  that  exceptions    are    more  properly  to  be  sought 
in  the  Lexicon  and  Critical  Commentary,  I  have  noted  such  irregu 
larities  only  as,  by  their    frequency,  can    claim   to  be  held   integral 
parts  of  the  language. 

3.  The  illustration  of  the  abstract    by  the  concrete  being  ne 
cessary  to  the  clear  understanding    of  the    former,    the   rules  have 
been  explained  and  confirmed    by    examples,  and  further  elucidated 
by  exercises. 

4.  In  elaborating  these  exercises,  I  have  taken  great  care  to  se 
lect  valuable  sentences,  containing  either  an.  interesting  historical  fact 
or  a  sententious  moral.     The  internal   character  of  the    passage  has 
been  considered  as    well    as    its    external  grammatical  form.  —  The 
Syntactical  part  is  without    exercises,    the  rules  being  illustrated  by 
examples  only.     Nevertheless  the  student  will  become  fully  familiar 
with  them  by  the  constant  reference    made   to  them  in  the  Etymo 
logical  part. 

5.  In  the  acquisition  of  a  language,  the  learner,  in  order  to  fa 
miliarize  himself  with  the  grammatical  forms,  should  make  frequent 
translations  into  it   from   his   mother-tongue.     To  this  end  English- 
Hebrew  exercises  have   been     prepared,    particularly  illustrating  the 
rules  which  they  immediately  follow,    anticipating   nothing,    but  ex- 


IV 

actly  keeping  pace  with  the  student's  progress.  I  have  intentionally 
made  the  construction  of  the  English  sentences  conformable  to  the 
verbal  arrangement  of  the  Hebrew*  Where  the  English  construction 
admits  of  no  change,  I  have  endeavored  to  aid  the  student  by  help 
of  numerals  irregularly  placed. 

6.  The   approved   results   of  continental  research  have  been 
concisely  embodied  in  this  volume.     Gesenius,  Ewald,  Fuerst  (Lex 
icon),  L.  D.  Luzzatto  (Grammatica  della  Lingua  Ebraica),  Naegels- 
bach,  being  followed  in  important    points;    the  latter's  arrangement 
of  the  declensions  has  been  preserved  with  slight  alterations.    ^ 

7.  In  the  Paradigms,    presented  at  the  end  of  the  Granmmr, 
the  groundforms  are  distinguished  by  asterisks. 

8.  Although  the  words  in   the    Hebrew  exercises  are  transla 
ted  as  they  occur,  a   vocabulary    is    added ;    first,    to  save  the  stu 
dent's  time  and  labor   in  seeking  a  forgotten    word,    secondly,    that 
he  may  refer  to  it,  should  he   be    in    doubt    as   to  the  form  of  the 
word  when  uninflected. 

To  economize  space,  however,  and  to  refresh  the  learner's 
memory  with  regard  to  the  original  sentence,  no  translations  are 
given,  but  the  student  is  directed  to  the  number  of  the  exercise* 

9.  A  Chrestomathy  composed   of  various    selections   in  prose 
and  poetry  from   the    Old    Testament   is    given    with  a  vocabulary 
consisting  of  all  the  words  not  found  in  the  exercises. 

10.  The  two  vocabularies  contain  about  two  thousand  different 
Hebrew    words    in  general   use.     How   large    a    proportion    this  is, 
one  can  easily  perceive,  when  one  considers  that  the  whole  number 
of  radical    words    in    the    language    does   not  exceed  1867,     It  is 
therefore  expected  that  the  diligent  student  in  a  few  months,  will  be 
enabled  by  mastering   the  Hebrew   exercises  and    the  Chrestomathy 
to  read  understandingly  the  less   difficult  portions   of  the  Old  Tes 
tament. 

By  this  enumeration  it  will  be  readily  seen,  that  the  plan  in 
some  respects  possesses  the  character  of  novelty,  and  it  is  hoped 
that  this  fruit  of  earnest  and  zealous  exertion  will  be  found  accepta 
ble  and  useful. 

Baltimore,  July  15,   1868. 


PART  I. 

OF  THE  ELEMENTS. 


CHAPTER  L 

LETTEKS,  SOUNDS  AND  SIGNS. 

§  1.     ALPHABET. 

df 
1.  Twenty-two  consonants  compose' the  Hebrew  Alphabet. 


FORM. 


NAMK. 


POWER. 


D 

Aleph 
(3)      Beth 

JV3     (*  fVjl  house) 

a,     scarcely   audible 
breathing. 

bh,      b 

y 

Q)        Giinel 

7DJ    (s  7p|  camel) 

g  in  go 

n 

(1)      Daleth 

H/H  (s  HTI  door) 

d 

n 

He 

*j"|  (the  meaning  doubtful) 

h  in  he 

i 

Vav 

^     (a  nail,  hook) 

w  or  v 

r 

Zain 

pf     (a  weapon) 

z 

n 

Cheth 

J"pn  (a  fence) 

ch    in  the  German 
word  nach 

B 

Teth 

]1^D  (a  basket) 

t 

t 

Yod 

*i^  (*  1^  hand) 

J  in  ye 

D 

Final. 

Q)  "I  Caph 

£13  (the  hollow  of  the 

ch  or  k 

7  Lamed 

0  D  Mem 

3  "  ?   Nun 

D  Samcch 


ox-goad)   1 


(  s  D'P  water) 
(a  fish) 


m 
ri 

s  in  sons: 


PAIIT  I.     ELEMENTS. 

FORM.  NAME.  POWER. 

Ayin  ]*y  (eye)  not   pronounced 

Final. 

:£))  *]  Pe  N*2  (  =  ,15  mouth)  ph,  p 

Y  Tsade'          H¥  (a  fish  hook)  ts 


Koph  v"]1p  (the  eye  of  a  needle  or  k 

1    the  back  of  the  head) 
Resh  £>H  ( *  £>X 1  =  £\sn  head )  r 


^  Sllin  V»*(- WJ  tootl^  sh 

/ x •  I  iff    \     (^    lOOtll) 

C^  Sin  s 

D  (fl)     Tav  }fi  (a  cross  mart)  th   t 

NOTE  I.  ^  and  ,*"]  may  be  respectively  compared  with  the  Greek 
spiritus  lenis  and  asper;  H  is  a  deep  guttural  sound  (the  German 
ch);  y  like  X  is  commonly  omitted  in  reading.  The  nasal  (ng)  pro 
nunciation  ofy  is  incorrect.  In  the  Septuagmt  it  is  sometimes  represen 
ted  by  the  spiritus  asper  or  lenis,  sometimes  by  the  Greek  Gamma  s  g. 
In  the  Arabic  the  corresponding  letter  is  a  deep  rolling  guttural 
(rg),  probably  the  true  pronunciation. 

NOTE  II.  These  characters  are  not  the  original  forms,  the  pre 
sent  letters  not  having  been  adopted,  until  long  after  the  Babylo 
nian  captivity  or  according  to  some  a  century  before  Christ,  hence 
this  alphabet  has  been  termed,  the  Assyrian  (properly  Babylonian) 
square  letter :  ^IISTX  DfiD  and  V5^*3  DDD  •  The  coins  struck 

-:  T    :  *    T    \:  T    : 

at  the  time  of  the  Maccabees  and  the    Samaritan  Pentateuch  present 
the  ancient  Hebrew  Characters  which  are  similar  to  the  Phoenician. 

NOTE  III.  The  names  of  the  letters  have  probably  been  selected 
for  the  sake  of  the  initial  sounds.  In  old  Hebrew,  Samaritan  and 
Phoenician  writing,  the  forms  of  the  letters  resembled  the  things  ex 
pressed  by  their  names :  this  resemblance  is  still  partly  seen  in  tin- 
present  alphabet :  as  ^  a  nail,  f  a  weapon,  Q  il  basket,  ^  the  hol 
low  of  the  bent  hand  etc. 
2.  Hebrew  is  read  from  the  right  hand  to  the  left. 


Write  the  Roman  characters  corresponding  to  the  fol 
lowin     Hebrew  letters  : 


--DD  nr  .] 

DO  ,n£3t  .H313 

ann  ^DD  nnpTi  muy  -nSa  --i!2D  -pn    »c-n    -p 


§  2.     DIVISION  OF  LETTERS.  3 

EXERCISE  2. 

Write  the  Hebrew  letters  corresponding  to  the  follow 
ing  Roman  characters  : 

1,  ch,  h,  k,  t,  th,  s,  sh,  r,  d,  p,  y,  w,  g,  f,  z,  tz,  n,  g, 
b,  ch,  Ichn,  km,  rtz,  zr,  ytlim,  chl,  kl,  shb,  dbktm, 
hnshrm,  bmdbr,  gdl,  ktn,  zvch,,sw,  dfalwt,  gy,  tw,  gbth, 
li/t,  nthn. 

§  2.     DIVISION  OF  LETTERS. 

The  letters  are  divided  according    to  the  organs  with 
which  they  are  pronounced  into  : 

Gutturals 


Palatals 

Linguals 

Dentals  or  Sibilants, 

Labials 

The  letter  1  partakes  of  both  a  guttural  and  dental  cha 
racter. 

EXERCISE  3. 

Give  in  the  following  words  the  names  of  the  letters 
and  the  classes  to  which  they  belong  : 

ICT    0  Vw  iWm  n-iyi  oa^'o  i&y  nin*  nox  HD 

SN*  i^n  Sx  maSxi  Din 


:nrnoipon 


^  :  astro  xn  D"i  pno 

§  3.     VOWEL  -  LETTERS  AND  VOWEL  -SIGNS. 

1.  The  letters  ^HN  Elievi  (a  word  used  to  assist  the  me 
mory)  form  a  separate  class,  being  called  vowel  letters, 
they  sometimes  representing  not  consonantal  but  vowel 
sounds.  , 

"2.  Besides  these  vowel  -letters,  which  generally  indicate 
long  vowels,  in  the  6th  century  nine  vowel  signs  (nliftJfl 
or  nnipj),  were  introduced,  points  and  strokes  placed, 
with  two  exceptions,  under  the  letter,  after  which  they  are 
to  be  pronounced.  Of  these  nine  signs,  three  represent  long 
vowels,  three  short  and  three  doubtful. 


PART  I.     ELEMENTS. 


Name.               ] 

Kamets  H3p 

Voi 
form. 

T 

eels. 

Power. 

a  in  father 

Tsere        HV 

e  in  there 

Cholem  D7in 

— 

6  in  note 

_Skort    Vou-els. 

Name.  Form.      Power. 


Patach 


Seghol 


WTO 


a  in  sharp 
e  in  met 


NAME. 


Doubtful   Vowels. 


o   in  not 

or  rather 

u  in  dull 


Chirek 
Shurek 
Kubbuts 


p*Yn 


(ni--p: 


tful   Vowel 

FORM.  POWER. 

i  in  machine  or  i  in  pin 

u  in  rule 

u  in  rule  or  u  in  full. 


NOTE  I.  Cholem  is  a  dot  over  the  ^  as  '1  or  the  *)  is  omitted 
and  the  dot  placed  above  on  the  left  of  the  consonant  :  as  J|  =  go, 
"J  *  do.  Shurek  is  always  placed  in  the  bosom  of  1  as  J|  ,  The 
Chirek-point  is  placed  under  the  letter  :  as  5  j  if  *  follows  it  is 
long,  if  not,  doubtful  :  O  l°ng  *»  3  either  long  or  short  i. 

3.  The  classification  of  the  vowels,  according  to  the  three 
primary  vowel  sounds,  from  which  they  have  originated,  is 
also  of  importance.  These  are  the  vowels  A  (in  father)  I 
(in  machine)  U  (in  rule),  for  E  and  0  are  properly  diph 
thongs  :  E  arising  from  a  +  i,  0  from  a  -[-  u. 


—  =  a  in  father 


» —  or  — =  I  in  machine 


—  =  a  in  sharp !  —         =  i  in  pin 

=  e  in  there 

—  ^=  a  in  fate 

.  —         =  e  in  met 


1  =  u  in  rule 
— =  u  or  u  in  full 
1  or  -_^  =  o  in  note 
—  =  u  in  dull. 

r 

NOTE  II.  The  above  pronunciation  is  that  of  the  exiled  Portu 
guese  and  Spanish  Jews  and  their  descendants  (the  Sefaradic);  the 
German  Jews  pronounce  (T)  like  6  jn  home  and  •_  or  1  like  o  in 
home  or  ow  in  vow;  the  Polish  pronounce  (••)  like  i  in  bind,  ('1) 
almost  like  oi  in  spoil, '•*)  almost  as  the  French  u,  the  other  vowels 
like  their  German  brethren.  The  Sefaradic  is  considered  the  pro 
nunciation  most  nearly  correct.  The  proper  names  in  the  Septua- 
gint  and  Josephus  and  the  Hebrew  phrases  occurring  in  the  New  Test 
ament,  are  written  in  accordance  with  this  mode,  which  is  also  con 
firmed  by  the  present  usage  of  the  Jews  of  Palestine  and  the  anal 
ogy  of  the  Arabic. 


§  3.     VOWEL  LETTERS  &  VOWEL  SIGNS.  5 

4.  These  three  classes  respectively  correspond  to  the  vow 
el-letters  '1HN  which  latter  may  be  considered  as  their  re 
presentatives  :     N  and  H  represent  the  A  class,  or  as  it  is 
usually  expressed,  are  homogeneous  with  this  class,  '  is  homo 
geneous  with  the  I  class,    «)   is   homogeneous    with  the  U 
class, 

5,  The  long  vowels  of  the  I  and    U  class,  are  most  fre 
quently  accompanied  by  their  correspondent  Vowel-letters. 
At  the  end  of  a    word  the    long   vowel,  of  the  A  class  is 
usually  written  with  K  or  H  :  as  N¥Q  ,  H^  ;  in  the  middle 
but  rarely  with  N  :  as  'HNtfD,  and  "never  with  fityrft&Z. 
*"Y)¥  HIS  are  compound  words    and  H  considered  as  quies- 
cing  at  the  end  of  the  first.)     Therefore  the  ^HN  are  vocal 
ized,  or  to  use  the  common  expression  rest  (quiesce)  in  the 
following  cases  : 

'    in    •<—  ,   *T,   i— 
1    in    J|,    V    as 

The  consonantal  power  of  K  and  U  is  so  feeble,  that  X 
without  the  vowel-sign  is  mute  after  all  the  long  vowels 
and  final  ft  without  the  vowel  is  mute  after  Kamets, 
Tsere,  Cholera  and  Seghol:  as 


6.  ^  and  *  when  preceded  by  a  heterogeneous  vowel-sign, 
or  followed  by  a  vowel  or  Sh'va  (§  4)  or  when  having  a 
Dagesh  (§  7)  retain  their  consonantal  sound:  as  11  read  vav, 
U  *  gev,  *fi  *  chay,  'Ijj  #  goy.  In  the  termination  V~  the 
*  is  silent:  as  V33  read  panav. 

T  T 

NOTE  3.     1  preceded    by    a    vowel-sign    or    Sh'va  [§  4]  or  fol 
lowed  by  a  vowel  must  be  read  as  i;  :  as  fyy  read  avon,  H1VP 
mitsvoth,   nib  read  love, 


NOTE  4.  When  the  ^j-jj$  especially  ^  arid  *  accompany  their 
homogeneous  vowels,  the  latter  are  said  to  be  written  fully  (JOD)  > 
without  the  quiescent  letters  they  are  said  to  be  written  defectively  •' 

(ipn)  :  niSi'   nv  >  Sinr  ftiiy  ,•  h^  > 


r 


ft  PART  I.    ELEMENTS. 

NOTE  5.     The  Cholem-point    without  ^  is  omitted  when  ty  pro 
ceeds:    as  in   XJlfi?  or  when  £>  follows:  as  in 


EXERCISE  4. 

Read  the  following   syllables    and  words  according  to 
the  pronunciation  of  the  Portuguese  Jews  : 


0  %r  »n  ,n  ,b  .p  o  ,p_  ,N*  ,K  ,K  .ij;  ^a  ^*  ^  /^*  »tp 

EXERCISE  5. 

in  *n  7  n  Jii  n  NJ  in  ^n  n  n  w  NJ  ID  ^  ^  NX 

ND   ^D   0   X:   VO   J|S   iS   tfS  »3  N3   V-  V   »   ^   ItO   1L5   ND 

T.        ,  •          .        T  T  T  ...  T 

'         t'  n  n  i    >p.-'¥  1^  NV  ^  ^  K9  iy  NI; 

,in  *n  xn  ^' 

EXERCISE  6. 

3»3    3N    3N* 


.nil  11  n  n?  pS  Tjin  t\)y  D.I  D^  DU 

.  EXERCISE  7. 

vS  iji  vS  vS  ^S  nS  ^n  sS  ^  ^  ^  "o  nj  ^ 

D1?^'    33#    S^2D    Tj^h    n?t?    H^'O    V    V    ^D    H 

n  ptrrr   f^'n  1^7   p^y   n^'p   ng^'p   ij;j?   S^i^ 


IB    no    ^TD    nbf    cn'n    Ti 

-     T  -   T  -    T  V 

EXERCISE  8. 


17*17x91  vnxpi  irni   iip  ^ip  np  »ip  vj;  pj; 
.rte'Xi  ir  w    ^n    iS^'  01:01  nin  rvn  m  HI 

*  '  - 


§  4.     KH'VA.  7 

EXERCISE  9. 

Write  the  following  syllables  and  words  in  Hebrew 
characters:  ye,  ya,  bo,  kifztl,  wu,  til,  to,  ra,  ril,  bin,  pi v, 
gav,  bechi,  gau,  clodi,  vav,  zodu,  bara,  paninu,  tuvecha. 
gorolenu,  yagllil,  yosher,  moshel,  bosem,  shalosh,  love, 
kol  [defectively]  kol  [fully]  sbomer  [fully]  choshev  [de 
fectively]  slil  [fully]  pe  [defectively]  nazid  [fully]. 


§  4.     SH'VA. 

1.  At  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the 
vowelless  consonant  also  receives  a  sign,  two  dots  (:)  de 
nominated:  Sh'va  tfW  (for  $}&  emptiness)  or  $3$  (for 

N^p*  fissure,  gap,  i.  e.  bare  of  vowel):  as  ^bj^  ,  Jlbyp  •  Final 
*J  ftid  two  vowelless  consonants  at  the  end  of  a  word  re 
ceive  the  8h'va:  as  *lh  ,  ip£'p  J  hence  also  a  letter  with 
Dagesh-forte  (§  7):  as 


2.  The  Sh'va  under    the  initial   consonant  of  a  word  or 
syllable  is  called  y%  KV?'  vocal  Sh'va,  because  it  indicates 

a  slight  vowel  sound,  like  an  obscure  or  .half  e  ;  as  7tOp 
read  K'tol.  Sh'va  under  the  final  consonant  of  a  sylable  is 
silent  and  termed  therefore  Sl,1  fcOtJ*'  silent  Sh'va. 


3.  Sh'va  is  only  given  to  a  consonant  and  never  to  the 
when    they    represent    vowels    or   quiesce:   as  n'^n 


NOTE  I.     Vocal    Sh'va  for    the    most    part    originating  from    the 
dropping  of  a  vowel  [§  14,  II.  Rejection]  retained  in  pronunciation 

an  aftersonnd  [Nacnklang]  of  that  original  vowel,  which  was  indi 
cated  by  the  addition  of  this  vowel  to  the  Sh'va  :  as  D*JJ*'"Tp  for 
D'CHp  from  &«'*-jp  ;  3H_n  for  ^Htl  from  ^Hj  ;  thus  always  with 
gutturals:  Jl^DN  from  |-  CN  '  D'uHH  from  V^n,  Seethe  next 

T         v:  •       T  T: 

§  and  Note. 

NOTE  II.     On  the  distinction  of  vocal  and  silent  Sh'va  see  §11. 

EXERCISE  10. 

rnirrr  r\m  rin^;.  yi3  niS?  nir  ny§  D'ID 


PART  I.     ELEMENTS, 


§  5.     COMPOSITE  SH'VA. 

When  the  vowelless  initial  consonant  of  a  word  or  sylla 
ble  is  one  of  the  gutturals  ^hPTX  (§  2)  a  short  vowel  (-), 
(-)  or  (T)  is    added  to  the   Sh'va,  to  indicate  a  more  dis 
tinct   sound,    as  a    half  a,  e  or  o.      This    Sh'va  is  called 
composite  Sh'va  (compounded  with  a  vowel)  or  iltDPf  Cha- 
tbeph  (rapid)  from  its  rapid  utterance. 
These  are:     -=  Chateph-Pattach 
w  Chateph-Seghol 
T=  Chateph-Kamets      Hf"j 

NOTE,     In  a  few  instances  the  compound  Sh'vas  are  also  written 
under  other  consonants  :  as 


EXERCISE  11. 

ro?  i\ 
n  nn 


n^is  ori 
nran 


§  6.     PATACH  FURTIVE. 

The  Patach  (-)  under  the  gutturals  H  y  and  H  [H 
with  a  dot  called  Mappik  §  7]  at  the  end  of  a  word  is 
not  read  after  the  letter  as  usual,  hut  before  it  :  as  (TH 
read  ruach,  (1H  read  reach,  JlllJ  roa(l  gahoahh.  This 
Patach  does  not  helong  to  the  form  of  the  word,  therefore 
it  falls  away  when  the  word  is  lengthened:  as  (TH*  'ITn. 
It  is  called  Patach  furtive  HDI^  (1113  *  because  its  position 
and  pronunciation  are,  as  it  were,  illegitimate. 
EXERCISE  12. 

yh  rb 


§  7.     DAGESII  AND  MAPPIK.  9 

nin   rr&  rnV  n  in  jn  jn 


§  7.    DAGESH  AND  MAPPIK. 

1.  The  six  letters  nMIJD  (HS^D)  as  initial   or  me 
dial  letters  after  a  consonant  entirely  vowelless,  [a  conso 
nant  with  a  silent  Sh'va]  represent  the  hard  sound  of  each 
letter  :    b,  g,  d,  k,  p,  t,    which  is    indicated    by  a    point 
within,    called  Dagesh  Lene  7p  ^"1  R#jn  puncture,  from 
the  Chald.  verb  £0*1  to  pierce  with  appoint]  as:  JJ,  npl^V 

2.  If  a  vowel  sound    [a  vowel  with  or  without  a  quies 
cent  letter]  or  a  vocal  Sh'va  precede  them,  their  pronun 
ciation  is  softened  or  aspirated,  like  bh  or  v,  gh,  dh,  kh 
or  the  German  ch,  ph  or  f,  th  ;  the  Dagesh  is  then  omitted  : 

as  *»  nyr,  Tjnrp  TT?- 

3.  When  the  word  ending  with  a  vowel  is  separated  by 
one  of  the  distinctive  accents  (§  9)  from  a  following  word, 
commencing    with    one  of  the  DMI^!}  >  the  vowel  cannot 
affect  the  pronunciation,  so  that  the  n£D1JQ  retain  their 
original  hard  sounds  and  have  the  Dagesh  :  as 


The  Dagesh  also  remains  after  a  vowel  sound,  if  the  word 
*  precedes  :  as  D'D^3  Hi  IT  or  when  two  of  the  letters 
come  together:    as  J*TJ  ^3, 


4.  A  point  in  any  medial  letter  /  except  "IJNinNj  that  is  im 
mediately  preceded  by  a  vowel,  indicates  the  doubling  of  this 
letter  :  as  '13N  =  *P9^  •  This  point  is  called  Dagesh  forte, 

' 


NOTE.  Dagesh  forte  in  the  fifiD*T!Q  at  the  same  time  doubles  and 
hardens  the  letter  :  as  0*3*}  =  rabbim. 

5.  A  point  in  final  Jl  serves  to  determine  its  consonant 
al  power  and  is  called  D'iDD  Mappik,    (i.  e.  causing  to  be 
pronounced)  :  as  IT?  =  lohh. 

6.  H  and    the  rest  of  1HN  never    receive    a    Dagesh  or 


Mappik,  when  quiescent.  2 

S    ub?n  ^  Avti^ta  \H^c^^^>^KCtfeU  iMy  ft 


f 


A  '  -J*  J*  .t-/  I 


10  PART  I.  EXERCISES. 

NOTE.  The  dot  in  ?|  represents  Dagesh,  when  the  preceding  con 
sonant  has  a  vowel,  otherwise  the  Shurek-point :  as  Jl^V  >  Dip  rea(l  • 
tsivva,  kavvam.  TltJV.  1U  read  shur,  gur. 

NOTE  V.  On  Dagesh  forte  conjunctive  see  §  9,  I.  Note. 

EXERCISE  13. 
Distinguish  Dagesh  forte  from  Dagesh  lene. 

TBD 


JJ3 


EXERCISE  14. 
Place  Dagesh  lene  in  the  nM^JJQ  where  required. 


1     .DID  ru     *V5  nn$*i  .m^p  nnn)  liw  nr?n 

.13331^530?' 


onehn        .bnir 


NOTE.     The    Sh'vas   under  the  letters  distinguished   by  asterisks 
are  silent. 

§  8.     SYLLABLES. 

1.  The  numher  of  syllables  in  a  word  is  determined  by 
the   number  of  its   vowels:    as  rWfrT)3  =  two  Syllables, 
==  three  S. 


NOTE.     Composite  Sh'va  is  considered  as  a  vocal  Sh'va  and  not 
as  a  vowel.     On  vocal  Sh'va  with  regard  to  Metheg  see  §  9,  7. 

2.  Every  syllable  begins  with  one  or  two  consonants, 
but  in  the  latter  case  the  first  consonant  must  have  vocal 
Sh'va:  as 


§  8.     SYLLABLE?.  11 

NOTE.  The  single  exception  is  *\  a  u  for  •)  ,,and"  (see  §  12,  7,  b«): 


3.  Syllables    are    either    open,    dosed,   double    closed  or 
sharpened. 

a.  Open  syllables  end  with  a  vowel  :  as 

b.  Closed  syllables  end  with  a  consoant  :  as 

c.  Double  closed  syllables  end  with  two  consonants: 

d.  Sharpened  syllables  end  with  a  consonant,   with  which 
the  following  syllable  begins:  as  7tpp  =  kit-tcl. 

4.  The  vowel  of  unaccented  (§  9)  closed  syllables  is  al- 

> 

ways  short  :  as  DJT1  read,  wayyakom. 

The  vowel  of  unaccented  open  syllables  is  always  long  : 
as  K*13  read:  bara. 

TT 

But  both  if  accented    may  contain  indifferently,  long  or 

>l  "  t> 

short  vowels  :  as  D?1J^  read  :  olam,  T|  7p  • 

The  double  closed    and   sharpened    syllables    have  most 
frequently,  even  when  accented,  short  vowels  :  as  JT7tbp  >  ^.Pr* 
NOTE.     The  Pause  (§  9,  11.)  forms  an  exception  to  this  rule* 

EXERCISE  15. 

Determine  the  different  syllables  in  the  following  words 
and  whether  they  require  long  or  short  vowels: 

-arao  arm  nstr  avh  rn'ip  naftn  yyn  xrmn 

*r  :     •  •    :  T    T  T          T       |  ;  "•  T  T 

nn        0  btf  nn  vSk  n^  n5'  w  ft  3 


-bgi  Dip  hy_  n^pprr  ninn  n^  K5  fah]  p^n-^j;  xv 
n  ro  nin^  nxo  tr'Ni  nha;i  nnoy 

T      ""          I     '  T         ;  *  *  T  '     I    T  T  —  -; 


NOTE.  The  Sh'vas  under  the  asterisked  letters  are  vocal.  —  The 
sign  >  is  used  to  represent  the  position  of  the  accent. 


§  t>.     ACCENTS,  MKTHEG,  MAKKEF. 
1.  Two  or  even  more  words  having  hotwcen  them  a  hor- 


12  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

izontal  stroke  :  as  DID"'?  >  VIST  7J7  are  read  in  connection 
and  considered  as  one  word.  The  horizontal  stroke  is  called 
D  Makkef  (conjunction). 


NOTE.  Makkef,  to  connect  words  more  closely,  is  wont  to  im 
press  a  dagesh,  called  p^fT1!  Condenser,  on  the  word  following  after 
rVpH—  iTp  as:  Dlt-rnO  srVITTl?-  Dagesh  without  Makkef 
after  a  word  accented  on  the  penult  ending  in  H  ,  ft  ,  J"|  —  or  ff  — 

is    called  DlPTO    JinX  coming    from  afar  :    as   Tl7  i"l£ty  •     Tne 

|  T  ••  ••  T  IT  v  * 

modern  grammarians  call  it  Dagesh-forte  conjunctive. 

2.  Every  word,  except  when  connected  with  the  following 
by  Makkef,  receives  an  accent,  which  marks  the   tone-syl 
lable  in  the  word;  as  DTiStf  aO3  n^'JOS, 

3.  Most  of  the  words  have  the  accent  on  the  last  sylla 
ble  and  are  termed  IH/D  (from    below)  ;    words  with  the 
accent  on  the  one  before  the  last  (penult)  are  termed  7'#?D 
(from  above.) 

4.  The  principal  tone  can   only   rest  on  one  of  the  two 
last  syllables,  therefore,  if  the  word  is    lengthened  at  the 
end,  the  tone  is  thrown  forward   according  to   the    length 
of  the  addition:  as  ifn.  DHIH. 


5.  Besides  the  principal  accent  there  is  a  secondary  ac 
cent,  a  small  perpendicular  stroke  (i)  on  the  left  of  a  vowel, 
denominated  JflD  Metheg  (bridle).     The  design  of  iihe  Me- 
theg  is  embodied  in  its  name  :  it  is  intended  to  restrain  the 
voice,  to  prevent  too  hasty  a  passage  over  the  vowel  or  its 
connection  with  the  following  vowelless  consonant:  as  ^'"UT 

&  :|T 

read:  sha-r'tsu.     Hence  Sh'va  following  Metheg  is  always 
vocal. 

6.  Metheg  regularly   stands  in  the  second  open  syllable 
before  the  tone,  provided  its  vowel  is  original  and  not  changed 
from  a  Sh'va,  and  again  in  the  fourth,    if  the  word  have 
so  many:  as  J^**fl  ,  JTiiiDfinDI  •    A  closed  syllable  or  one 


: 


XTm  fk>  *it*/i£fc*  *; 


.... 


§  9.     ACCENTS,  METHEG,  MAKKES.  13 

with  a  vowel  not  original,  is  always  without  a  Metheg  :  as 
B^?^;  ngtol'Uor  1  cf.  §  12.  7,  b. 

7.  With  regard  to  Metheg  vocal  Sh'va  is  considered  as 
a  vowel  and  forms  a  syllable,  therefore  npj#«|^  &V*  * 

8.  The  accents,  [D'O^t?  tastes,  i.  e.  criteria  of  the  sense, 
or  ttto'JP  modulations,  i.  e.  musical  notes,  from  JjQ  to  play 
on  a  stringed  instrument,  to    sing]    26    in  number,  are  a 
species  of  musical  notes  or    signs    for  regulating  a  sort  of 
cantillation  with  which  the  Jews,    since    the  oldest  times, 
were  accustomed  to  accompany    the    public  reading  of  the 
Law  and  Sections  from  the  Prophets  (Haphtaroth) . 

This  cantillation  being  strictly  subordinate  to  the  sense 
of  the  proposition  and  to  its  logical  connection,  the  accents 
also  serve  to  show  the  mutual  relation  of  words  and  to  in 
dicate  the  connections  and  pauses  to  be  made  in  reading, 
hence  their  general  division  into :  D'jTp^D  Distinctives 
and  DHSntp  Conjunctives. 

9.  The  distinctive^    are  divided   according  to  the  longer 
or  shorter  pauses  marked  or  governed  by  them  into :  Em 
perors,  Class  I.  Kings,  Class  II.  Dukes,  Class  III,  Counts, 

Class  IF. 


u|-      CLASS    I. 

1)  Silluk  pY?p  or.  p1D3  f]lD  end  of  the  verse :  as  J 
(*  i)  two  perpendicular  points  between  two  verses  and  the 
sign  of  Metheg  at  the  tonesyllable.  2)  Athnach  ("QfiN  •  as 
D"Jtf  •  Athnach  divides  the  verse  into  two  parts  either  senr 

AT  T 

tences  or  clauses.  In  the  latter  case  the  clauses  respectively 
consist  of  those  words,  which  are  more  intimately  related:  as 
•pfcO  riXlD^H  HK  DTiS^  105  n>:?>03  In.  the  be 
ginning  God  created  the  heaven  and  the  eartn:  the  heaven 
and  the  earth,  as  the  object,  being  divided  by  Athnach  from 
the  antecedent,  containing  the  subject  and  predicate.  A 
simple  sentence  never  takes  A.  Of.  Gen.  1,  3,  6,  8. 

CLASS    II. 

3)  Seghol  Tttp :  as  CHK  divides  the  first  member  of  the 
sentence  into  two  parts,    standing  between   the  first    word 


14  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

and  the  word  with  Athnach.    Its  position  is  always  over  the 
last  letter.     Of.  Gen.  I,  7. 

4)  Zakeph  Katon  JltDf)  *]J2J  )  as 

5)  Zakeph  Gadhol  Sll|  f|j2J  )  as 

form  smaller   divisions  either  before  or  after  Athnach.  Of. 
Gen.  1,  44. 

6)  Tiphcha  NTOp:  as  D"1X  possessing  less  separating 
power  than  the  preceding:  always  placed  under  the  last 
word  before  Silluk  or  Athnach  or  before  the  last  but  one. 
Of.  Gen.  1,  6. 

CLASS.    III. 


*7)  R'bhia  J£*!n  as  :  D"1K  a  point  over  the  middle  of  a 
letter,  distinguished  by  this  position  from  Cholem  over  its 
end.  R'bhia  halves  the  semi-clause  terminating  in  Seghol, 

Zakeph  and  Tiphcha  :  as  Vj-fl£  >3  "1.9K*!  ITTliT  vStf  #n 
And  Judah  stepped  near  unto  him,  and  said,  Oh  my  Lord  ! 

Gen.  44,  18,  vfy  DO2f4Pr  Sb1?  pgKO^  *]&'  VlT^  And 
Joseph  could  not  refrain  himself  before  all  them  that  stood 

by  him.  JJJ  Jfp  ^  *pl3-H3  njpK'n^  1^|W3  And  he 
gave  him  (to  wife)  Asenath  the  daughter  of  Potiphera 
priest  of  On.  Gen.  41,  45. 


8)  Zarka  ND^It   as     3"]^  )  ^>0^1  over  tn 

The  latter 


9) 

distinguished  from  Kadma  the 

same  in  form.     If  the  word  is  TO  two  Pashtas  are  used  : 


Kadma  is  always  placed  on  the  tonesyllable. 
10)  T'blr  ^3J1  as  D1X  )  These  two  and  Zarka  and  Pashta 


11)  Geresh  tfih]|  as  D          divide  th 

T  T  '  terminating  with  any  of  the  tour 

preceding  accents: 

Zarka  precedes  -Seghdl:  B^3^ft^'.*^C*  H^- 
And  Joseph  took  them  both.  Gen.  48,  13. 

Pashta  precedes  Zakeph  :  7^f  H  Dl*1?  HS^l 

And  he  rested  on  the  seventh  day.  Gen.  2,2. 


§  9.     ACCENTS,  METIIEG,  MAKKEF.  15 


T'blr  precedes  Tiphcha  : 

He  and  the  men  that  were  with  him.    Gen.  24,  54. 
Geresh     precedes   K'bhia  :        rTTin?   V^N   BW\ 

Then  Judah  stepped  near  unto  him.    Gen,  44,  18. 


12)  Y'thibhDTV  as:  D"JN  stands  a  little  before  the  first 
letter  and  is  distinguishable  by  this  position  from  Mahp- 
ach,  the  latter  standing  immediately  beneath  the  letter  to 


which  it  belongs. 


CLASS    IV. 

13)  T'lisha  Gh'dhola  nSlI^  W$fa  as  DIN  always  over 
the  first  letter.    The  other  distinctives,  the  separating  power 
of  which  is  of  no  perceivable  consequence  to  the  sense  are  : 

14)  Shalsheleth    t^ffih&  as  D1K  over  the  tonesyllable. 

p 

15)  Paser  *"\[|)   as  D"JN  over  the  tonesyllable. 

QP 

16)  Karne  Phara  rn$  ^"jp  as  D"1K  over  the  last  letter. 

,*• 
1*7)  G'rashayim         D^H^l  as  D"JNt  over  the  tonesyllable. 


18)  P'sik  )          p^DS 

L'ganneh         ,  J^L"  '  D^  ?  PclTendicular  stroke 
^  01  iTan;7  between  two  words. 

The  Conjunctive  accents  are: 

19)  Merka  ND")5  20)  Munach  TtflD   21)  Merka  Kh'phula 

ilSlsD?  N5"|9  22)  Mahpach  T]3fl5  23)  Darga  XjTF\  24) 
Kadma  NDljJ  25)  Yerach  ben  YomO  lOV'j?  rh*  26)  T'lisha 
K'tanna^Dp  Ntt'^Sp  over  the  end  of  the  last  letter. 

10.  The  distinctives  of  Class  I.  denote  the  longest  pauses, 
which  may  be  compared  to  our  period  and  colon  ;  Class  II. 
to    Colon    and    Semicolon  ;     Class    III.    to    Semicolon  and 
Comma  ;  Class  IV.  to  Comma  and  half  Comma. 

11.  The  distinctives  of  Class  I.  and    some  of  Class  II. 
by  their  strong  accentuation  change  short  vowels  into  long  and 
very  frequently  Sli'va  into  a  vowel  :  as  */*]^  earth   —     ¥**)# 

riT  thy  hand  --  HT 

I    :T  IAVT 

A  word  so  accented  is  said  to  stand  in  Pause. 


16  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

12.  For  the  sake  of  completeness,  we  here  give  the  rules 
for  the  position  of  the  accent,  though  they  will  not  yet  he 
fully  understood  hy  the  beginner  and  must  therefore  he 
passed  over  for  the  present. 

I.  Nouns  have  the  tone  on  the  last  syllable  : 

a.  When  ending  with  a  long  vowel  both  in  open  and  closed 

>          >  > 

syllables:  as  *O*1'  '^^?  coming,  but  HN3  she  came. 

NOTE.    The  participle  is  in  this  respect  considered  as  a  noun. 

b.  When  ending  with  a  short  vowel,  that  stands  for  a  long 
one:  as  ylf\  for  JWh- 

c.  Feminine  nouns,    that  change  their    long  vowel  in  the 

>  > 

st.  const,  into  a  short  one :  as  fTl^D  from  JTTJJp « 

d.  Nouns  of  which  the  two  last  syllables  are  closed:  as  7H3- 

e.  Nouns  which  end  with    Jl—  preceded  by  a  long  vowel: 

as  rnro- 

/.   Nouns  with  the  following  Suffixes :  as 


.    Fer&s  in  the  Pret.  form  with  the  afformatives  DI1>  ff):  as 

DJ&eR'   1P^|?« 
.  Verbs  in  the  Pret.  form  with  Vav.  Conv. :  as  m®\)  but 

n^pprv  w^J  ^t  %n?^v 

NOTE.      The    verbs    N"?    and    JT7    form    exceptions    to   A.:    as 


II.  The  following  have  the  tone  on  the  penult  : 
i.    All    the   nouns,    of  which    the   last  vowel  is  a  helping 
Seghol  or  Patach    (a  class    of  words  called  Segholates)  : 


.   Words  ending  with  Patach  furtive:  as  |Tn»  J?| 
.   Words  ending  with    D'r~  (d^al  form):  as  D?6 


§  (J.     ACCENT?,  METIIEG,  MAKKEF.  17 

.  Verbs  in  the  Pret.  form  with  the  affirmatives  fl,  Tl>  13  : 


m 
as 


ft.  The  regular  verbs  in  Hif.  and  those  of  V'J?  and  J?"^  in 
Kal,    Nif.    and    Hif.    with    the    affirmatives    j"T—  »  1>  V: 


as  nap,  m 

o.    Verbs  with  the  surf.  H-  in,  11  »1  ?]. 

p.  Paragogic  H—  or  il  —  attached  to  nouns,  pronouns  and 

adverbs:  as  iT^A,  TOH  ,  H^V,  HjS- 

NOTE  1.  Paragogic  *>—  most  frequently  has  the  tone  :  as  *JTJ4'?^' 

^?w*5H 

q.  Verbs  with  the  Vav  coiiv.  of  the  future,  provided  the 
penult  is  an  open,  syllable  ;  (cf.  the  following  under  r) 
as  nDX»  ljut  "ti?*n.  N^j?-?l  and  not  R1^.: 

r.  When  the  tonesyllables  of  two  words  immediately  follow  : 
as  in  1^  njEV'  p"^V*  *9^j  ^ie  tone  °^  tne  f°rmer  recedes: 
as  I1?  nt^^  >  p"J.V  *©"|^  (")1HN  ^IDJ  •)  Such  a  receding  ac 
cent  being  considered  as  a  Metheg  and  having  its  posi 
tion,  cannot  recede  to  a  dosed  syllable  (cf.  6.  of  this  §). 
In  this  and  a  few  other  cases  it  drops  entirely,  its  word  being 
connected  by  Makkef  with  the  following:  as^Tfcnj??! 

or  rfc  Nip*1!;  nSrrpn  for  nS^pn- 

T          .T  I  :  •  '  T    I.     '  ~  ' 

NOTE  II.  Both  the  vowel-signs  and  accents  were  added  to  the 
Biblical  Text  between  the  6th  and  llth  Centuries  by  eminent  Jew 
ish  scholars.  Critical  and  linguistic  notes  were  also  added,  the  most  im 
portant  of  which  are  called  Hp  and  HTO  '  ^^3  ^S^fy^o  written, 


U 


that  is  the  M.  S.  reading  and  *^H  :  recul  i.  e.  the  expression  con 
sidered  by  the  Jewish  critics  to  be  preferable. 

This  body  of  notes  is  called  tlie  Masora  (iTTlDQ  i-  e-  Tradition) 
and  the  compilers  themselves  the  Masoritcs.   (JlllDO  ^/J/5^ 

EXERCISE  16. 

Place   Metheg    where  required  !     Metheg  cannot  precede 
silent  Sli'va  or  Dagesh. 


18  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


pron  .DIKH  .jx  .rop&pi  -nnnp  -n>j£  .« 


NOTE.     The  Sh'vas    under  the    letters   marked    with  an  asterisk 
are  silent. 

EXERCISE  17." 

Give  the  names  of  the  accents   and  the  classes  to  which 
they  helong: 

rxS  iS  noxn  imvn  lax  rran  ipy»-Sx  PTO»  Nnp-n 

•••       ->-  ""I  A  I  VJT:-       |V*rj~        '•'     I    -IT    :  •          ;-r):-- 


N)  :?]9X  *nx  fjS  niJSD  n^'N*  o^p  ^~np)  ^K 


T  :    -  j- 


prry? 


EXERCISE  18. 
t  out  the  tone-s 

nrn  . 


Point  out  the  tone-syllable  in  the  following  words  : 


§  10.     DISTINCTION  OF  KAMETS  AND  KAMETS-CHATUPH. 

1.  The  sign    (T)    serves  at  once  to   represent  the  long  a 
and  the  short  6. 


§  10.     DrsTrxt'Trox  OF  KAMETS  AXD  KAMETS-CHATUPH.     19 

2.  //  /*  a:   * 

1)  in  an  open  syllable:  as  J/TO£',  read  sh&marta  :   hence 

2)  when  Meth  eg  stands  on  the  left  of  it  :  as  iTTD^  :,  read 
sham'ra. 

3)  the  (IT)  in  final  T  :  as  M>  rea^  becha. 

4)  in  an  accented  syllable  :  as  1HX,  read  e'en  ad. 

3.  It  i's  o: 

•>  > 

a.  in  an  unaccented  closed    syllable:  as  rtDJlT  'Thread 
chochma,  omdi  :  hence 

b.  in  a  closed  sellable    before    Makkef  :    as  J^TKfT"73i  read 

I          .    T     T  T 

kol  :  and 

c.  in  the  final  close!  syllable  of  a  word  beginning  with  Vav 

> 
conv.  (§  33)  :  as  Dp^  read  vay-ya-kom  : 

d.  before  Chateph-Kamets  :  as  "JDJ^  read  y5°mad. 

EXERCISE  19. 


.rrvoj  •oirpn  /^p  .lpipT  .o?w  -Hiro 
so  ,  nprn  ,nprn  .^fn»  .  niDt  .  nor  •  onnv 

T     •  )T:|T  JT:T  "  T    :  T  :  |T  -   T:T  •    -  T:  T 


.on)  .Dinn  -D^no  .nnw  . 

-  • 


T  T 


§   11.      DISTIXCTIOX  OF  VOCAL  AND  SILEXT  SHTA. 
The  Sh'va  is  vocal:   *)$    .WIV^' 

1)  at  the  beginning  of  a  word:  as  7tOp  ==  k'tol. 

2)  in  the  middle    of  a    word    after   another    Sh'va:    as 
^tppn  —  tlk  -  t'll. 

3)  after  every  unaccented  long  vowel  :  as  fapp  =  ka-t'hl, 
but  *FT\3&,  read  sha-mar-tl,    tlie    vowel    before    the    Sh'va 
bein     accented. 


4)  after  a  Metheg:  as  !)N*V  =  ye-r'u,  but  Wl»  =  yir-u. 

5)  under  a  letter  having  D.i^esh  :  as  *7lD^  =  kat-t'll, 


20  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

6)  under  the  first  of  two  similar  letters:  as  ?)S^n=  ha-l'lil. 

7)  in  most  cases  under  a  letter,  which  is  followed  by  any 
one  of  the  fiiOTQ  without  Dagesh:  as 

EXERCISE  20. 

^  •UfV 
*nny?n  .DT  .11     n 


i   .ya'     .ratr    . 


CHAPTER  II.* 

PECULIARITIES  AND  CHANGES  OF  LETTERS  &  VOWELS. 
§  12.     CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS. 

1.  The  formation  and  inflection  of  Hebrew  words  are  ef 
fected  by  changes,  partly  vocal,  partly  consonantal. 

2.  Changes  are  also  made   for    the  sake  of  euphony,  to 
prevent  the  concurrence  of  vowels  or  consonants  of  difficult 
pronunciation. 

3.  The  diiit-rent    changes    of   which  consonants  are  sus 
ceptible  are:  AssimUcdwn,^    Transposition,    Rejection,  Com 
mutation. 

4.  Assimilation,     Yowelless  3  in    the    middle.  of  a  word, 
when  the  syllable  is  unaccented,  is  assimilated  (made  sim 
ilar)   to  the  following  letter,,  3  being   dropped  and  the  fol 
lowing  letter  taking  Dagesh.     The  Dagesh  doubles  it,  thus 
indicating   the   assimilation:   as  £*J*  =  Vf^y  for  u'JG*-     In 
an  accented  syllable,  assimilation  does  not  take  place;  rObu*> 

«••  T  :    -    T 

>  > 

with  the  exception  of  the   verb    rU  to  give:  jTlJlJ  for 


*  This  chapter  being1  placed  here  fur  reference,  will  he  passed  over 
for  the  present,  as  many  of  the  rules  can  only  be  understood  by  the  more 
advanced  student. 


§12.  CHANGES  OF  CONSONANTS.  21 


If  the  following,  letter  be  one  of  the  ynnN>  either  3  is  not 
assimilated:  as  ^H^,  *]$}& '  or  tne  dropping  of  3  is  indi 
cated  by  the  lengthening  of  the  preceding  vowel :  as  HIT 

for  nrov 

The  assimilation  of  other  consonants  occurs  only  in  the 

following  cases  : 

.  .  > 

7  in  the  verb  flp7  to  take:  as  njT  for  rip7.- 

H  in  the    syllable  fin  of   HithpaeL   before  1,  tO  and  in  a 


few  instances  before  sibilants  :  as  HS'in  for 

for  irronn ,  orn  for  iDirn ,  'a&jffi  for 

1  in  the  relative  ,#  for  n&T*. 

*T  at  the    end  of  a  few    words   before  JT  as  H?  for  PH? » 

nnx  for  fnru* . 

»  in^a  few  verbs  *"£  before  ^:  as  py  for  py.% 

5.  Transposition.     In  grammar,  transposition  occurs  only 
in  the  case  of  H  in  the  syllable  HH  of  Hi thpael  before  sibi 
lants,  it  being  easier  to  pronounce  st  than  ts,  thus  :  Iftfi^'n 
for  15^'nn  «    Before  ¥  it  is  even  changed  into  £  :  as  p*li3V} 
for  pT^-lj  , 

6.  Rejection.     Rejection  may  take  place  at  the  beginning, 
in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of  a  word. 

The  following  are  regularly  rejected: 

A.     At  the  beginning. 

Yowelless  V  }  (or  *7  in  the  verb  Hp1?)  in    the    Infinitive 
and  Imperative  of  the  verbs  *"5  and  TsD :  as  I1? ,  ftfj 

nS^ » iM  from  ?ro »  np ,  nnp  from  npS , 

-T!--  I    *  T  .}-  ~1~  »"T 

*  as  a  silent  consonant  after  a  vocalized  ' :  as  0*1-3  for 
from  ^1J . 

K  is  dro])]KHl  in  l^hj  for  UrU^.-  in   »CV  from  liT'S  • 

7?.      /??.  ///^  middle. 

1 .  The  first  of  two  similar  consonants,  when  vowelless, 
is  not  written,  but  represented  by  Dagesh  forte:  as 

for  iijrn ;  ni?  for  n^-iD . 

2.  In  the  verbs  the   first  of  the  two  similar  letters  is 


22 

dropped,  even  when  possessing  a  vowel,   if  a  vowelloss  letter 
precedes  :  as  3D  for  ±Jp  <  top  for  1^5p  , 

3.  The    weak   letters  ^JIN  (especially  |f)  are  dropped  or 
quiesce,  though  having  vowels,  after  a  letter  with  Sh'va:  as 
for  D!D#n?,   Dp  for  Dlp,.^  for  ^|,   t]nS^  for 

p*wr?  for  pin*?. 

N  often  quiesces  in  the  long  vowel,  resulting  from  the  con 
traction  of  its  own  vowel  or  half  vowel  (Composite  Sh'va) 
with,  the  preceding  vowel:  as  nNVD  for  riNVb»  "OxS  for 

ips;?,  D'rfttfS  for  DW?£^  nnx  for  rma*  .r  ' 

'  <f7.     ^  #//.e  JSfoc?. 

At  the  end  of  a  word  f  and  D  are  rejected  in  a  few  ca 
ses.  The  |  of  the  verbal  ending  p  and  p—  .  This  original 
f  has  heen  very  rarely  retained  :  as  pJTV>  pj^j/n  .  D  is  regu 
larly  dropped  in  the  st.  const.  Plural  : 

as  nn  f.  onn,  *m  f.  0^5, 

7.   Commutation.     Commutation  comprises  a)  interchanges 
of  consonants   with    other    consonants  ;    h)  Interchanges  of 
consonants  with  vowels. 
a.  r\  interchanges  with  D»  see  above  §12,  ,r>. 

Initial  ^  interchanges  with  *,  especially  in  verbs  v/^!  :  as 
-]V  for  -|S}>  yT  for  J.HV  S'Dp*  for  SbpV 
Medial  1  interchanges  with  *  on  account  of  homogeneous 
vowels    preceding    it:    as   D'D  for  D-1H  -  DTf  for  ^H  . 

"j     '  "I     '      I  "    •  4  '•     '      , 

Final  1  and  *  interchange  with  j"f:  as  H/jl  for  ^Sjj,  n^J!-' 

•  T  T  -    T  T    T 

for  ng?.    When  the    word    is  leno'thened,   the  original 
consonant  reappears:  as  j]V?ji.  ^H^w  . 

/;.  1)  The  conjunction  1  "and",  preceding  a  vowelless  letter 
or  one  of  the  labials  (JpD),  is  converted  into  its  homo 
geneous  vowel  1  :  as  v'»  ^  for  "Crn  H'DI  for 


In  the  same  manner  *  following  a  vowelless  letter  is 
softened  to  I  :  as  rniTO  for  HIIH^  , 

T  T          :    ; 

2)  In  the  middle  of  a  word  1  arid  \  are  often  contracted 
into  a  diphthong  or  a  long  vowel:  as  T7J'  for  TSv 
(a  +  u),  D'LT  lor  yw  (a  +  i)  iSn  for  iSlH  (o  +  u" 


§  18.     PECULIARITIES  OE  THE  GUTTUKALS.  23 

contracted  into  u).    *)  after  Ohirek  becomes  1  ,  the  1  resting 
in  its  homogeneous  0  vowel  :    as  Dt#\D  for  2&}),  2'tTin 

for  a'cnn  . 

3.  1  and  '  final  after  a   vowelless    letter  are  softened  to 
1  and  *>—':  as  )fif\  for  inn  ;  ng  for  n§),  Tin  for  VT1, 

-        §  13.     PECULIARITIES  OF  THE  GUTTURALS. 

1.  The  gutturals    instead  of  the    usual    (simple)  Sh'va, 
receive  the  composite  Sh'va,  (see  §5). 

2.  They  do  not  admit  of  Dagesh  forte,  i.   e.   they  cannot 
he  doubled,   (see  §7.  4).     The    half-guttural  1  partakes  of 
this  peculiarity.     The  omission  of  Dagesh  causes  the  length 
ening  of  the  preceding  short  vowel  :  as  D1N!"T  for   D~Th*n  , 

for  Tp3, 

-and  H>  being  harder    gutturals,    in    most  cases  retain 
the  preceding  short  vowel  :  as  JOnn  .  D**Hn  • 

3.  The  gutturals  n>  Jf>  and  n  (with  Mappik)  when  final, 
require  the  a  sound  before   them.     Therefore  they  change 
mutable  vowels  (  §  14,  1  e)  into  Patach  :  as  nStT'  for  PTHS^S 
if  the  vowel  be  immutable,  a  helping  Patach,  called  Patach 
furtive  (§  6),  is  written  under  them  and  pronounced  before 
them. 

NOTE.  On  the  gutturals  sec  further  Chapter:  VII.  §  §  40,  41,  42. 

§  14.     VOWEL  CHANGES. 
I.  The  vowels  are  immutable  or  mutable. 
Immutable  : 

a.  Vowels  regularly  written  with  their  homogeneous  vowel- 
letters  :  as  K—  ,  >—  ,  >—  ,  J),  1. 

b.  The  long  vowels    defectively    written,    (§  3.  Note  4.)  as 

Sp  =  Sip  ,  D1  =  D*O  . 

I  T  T 

c.  Vowels  after  which    a    Dagesh    forte    has  bevn  omitted 
on  account  of  a    guttural  :    as  CHfl  for  D**in>  D1I1X  for 


d.  The  short  vowel  iri    an  unaccented    closed  sllable  :    as 


Mutable  :  t  %  «n  H 

e.   All  the  long  vowels,   without  vowel-letters  and  not  in- 


24  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

eluded  in  the  cases  specified  under  b)  and  c),  both  in 
open  and  closed  syllables  :  as  l^pp'  from  ^tOD*  »  '"p~J 
from  "HI  , 

T       T 

/.    All  the  short  vowels    in    open    and  in    accented    closed 
syllables  :  as  n^pDfrom  ?6p  • 

II.  The  changes  which  the  mutable  vowels  can  undergo, 
are  :  Lengthening^  Shortening,  Rejection  and  Rising  of  new 
vow  eh'. 

Lengthening:  The  short  vowels  are  made  long: 
(  —  )        becomes       (  —  ) 

T 

(  —  )        becomes       (•  —  ) 

(—  or  —  )  become       (_)  or  (1). 

1.  When  a  closed    syllable    is    made    an    open  one  :   as 
iSpp  for  SB£  >  19P  for  n?p  ,  DpjH  for  DpH  ,  properly  DIpH  . 

2.  Hence  when  a  required  doubling  of  the  following  letter 
does  not  take  place  :  as  11NJ1  for  TiKH,  rflfT  for  rP,F?'; 

3.  When  one  of  the  vowel-letters  quiesces  in  the  vowel  : 
as  NVPJ  for  Ktfpj  , 

4.  When  the  final  word  of  a  sentence  or  clause  has  the 
pause  accent  :  as  D/iDp  for  JlSfcDp  >  K*1N  for  T*1K  « 

T    :AT|  T  T    :    -)T        |     -.-AT  ) 

Shortening  :  The  long  vowels  are  shortened  : 
(—  )  becomes  (—  )• 

(—  )  becomes  (—  )  or  with  the  strong  shortening  (—  ). 
(_)  becomes  (—  )  or  stronger  (—). 

This  takes  place  : 

a.  When  an    open    syllable  becomes   a   closed   one  : 
for 


b.  When  a  syllable  with  Dagesh    or  a  sharpened    syllable 
arises;  in  this  case   the  strong   shortening  is  used:    as 
D'pH  from  ph  >  >£N  from  DN  ; 

c.  When  a  closed  svllable  loses  the  tone  ;  as  D""TN~7-3  from 

T   T        J    V 

>  rnrr-T  fro^i      cf\\*"S   irom  S^. 


§  14.     VOWEL  CHANGES.  25 

Rejection:  The  vowel  falls  away  entirely.  It  occurs, 
when  the  word  is  lengthened  at  the  end,  so  that  the  ac 
cent  must  be  thrown  forward.  This  is  particularly  the 
case  : 

1.  With  pretonic  Kamets   and  Tsere,   (the  latter  gener 
ally  when    followed   by   Kamets  :    as  M/)-     Kamets   and  '•*? 
Tsere  in  an  open   syllable  preceding  the    tonesyllable,  are 
called  pretonic:  i.  e.  they   are  pronounced   only  before  the 
tone  and  are  dropped  upon    its  being    moved  forward  :  as 

nStb   but         )'  *n  but  cr'  n    but 


2.  With  Tsere  in  a  monosyllable:  as  DC?»  or  in  the  last 
syllable  of  a  polysyllable,    when  all   the  preceding  vowels 
are  immutable  :  as  *n#,  thus  W,  DHyN  *\ti&  >  DniJtP  . 

3.  With  (-),  (••),  (_)  in  the  last  syllable  of  verbs,  when 
the  word  is  lengthened  by  an  addition  commencing  with  a 
vowel:   as  nSpfJ  from  Sc?j%  jfapj^  from  VtDj3». 

The  following  rule  regarding  the  rejection  of  vowels 
deserves  attention  : 

When  the  accent  is  thrown  forward,  in  nouns,  the 
vowel  of  the  penult  drops,  in  verbs,  of  the  ultima.  Com 
pare:  HDI  my  word,  from  HDI  word,  J17DD  she  has  killed, 

4      •  T     :  T    T  T   :   |  T 

from  7cOp  he  has  killed. 

Rising  of  new  vowels:  Instead  of  Sh'va  a  new  short 
vowel  arises  : 

I.  No  word  can  commence  with  two  vowelless  consonants 
or  with  two  Sh'vas,  therefore  the  first  Sli'va  is  changed  in 
to  Chirek: 

A.  When  one  of  the  prefixes  S^  (§  18.  II,  b,)  or  of  the 
preformatives  JJTN  (§  31,  1.)  which  regularly  take  Sh'va, 
is  connected  with  a  word  beginning  with  Sh'va:  as  ^t^p^ 

for  S^'pS  ,  Sbj"V  for  Sb|T  ,  Sbf^  for  Sbf^JSI  . 
NOTE.     Respecting  "j  before  a  letter  with   Sh'va  see  §  12,  7,  b. 


B.  /^p^  for  ADpJSt  can  serve  as  a  memorial  word  for  the 
following  rules  : 


26  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

a.  When  the  first    of  two    vowelless    letters   has  comp. 
ShVa,  the  helping  vowel  is   that   of  the  comp.  Sh'va  :    as 
>#JN  for  *Ufy$  from  &&M,  »Bhn  for  'gnn  from  D'BnP?. 

b.  When  the  second  of  two   vowelless  letters  has  comp. 
Sh'va,    the   helping  vowel    under    the    first  is    again    the 
vowel    of   comp.    Sh'va:    as  "l^D  for  ^fiftp,     fniT  for 

rnr?>.  §40,  e. 

II.  With  a  pause  accent.     When  Sh'va  is  heightened  in 
pronunciation  by  the  tone,,  either  Seghol  arises  from  it,  or 
the  correspondent  long  vowel  of  Comp.  Sh'va,  or  the  origi 
nal  vowel  which  has  been    dropped  by  the  lengthening  of 

the  word  :  as  TlS  from  TfS;  ^H  from  >Sm  HS70  f. 

i  'A'.'  '    :  •    A  •  T:  Trt-r 

from  K70;  n'DC*   f.    WDB*  from  l'D^ 

**  T  :     :  ;    • 

NOTE.  In  all  the  cases  given  under  II.  the  word  is 

III.  When  one    of  two    similar    letters    or  of  the  weak 
letters   ^HN  drops,   (§12,  6  B.  3.)  its    vowel   recedes  and 
takes  the  place  of  the  preceding  Sh'va  :  as  JTJ?  for  7V3PP  > 

StOp;.  for  htoftW  ,  lS|  for  vSj,  «9^!D  for  U£)SNE,  DD  for  Mp, 
!lp»  for  23p_>  . 

IV.  The  meeting    of  two   vowelless    final  consonants  is 
generally  avoided  :    most    commonly    by    the    insertion  of 
Seghol  between  the  concurring    consonants,  Patachj  if  one 
of  them  is  a  guttural,  Chirek,  if  one  of  them  is  a  ^  Shurek, 
if  the  last  one  is  1  :  as  T^J  for  i;Q,  jnj  for  j;-jj,  ^4fl  for 

for 


CHAPTER  IIL 

§  15.    SERVILE  LETTERS. 

1.  Letters  added  to  words  for  the  purposes  of  formation 
or  inflection  (serving)  are  called  Serviles,  while  those  three 
letters  which    constitute    most   frequently    the   root  or  the 
radical  idea  of  the  word  are  termed  Radicals. 

2.  All  the  22    letters   of  the    alphabet    can    be  used  as 
radicals;  the  11  following  only  as  serviles  : 

N>  D-  n-  %  *.  r>>  S>  o<  i  tr.  n 


§  15.     SERVILE  LETTERS.  27 

They  are  called  prefixes  (preformatives)  when  placed  at 
the  beginning  of  a  word,  suffixes  (afformatives)  when  added 
at  the  end, 

NOTE,  When  the  letters  added  are  used  to  convey  the  acci 
dents  of  tense,  gender,  number,  person  (in  the  nominative  case)  and 
to  form  derivatives,  they  are  respectively  called  according  to  po 
sition  preformatives  and  ajformative** 

§  16.     THE  PREFIXES 


1.  D  as  a  prefix  has  Chirek  and  in  the  following  letter 
Dagesh,     It  is  the  abbreviation  of  fp  from,  away  from  ,  out 
of,  by,  of  which  the  .3  is  assimilated,  as  HID?  from  below,  in 
stead  of  nfir)  fp  »    Before    gutturals    the  (—  )  is  lengthened 
to  (")  (§14,  II.  2):  as  Sj;p  from  above,  instead  of:  ^  |Q, 

Before  H  the  lengthening  is  sometimes  omitted  :  as 
from  without  (  §  13,  2.),    D  before  *  becomes  >p  as 
from  Jerusalem,  for   D^CTTD  (  §  12,  7,  b.) 

2.  —  $  as  a  prefix,  see  §23,  2. 

3.  II  as  a  prefix,    an  interrogative  particle,  see  §  24,  5. 

4.  H  as  a  prefix,  the  article,  see  §  17. 

EXERCISE  21. 


wayi  enemy2    fire3     hero4     house,  within5    pit6    brother7    loveS    Gods 
covenant10     man11      generation,  age*2     palace*3     they14     n.  p.  of  a  city15 
month16    thread17    sandl"    milk™    clay^o    dew2i    hand22    n.  p.  m.23    day^t 
n.  p.  of  a  city95    a  time  unlimited,  eternity26    a  maiden^7    head,  beginning-3 
n.  p.  m.^ 

EXERCISE  22.* 

From  a  father1*  from  Abraham2*    from  destruction3*   from 
a    cistern4,    from  a  lands,     from   blood6,    out  of  a  house", 


*  The  learner  is  advised  to  form  for  himself  an  English-Hebrew  vocabu 
lary,  by  whioh  his  memory  may  be  assisted  and  a  tedious  search  through 
the  exercises  avoided. 


28  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

from  a  mountains,  from  Edom^,  from  Raman™-  from 
from  to-morrowi2,  from  a  rivei-is,  from  Jeberechjahui*,  from 
Jedidja^,  from  a    Jewis,  from  a  panther^,  from  Nimrod^, 

from  the  Most  High^,  from  a  plantzo,  from  Eden^i,  fromdust22. 

* 
HD'T)  10  pn  &DTK  8-»n  vjra  eoi  spK  4-1x3  sp'iax  somax  ISK 

1  vv  --:  T  T  :  -  T 

aonpv  isp'-Stf  is  TIB  j  i7ipj  len^rr  ISJTTT  mrriny  MINT  12  mm 


§17.     THE  ARTICLE. 

1.  The  definite  article  is  represented  by  the  prefix  PT 
with  Patach  and  Dagesh  in  the  following  letter  :  as  D*9^' 
heaven,  D'Dfc'n  the  heaven.  Before  the  gutturals,  especially 
the  Patach  is  changed  into  Kamets  (§13,  2.):  as 
the  master,  7JTH  the  foot,  "l^fl  the  servant.  Be 

fore  the  unaccented  JNn,n  into    Seghol  ;    as    D^n  the 

clouds,  DHJIPI   the   mountains,   DDHJl  the   wise    man,  but 

> 
DJ/H  the  cloud,  Ilirr  the  mountain,     cf.   5. 

Before  H  and  H  the  Patach  is  commonly  retained  :  as 
Dwnn  the  life,  SjnH  the  vanity.  §  13,  2. 

2:  A  noun  without  the  ,!lis  to  be  translated  with  the 
indefinite  article,  except  the  noun  in  the  st.  const.  (§  19,  5): 
as  TV  a  house. 


3.  When  the  noun  is  preceded  by  the  prefixes  ^D  ,  the 
article  is  only  represented  by  its  appropriate  vowel  under 
the  prefix  and  the  Dagesh  in  the  following  letter  (§12, 
6.  B.  3.):  as  "Vm  in  the  word  =  nmrQ,  V*\tib  to  the 

-  •• 

land  = 


4.  The  Dagesh  after  the  article  is  often  omitted  in  let 
ters  with  Sh'va:    as    D'KT)9VD  tfte    frogs,    especially    in 
nouns  with  initial  *  :  as  ^INTT  the  river,  and  in  participles 
of  Piel  and  Pual    (§25,  7.)-'  as  *O"TQn  the  speaking  man. 

5.  Some  words  lengthen  the    accented  vowel,    when  the 
article  is  prefixed,  e.  g.    DJftl  from  DJN  plNH  from 

inn  from  in  >  n^pn  from 


§  18.    THE  PREFIXES  SQl.  29 

EXERCISE  23. 

.Prefix  the  article  to  the  following  words, 
sr-tw^v  7pvinn    G*VW   DQ^   4*VJN   3H^n   2{^N    1D^DC* 

I3rrn  iajnr  nnp!>  10o5n  n^;4"* 

T  ~  "  •  •  I  V  T     T 


22  no™   21Mi3  2°n   198n  17 

»rrn 


heaven1  earth,  Iand2  darkness3  light-i  water^  evening^  place?  dry 
lands  herb9  wise10  morning11  seed12  animal13  cord,  rope1*  grass15  new^ 
rich  man17  fat1^  weary19  pipe20  star^i  ground,  soi}22  foot23  life2^  spirit^ 
ornament26  thought27  cloud-8  majesty29  riddle30  joy31  vision32  intuition, 
vision33.  » 

§  18.     THE  PREFIXES  D7D1) . 


I.  1  called   the   conjunctive    Vav    denotes:    and,   as 
bread  DfTT)  and  bread.     It  is  changed  as  follows: 

a.  Into  }  before  a  consonant  with  simple  Sh'va  :  /b/V  and 
to  all,  §  14,  Rising  I  ;  or  before  the  labials  3  >  D>  £3  >  to 
avoid  the  recurrence  of  two  sounds  of  the  same  organic 
class:  as  ]*y\  and  between,  J01  and  from,  "^  and  a  bul- 
lock  (§  12,  7,  b,). 

6.  Into  1  before  *  becoming  quiescent :  as  *n*)  «ind  it  may 
be  (§12,  1,  IK). 

c.  Into  V  J,  1    before    comp.    Sh'va,    taking  the   correspon 
ding  short   vowel :    as    \JfcO  and  I,  7bN|!  and   eat,  '7HJ 
and  sickness  (§14,  Rising  I,  B.  b.) 

d.  Into  )  before  DwJJ:  as  D'ij^  and  God  (§  12,  6.  B.  3.). 

NOTE.     Before  HUT  into  *| :  as  niiT!  »    This  most  sacred  name 

T      :  T      |- 

of  God  was  believed  to  be  incommunicable  and  the  word  U*1J$ 
my  Lord  substituted  for  it,  according  to  which  latter  word  the 
vowels  of  1  and  the  prefixes  Q733  were  adapted,  as  HilT!;} » 

nin^»  nin;p  corresponding  to  71x3,  >$i*h>  ^89-  Tw^en 

IWwever,  nlH*  is  already  preceded  by  ^"|^  >  to  avoid  repetition, 
it  was  written  with    the    vowels    of  D^rtS^  >  so  tliat  HlJl^  ^1^ 
is  to  be  read  DTlSiS!  ^'l{< , 
6.   Into  1  immediately    before    the    tone-syllable,  especially 


30  FART  1.     EXERCISES. 

when  the  latter  has  a  distinctive  accent  and  short  words 
are  connected  in  pairs  :  as  Jirfctf  !)iifl  desolate  and  void, 
cold  and  heat,  rm  "  summer  and  winter. 


NOTE.     iriDI  shows   that  1  before  £pD  (a)  in   case  of  (e)  has 
—  and  is  not  }  , 

T  , 

II.  a.  3»  7*  3»  3  preposition  of  place  ani  time:  in,  on, 
among:  as  h'&?iO3  in  the  beginning,  ^113  on  a  mount 
ain,  7N"li^*3  amongst  Israel,  or  it  has  the  force  of  the 
prepositions:  with,  by,  through:  as  [3J*3  with  a  stone, 
"%n3  with  or  by  a  ^word. 

3  adv.  and  prep.,  generally  expressing  comparison  and 
proportion  answers  to  the  words  :  as,  like,  so,  about,  nearly, 
almost:  fHfcjp  as  a  land,  iTp'N3  about  an  ephah,  *lb>#3 
D\3£>  about  ten  years.  As  prep.:  according  to,  after, 
when,  (comparing  the  time  of  two  actions)  ^OfWJTp  after 
our  likeness,  »7lp  'OH53  when  I  lifted  up  my  voice, 
Tj^,t?n  T3  according  to  the  bounty  of  the  king. 
I.  "Kings"  10,  13. 

7  prep.,  denoting  motion  or  direction  toward  any  ob 
ject,  to,  unto,  towards,  for,  hence  it  is  the  sign  of  the 
dative  (§  19,  2.):  p^  to  a  land,  Tj^S  to  or  for  a  king. 

b.  3  »  7  >  3  always  with  Sh'va  except  in  the  following  cases  : 
1.    With    Chirek  =    3,  7»  3'  before   a    word    which    has 

Sh'va  under  the  first  letter  :  as  "O"13  by  the  word  of, 

"DID-  (14.  Rising  I.  a.) 

Before  '  the  *  becomes  quiescent  .(§  12.   7.  b.):  as 

in  the  days  of?  rniHv  to  I.  H'3  as  tne  hands  of. 
•2.    With  (-),  (-),  (-)  before   composite  Sh'va  : 

in  truth;  "10J77  to  stand,  ^HD  as  a  sickness;  or  when  dis 

placing  the  article  H  (§19,  3/)  :  as  Di*3  =  DlTO  in  the  day, 

DDn1;  ==  Dpnri1?  to  tn^  wise,  fjn  =  ^ri3  on  the  tree,  *but 

DV3  in  a  day,  W3  on  a  ^ree- 

3.    With    Kamets  rr^  a,    often   before    the   tonesyllable, 

>  •  > 

especially  before  monosyllabic  particles  :  DPO  in  them 


§  18.     PREFIXES  DDI*  31 

as  this,  t^'iD,)/  to  a  soul,  person.  7  before  several  forms  of 
the  pronouns  and  the  infinitives  of  verbs  :  as  HP  to  this, 
ri7N7  to  these,  rO?7  to  go.  Before  nouns  with  a  distinct 
ive  accent,  especially  when  short  words  are  connected  in  pairs  : 
as:  D?oS  D?0  |>3  between  water  and  water,  y£b  JttJ  }'? 
between  stroke  and  stroke. 

EXERCISE  24. 
Exactly  translate  the  following  words. 


nightl    image-    dry  land3    bird4    field5    man6    river?    rain8    king9- 

EXERCISE  25. 
Translate  into  Hebrew. 

And  light,1  and  the  light,  and  in  the  light,  to  the  earth 
and  to  the  heaven,  and  the  fruit,  2  and  fruit.,  and  from  the 
fruit,  evening  and  morning,  day  and  night,  I  and  he,3 
and  Jacob's  hands,4  and  to  an  animal,  and  in  a  land,  and 
in  the  land,  and  a  river,  and  Jonathan,  5  and  Jerusalem, 
in  Jerusalem,  to  a  man,6  to  the  man,  from  a  tree,  from 
the  tree,  from  morning,  from  the  morning,  in  a  cloud,7  in 
the  cloud,  as  an  image,  as  the  image,  to  a  bird,  to  the 
bird,  from  the  bird,  from  a  man. 


EXERCISE  26. 


*  8  was  rich.     In  sentences  with  a  noun,  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the 
predicate,  the  copula  "7o  />e"  must  always  be  supplied.     See  §77,   1. 


32  PART  I.  EXERCISES. 

82  mini  2lnwo  2°-u  :jn  19aw  18jn£  :17nw  16ninvj 

T:  T:-  '     T  TT         ^    -••  'r;  T:-- 


34  .  33  32^'     31 

38rrn 


47mriso  :46ii 
:rnrv 

notl  arose2  prophet3  since^  Moseso  Israel^  Abraham7  rich8  very9 
cattle10  silver"  gdtf-Z  foolis  darknessl4  walks1^  §  18.  I.  Noteis  deliverancel? 
evil18  goes  out19  lamp20  commandment21  law22  lights  eternity24  to23  thoti 
(art)26  God27  says28  slothful  one29  lion30  withoutSl  roarer32  way33  also, 
even34  laughter35  may  ache36  heart37  he  was38  thief39  abroad40  destroys, 
makes  childless41  sword42  deaths  n.  p.  m.44  chosen4^  good,  beautiful46  east47 
west48  north49  sea^0  (in  general  the  Mediterranean  Sea,  lying  west  of  Pales 
tine,  hence:  the  west,  but  sometimes  the  Dead  Sea  or  as  here  the  South 
Sea,  therefore  here:  the  South.)  is  praised51  name  of52. 

§  19.    CASES  OF  NOUNS  AND  PRONOUNS. 

1.  To  express  the  relations  between  the  different  nouns 
and  pronouns  in  a  sentence,  Prepositions  or  the  correspon 
ding  Prefixes  D^DD  are  chiefly  used. 

2.  The  Dative  is  formed  by  the  prep.  7N  or  its  abbrevi 
ation  the  prefix  h  (§  18,  II). 

3.  The  Ablative  is  formed  by  the  prep,  fp  or  its  abbrevi 
ation,  the  prefix  9,  D  or  by  2  and  D  (§  16,  1.  §  18,  11). 

4.  The  Accusative  is  denoted  by  the  particle  HX  or  T!^ 
(i.  e.  before  Makkef)  when  the  noun  is  definite,  i.  e.  defined 
by  the  article,  a  possessive  pronoun  (Suf.  §  21),  a  follow 
ing  genitive  or  by  itself  as  a  proper  noun,  otherwise  it  has 
no  designation,  being  entirely   similar  to  the  nominative: 
as  pKH  n?O  DW"n  n^  the  heaven  and  earth,  ^VUV  my 
son,  nDNH'f?  nx'the  son  of  fhe  servant,  DrTpX  h$  Abra 
ham,  but  Gen.  2,  4:   In  the  day  that  God  made  D 

earth  and  heaven. 

5.  The  Genitive  or  possessive  case    remains   entirely  un 
changed,  with  which  the  preceding  noun,  (which  is  limited 
and  more  nearly  defined  by  the  Gen.)  is  most  closely  con- 


§  19.     CASES  OF  NOUNS  AND  PRONOUNS.  33 

nccted.     For  this  reason  the  latter  is  said  to  stand  in  tlie 
Construct  State,  or  simply  in  the  Construct. 

The  better  to  effect  this  connection  the  article  of  the  Con 
struct  is  thrown  off  and  its  mutable  vowels  are  shortened  :  as 
D1DH  the  horse,  but  TlStDn  DID  the  horse  of  the  king  (not 
D1DH);  *]iyPT  the  fowl,  'but  D^'n^iy  the  fowl  of  the  heaven 

(not  ^iyn).T 

Regarding  the  shortening  of  the  vowels  and  other 
changes,  which  the  word  in  the  st.  const,  undergoes,  see  §  59. 

6.  The  direction  towards  a  place  or  the  time  is  indicated 
by  the  unaccented  syllable  H—  appended  to  the  noun,  called 

local  il—  »  as  D*  sea,  HD*  towards   the  sea,  f-itJ^  the  north, 

>  > 

i"0i£)¥  northward,  towards  the  north.    D'D*  year,  j"O*P*  to 

year,  jlD'D*  D*D*ID  from  year  to  year. 

NOTE  I.  Local  j"J  —  is  the    remnant  of  an  old    accusative  Q  —  , 

T  T 

yet  appearing  in  many  adverbs  :  as  DJ9V  by  day,    in  the  day  time, 
DfTjn/p    to-morrow,    (cf.  §  85.  4,  "JB,  B.) 
NOTE  II.  On  the  Segholates  with  local  H  —  see  §  66,  Note  I. 

EXERCISE  27. 

"r-oa  mrr  **toh  4riSn  TH   :3n:raS 

v  v:  v 

nin  j 


29 


pinp  N>^ 

8  :  31  n^-isn   ?n 

nSj;  ^^ 


memory1  just2  blessing-^  walked4  before5  truth0  righteousness''  offer8  God9 
thanksgiving10  good11  all12  to  wrap,  to  put  on13  garment14  stretches15 
curtain16  was17  shepherd18  small  cattle19  came20  bear21  took22  lamb2^  flock24 
eater25  came  forth26  food27  strong28  sweetness29  moved  on30  desert31  sitting''32 

5 


34  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

on,  in,  over33  throne34  judgment35  who  ?36  ascended37  snovvSS  summer39 
harvest4**  thus41  becoming,  suitable42  honor43  a  whip44  horse4^  bridle46  ass47 
a  stick^  the  back49. 

EXERCISE  28. 
Translate  into  Hebrew: 

The  evening  (accus.),  to  the  evening,  to  an  evening,  a 
man  (nom.),  a  man  (accus.),  the  man  (accus.),  from  a 
man,  from  the  man,  the  head1  of  the  man,  the  head  of  a 
man,  from  the  heaven,  the  grass  of  the  earth,  the  land 
(accus.),  the  land  (nom.),  a  land  (accus.),  a  land  (nom.), 
the  light  of  the  heaven,  to  the  judge2,  to  the  judge  of  the 
land,  to  a  judge  of  the  land,  the  fruit  (accus.)  of  the  tree3. 
God  created4  earth  and  heaven.  God  created  the  earth  and 
the  heaven,  the  voice5  (accus.)  of  God,  a  voice  (accus.)  of 
God,  a  voice  (nom.)  of  God,  the  sign6  (accus.),  a  sign 
(accus.),  by  a  sin?,  by  the  sin,  towards  the  east^  towards 
the  souths,  to  the  mountain,  towards  Samaria1*). 


CHAPTER  IV. 

OF   THE   PRONOUN. 
§  20.     THE    PERSONAL   PRONOUN. 

1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  either  separate  words  or 
syllables,  contractions  of  the  first  and  appended  to  nouns, 
verbs  or  particles,  thence  receiving  the  name  of  Suffixes. 
The  separate  pronouns  represent  the  nominative,  (see  ex 
ception  to  this  §  93,  2.).  The  suffixes  appended  to  the  verb 
stand  for  the  accusative  and  for  the  dative  in  rare  instances. 
The  suffixes  appended  to  the  noun  properly  stand  for  the 
genitive  or  possessive  cases  and  then  serve  the  purpose  of 
possessive  pronouns :  as  'D'lD  the  horse  of  me  =  my  horse. 
The  suffixes  appended  to  particles  either  represent  the  nomi 
native  or  the  accusative  cases:  as  '31DD  as  I,  WIN  me. 


§  20.     THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUN. 
2.  The  separate  personal  pronouns  are  : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

P?itf » in  pause  O^tf  ] 
l.com.  <*    ^^    (|       f|       ny  (•  I       l,com.  <j 

I  •';  i 


2- 


nnx 


f.     UK.  (P«>P. 


m. 


thou  2. 


he  fm.       DH 


3-  if.       K»H  she     3'  if. 

• 


3.  Remarks.    ^J<  is  the  ancient  form  .and  more  used  in 
the  Pentateuch  than  0$,  while  the  latter  occurs  often  in  the 
later  books.     ,ir)K>  compounded  of  HJp^,  as  the    kindred 
dialects  have  :  Chald.  HH^  >  /l-DK »  Arab.  anta. 

T     ;    ""  :    ;   *" 

The  fern,  form  T\&  occurs  only  in  k'thibh  (7  times), 
but  it  is  the  foundation  of  some  verbal  inflections,  (so  the 
form  717LDD  before  suffixes,  §43, 1.)  fcOJl  is  of  common  gen 
der  in  the  Pentateuch  and  also  signifies  she.  But  whenever 
NtH  stands  in  the  text  for  K^n>  it  has  the  pointing  JOf"! 
and  must  be  read  tfTl* 

'GfTDN?  is  formed  from  the  pronominal  stem  JJSt  found,  in 
^Nt/nnX  and  UH  the  harder  form  of  ^  we;  D^N*  and 
JJ-1K  are  blunted  forms  ofD^fiN*  properly  Dlflp^  (Chald. 
pr^JK'  Arab,  antum).  Before  verb.  suif.  this  original  form 
is  retained  (§  43,  1.).  DH>  [H  from  D1H.  p,1»  hence  not 
seldom  the  2.  and  3.  masc.  plur.  inp.'as  py3^»  pSlT(l.V 
D^W*  Is.  35,  1.  nSH'  H^n  have  a  demonstrative  character. 

4.  The  separate  pronouns,  when  connected  with  a  noun 
as  predicate  of  a  sentence,  always    include    the   copula    or 
the  verb  to  be:  as  tjpi'  ^^T  am  Joseph,  ^NH  nJlX  thou 
roV  the  man.  t^V 

EXERCISE  29. 

n 
nnx 


36  P^RT  1.     EXERCISES. 


:12  onto  -in  nan  :    K  6ni:p  :  u  :wn  "toj;  *o  nrus* 
mrr  nriN 


:  | 

->8nnD 


blessed1  holy2  woman3  the  first*  the  Iast5  honest,  upright  (|3  ;  pi.  m.  D',33  , 
pi.  f.  m'J3  §  58,  l.)c  idols?  vanity.,  foolish8  stranger9  dust10  thou  shalt  return11 
Ontoi  pl.fr.  "»13J  cf.6-12  the  only  child  (girl)13  twelve14  brothers15  forgiving™ 
my  sister17  younger18  bare19  son20  beside  me21  Saviour22  filling23  declaration24 
guilty25  old20  came27  mountain28  n.  p.  m.29  dwelled30  n.  p.  of  a  city31. 

EXERCISE  30. 

Ye  are  strangers!  with  me2-  Lord,  thou  art  a  refuge3 
to  us  from  generation4  to  generation.  From  eternity5 
to  eternity  thou  art  God.  Not  a  God  deligHting6  (in)  wicked 
ness1?  thou  art.  I  am  dust  and  ashes®.  God  is  in  heaven  and 
we-are  on  the  earth.  Justs  art  thou  0  Lord  !  Thou  art  neario 
0  Lord  !  Ye  are  a11  seed  of  falsehood12. 


-nn 

(in  pause!)  19 

§  21.     NOMINAL  SUFFIXES. 

1.   The  nominal  suffixes  appended  to  Novns  in  the  Singu 
lar  are  : 

SING.  PI.UR.VL. 

1.  com.  *—  ,     ^p^lD  my  horse. 
m.     ?|,(in  pause  rj 

•f:    r|/Tj- 

m.  in  ,  1  .  1D1D  his  li.   DD-  D~^  OD1D  )  (poetical) 

*'  f.     H  ,  n—  <  (H-)  MOID  her  h.     p  •  ?—  ,   [DID  V  4  >  v 

T         T       T  •.-  r.      I  T      i  T       )  their  horse 


§  21.     NOMINAL  SUFFIXES, 
Appended  to  Nouns  in  Plural  : 

SING.  PLUR. 


1.  com.  i—,    ^pID     my  horses     W~  >    ^DID     our  horses 


m.   ?]»-,  ?pp!|D  )  D3'-,  03'plD  ) 

horses  your  horses 


m.    V—  >    VD1D     his  horses    DiT—  »  DITDID  )  (poetical) 

£  T  V  V        •  (-Spy  _         ' 

'  f.    IT—,  JTD-1D     her  horses    TIT—,  'ffTDID  \  ,,    .  r 

T   •••      T  •.  3  their  horses 

2.  Remarks.     The  suffixes  of  the  noun  are  divided  into 
two  classes  :  of  Singular   and    of  Plural  nouns  ;  the  forms 
of  the  latter   are    longer   and   may    be    recognized  by  the 
plural  t  ;  as  -IJDID  our  horse,  but  ^D'lD  our  horses. 

3.  The    suffixes   Dp'   |?>  and   D)l>  fr7>  they   invariably 
having  the  tone,  the  better    to  distinguish  between  the  D 
arid  the  pare  called  grave,  the  others  are  light  suffixes. 

4.  Ill—  is    a   favorite    longer    suffix    for    I*   particularly 
in  monosyllabic  words  and  in  nouns  with  the  ending  J"J—  : 
pO  species,  jyp  and   ^H^P  his,    its    species  ;  Jl^^/?  appear- 
ance;  ^nN^p  his  appearance. 

5.  The  suffixes  denote  the  genitive  of  the  pronoun  (§  20,  1). 
The  other  cases  are  represented  by    attaching  prepositions 
or  prefixes  and  particles    to    the    suffixes.     The  dative  by 
^  or  *7;  the  accusative  by  fijtf  OjTlN)  ;  the  ablative  by  jp  , 
3'hX  OJ-JN)  etc.     See  Paradigm  A. 

6.  The  possessive    pronoun    is    also    represented   by.D* 
(§23,  2.)    followed   by  S   with    the   suffix,   thus  :    ^  = 
**?  "H^K  which  is  (belongs)  to  me  =  my.     See  Paradigm  A. 

NOTE,     On  the  suffixes  of  the  vero  see  §  42. 
EXERCISE  31. 


PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

nirr  j 


:rrrojn  HD  ^701    35  ^iD  nnx  :29ninn)  ^mu 


vineyard^     strengths     withs     might*      will  forsakes    people,    nations 
safety,  protection?     perished,  was  losts     refugeQ     peace,  welfare1*)    intelli- 
gentH  who   digs12    pitl3    shall    fall14    good  man,    pious1**    upright1^    man, 
here  collect,  men1?  there  is  noneis  heart,     understanding19    drink20  cistern  1-a- 
also22   rock23    shelter24   strength25   greatness26   glory27   victory28    majesty29 
rulingso  now3i  thanking^.    cf.  to  32,  33,  §  107,  3. 

EXERCISE  32. 

His  light,  our  light,  my  tree,  their  tree,  her  tree,  thy 
tree,  thy  trees,  his  dayi>  thy  (fern.)  day,  my  stars,  our 
star,  our  stars,  to  the  fruit  of  his  tree,  thy  voice,  my  be 
ginning,  thy  (fern.)  beginning^  your  beginning,  thy  (ac- 
cus.)  voice,  the  voice  of  God.  lam  giving^  from  the  fruit 
of  your  trees  to  the  ruler4  of  the  citys.  The  strength^  of 
my  arm"?.  The  liglit  of  our  torches8J  the  sand9  of  their 
shores10. 

.iocyin  9  Sin  8T£)S  7;rht  erjs   STJT  ^BfD  sjn'j  sri^wi  inr 

EXERCISE  33. 

God  created  him,  us,  me,  them  (fern.),  her,  I  gave1  thee 
from  it,  from  them,  I  come2  to  thee  (m)  (f.),  and  she  came* 
to  him,  to  them,  to  us,  I  (am)  with  thee,  in  it,  by  us,  as 
we,  as  I.  God  took4  him,  thee,  thee  (in  pause),  thee  (f.), 
I  shall  establishs  my  covenants  with7  you,  with  them,  with 
him,  with  her,  with  th  (f.). 


§  -2'2.     DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN. 

i.  M.      nn 

'  \  this 

nxr  )  (rarely  fit) 
Com.        tf     (without  distinction  of  gender  or  number.) 

Plur.    JlW»    (S$  rarely)  these. 

NOTE.    In  nt7il  or  apocopated  1 7H  '/'''"«,  the  demonst.  has    the 

V  T    ~  T 


§  22.     DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUN.  39 

original  article    with  7:    (Sjl)  before  it;    IrpJl  f.   occurs    only 
once  Ez.  36,  35. 

2.  The  demonstrative  referring  to  a  remoter  object  is  repre 
sented  by  jonn*  x'nn»  onn»  jnrp  as  onn   0*0*3 

••     T  I   ••     T  "      T  •    -i  - 

in  those  days,  while  rr?tf  H  D'P*3  in  these  days ;  or  they  ex 
press:  the  same:  as  K^inn  ^NH  the  same  man. 

3.  The  demonstratives  are  thus  declined: 
Nom.          rtf>  JIN*  this,  «^7N  these. 
Dat.         H!I/»        »Vtf/ to  this,     H^N/  to  these. 

ACC.   nrn^»  n^rn^  this,   nWrw*  these. 

n-ro » 


Abi 

* 

HD 

4.  Syntactical  rules.  §  94.* 

EXERCISE  34. 


:TJ?n  rir^S)  rj^n  nrxS  J11^!??^  Sv?  n^  lonp5nn 

a  D'rtSg  12nnn  kvS 
r  :17nSin  16rn  rir 


21 

1Dm 


on 


n  ^x 


*  The  learner  must  refer  to  the.  respective  paragraph  before  translating 
the  exercise  following,  and  in  all  cases  when  his  attention  is  called  to  the 
Syntax. 


40  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


city1  words'-^  I  have  redeemed3  thou  hast  made,  performed* 
sepulchre6  unto7  lo!  behold!8  shadow,  shelter,9  wisdom10  money11 
chosen12  while  yet13  (was)  speaking14  came15  evil16  sore17  strength18 
three19  sons  of20  n.  p.21  was  overspread22  I  formed23  chariot-4  we  will  re 
member25  his  name26  plain27  fearing28  departing29. 

EXERCISE    35. 

This  man1,  that  man,  that  woman2,  this  woman,  these 
men3,  these  women4,  those  men,  those  women,  this  is  the 
man,  that  is  the  woman,  these  are  the  men,  that  is  the 
words,  from  that  man,  to  this  woman,  this  is  my  God, 
this  boy6,  this  is  the  law?,  this  pillar8,  these  are  the 
names9  of  the  sons10,  those  brothers11  (ace.),  these  are  thy 
uncles12. 


.  12  DHn    11  D'PIX    10  D'JS    9  mD#  the  names  of 

§  23.     THE  RELATIVE. 

1.  The  relative  pronoun  for  both  genders   and   numbers 
is  *")^K    ivho,    which;  often  including  the  pers.  pronoun:  he 
who,    she    who,    that    which  :   *)Xfi  1^   he    whom    thou 
cursest. 

2.  In  the  later  biblical   books  and   the  modern  Hebrew 
writers,  the    abbreviated   form  .  $  or  t$  (with   following 
Dag.,  omitted  before  gutt.)  is  most  frequently  used. 

3.  n&TiK  (or  ,g?)  gives  to  every  word  to  which  it  refers 
relative  signification:    as  D^  there,  D^  *")&'X  where, 

whence. 

4.  It  is  declined  as  follows  : 

Gen.  (1D1D  his  horse)  ID^D  "It^jSt  whose  horse 

Dat.  ClS  to  him)                  iS  *°\$$  to  whom 

Ace.  (WIN  him)  IHlK  H^'JJ  whom 

Abl.  (^5P  from  him)  Jtfjjp  *)        from  whom. 


5.  Before  participles  the  article  H  i'requciitly  represents 
the  relative  :  us  T^inn  he  wlio  goes. 


24.     THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN,.  41 

EXERCISE  36. 


ntrr  12 
19     »    -  18       "  17 


33&  oyjn  n^ 


:|V 


spiritl  with2  may  speaks  fishes*  are  taken&  net^  wishing,  desiring?  he  did8 
how9  great10  goodness11  has  laid  up12  confide,  trust13  woe14  the  king15  a  boy, 
a  youths  cursed1''  trustsis  departs™  zh^sh)  heart20  hail!  happy  .'21  makes22 
trust23  said24  mother  in  law2^  thou  goest2^  I  will  go2?  thou  lodgest2^  I  will 
lodge29  thusso.  t 

EXERCISE  37. 

The  field  which  Abraham  boughti.  The  horse2  upon4 
which  the  king5  rode3.  Daniel6  whose  name8  was  called? 
Belteshazzar9.  Not  goodio  (is)  the  counsel1!  that  he  has 
given12.  Nigh13  is  the  Lord14  to  all15  that  call  upon  him16 
in  truth1?.  Andis  God^  sawis  all  that  he  had  rnade2<>,  and, 
behold21,  (it  was)  very22  good. 

(his  name  ID  V)     8  LD#      7  I^lpJ     e^N'H    5  ^S^    4  rSl»    3331     2  D^Q    1  HJD 
:  ••  T|:-  ••  •  T          >:•:•  T^T          -  T  T|T 

15  Va  wrnrr  i33npT  12]^  nnjj; 


§  '24:      THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN. 

1.  The  interrogative  pronoun  is  >0  who?  usually  applying 
to  persons,  np»  i10»  nD  what?  applying  to  things. 

ilO  before  tf  and  *1  and  always  in  pause:  n^N'nO  what 
(are)  these,  DTV5O  no  what  did  you  see  ? 

Commonly  it  is  written  no  or  ,nO  (followed  by  Dag.):  as 
iOC'~nO  what  is  his  name  ?  or  with  a  small  word,  it  is  con 
tracted  into  one  word:  as  ntO  what  is  this?  (§  9.  1.  Note.) 

n.O  before  Jl.  n»  JJ:  as  rptyy  >10  what  hast  thou  done? 

6 

/ 


42  PART  I.     EXERCISES* 

At  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  np  also  frequently  stands 
before  letters  not  guttural  :  as  /Ip  j"|p  what  voice  ? 

2,  The  cases  are  indicated  by  the  prefixes  and  the  par 
ticle  nx- 

Dat.  'p'^  to  whom  ? 

'  Ace.      'p  MX  whom  ? 

»J30  from  whom? 

*  with  or  throuh  whom  ? 


The  Gen.  by  *pyE?  whose?  but  more  frequently  it  is 
indicated  by  putting  the  interrogative  immediately  after  the 
noun:  as  ,^P~n3  whose  daughter?  *p~T3  through  whose 
hand?  DftS  Hp'TOpH  Jer.  S,  9.  the  intelligence  of  what 
remains  to  them? 

3.  Up  is  also  used  adverbially;  as  D^TIPI  D1D"HD  how 
good  and  how  pleasant  ! 

4.  Interrogative   particles:  *>$  or  JTN  where?    with  suiF. 
rO*N  where   art  thou?    1"N  where   is  he?    D51^  where   are 
they  ? 

With  adverbs  and  pronouns,  HJ  *N  which  ?  what  ? 
where  ?  whither  ?  HTO  >N  whence  ?  from  what  ?  HXtS  ^ 

V   "  **  T  '* 

on  what  account  ?  wherefore  ?  J"D'^  now  ?    ^^^  where  ? 

5.  Interrogative   prefix:   Jl  (H   with   comp.    Sh'va)    fre 
quently  before  non-gutturals  :  as  17  Dl7^*!l  is  he  well  ?   H 
before  a  letter  with  Sh'va  or  a  guttural  :  as  JD^TIN  Dr)JJ"l^n 
know    ye    Laban  ?    TDK!!  shall  I  go  ?   H  before    gutturals 
having  Kamets  :  as  'jiNH  have  (or  am)  I  ?   NIH  pjnn  is  he 
strong  ? 

In  negative    sentences    this  H  is  always    connected  with 
the  negative  particle:  as  fl#£t^  xS*l  hast  thou  not  heard? 
Nrl  is  not  tlie  Lord  in  our  midst  ? 


EXERCISE  38. 

jnNt  2nnb*j 
n    \x  ^ 


§  24.  THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN.       43 

•no  :nin 


npjnn 
2>iK  rt?1? 
7i?.  28rnSS:?n  ^p1?  27D 


•jw  nin? 
34 


np  nin»  42niD?  :41pj; 


knows1  has  wrought2  *  the  feminine  is  used  for  the  neuter  §  81,  1.  made 
thee3  chief4  judge5  over6  youth7  or8  enemy9  the  planter10  ear11  he  shall 
hear12  the  former13  eye14  he  shall  see15  where  (is)1^  depth1?  says18  sea™ 
(it  is)  not2^  with21  woe22  misery23  contentions24  sorrow25  wounds2^  without 
cause27  darkening  of28  eyes29  that  tarry  long30  wine31  knows  (prop,  (is) 
knowing)32  besides,  except  me33  there  is,  it  is34  father35  ice37  gave, 

put38    the  insight,  mind39  understanding40    toiling,  labouring41     remember4- 
in  stead  of43. 

EXERCISE  39. 

Who  art  tliou  my  soni?  Who  art  thou  my  daughter2? 
Who  is  this  man?  What  is  his  name3?  Who  are  these? 
Whose  daughter  is  this  maiden4?  What  has  he  done5? 
Who  is  this  that  cometh6  from  Edom*?  For  whose  son  do  I 
labours?  Whom  wilt  thou  sends  with  meio  ?  What  is  that 
in  thine  hand1*  ?  Is1*  in  a  dream13  truth  ?  Whose  ox14  have 
I  taken15  ?  or1^  whose  ass^  have  I  taken  ?  or1^  whom  have 
I  defrauded19  ?  or18  of  whose  hand  have  I  received2®  (any) 
bribe^  ?  Is  he  strong22  or2S  weak24?  What  is  the  land*  that 
he  dwells25  in,  is  it  good2^  or  bad2^  ?  is  it  fat2-  or  Iean28  ? 
Is  not  one29  father3*)  to  us  al!31>  has  not  one  God  created  us32? 
What  did  this  people  do  unto  thee?  Who  has  done  this  ? 


:  |-T 

is  frm.    inX*24ni)'l     interrogative  H  23     22pm    21  ^£33    20'PnpS 
I   ;•••  •:  i  |  TT  •   :    f-t 


44  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


,$.  90,  2.  so  ix  29  inx  as  nn  2rn:OT  26pjn   ,p3io  f«m.  310 

T  TV  TT  T--  :  -S-T  T      ' 

,,V?3  ,193  withsuff. 


CHAPTER  V. 

OF    THE    VERB. 
§•25.     GENERAL    VIEW. 

1.  The  verbs  classified  with  respect  to  their  origin  are  : 
a.    Primitives :  as  TI7D  to   govern  ;     6.  Derivatives,  which 

are  either  derived  from  other  verbs :  Verbal  Deriva 
tives',  as  p*!^  to  justify,  from  pT^  to  be  just,  or  are  de 
rived  from  nouns :  Denominatives  :  as  Jtt^T  to  remove  the 
ashes,  from  |&**1[  ashes. 

2.  The  groundform  or  stem  of  the  verb  is  the  third  per 
son  singular  of  the  preterite:  ^Dp  he  has  killed.     It  regu 
larly  consists  of  three  consonants  (radicals),  the  most  import 
ant  vowel  of  which  follows  the  second  radical ;   in  transitive 

verbs  it  is  Patach  :  as  vtDp  >  in  intransitives,  Tsere  or  Cho- 

.  t 
lem:  as"tJ3  he  was  heavy,  fbp  he  was  little.     The  Kamets 

after  the  first  radical  is  pretonic  and  drops  when  the  tone 
or  accent  is  thrown  forward :  as  Dfl^Dp  you  have  killed. 

3.  The  infinitive  construct,  ^bp  to  kill,  is  another  ground- 
form  and  was  so  considered  by    the  earlier  Jewish  Gram 
marians,    being  called  by    them  Un$  root.     It  consists  of 
the  three  radicals  with  only  one    vowel,  after  the  second. 

4.  These   groundforms    are  both    of   great    importance, 
controlling  the  other  forms  of  the  verb  derived  from  them. 

NOTE.  From  the  infinitive  as  the  second  groundform  are  deriv 
ed  the  imperative  and  future.  In  some  guttural  and  irregular 
verbs,  where  the  infinitive  is  differently  vocalized  from  the  impera 
tive  or  takes  a  nominal  ending,  the  future  is  derived  from  the 
latter. 

5.  The  modifications  of  the  simple  and  primary  idea  of 
the  root  are  effected  by  external  variations  of  the  ground- 
form.     These  variations  are  threefold:. 


§  25.     GENERAL  VIEW.  45 


a.  Vocalization^  or  the    alteration    of  the    vowels  :  as 
he  sends,  n!j&  he  dismisses. 

b.  Reduplication,    or    the   doubling  of  one,  and  in  rare  in 
stances  of  two*  of  the  radical  sounds:  as  7~t?p  =  7i?tpp» 

fr- 


c.  Augmentation,  or  the  prefixing  of  one  or  two  formative 
consonants  :  as  h&$}>  ^tPj?fct'  ^pO'  %(2Wl  • 

6.  These  new  forms,    more    properly   called  derivations, 
having  altered  not  only  their  external  form  but  also  their 
internal  sense,  are    now  generally  termed  Conjugations,  in 
the  language  of  the  ancient  grammarians  D^\53  buildings, 
forms. 

7.  The  ancient   grammarians,    who   employed   the   verb 
7J7  j3  to  do,  as  a  paradigm,  named  the  conjugations,  accor 
ding  to  the  various  forms  derived  from  this  verb,  thus  : 

1.  7J7JD  —  Paal,  he  acted,   (now  generally  7p)  « 

2.  ^92  ~  Niphal,  he  was  acted  upon. 

3.  7j)$  —  Piel,  he  acted  vigorously. 

4.  7^  ~  Pual,  he  was  vigorously  acted  upon. 

5.  7*J/*On  —  Hiphil,  he  caused  to  act. 

6.  7J/*5H  —  Hophal,  he  was  caused  to  act. 

T.   T^Sfl/l  —  Hithpael,  he  acted  upon  himself. 

The.se  terms  have  been  retained  with  the  exception  of 
the  first,  which  has  been  supplanted  by  the  equally  an 
cient:  ^p  light,  intimating,  that  it  is  the  simple  original 
form,  without  external  or  internal  change,  while  the  other 
six  are  DHD?  grave  or  heavy  i.  e.  freighted  with  a  weight 
ier  meaning,  which  brings  with  it  a  corresponding  exter 
nal  change. 

$  26.     SIGNIFICATION  AND  CHARACTERISTICS  OF  THE 
.CONJUGATIONS. 

The  Characteristics  and  the    signification  of  the  derived 
conjugations  are: 

1.   7^53  '  Niplial  is  the  passive,  or  often  the  reflexive  or 


PART  I.     EXERCISE. 


reciprocal  of  Kal  :  as  TOtf  to    keep,    Niphal  :   to   be  kept, 
or  to  keep  one's  self  from. 


2.  /yS,  Piel  signifies  in  general  intense  action,  energy, 
frequency  :   -Q#  to    break,  "QLT  to    shatter,  nStT  to  send, 
rhti?  to  dismiss.     It   is    often   the   transitive    or  causative 
of  Kal,  when  the  latter  is  intransitive  :  as  S"U  to  be  great, 
to  grow,  hnj  to    cause    to    grow  :    £Hp  to    be   holy,  B*JT) 
to  make  holy. 

3.  7#iD,  Pual  is  the  passive  of  Piel.   The  characteristic 
of  both  is  the  doubling  of  the   second   radical  by   Dagesh 
forte. 

4.  yy^n,  HipUl  signifies  causation:    to  cause    another 
person    or  tiling    to    do    that,    which    is  indicated    by  the 
primitive  Kal  :  as  3HD  to  write,  D^-pr?  to  cause  to  write. 
If  Kal  is  intransitive,   Hiphil  signifies  only  the  transitive 
of  Kal  :    as  pfll  to  be  strong,  Hiphil  :   to  make  strong,  to 
strengthen. 

5.  /JS)Tf>  Hoplial  is  the  passive  of  Hiphil.  The  charac 
teristic    of  both  is  the   prefixed  H  and   the    proper  vocali 
zation. 


$3nrT4»  Hitlipael  is  generally  reflexive,  sometimes  re 
ciprocal:  as  *7C3j2Jirr  to  kill  one's  self,  i"r#"Vin  to  look  at 
each  other.  Barely  has  it  a  passive  signification  :  as  f"DJl^7T 
to  be  forgotten,  EC.  8,  10.  pETtfin  to  be  embittered",  pro 
voked  to  anger,  Ps.  73,  21. 

Occasionally  it  denotes  to  pretend,  to  feign  to  be 
or  to  do  what  is  denoted  by  the  root,  hence  it  has 
been  called  by  some  the  hypocritical  conjugation:  as  "Ite'jyin 
to  pretend  to  be  rich,  Pr,  13,  7.  DDrtfVl  to  show  ones'  self 
wise  EC.  7,  16.  Its  characteristic  is  the  prefixed  syllable 
^in  and  the  doubling  of  the  second  radical  by  Dag.  forte. 

NOTE.     There  are  also  unusual  conjugations:  1.  Pod  as 
reflexive  TgBpJjTl  »  fut.  S$ip>  ,  part,  SpIpP  ,  fut.  pass, 
In  the  regular  verbs  it  occurs  very    seldom  :    ^5^'P  my  judge, 
Job  9,  15.   ^0  to   take    root   Is.    40,  24,     In   verbs  it  is 


§  27.     INFLECTION.  47 

frequent:  as  M?tt1»  MID.  pill.    2-  Pile1'  Pulal>   Hithpalcl,  es 


pecially  when  'the  second  radical  is  a  guttural  :  as  pfr^  to  be  at 
rest,  pjn  to  be  green.  3.  Pealal  (the  two  last  letters  being  re 
peated)  as  irnflD  to  beat  quick,  to  palpitate,  from  ^HD  to  go 
about.  4.  Pilpel,  formed  from  a  Mliteral  root  by  doubling  both 
radical  letters:  as  ^37?  to  sustain,  nourish.  ^Jf/V  to  tinkle, 

t]y%y.  to  flutter. 

§  27.     INFLECTION. 

The  different  derivative  forms  or  conjugations  are  in 
flected,  to  indicate  the  various  grammatical  conditions  of 
Tense,  Mood7  Gender,  Number  and  Person. 

a.  The    Tenses     (D^Of)   are  two:    Preterite    (*Q)£)  and 

Future  (TflJJ)  • 

b.  Moods:    Two  forms  of  the  Infinitive  OlpD  fountain), 
an   absolute    and    a    construct;     an  'Imperative   *W{   (com 
mand),    excepting  in    Pual  and  Hophal  as  pure   passives  ; 
two  Participles,    [W3  (middle)  or  HIH  (,,66%,")  Part  of 
the  verb  jTH  to  be],  a  Part,  active  (7J1£)),  a  Part,  passive 
(7^3),  as  derived  nominal  forms. 

c.  Two  Numbers:    Singular  (TfT  alone,  single),  Plural 
(D'!TI  many). 

cZ.  Three  Persons  :  I.  P.  (i"IJ?3^319  speaking  for  himself), 
II.  P.  (NX9J  present),  III.  P.  O-OW  concealed,  hidden). 

e.  Two  Genders  :  Masculine  (*)Df  a  male),  Feminine  (HDp.4 
a  female). 

§  28.     CLASSES. 

1.  The  verbs  are  divided  into  regular  or  perfect  and.  irregu 
lar  or  imperfect  verbs.    Regular  D^/C*  (perfect)  are  those, 
of  which  the  three  radicals  undergo  no  change  and  always 
remain  audible. 

The  regular  verbs  include  the  gutturals  :  i.e.  verbs  of 
which  one  or  more  radicals  are  of  the  *")J?nnK  >  the  changes 
which  they  suffer  affecting  the  vowels  only,  not  the  radicals. 

2.  The  irregular^  are  divided  into  DHpPj  Defective,  D'flJ 
Quiescent    and   Q^SD  Reduplicate. 

jn       Defective  verbs  in  some  forms  drop  one  or  more  of  their 


48  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


radical  letters.  Quiescents  have  one  of  Hie 
*li"TN  aw  radicals,  which  in  some  forms  either  drop  or  quiesce. 
Reduplicates  have  for  the  two  last  radicals  similar  letters. 
3.  From  the  old  example  ^]73  ,  of  which  the  first  letter 
is  t3  ,  the  second  y  ,  the  tldrd  7  ,  those,  the  first  letter  of 
which  quiesces  or  drops,  were  called  '£  Hpn  or  '£  ^  i.  e. 
defective  or"  quiescent  in  £,  those,  the  second  letter  of 
which  quiesces,  'y  ^PlJ  i.  e.  quiescent  in  J/,  and  those  in 
which  the  third  is  quiescent,  '7  ^tU  i.  e.  quiescent  in  7* 
Thus  t^J  is  called  }"&  i.  e.  the  5  or  the  first  radical  is  3  ; 
TlD  =  Y'J?  i-  e.  the  J?  or  the  second  radical  is  1;  ft^J  =  n"S 
i.  e.  the  7  or  the  third  radical  is  Jl  '•>  DDD  is  called  y"y  i.e. 
double  y  ,  its  second  and  third  radicals  being  the  same. 


CHAPTER  VL 

i 

THE  REGULAR  VERB. 
EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SECOND  PARADIGM. 

§  29.    THE  PRETERITE  CQJ?). 

1.  The  principal  vowel  stands   after  the  second  radical. 
In  the  transitive    verb   it   is   Patach,    in    the    intransitive 
Tsere  or  Cholem.     For  the  sake  of  brevity  the  former  are 
called:    Verbs  middle  A,  as  7fcDp  »  the  latter:  Verbs  middle  E, 
as  T^'fl  to  incline_,  to  delight  in,   and  middle  ^  0,  as  7^  to 
be  able,  can. 

2.  The  Kamets  in  the  first  syllable  is  pretonic  (§  14  Re 
jection  1)  and  drops  when  the  tone  or  accent  is  thrown  for 
ward:  as  DrV7fc?p;  ye  have  killed. 

3.  The  conditions  of  Person,  Number  and  Gender  are  in 
dicated  in  the  preterite  by  attaching  at  the  end  fragments 
of  the  personal  pronouns,  which   are  called  :  Affirmatives. 
(§  15,  2.  Note). 


I 

§  29.     THE  PRETERITE  O?J/*).  49 

4.  The  afformatives  of  the  preterite  are : 

Person:  1.  2.  3. 

m.        jl 
Singular.        TJ    com.        ^         ^         ^        ^_ 

:  T 

m.    Dfl 
Plural-  f        .„         com.     1 

5.  The  vowel  in  the  second  syllable:  —,—_,_  drops  in 
the  third  person  fern,  and  plur.:  as  fl7DpT>  }  7DpT  (§  14  Re 
jection  3). 

With  a  pause  accent  it  is  restored:  as  H/tDp  >  nV£)n>  H/b* 
(§14  Rising  II). 

6.  The  verbs   middle  E.  generally   lose  the   sound  r  in 
their  inflection  :  as  f§n »  F)¥§0  » 

The  verbs  of  middle  0  retain  the  Cholem  in  the  second 
sing,  and  first  persons:  as  fi?b*>  *p  /b1* » 

In  those  cases,  however,  where  the  tone  is  shifted,  Cho- 

>  t 
lem  changes    into  Kamets-Chatuph  :  as  DJl/O' » 

7.  Verbs  ending  with  fi  suffer  a  rejection  of  the  fi  before 
the  afformatives  beginning  with  TV  as  JT"O  for  nni^' from 
HID.  W3,  DP13  (§  12,  6.  B.  1.) 

8.  In  combinations    with    the  afformatives  fl*  p>  ^J  the 

•  >        >f  >» 

word  is  Milel,  otherwise  Milra:  as  fl7tDp>  il/DD »  DH/DD  • 

T    :    -  |  T  T    :  I  |T  v    :    -  )  : 

(§  9,  12.  II.  m.). 

9.  Syntactical  rules  §  100. 

EXERCISE  40. 

nirr  2- 


50  PART  I.  EXERCISES. 

30  - 


nr 


to  be  great1  work2  very3  to  be  deep*  thought5  voice6  to  flee7  i$  to  be  or 
become  wise9  ant10  to  gather11  harvest12  food13  to  remember14  fish15  to  eat™ 
Tyre17  to  sayiS  the  perfection  of  beauty  19  to  work2<>  iniquity21  to  fal}22 
street^  to  keep24  precept25  to  send26  hither27  but2»  Saul29  to  take3<>  role, 
dominion31  to  be  too  little32  mercy33  to  give34  the  produce35  to  seek36  to  be 
able37  to  endure38  to  enter39  the  tent  of  the  congregation4^  because41  to  rest42 
cloud43  the  glory  ot44  to  fill45  dwelling,  Tabernacle46  to  counsel,  to  advice47 
n.  p.  m.48- 

EXERCISE  41. 

Kacheli  Stole2  the  images^.  Why  4  hast  thou  soldo  thy 
horse?  Jacob6  rent7  his  clothes8-  A  dream^  I  dreamed10- 
Why  have  you  not  sentu  a  messenger^  to  our  father^?  The 
woman  dipped**  the  bread15  in16  vinegar1?.  Ruth18  gleaned1^ 
ears20  in  the  field.  Our  enemies21  took22  our  city  (f.)  and  all  its 
men  they  killed2^  with16  the  sword2*.  Why  did  you  laugh25? 
(fern.)  They  have  not  kept26  the  covenant  of  God.  We 
loved27?  I  loved.  Thou  wast  able28?  you  were  able.  I  slept2^ 
Ye  slept  (fern.),  thou  hast  cutso,  I  have  cut,  Ye  have  cut. 
The  Hebrews31  went  over32  Jordan33.  Jacob  gave3*  Esau35 
bread  and  pottage36  of  lentils37-  Sacrifice38  and  offering^ 
thou  didst  not  desire-to,  burnt  offering41  and  sin  offer  in  g*2 
hast  thou  not  required**. 


n  163  15DnS   w  Spa    wix  with  8Uff.  ,3« 

(in  Pause  !  $.  14     24  3^11     23  J^H     2213^     21  D^K     (pi-)   20  0^31^ 

3213J?    (Pl.)310n3^    30n^_3    29  jtfT    2S^y    2^3HN    26^73^    25  pHV  Lengthening  4) 

o  van  sanmo  ssn^i    (i»i.)  37  D'^n^  sirn  skr^  34rnj  33  ni» 

I  ••  T  T  :  •  •  T—.  •:  T   ••          I  -  T          It*  f 

:  (in  pause)  43  *7K#    ^ 


§  30,     THE  INFINITIVE.  51 

§  80.     THE  INFINITIVE. 

1.  The  second  groundform  is  the  Infinitive  /Dp  to  kill. 
It  is  called  construct,  because  it  is  always   connected   with 
the   Prefixes  D  ADD  >  or  with  a  following  noun  :  as  D*l  2^X 
to-lie-in-  waitrfor  blood.     With  the   prefixes:   as  7t3p3  in 

killing,    Sbp?  as   killing,    ViOpS    to     kill,      VtDj3!9   from 
killing. 

2.  The  /"DD  are   regularly   vowelless  ;   the   Chirek  here 
is  a  helping   vowel.     The   Dagesh   after   the  ft  is   for   the 
assimilated  J-,    Sb[?0  for  VtDp  JD  »     Of  S"M  the  h  is   most 
closely   connected,    so   that  the  following   Sh'va  is  silent, 
while  the    Sh'va    after  3  and  3  are   vocal  :    as   790^  but 

Sb4-3.  Sbj-3.  (§11,  7.) 

3.  The  Cholem  is  shortened  before  Makkef  :  as 

4.  The  Infinitive  has  a  form   with   Patach   of  but    rare 
occurrence:  as    22$  to    lie   down,   ^§^'  to  be  humiliated. 
Sometimes  it  is  lengthened  by  Jl—  :  as  rQ"lp7  to  approach. 

5.  The  second  form  of  the  Infinitive  is  the  Inf.  absolute 
*  with  immutable  Cholem.     It  is  used   before  or  after 

finite  verbs  to  indicate  continued  action,  energy,  intensity: 
1J?Tl  TjlSn  O^Jl  they  went,  going  on  and  lowing, 
ye  shall  diligently  keep. 

6.  Syntactical  rules  §  §  105,  106. 

EXERCISE  42. 

2vin 


njn  13ntop  12nj;  :u 
18 


52  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


shear^  ho!  wo2!  mix3  strong  drink4  to  think  of5  sabbath6  to  taste7  with 
the  end  otB  rod9  a  little10  honey11  time12  to  lament13  to  leap14  to  fall15  sons 
of16  ah!  alas17!  Lord18  to  reject19  to  break  assunder20  a  hungry  one21  thy 
bread2'2  to  go  down23  garden24  to  gather25  lilies26  the  days  ot"27  to  judge28 
judges29  he  that  shaketh3<>  hand31  to  hold32  D  here  includes  negation  §  106.  2. 
bribe33  good  cheer,  delight34  much  less35  slave,  servant36  to  rule37- 

EXERCISE  43. 

God  made1  the  sun2  and  the  moon3  to  rule^  over5  the 
day  and  over  the  night,  I  hired6  a  reaper  f  to  reaps  the 
wheats  and  a  builder10  to  repair*1  the  house.  They  have 
slaughtered12  an  ox  to  sell  its  meat1  3.  He  gave  me  rai 
ment14  to  put  on15-  I  have  rejected1*  thee  that  thou 
shouldst  not  reign1''  (from  reigning)  (§  106,  2.)  over]8  them. 
The  Lord  said^  that  He  would  dwells  (tr.  to  dwell)  in  the 
thick2i  cloud21-  The  man  went  out22  to  lie23  on24  his 
couch25- 


ionj3    9  n^n    8«m>    712fl'p    6-o#   53    4#D    3  FIT    2 

v  T  •  -IT         -I  -T  -  -T        -  -T          :•:• 

(with  plur.  sufl.)  18  S^    17^D     iCDNH     IS^aS     U1J3     1311^3 

'-T  -T  -T  VV  T    : 

C2533^a    243    23^3^    22  «r    21^31^     20  \y& 
T  :  •  -  T  T  T  v  T  -:          I  -  T 

§  31.     THE  FUTURE. 

1.  The    future    is  formed    from    the    second  groundform 
7bp  by  prefixing  the   preformatives  fjTN»  which  are  origi 
nally  vowelless,  and  receive  the  helping  vowel  Chirek.    K 
receives  Seghol.     (§  14.  Rising  I.  a.) 

2.  The  preformatives  jrVN  indicate  the  personal  relation, 
while   the   afformatives   determine   the  relations  of  Gender 
and  Number.        /•  //  •      , 

ft^i^aut^  StAsUwfjLJ 

3.  The  preformatives  and  the  anormatives  of  the  future  are  : 
Person:         1.  2.  3. 

m.  H  m.  ^ 

bmg.     com.     ft  f         ,_^  f.  n 


m.       1— n  m.       1— 

rilir-  eow-    3        f.    rum  r.  ra-n 


§  31.     THE  FUTURE.  53 

4.  The  Cholera  in  the  second  syllable  generally  is  only 
to  be  found  in  the  transitive  verbs  (middle  A),  whilst  the 
verbs    middle  E^~and  0   regularly    have    Patach  :    as    TJ^* 
from  7"!  3  to    be    or    become    great,   "135!  fr°m  "Q?   to-  be 
honored,      JDp*  from  fjop  to  be  little,  small.     Before  Mak- 
kef,  Cholem  is  changed  into  Kamets-Chatuph  :  as  D^'Dftp'l 
and  he  wrote  there. 

5.  The  vowel  of  the  last  syllable  which  drops  before  the 
afformatives  commencing  with  a  vowel  (§  14,  Rejection  3.)7 
is  regularly   restored    in    pause.     The    restored    vowel    re 
quires  the  tone  and  lengthens  its  restored  A  vowel  (Patach) 
into  Karnets:  ftff'^QpA  but  >Sbpfi>  *MfoV  but  WW  they 

•    :    I  :   •  '    A  I  •'    '  :   :  '  i"»T  • 

will  be  great. 

6.  The  forms  ending  in  1  or  >—  have  occasionally,  especially 
at  the  end  of  a  period,  a  paragogic  f  .  (§  12.  6.  C.)     In  this 
last  case  the  vowel  of  the   second  syllable  is  restored  :    as 

'p3"]fi>  but  ppsnn,  ir;ry>  but  pm\ 

7.  The  form  H^bfl  often    appears    without    the  H  5  as 


8.  Syntactical  rules,  see  §  101. 

EXERCISE  44. 


nin 


37 


54  PART  1.     EXERCISES 

i  40Drn 


withouti  tattler2  to  cease3  strife4  to  counts  how  long6  injustice7 
to  lie  down,  to  sleeps  in  vain9  to  wake,  to  watchio  the  keeper,  watch- 
manii  to  rule12  to  be  Justus  manH  with15  rich16  poor17  to  cleave18  to  steal1^ 
not2o  to  rob2i  poor22  he  that  soweth23  to  reap24  vanity25  the  diligent  26 
upright27  to  dwell28  young  men29  to  keep  fast30  commandments31  to  be  joy 
ful32  daughter33  Edom34  unrighteous,  a  sinner35  to  decay  or  perish 
quicklyss  to  spread  out,  to  extend3?  folly38  cold39  warmth,  heat*o  autumn, 
harvest,  frequently  including  (as  here)  the  winter41  to  cease42- 

EXERCISE  45. 

In  that  day  shall  be  greati  the  mourning2  in  Jerusalem-^- 
The  Lord  shall  judgp4  the  world5  in  righteousness^.  In  those 
days'*  I  will  pour  out8  rny  spirits  upon1(>  all  flesh11-  Do  ye 
thus12  requite13  the  Lord14?  The  work  shall  be  heavy  is 
upon16  the  men.  Of  thee17  she  will  require^  the  blood1** 
of  her  brother2Q,  fbi-2i  thou  hast  killed22  him.  I  shall  make23 
a  covenant  with.24  you,  for  you  are  my  people2  5,  that  I  have 
chosen26- 
why  ann  8ip#  TW  epiy  5  San  4Batf  sD^Sic-'n"  21300  iSn-i 

i  -  T  •  T         I    vv  ~  T  -  -  T       :  ••  :  •  -T 

16  Sir       15133        fern.   14ni3y        seldom  as  here  with    S   13SDJ      12nNT      1111^3 
••T  T   <•:  -T  TT 

23H13    22SDD    21  '3    CHK  with  suff.)  20  HX     !9D1      18^11       trasl.   at  thy  hand  17 

-T  ~|T  •  T  T  -  -  T 

.261H3     ("3y  with  suff.)    25  Qy      24(*p«)  ,n« 

§  32.  THE  LENGTHENED  FUTURE  OR  OPTATIVE. 

I.  The  first  persons  in  Sing,  and  Plur.  of  all  the  active 
future  tenses  are  frequently  lengthened  by  the  syllable 
H—  »  seldom  H—  >  which  has  the  tone  and  affects  the  final 
vowel  of  the  future,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  aiformatives 
1  and  >:  as 


2.  The  lengthened  form  has  the  signification  of  the 
optative  and  expresses  self  excitation,  purpose,  direction  of 
the  will:  as  nnptW  let  us  be  joyful!  - 


0   NOTE.     In  a  few    instances  it  is    found    attached  to  other   per- 
Kns:    Is.  5,  19.    Ez.  23,  20,  Ps.  20,  4.     (with  JT~  )  . 


§  32.     THE  LENGTHENED  FLTURE  OR  OPTATIVE.  55 

EXERCISE  46. 


:niir  rpn 


to  learn1  to  bury2  a  dead  person3  thither4  to  seek5  come  near,  approach6 
hither7  to  gathpr8  heads,  chiefs9  here10  prophet11  further,  besides12  to  ask. 
inquire13  mouth14  a  muzzle15  therefore16  to  wail17  come18  to  bend  the 
kneel* 

EXERCISE  47. 

Let  us  keep  the  testimony1  of  thy  mouths.  I  may  keep 
thy  precepts3-  Let  us  make  a  covenant,  I  and  tliou.  I 
will  pursue4  after^  David6-  I  will  forget7-  my  complaints. 
Let  us  sends  a  letter™  unto  the  king  of  Israel.  I  will 
remember11  these  things12  and  I  will  pour  out  my  soul1^ 
in  me14-  I  will  make15  with1**  you  an  everlasting  cove 
nant1?.  Atis  thy  hand  I  will  require^  the  flock2o  of  my 
father. 

6-in    5^n«    4ti-n    son-ips  (with  sum  ^  >    2na 


(with  pi.  suff.)  n^  is  -Bra:  12n«  HIDT  ioiap 

:  20  jNJf    19  ^nrr     (prefix)  18  jp    17  oSlj? 

§  33.     VAV  CONVERSIVE. 

1.  The    preterite  when  connected  by  1  with  a  preceding 
verb  in  the  future  or  imperative  is  made   dependant   upon 
this  verb,  and  its  time  is  thereby  seemingly  changed  —  it 
receiving  a  future  meaning. 

Vice  versa  the  future  when  connected  by  *)  with  a  past 
tense  either  expressed  or  understood,  receives  the  significa 
tion  of  the  preterite.  See  §  102,  1.  2.  3.  4. 

2.  This1)  is    called    Vav    Conversive  CMQflfl  YJ).     Pre 
fixed  to  the  preterite  it  is  the  simple  ^%or  }  conjunctive:   as 
ION  he  said,  *Ott  and  he  will    say,'S#£)  he  made,   ^J/^n 
and  he    will    make.      Prefixed    to    the    ftit.   it  has  Patach 


56  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

and  following  Dagesh,  before  N  Karnets  (§  14,  II.  2.); 
as  -iOlf*  be  will  keep,  *JD^1  and  lie  kept,  ^£?>X1  and 
I  kept.' 

3.  The  prct.  with  Vav  eonv.  removes  the  accent  in  the 
first  and  second  person   sing,  to  the   ultimate  syllable:  as 


4.  The    fut.  with    vav  conv.  suffers    the    removal  of  its 
accent   from    the    ultima    to  the  penult,    and  consequently 
the  last  long  vowel  is    changed   into   a   short  '  one.      This 
rule,    howrever,    can    never    be    applied  to  the  fut.  Kal  of 
the   regular    verbs,    because    the   penult    here  is  always  a 
closed  syllable,  §  9,  12,  r.     General  exception  to  this  rule  : 
When  the   third  radical  is  N,  or  the   accent  is  a  principal 
distinctive. 

5.  Syntactical  rules,  §  102. 

EXERCISE  48. 


N  nan) 

IT      ' 


nin 


inter),  denoting-  respectful  entreaty2   and  see3  from  US'1    n.  p.  m.5 
the  bearer  ul'6   arms7  to  put  forth''    the  end  uft   to  dip10  (honey)  twig,  honey- 


§  33.     VAV  COXVEIISIVE.  57 

coinl)n  because12  judgments13  to  cutli>  rr"i3  rH3  to  make  a  covenant  (from 
the  ancient  custom  of  cutting  up  victims  on  such  occasions.)  justice,  right 
eousness'5  to  pursue16  to  inherit17  to  drawl8  n.  p.  m.19  coat90  blood21  eyes-2 
after23  to  blow24  n.  p.  m.25  trumpet2^  to  wrap  around,  to  muffleS?  face-'8 
to  cry,  to  lament29  great,  Ioud3»  n.  p.  m.31  3  into,  upon  ;  n.  p.  m.32  to  fall33 
shall  be34  strength,  support35  capture,  noose3^  to  be  in  dread37  to  be  sweet38 
thy  sleep-"9-  *  §  96,  3.  2. 

EXERCISES  48. 

And1  God  remembered  his  covenant  with2  Abraham. 
And1  Abraham  weighed3  to  Ephron4  the  silver^-  And  I 
hewed<>  two7  tables8  of  stone9,  and  he  wrote1**  on11  the 
tables  the13  ten12  commandments13-  And*  a  mighty^  king 
shall  stand  up*-*  and  he  shall  rule  (with)  great^  domin 
ion17-  Arid1  Moses18  wrote  this  law.  And1  Eachel  stole 
the  images19  that  (belonged)  to  her  father.  Hear2<>,  0  Is 
rael,  the  Lord,  our  God21,  the  Lord  is  one22-  And1  thou 
shalt  Iove23  the  Lord  thy  God.  If2*  God  will  be25  with 
me2<>,  and1  will  keep27  me  in  this  way28,  and1  will 
give29  me  bread^o,  then31  will  I  serve32  him  forever33- 
God  shall  send34  his  angel35  before36  thee,  and  thou  shalt 
take37  a  wife38  to  my  son39  from  thence4**- 

inS    1~*y&    6SD3    5r]p3    4p"l?£'    3l?pt?     2r\X    1  Connect  ,,and"  with  the  verb ! 
13J,     connect  the  article!  :  13 D'HS'l     12rnjpj»     H  hy    103fi3      (stone's)    9  Q'JJK 
cf.  §.  90,  2-   ITV^DD     163*^     14  stand   up    l«3j»,   after  the  noun !  cf.  §.  90,  2. 
6H?3y     25n^ns     24  DN      232HN     221HX      21  D'riSx     20]!VV     19  D'£J^n 

35-TxSD     [fut.  A.]  34  nW    33DSl>(?    32n3j»     (vav  Conv.)  311    30DHS    29  mj    28  TH 
IT  :  -  -  T  T  f   :  -  T  v  v          I  -  T  I  v  V 

;40Dt^    [with  suff.  "J3  etc.]  39  |3    38DKWI    37HpS    [with  plur.  suff.  ^3*7  etc.]    36  'JfjS 

§  34.     THE  IMPERATIVE. 

1.  The  imperative  belongs  to  the  second  groundform:  the 
infin.  const.,  and  in  most  instances  is  identical  with  it  in 
form;  as  7Dp  Inf.  const,  and  7tOp  Imp. 

2.  The  verbs  with  A  in  the  fut.  retain  the  same  in  the 
imp.:    as    fut.   2?^  he,  will  lie   down,   ^V  he    will   be 
clothed,  Imp.  M^',  CoS. 

3.  The  Cliirck  in  the  f.  sing,  and  ni.  plur.  is  called  by 


58  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

the  ancient  grammarians  H/p  nj^Jl  light  vowel,  its  sound, 
originated  from  Sh'va,  being  so  lightly  passed  over,  that  it 
cannot  form  a  closed  syllable  with  the  following  Sh'va, 
hence  ^T")?  read:  ri-d'fu  and  not  rid-fu,  ^O^VJ?  (§  11,  7.)- 

4.    To  the   imp.    is  annexed    very    often   the    paragogic 
j"T—  *  expressive    of   wisli    and    entreaty,    emphasis.      With 

paragogic  p—  the  form  7CDD  becomes  Jl/Cpp  »  the  form  ADD 
becomes  rh'-  as 


5.  Before  Makkef  the  Cholem  is  changed  into  Kamets- 
Chatuph:  as  fcO'CH^  enquire,  I  pray  thee.  pT^'tO^^ 
judge  righteously. 

6-    In    pause    the  dropped   vowels  0  or  A  in  the  forms 
p  return  :    as  VOtD^'  n£N  BStP'p  execute    true 
judgment. 

7.  After  the  imp.  and  fut.  if  the    latter  be  lengthened 
(op  tat.),  JO  is  often  put,    as  a  particle    of  incitement    and 
entreaty:  I  pray  thee!  (the  German  :  bod)!  the  Latin:  duni 
with  the  imp.  or  quaeso,  age.):  as  ^"V  fcOTl1?^  put  forth 
thy  hand.     n^TTl'l^  I  will  go  down. 

8.  Syntactical  rules.  §  104, 

EXERCISE  50. 

npn  :3Dinn  hi  itoptr  :2f??n 
:6oSi^  nw  nnp^'  pnyxf?  nin? 


^rrniV  ^nnnp  32n3i?  nppn  ij; 


§  34.     THE  IMPERATIVE.  59 


H  :nrr"#  ^1 

morsel,  sc.  of  bread1  vinegar2  orphan3  mercy4  for  good5  tor  ever6  great7 
terrible8  stones9  keep10  tonguu11  evil12  to  write13  song14  to  hear15  the 
word  of16  women17  the  commandment  of18  mother19  to  hew20  tree21  to  cast22 
against23  a  mound,  rampart24  to  be  strong25  to  be  courageous26  boy,  youth27 
to  mark28  the  perfect  (man)29  behold30  the  end31  to  pass  over32  quickly, 
hastily33  to  advise,  with  7#  against  one31  n.  p.  in.35  then  cried36  wise37-(t.) 

EXERCISE  51. 

Flee1  (pi.  m.)  from  this  place.  Write  (pi.  f.)  a  letter 
to  the  king.  Keep  (sing,  f.)  the  word  of2  the  Lord.  Seek3 
(pi.  m.)  the  Lord.  Seek  (sing.  f.).  Seek  (pi.  f.).  Seize4 
(pi.  m.)  the  prophets  of  5  BaaK  Shut*  (pi.  f.)  the  doors. 
Keep  (paragog.)  this  (f.)  forever^-  Preserve1*)  (paragog.) 
my  soul11,  for  pious12  I  (arn).  Remember  (parag.)  this 
(f.)  my  God!  Stretch^  outis  thy  hand  towards*  Him. 
Send  (parag.  fut.  A.)  me,  I  pray  tliee,  oneU  of  the  young 
men15-  Offer16  unto  God  thanksgiving17-  Sacrifice18 
(pi.  m.)  to  your  God  in  the  land  !  Trusts  in2o  the  Lord 
with21  all  thine  heart22.  Remember  (following  Makkef  !) 
I  pray  thee,  the  word23  of  thy  father. 


ffut.    A.]     16H3?     15Q"1]?J     l-nn,S%  *vvith  pi.    suif.     . 

-T                  •  T.                TV                                          v  -T 

[with  suff.  ^S]  22-aS  213  so1?^  [fut.  A.]  i9na3 

•  - 


§  35.     THE  PARTICIPLE. 

1.  The  participles  are  formed  from  the  first  ground-form 
(the  preterite).    Kal  has  two  participles,  one  active  and  one 
passive.      In  the    act.,    the  first   radical  takes  1  or  —  ,  the 
second  —  ;  in  the  pass.,    the  pretonic   Kamets   remains   (in 
sing,  masc.),  and  }  (or  sometimes,    in   order  to    form  pass. 
substantives  *  —  §  56,  3.)    is  inserted   between  the  two  last 
radicals:  ^ItDD  killed  ;  *)1DX  fettered,  TD$<  a  prisoner. 

2.  The  participle  involves  in  its  signification  the  person 
or  thing  to  which  the  action  is  attributed  :  as  ""IQ^  keeping, 
properly  one  that  keeps,  or  a  keeper,  DHtf  a  loving  person, 


60  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


friend,  D^ltf  a  beloved  person.  The  participle  thus  having 
the  character  of  a  noun  is  treated  as  such  :  receiving  the 
article :  as  3riNn »  and  possessing  the  same  terminations  of 
gender  and  number.  (§  57,  §  58). 

3.  The  part,  preceded  by  the  personal  pronoun  expresses 

present  time:  as  TPJl  *?3K  I  go. 

4.  7Dp  (or  ^CDlp)  is  the  regular  participle  of  the  verbs 
middle  A,  like  ^Dp5  the  participles  of  the  verbs  middle  E 
and  0  are  identical  in  form   with   the  pret.:  as  jpf  (to  be 
or  grow  old)  pret.,   jpj  part.   ""0*  (to  fear)  pret.,,  *"ljp  or  *YiJ* 
part. 

5.  Sometimes  poetically,  the  old  union-syllable  '—  is  ap 
pended   to   the   st.  const,  m.  and  f.  of  the   part.    act.  :  as 

}$  the  inhabitant  of  the  thorn-bush.  5.  Mos.  33,  16. 
who  changes  the  rock;  Ps.  114,  8.  *5&?"  PS- 
123,  1.  'nt?K  1.  Mos.  49,  11.  'fqrtK  Hos.  10,  11.  Some 
times  the  *  is  not  read:  as  ^fOtyVfODtP'  ^erj  22,  23.  51,  13. 

6.  The  inflection  of  the  participles  active  and  passive  are: 
Part.  act.  Part.  pass. 

S.  P.  S.  P. 

m.       7tOln       m.  DvLDlD  m.     TlDD       m.  i 


nStoip 
f.      r          f.  mSoip  f.  n^iDp     f. 


7.  Syntactical  rules.  §  107. 

EXERCISE  52. 

-as*  on  Dnrtr  ::DHV  ^HN  nin    :Sb  Ste  D'r 

nin  t 


ip  Jl8nw'p  t^\ 
^     :own  M 


§  35.     THE  PARTICIPLE.  f>l 

rnrv  29rpio  :28ni?S  27rr!??y  nirr  26np_-iv 
ion  31D<pS' 


iiT  :jnp  ^   nn  -wpy  :f]p3  ^yzty-si  tjp?  DDK  :T|in 
:rnpy 


to  love1  as2  their  fathers3  between4  tear5  joy6  to  totter?  to  help8  book9 
there  is,  are10  riches1!  evil,  harm12  his  father13  his  mother14  (it  is)  not1^ 
transgression16  companion17  destruction,  corruption18  sound19  words20  de 
sire21  to  be  sweet22  to  lie  down23  under24  thy  burden25  righteousness  o$6 
to  stand,  endure27  for  ever28  to  uphold29  men30  peaceable31  to  have  abund 
ance  oft2  faint33- 

EXERCISE  53. 

The  Lord  raiseth  upi  (those  that  are)  bowed  down2. 
Threes  kings4  are  standing  up5-  Wherefore^  do  ye  trans 
gress?  the  commandments  of  the  Lord?  The  wealth  of9 
the  sinner10  is  laid  up11  for  the  just.  The  iniquity  of12 
Ephraim1^  is  hound  up14,  his  sin15  is  hidie.  She  dwells*? 
in  the  midstis  of  my  people.  Ye  (fern,)  go19  the  way20  of 
all  the  earth.  The  beasts2!  of  the  field  flee2!  from22  the 
lion2-"*-  The  door24  is  opened  2^.  Wherefore  liest  thou26 
upon2?  thy  face28?  The  ant29  gatherethso  her  foods  1  in 
the  harvest32.  The  fool  foldethss  his  hands^4  togetherss. 
••a  st.  const,  a  na  713^  6rn-rij3S  snoy  4D'pSp  3n^S^  2^33  i^ 
-p;i.  st-  const-  12p^  n|3y  lOKBin  ,Vn  st.  const.  eVn 
20^1  wa^Sn  is^ifria  ivnur  lerav  (fem.) 

P«  V  '-   T  I-  T  I-T 

[fem.]29nSnj     28  rrj3      27  S^     26  Ssj       25HH3       (fern.)  24;^      23  n«      22 
T  T  :  I  VT  -  -T  -  T  v  v  •-: 


§  36.     NIPIIAL. 

1.  The  two  principal  forms  again  pointed  out  in  the 
paradigm  by  larger  type,  are  the  preterite  7^(7^  and 
the  inf.  const.  SppJl  »  To  the  first  corresponds  the 
participle  7pp}»  with  the  exception  of  having  like  all  the 
other  participles  of  the  passive  conjugations  Kamets  under 


62  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

the  second  radical.   The  rest  of  the    forms  coincide  with  the 
»  » 

second  principal  form  A?pn>  for  yLDp^n , 

2.  From    the  original   StDj^jT    (§  31,  1.)    arises  Sftp^ 
(§  12.  6,  B.  3.),  from  this,  StDjT  (§12,  4),  the  future  NiphaL 
The  first  person  of  the  fut.  is  sometimes  found  with  Chi- 
rek  under  tf:  as  Dgt^N  I  shall   judge.      The    optative    al 
ways  has  Chirek:  as  Hp/ftN  I  will  escape.' 

3.  The  3  pers.  fern,  of  the   pret.    H  App}   is    in    pause 
PT7Cpp3  (§  14.  Rising  II),    identical   with   the   feminine  of 
the  participle  H 7tpp3  •    They,  are  distinguished  by  the  po 
sition  of  the  accent :    PHS^  W^  (Milra)  part. ,  H*D^  IjnH 
(Milel)  is  preterite.     (§  9,  12,  I.  Note.) 

4.  In  the  Infin.  after  %  and  7,  the  fl  occasionally   drops 
and   its  vowel  recedes   (§    12,    6.   B.    3.)  :    as   iS^'DD    for 

"bu?3ri$. 

5.  The  infin.,  imp.  and  fut.,  when  followed  by  a  mono 
syllabic  word,  throw  back  the  tone,    shortening    the  final 

Tsere    into    Seghol    (§  9,  12,  r.,  §  14,  Shortening  c.)  :  as 

>        j>  > 

PD  "O?!  ne  snaU  ^e   taken   by   her,  fiXf  ^HDII  this  shall 

be  written. 

6.  With  distinctive  accents  Patach  is  sometimes  put  for 
Tsere :  as  W&¥]  and   he  was  refreshed,  7DJH  and    he    was 
weaned. 

7.  The  second  and  third   persons  plur.  f.  regularly  have 
Patach,  but  once  with  Tsere :  (1151^)  Ruth  1,  13. 

8.  The  imper.  of  Nif.  is  reflexive  or  reciprocal  in  mean 
ing,  for  no  passive  verb  would  allow  an  imperative. 

9.  The  participle  passive  of  Kal  and  the  part.  Nif.  thus 
differ    in    meaning:    the  part.  Nif.  representing    the  noun 
to  which  it  belongs    as  being    acted  upon  in  present  lime, 
whilst  the  part.  pass,  of  Kal    does  not    take  the  time  into 
consideration:  as  fifing  A/HD  the  door  opened  now,  H 7*111 
nPTin?  the    door    opened,  *O^n  n^pn   the   cane    broken 
now,  "i*O£*n  rOpil  the  broken  cane. 


§  36.     NIPIIAL.  63 


10.  The  Inflection  of  the  participle  is: 
S,     m.      Stpp4  'P.     m. 

f.   n:  (nbt)  f. 


EXERCISE  54. 


S 


27 


•nt?  34?in?^n-33f3  D^  rup^'n  j^jx  no   f5PP 

34  :D3sj?  nns  n^  DpTiSjf  nin^  nn? 


39 

HIPP  ; 


wicked1  mischief2  darkness3  at  what4  stumble5  (the  Tsere  in  Pause!  §  14 
Rising  II.)  poor6  to  meet  each  other7  to  deliver8  to  break9  wickedness10  net11 
to  hide12  to  take,  catch1^  their  foot14  our  soul1^  bird16  snare17  fowlers™ 
arms19  neighbour,  friend20  to  separate21  to  shed22  Zion23  prosperity24  to  be 
grieved25  enemy26  adversity27  friend28  to  take  heed29  before30  to  long31 
courts32  that  not,  lest33  to  neglect,  forget34  to  be  delivered35  multitude36 
shadow  of  death37  to  hide  one's  sell38  there39  the  worker  of40  to  trust41 
youth42  to  be  delivered4'*  the  transgressor44  to  be  destroyed45  together46  the 
end,  future47- 

EXERCISE  55. 

The  soul1  of  Jonathan2  was  knits  with*  the  soul  of  Da 
vid.  And5  the  riumher^  of6  the  children7  of7  Israel  shall 
be  as8  the  sancl*>  of  the  sea,  which  will  not  be  numberecUo. 


64  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

Is  not11  the  whole12  land  before  thee13?  separate^  thy 
self,  I  pray  thee,  from  me1^-  And5  they  separated  them 
selves  the  one16  from  the  other  17.  Suddenly  is  Babylon™ 
is  fallen  and  destroyed2o.  Were  ye  also  21  sold  for22 
slaves23?  Thus2*  saith  the  Lord  :  Behold2^  I2*  will  give2** 
this  city  into  the  hand  of27  the  king  of  Babylon,  and 
thou  shalt  not  escape28  out  of  his  hand29  but3<>  shalt 
be  caught3  1  and  given  into  his  hand.  We  are  sold,  ye 
(fern.)  are  sold,  thou  (fern.)  art  sold,  ye  will  be  deliv 
ered32-  And  in  all33  things33  that  I  have  said  to  you,  be 
circumspect34- 

5  connect  ..and"  with  the  verb  :    and  shall  be  7TH1      43     31#D     2»rU1'JT      f. 

T  T  : 

15'Sj?D    14T13    13TJ3S    12  -S3     H  H'Sil    10*120 
T"*r"  -T  '  VT  :  T  -:  -T 

24713     23DH3J?     22S    21D:    20n3tf    (fem.)19S33 
•T-:  -  T  VT 

Ni  31  W£)n        30  '3      29JT3      Ki.  28  aS?3       27  T3      26  Part.  act.        25  behold  I 

-T  •  %          T-  -T  -: 

.  Ni.  34  tour    33  S*3       Ni. 


§  37.    PIEL  AND  PUAL. 


TT 


1.  The    first    principal   form  is      Dp>  the  second 
With  the  second  are  allied:  the  imp.  *?Dp>  the  fut. 

the  part.  7i?TO  •    In    Pual    the    two    principal    forms    are 
identical. 

2.  Under  the   second   radical    the   pret.  Piel   has  Tsere, 
which    changes    in    the    inflection    into    Patach  ;    as  ^t3p> 
ll^Dp  >  ^ri^Dp  .     Occasionally    even    the    principal  form  is 
found  with  Patach  :  as  ""GBH  13^  he  destroyed  and  broke 
in  pieces,  especially   before   Makkef  :  flJTr*!^  he   teaches 
wisdom.      Seghol    in    the   following    three   verbs  :   "D*!  *° 
speak,  D35  to  wash,  *\§3  to  atone. 

3.  As  the  first  radical  in  Piel  arid  Pual  must  be  vocal 
ized   for    the    following    Dag.,    the    preformatives  off  these 
conjugations    can    retain    their    original    Sh'va  :    as  bD*> 


4.  The  participle  in  these  and  all  the  other  conjugations 
(except  Kal  arid  Nif.)  has  a  prefixed  £  , 


§    37.      PlEL    AND    PUAL.  65 

5.  The  inflection  of  the   participles   in  Piel  and  Pual  is 
as  follows  : 

Part.  Piel  Port.  Pual. 

S.  P.  8.  P. 

m.    Sttpp       m.  D'SippP       m.    ^D{?5       m.  D'SttpP 

f.  n^pp     f.  niStppp    f.  n^pp     f.  niStppp 

NOTE  I.  Without  £  the  participle  seldom  occurs  :  as  *Jtf  tQ^ 
I  praise,  EC.  4,  2.  HpS  taken,  2  Ki.  2,  10. 

NOTE  II.  The  feminine  in  Piel  is  usually  fi—  ,  the  ending 
p|  —  indicating  a  nominal  signification  :  as  HlDtrDp  a  sorceress, 
witclu  In  Pual  the  fern,  in  ,*J—  is  rarely  found:  npfc''j?P  Is-  23>  12> 


6.  In  those  forms  of  Piel  and  Pual,  which  have  ShVa 
under  the  second  radical,  the  characteristic  Dag.  is  often 
dropped  :  as  UnSt^  for  HH1?^  s^ie  dismissed. 

T.  The  part.  Pual  like  that  of  Nif.  is  distinguished  by 
Kamets  in  the  last  syllable  :  as  7DpP  • 

8.  The  infin.,  imp.  and  fut.,  when  followed  by  Makkef, 
or  a  word  having  the  tone  on  the  penult,    generally  take 
Seghol  in  the  final  syllable:  as  ^"CHp  sanctify  unto  me; 
he  seeks  him. 

EXERCISE  5G. 


-  19 


n-jin  : 
nnn 


rrirv  :29v:n£  i%y.  vaN  ima  :njn  nnronnn 

T:  T  T    '  "•:  "    T  ••-;  TT  T 

9 


• 
66  PAKT  1.     EXERCISES. 


33 


prn  itfp 


nxo  53S:  rrtormx  0 


Babylon1  to  destroy'-  to  reward'*  7^1  any  act  done,  g-ood  or  eviJJ  to  do, 
show  good  or  evil  to  an}'  one^  entreatiesG  to  speak?  '^  "^"]  to  speak  entreat- 
ing-ly,  glorious  things^  to  honorfl  wealth,  plentylO  interj.  of  entreaty,  I  prayll 
hopel^  to  defer!3  sicknessll  the  heartlS  sinnerstG  to  pnrsuel?  wickednessl^ 
to  seelil9  a  scornerSU  j'N  not21  (including  the  verb  to  be,)  to  make  great'^2  to 
give  strength23  to  regard^  reproof^  rneekness'^6  priest^?  to  wash  28  D'J|  sons, 
children'^  to  raise^O  poor,  indigent^l  afflictions^  a  vision33  counse!34  an- 
cients35  ship3G  to  be  about37  to  be  mercifu!38  (const,  with  ace.,)  the  Most 
High39  toil,  trouble^  to  bear,  bring  forth41  to  praise-12  a  report^  to  make 
fat44  bone,  body45  to  blind46  seeing,  having  the  eyes  open47  to  pervert48 
the  words  of40  his  wifeSO  one  of^l  foolish  women52  to  receivers  to  ibnTive'r>4 

O 

sin«r>5  to  sing  hymns,  praisesi>6- 

EXERCISE    57. 

Haman1  stood  up  to  make  request2  for3  his  life-*-  BL*- 
liolds,  the  righteous^  shall  hp  recompensed^  on  the  earth. 
The  Lord  rewards?  the  man  of  violence8-  I  taught9  ye 
(the)  lawio-  Miriam11  sung12  praises12  to  the  Lord,  with13 
the  harp14-  I  have  preached1^  righteousness  in  a  great17 
congregation16-  Did  ye  hope18  in19  the  Lord?  Why20 
have  ye  (f.)  not  met21  the  traveller22^  with  bread  and  wa 
ter?  I  shall  not  lie23;  thou  (f.)  wilt  not  lie,  ye  will  not 
lie,  they  (f.)  will  not  lie.  Do  (pi.  fern.)  not  profane24  the 
name25  of  our  God.  This  (is)  the  law,  (which)  the  Lord 
commanded26  to  teach  you.  Thou  (f.)  art  gathering2?  ears. 
Five28  cities29  in  the  land  of  Egypt3®  are  speaking31  the 
tongue  of32  Canaan33-  The  poor34  (women)  are  seeking35 


§  38.     HIPHIL  AXD  HOPIIAL.  07 

bread.     The  ears  are  gathered   by  the   poor.  The  tongue 
(f.)  of  Canaan  is  spoken  in  Egypt. 

Pi-  91oS    SDDn     [Pi.  ,-un.]7DW     6p"?¥     5|H    4i#33    3^  P«-2tfp|    1  JDH 

17  an    in.  leSnp     PI.  is  1^3    14-11:3     is  a     PI.  12  nor  HD*IO     lomto 

T|T                          -T                                                                  -T  T:  •                     T 

25  Q#      Pi.  24V?n      Pi.  23*™     22  mfc      Pi.  21  Dip      20;«HD  19^       Pi.  18  13  jp 

-  T                         I  -T                                                 -|T  V                          -  T 

Pi.  31  131    30D'12fO     [f.]  29D'1 


§  38.     HIPHIL  AND  HOPHAL. 

1.  The  first  principal  form  is  THpbfT*  the  second 

From  the  second  are  drawn  all  the  other  forms  :  imp. 
f?Cp»Ji  to.  S^^  part.  S^pD?  for  S^H^  S^HD 
(§  12.  6.  B.  3.).  In  Hophal,  even  tlie  two  principal  forms 
are  the  same. 

2.  Besides    the    lengthened  fut.    (§  32)  a  shortened,    or 
apocopated  future  exists,    which  in  the  regular  verb  is  re 
cognized  only  in  Hiphil  by  a  shortened  form  in  Tsere  :  as 
TLOplfut.,  7ippl  apocopated  fut. 

3.  The  aposop.  fut.  is  especially  found  : 

a.  In  expressions  of  command  and  wish,  more  usually  in 
prohibitions  with  ^X  :  as  fTO*  he  may  cut  off,  Ps.  12,  4. 

,NVin  let  lier  brins  fortllj  !•  Mos-  1»  24-    ^PP"^8 

hide  not,  Ps.   27,  9.    nntriT^N  destroy  not,  Ps.  57,  1. 
Hence  called:  Jussive. 

I.  After  Yav.  Conv.  excepting  in  the  first  person,  which 
generally  retains  >—  :  as  ^Dp^_>  but  TO^W  and  I  de 
stroyed,  Am.  2,  9.  T]^'>O  and  I  cast,'  Zee.  11,  13. 
Tj^ONJand  I  made  kingj  iJSam.  12,  1. 

4.  Before  Makkef  the  Tsere  of  the  imp.  and  apoc.  fut. 
\  becomes  Seghol:  as  N^"f5?n  become  familiar!  Job  22,  21, 

13"ptD'll  an(^  ne  laid  hold  upon  him. 

5.  The  tone  in  Hi.  differs   from    that  of  the   other  con 
jugations.    in  not  resting    upon  the  afForm.  J"T  —  •  *—  and  ^ 


68  P.ART  I.     EXERCISES. 

as  nS'bpil,  ^bH,  'hvn.    With  Vav  Conv.,  however, 


they    receive   in   the   prefc.    the    tone:  as  n^HI  an^  she 
shall  divide,  Ex.  26,  33. 

6.  In  the  inf.  after  733  generally  no  contraction  takes 
place,  and  the  form  remains  Vcppil^);  occasionally,  how 
ever,  the  H  drops  and  its  vowel  recedes  :  as  "Vftlffo  to  de 
stroy,  Is.  23,  11.  rV?0  to  put  an  end  to,  Am.  8,  4. 
to  cause  to  languish,  1.  Sam.  2,  33. 


t  7.   In  Hophal  there  is  a  second  form  with  Kubbuts:  as 
Tl^v^n  ne  is  cast?  Da.  ^'  11-     I*1  the  part,   this  form  occurs 
more'  frequently,    than    the  reg.  one.    Itpj^p.,  Mai.   1,  11 
,  Ps.  22,  16. 


8.  The  inflection  of  the  participles  in  Hiphil  and  Hophal 


are  : 


Part.  Hiphil  Part.  Hophal. 

8.  P.  8.  P. 


m.  in.  m.       p?0     m. 

f.  n^tppo   f.  niS^pp?     f.  nSt?p£   f. 

EXKRCISE  58. 

:n-ira  oon  4'n  : 


20 


jr 

'       in 
31       30 


rrr) 


§    38.      HlPHIL   AND   HOPHAL.  f>9 

'         TVS  D^D     :nir  Dtr 

run 


holyl  profane2  to  divide,  to  show  differences  cause  to  stumble*  saido 
n.  p.  m.6  to  make  a  king7  to  slanderS  master,  §  82,  4.  b.9  to  castlO  a  piecell 
the  upper  millstonel2  upon!3  fundament,  foundations  of  14  to  sink  in,  to  fasten 
in!5  to  commitlG  perversenessl7  lipslS  to  put  far!9  slowness20  anger21  to 
give  rest,  to  stil!22  contention,  quarre!23  an  offering  to  God24  (especially  a 
bloodless  offering)  wholly,  entirely25  to  burn  sacrifices26  Solomon27  his 
son28  to  be  wise,  pious29  to  shine^O  brightness^l  firmament32  to  humble33 
worm,  collect.  worms^4  al!35  (they  all,  §  98,  2.)  to  hearken3G  hight37  to 
lift  up,  exalt38  words39  to  be  far  ofBO  to  mention  with  praise,  i.  e.  to  praise4* 
over4?  wall43  lot,  fate44- 

EXERCISE  59. 

Do  not  cause1  a  strangers  to  dwell*  in3  thy  house4-  This 
woman  lay5  upon  her  son^  and  he  died?  and  she  took8  my 
living^  son  from  my  bosom10  and  laid11  her  dead12  son 
beside  me13  while14  I  slept15-  And  they  stript1^  Joseph1? 
of  his  coat18  and  they  cast1^  him  into20  the  pit2i. 
The  wife22  of  Potiphar23  slandered24  Joseph.  Ye  shall 
not  deliver25  the  servant2^  to27  his  master  28  who  is  es- 
caped2^  from30  his  master  unto  ye.  My  sons31  strip  0ff32 
your  garments33,  my  daughters^  clothe35  the  naked3^. 
This  woman  is  clothing  the  poor.  Hide3?  (sing,  f.)  the 
child38-  Hide  (pi.  f.)  this  money.  This  girl3^  is  hiding 
her  brother.  Darius40  was  made  king4!  over  the  realm42 
of  the  Chaldeans43-  The  girls44  are  warned45-  If46  your 
father47  taught  you  wisdom48  and  knowledge49?  then50  a 
good  property51  was  given52  you  as  a  possession52- 
snprti  7r\D")  6^J3  533^  4njv3  3  Tiro  2*1?  m.  jussiv^ot:1?^,  HOB  ipi^ 

|_.-          TT-  T:  -  T          i  ;•  ••  :  r  -  I-T 

15  t^    141    13-S2fN    12  r\D    Hi  .1133^    10  pH    (with  the  Article  §  80,  2.  g  90,  2.)  9  'PI 
I  ••  T  •  :  v  ••  -  T          I  •• 


20SS  19,  6-       Hi    191ll^      18ir>JP3      17^or      Hi.  (with  two  ace.  §  85,  2.  b.) 
'-  T  :  T  -. 

28VJHN    27  Sx    26^3y      Hi.  Juss.  25  1JD      Hi.  24  mS     2313*013     22n#X 
T     -:  v  •.•*•       ^  -T  I~T 

Hi.  355T31?      34-ni'33      33DT1J3       Hi.  32^3       31  'J3      30  D>»O      fut.  Niph. 

-T  _      .  •.•-:•  -  T  -T  -T 

43Q^t73     42noSfl     Ho.  411lSrD    40  ^Vll    39  mV    38  iS"     Hi.  37  J3V    36  Q'D^l* 
•  :  -  :  -  I-T  YT  :  -  T  :  -  v  V  I-T 

HO.  5-aSnj  51  [fein.  ]  nSnj  50  ?x  49  mn  4snD3n  ^7D3'3x  40  DK  110.45  in* 

-  T  T   :  -  T  -  ~  T  :   T  •.••-:  ~  T 


7°  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

§  30.     HITHPAEL. 

1.  In  Hithpael  the  two  principal  forms  coincide. 

2.  The  rules   given   above  (§  12;  5.)  apply   to  Hithpael. 
In  Verbs  commencing  with  a  sibilant,  transposition  occurs : 
as  "V!pJlB>n,   for  "Mpg>JVT,     Before  tf,  the  fi  is  clianged  into 
ID-'  as  jTTCDyj'  for  p^Hj  (§  ibid.).. 

3.  Verbs    commencing    with  "1,   tO»   M>   sometimes    also 
with  3 ,  ^  and    the    sibilants,    assimilate    the  fi  of  Hithp, : 

as  n^rMbr  n»^n  (§  12,  4.). 

^4.  The  pret.  has  usually  Patach  in  the  final  syllable: 
as  ptnnn  to  show  one's  self  courageous,  2.  Ch,  13,  7, 
Patach  occurs  also  in  the  fut,  and  imp.,  especially  in 
pause,  and  in  the  future,  when  expressing  command  or- 
wish:  as  tiyr\fl  delight  thyself,  Ps.  37,  4;  S^p/in  sanc 
tify  thyself,  '  Jos.  3,  5.  D^nn'^X  hide  not  'thyself, 
Ps.  55,  2.  lDp>  ?p?rV  His  name  be  blessed  !  In  pause  the 
Patach  oftentimes  is  lengthened  into  Kamets:  "ITNnn  he 
girded  himself,  Ps.  93,  1.  ^NI^  he  mourns,  Ez!  7',  12. 

5.  When  the  accent  is  thrown  forward  by  Vav  Conv. 
(§  33,  3.),  the  Tsere  in  the  pret.  sometimes  is  sliortened 
in^>  Cliirek:  *mHpnn)  T^inm  I  will  .show  myself 
great  and  holy, '  Ez.' 28,  23.  DJI^j^fTyaiid  ye  shall 
show  yourself  holy,  Le.  11,  44. 

NOTE  I.  A  form  of  very  seldom  occurrence  is  Hutlipacl  (with 
Kameth-Chatuph  or  Kubbuts  under  the  preform.  n)>  the  sense 
of  which  is  purely  passive  ,  as  riMHn  they  were  mustered,  num 
bered,  Num.  1,  47.  D33J1  (arising  from  DSSJin)  to  be  puri 
fied,  Lev.  13,  55.  N£^?7  to  be  defiled,  Deut/i>4,  4.  iDH/1! 
to  be  made  fut,  Is.  34,  6. 

NOTE  II.  In  later  Hebrew  (Mishna  and  Talmund)  a  pret.  form 
Nithpael  is  very  frequently  used  in  a  purely  passive  sense :  as 
n^'wIXrO  she  became  a  widow,  TTVMin}  she  was  made  a  prose 
lyte,  n&*"UnJ  sae  was  divorced,  ^s5tV^^  ne  was  cured,  etc. 
In  Biblical  Hebrew  this  form  three  times  only  occurs:  ^35^1 
to  be  forgiven,  Deut.  21,  8.  IHplJI  to  be  instructed,  corrected, 
Ez.  23,  -is.  mfijr'j  to  be  alike/ Prov.  27,  15. 


§    o9.       IliTlIPAEL.  71 


6,  -Forms  followed  by  Makkef,  takeSeghol:  as  JQJtf)* 
the  snow  hides  itself,  Job,  6,   16 

7.  The  inflection  of  the  participle  is  : 

8.  m.  Stsprp  f.  n|?$p_jio  p.  in.  D'Stppjpo  f. 

EXERCISE  60. 


nn  SN  nr         rn  ^S  DK  :6S'3  7 

:10mS  9n" 


:n   j^. 
19 


. 

to  glory*  to  understand2  to  know3  to  feign  one's  self  rich4  not&  (including 
the  verb  ,,to  have")  anything6  part7  to  think  one's  self  wise8  thou  becomest9 
contempt10  to  justify  one's  self11  to  earn  wages12  bag13  to  bore,  pierce14  to 
obtain15  to  delight  one's  self16  surely,  truly17  to  hide  one's  self18  distress, 
adversity19  to  purify20  to  cleanse  one's  self21  works,  deeds22  to  be  recog 
nised23  to  decorate  one's  self24  cloak,  mantle25  strange26  to  show  one's  self 
honorable27  honor  of28  He,  falsehood2!)  to  grieve  one's  sell30  joy31  to  make 
great32  sorrow33  to  multiply34  folly35- 

EXERCISE  61. 

Behold  men  beat*  at2  the  door.  Amis  Jonathan  stripped3 
himself  of  the  robe4?  that  (was)  upon^  him,  and  gave  it6  to 
David.  Little8  children''  came  forth^  out  of  the  city  and 
mocked10  Elisha11-  David  is  hiding  himself12  in  the  des 
ert13-  Joseph  made  himself  strange14  unto  his  brethren15- 
Before  Thee16.  0  Lord  !  we  shall  not  be  justified1'''.  Wo 
men  disguising  themselves18  and  putting  on1^  other21  gar 
ments20-  Always22  we  shall  purify  ourselves23  and  walk24 
with25  the  Lord.  Do  not  hide  thyself^  from  thine  own'^ 
flesh2*-  Consider28  (pi  f.)  the  deeds'-^  of  the  wicked30  and 


f2  ,PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

turn  awaysi  from  them.      Do    not  feign    yourselves  ricli32 
if  in  truth  the  Lord  has  not  given33  you  wealth3*. 

('S^with  plur.  suff.)  5S#     4Vt#n     Hith.  (with  ace.)  3  D^3     21?;'     Part.  Hith. 

11  y&hx    Huh.  (with  foil.  3)  10  oSpT   9K2TT  d  90,  2)  s  D-sop    7on;*3 
20DHJ319  i^aS  Hith.  is  aran.  17  pTjf  le^paS  isrnx  14133    131210 

27?pfr3     Hith.  260^    25  n«     Hith.  24  ^H     23^^  22TDB      (§   90,    2-)  21 
:341fc;ty     33jrn     32-l&>J[?     Hith.  31  ppp     300^^1     29^»?3      S^  with  Hith. 


CHAPTER  VIL 

THE    GUTTURALS. 
§  40.    VERBS  PE  GUTTURAL. 
1  .  When  the  first  radical  is  one  of  the  gutturals 
in  all  the  forms  requiring  simple  Sh'va,  it  receives  Sh'va 
comp.  as  prnQJ7;  to  stand  (§5.). 

2.  When  standing  for  vocal  Sh'va,  it  is  generally  Cha- 
teph  Patach:    as  10JJ.  for  10;  1D_  from  the   Inf.  const. 


3.  The  helping  vowel  under  the  serviles  Tjl^  is  always 
that  of  the  Chateph:  as  1DJ2_(§  14,  Rising  I  B.). 

4.  If  the  Sh'va  be  silent,  the  vowel  added  to  it  must  be 
either  identical    or    homogeneous    with    the  preceding  :    as 
nOJ&for  ngjft  (Pret.    Niph.),    Seghol    and    Chirek  being 
homogeneous  '(§  3,  3.)  1£j;n,for  nJDJfll  (Pret.  Hof.],TDJ^, 
for  TOj;^- 

5.  In    forms    with    the    afformatives   T\—  >  1^  —  ,  before 

T 

which  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  drops,  the  comp. 
Sh'va  loses  its  Sh'va  points:  as  npJMrom  10J£;  HD^n. 
from  TOJjn;  n-fOJJJ.  from  13DJ?.i. 

6.  The    future   of  the  verbs  Fut.   0.  in  most   cases  has 
Chateph-Patach  :  as  *lDl?'_to  serve.     The  verbs  Fut.  A.  take 
Chateph-Seghol  :  as  ptfT  to  be  strong. 

NOTE.  Sometimes  verbs  with  Chateph-Seghol  take  Patach,  when 
the  form  is  augmented    by    afformatives:    as  "1DN*  to  bind,    with 

to  collect, 


§  40.     VERBS  PE  GUTTURAL.  73 

7.  Some  verbs  retain  simple   Sh'va  under  the    guttural. 
This  is  most  frequently  the  case  with  |1:  as  lOfT  to  covet, 
"IpfT  to  want,  lack. 

8.  The  Inf.,  Imp.  and  Fut.  Nif.,  which  require  a  Dag. 
for    the   assimilated  }  Nif.    (§   12,    4.),  \\jill    lengthen    the 
vowel    under  JJVN»  to  compensate  for  the   Dag.  :    as 

to  cut  in,    engrave,    for  JTTJV  "JQJJ*;for    *M?'1J!»    ^  ^ 
characteristic  is  associated   with  the  gutturals  :  as  £"|TT  to 
pursue. 

EXERCISE  62. 

S'     5sn!  N*S  :4fnj; 


n 
ny  :miD^cnDi  I2nn 


orro 


njn  nxn  S9anj;  :38vnirn>x 


sleep1  to  change2  Ethiopian3  skin4  to  have  delight5  understanding-6  to  de 
vise7  to  dwell8  securely9  prosperity10  to  rejoice11  cit}-12  to  draw,  deliver13 
intelligence14  a  fool15  to  keep  silent16  to  count17  oil18  to  become  rich19  to  lay 
hold20  to  examine21  to  condemn,  punish22  to  explore23  after,  then24  to  hold 
back,  restrain25  help26  to  leave,  miss27  the  words  of28  to  learn29  to  mourn30 
the  fool,  simple31  to  believe32  to  be  wanting33  trespass34  to  seize35  pitch36 
to  join  one's  self37  way38  prudent  man39  simple40  to  pass  on41  to  punish42 
to  ha(e43  unjust  gain44  to  lengthen45  fierceness,  cruelty46  fury47  a  flood48 
wrath49  envy50- 

10 


74  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  63. 

In  the  place  of'1  greats  men2  do  not  stands.  The  house 
of4  the  righteous  shall  stand.  The  fatherless5  and  the 
widow6  do  (in.  pi.)  not  oppress7-  And8  Pharaoh9  heard1® 
this  thing  and8  h$  sought11  to  slay  12  Moses13-  Thou  shalt 
not  oppress14  a  hired14  servant15,  do  (f.  s.)  not  take16  to 
pledge16  the  raiment17  of  a  widow.  My  heart18  trusted1^ 
in  the  Lord  and  I  am  helped20  and  my  heart  rejoiceth21- 
The  Lord  said  unto  these  wicked  :  as22  you  have  forsaken23 
me,  thus24  I  will  forsake  you,  as  you  have  plowed25  wick 
edness26)  thus  you  shall  reap27  iniquity28,  and8  I  will  cause 
you  to  eat2-9  the  fruit30  of  falsehoods1-  Let  be  put  to  si 
lence32  the  lying  lips33,  which  speak34  against35  the  right 
eous  arrogancy36-  O37  sword38  !  put  thyself3^  into^°  thy 
scabbard41  and  rest42- 


.  4JT3     §  104,  2-  siro;* 

-  "T  •:  |r 


12JHH      Pi-  H£'p3      [Fut.  A]  10yn#    9  rl;n3     Sconnect  and  with  the  verb. 

Fut.  21lSl?    Nif.  20-iiy     3withl9nD3      18m.  21?  ,'3*7     17  1  JD     16^)1     15,14T^ 
-<r  --^  _T  ....  _T  <T 

a  25  7,  5]  29  SDX    28nnSij;    27iy     wyti     25Bhn    24  3    w^y    223 


35  Sj?      Part.    34*131      [f.]  33  1j5Kr-'r\£)^      Jussiv  Nif.  32  oSx      Pause 


;Nif.  42  ^jn    41^r)    4o?^    Nif.  39tjpx    [f.J  SS^in    37  "IH    36pny 

§  41.     VERBS  AYIN  GUTTURAL. 

1.  These  verbs  are  subject  to  the  same  variations  as  the 
verbs  Pe  Guttural,  taking  Sh'va  comp.  in  all  those  forms 
where  the    second    radical    has   Sh'va:    as  Hprn  to  go  far 
away,  for  HfJITJ.;  'tpfl&f'n  to  slaughter,  for  »P^J1, 

2.  The  fut.  and  imp.  in   these  verbs   are  regularly  A  : 

as  prrv. 

3.  Pi.  Pu.  and  Hitli.,  which    require  the  characteristic 
doubling  of  the  second  radical,    lengthen  the  vowel  under 
the    first   to   compensate   for    the    omitted    Dag.  :    as  T]")3 
for  Tj''©,  rpM'for  Tp39,  r|*O!9  for  Tj^Dlp, 

Before  H  >  II  and  y  the  preceding  vowel  very  often  re 
mains  short:  as  *1J£J  to  destroy,  pTO  to  mock,  ""inspp  to 
cleanse. 


§  41.    VERBS  AYIX  GUTTURAL.  75 

4.    In  Pi.  and  Hithp.  the  Tsere  of  the   last   syllable  is 
shortened  to  Seghol  by   throwing  back   the  accent,    which 

> 

often  occurs  after  Yav  Conv.:  as  CJHJM  anc^  ^e  drove  away, 

>  >  .  > 

for  &T"U*  ,  rntin  and    he   ministered,    for  rr\W*>  or  when  a 

monosyllabic    word    or    one    with    the   tone  on  the  penult 

>    *  >  * 

follows  :  as  ^  pD¥^  to    mock    me,  DE>  JTJ$7  to   minister 
there.     (§  14,  Shortening  c.). 

EXERCISE  64. 


JN  DiN"19p  j 

T  v:  T  T  I  v 


garment1  training,  instruction2  not3  to  mock4  to  grow  old5  to  boast  one's 
selfs  to  hew7  to  bless8  to  cast  out9  shall  go10  to  flee11  to  continue12  early13 
§  105,  6.  a  curse14  to  refuse15  to  comfort,  console  one's  selfrs  to  hide17  to 
ask18  son  of19  to  purify,  to  clean20  to  change21  garments22  to  deny,  deal 
falsely23  to  lie24  fellow-man25  deceit,  fraud26  to  abhor27- 

EXERCISE  65. 

Serve1  (p.  m.)  the  Lord  in  truth'2,  and  if  (it  be)  evils  in  your 
eyes4  to  serve  the  Lord,  choose  you5  this  days  whom  you  will 
serve,  whether^  the  gods,  which  your  fathers^  serveds  orio 
the  gods  of  i1  the  Amorites12>  in  whose  landis  you  dwell; 
I  and  my  house14,  we  will  serve  the  Lord.  And  is  the 
people  said15;  God  forbid1**  that  we  should  forsake11?  the 


70  PART  1.     EXERCISES, 

Lord,  to  serve  other18  gods;  for  the  Lord  drove 
from  before  us20  all  the  people21  ;  also  we  will  serve  the 
Lord,  for  he  is  our  God.  Do  not  deny22  your  (pi.  m.) 
God.  The  Lord  trieth23  the  righteous.  They  cried24  unto 
God  and  were  delivered25-  Truth  (f.)  does  not  spring  up26 
until2?  the  Iie29  is  rooted  out2«-  We  bless30  you  in  the 
name  of  the  Lord.  Arid  he  drove  out  the  man.  How 
long31  refuse32  ye  to  keep  my  commandments?  Haste 
tliee33  (fern,  s.)  escape34  (f.  s.)  thither35-  How  long  will 
ye  despise36  intelligence3^  will  ye  regard38  it  as39  an  ad 
versary^  whilst*1  it  loves42  you,  seeks-*3  your  welfare44,  to 
lead4^  you  in  the  way  of'46  integrity4?. 

8  verb  before  the  noun      7  DX      6  QVTI      5Dat.      4  DDT#3     3.jn      [f.J2nON 
15  -ntf"!    u'r\*2    [§  23,  4.  §  96,  2.]  13  DY>X3   12  "TOWl    H  "TlSN    10  OKI 

[the  adj.  after  the  noun  g  90,  2.]  18  D^HK    17  transl.    from  forsaking  [§  30,;-  1.]  16  HjS 
.  ..  _.  T 

24pm     Fut.  23JH3         Pi.  Jussive  with  3    22#H3      21  Q"3  y      20.1J'J3D      Pi. 

I      ~T  I   -  T  -  T  "*•  ••  T    ' 


"11?      Pi.  pret.  301p3      m    293T3       Pu    28t^^t^      2?TT»      Fut    26no¥      Pause! 

*~  '-r  TT  -T  -  -T 


36VN3      35H^^     Nif.  34  fio      Pi.  33  ^HD      Pi.  pret.  32  J 

T:  I-T  TT  -T  -T  1 

trans,  seeking  43  #Tl    transl.  it  [f]  is  loving  42  3HN   41)    Part.  act.  f  403'K 

-  T  -T;  -T 

:  47  Q'DD    46  }"n     Pi    the  vowel  short  !  45 

•    T  I  V   V 

- 

§  42.    VERBS  LAMED  GUTTURAL. 

1.  To  this  class  belong  only  verbs  with  H>  y  and  Jl  (il 
with  Mappik  §  7)  as  the  third  radical. 

2.  Their  peculiarities  are: 

a.  These  gutturals  when  final  require  the  A  sound  before 
them,  hence  every  other  mutable  vowel  is  changed  into 
Patach;  the  Inf.,  Imp.  and  Fut.  therefore   have  A:  as 
n1?^  to  send,  (T^  , 

b.  The  gutturals    preceded  by  the  immutable    vowels  1,  J|, 
>—  ,  »T    take    Patach    furtive    (§    6.):    as.rTD^  J£lOB>'» 

frStf'b>  nn, 

3.  The  forms  with  Tsere  before  the  final  guttural  either 
retain  the  Tsere  and  then  Pat.  furt.  must  follow,  or  Tsere 
is   chaned   into  Patach:  as 


§  42.     VERBS  LAMED  GUTTURAL.  77 

NOTE.  The  form  with  Tsere  and  Pat.  furt.  is  found  more  frequently 
at  the  end  of  a  period  (with  distinctive  accent):  as  JHT  Lev.  11,  37, 

but  jnr*  NE.  1.  14.  nns  Job  12,  is,  but  nnsTjob  30.  n. 

f    _,..  -   ..   . 

4.  In  the  second  sing.  f.  of  the  pret.,  which  ends  with 
two  vowelless  consonants,  the  guttural  takes  Patach  instead 
of  Sh'va:  as  J1#D#.  for  flJflDB';  the  sing.  f.  form  of  the 
participles,  take  two  Patachs  instead  of  two  Seghols  :  as 

>  for  nj?Dfc>  . 

EXERCISE  66. 

pn  rji 
:n-rn 


nirr  wrx  nin»  xi^  ^D^'  :  VDN  na^  noon 


to  withhold1  to  anoint2  §  97,  2.3  to  pardon4  iniquity  of5  to  cease6  midst 
of7  therefore8  to  open9  dumb10  hell11  destruction12  the  eyes  of13  in14  to 
slay15  for  ever16  to  cheer,  to  gladden17  the  heart  oft®  the  God  of19  to  cause 
or  make  to  prosper20  to  justify21  to  condemn22  abomination  of23  n.  p.  f.24 
door25  §  85,  4.  b.  rebuke  oft6  other27- 

EXERCISE  67. 

Behold  upon  the  mountains1  (are)  the  feet  of2  him  that 
hringeth  good  tidings-%  that  published  peaces.  Dost  thou 
(f.  sing.)  not  knows  whither*?  the  men8  did  go?  I  flee^ 
from  the  face™  of  Saraiu.  And  he  rose  up12  to  flee 
unto13  Tarshish1^  And  David  said:  arise^  and  let  us 
But1"7  to  the  king  of  Judah18,  which  sent1^  you  to 


r.-uiT  I.  EXERCISES. 

Of  the  Lord,  thu§2i  shall  ye  say22  to  him  :  be- 
cause23  thine  hearta*  (is)  tender^  and*  thou  hast  hum 
bled  thyself^  before2T  the  Lord  and*  hast  rentes  thy 
clothes29,  i  aiso 


God  will  speak.  Againso  (there)  shall  be  heard  in 
place  the  voice  of  joy32.  The  house  ofss  the  wicked  shall 
be  overthrown34,  but^  the  tent35  Of  the  nprightse  shall 
flourish37.  He  that  trustees  in  his  own  heart,  is  a' 
but  whoso  walketh^o  wisely4i  he  shall  be  delivered^. 

4part.  Hi.  of  yv&    3  part.  Pi.  of  -|fr|  the  bringer  of  (him  that  br.)  g.  tidings  2^.H     1 
10;J3D    »I»art.  f.  s.  rO3    8  the  noun  after  the  verb  (§  107,  4.)    7  HJX    6pret.j;T 

171    16  fut.  pamg.  in  pause     15  .^:p    14^^    13(§  19,  6.)  12Qp'l    11  nfer 
^      23pll      22nOK'n      21713      20  with   ace.  ff«n      19  part,    w.tii    article 
31(f94,2)      30^      29TJHja      28;nD      27  ^fip      26Ni.  ^3      *  Vav  co«v. 
38  part,  with  3  ,HD3     37  Hi.  H^3      36  D^^      35^^      34Ni.  155^      33n-3 

.42oV)3    41  (in  wisdom)  riDDH    40  part.  -tSn 
~  '' 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  SUFFIXES  OF  THE  VEE13. 
§  42.    IN  GENERAL. 

1.  The  suffixes  of  the  verb  are: 
Person:          1.  2.  3 

'Sing.     com.     »J  I"'        3          '"•      in        ™ 

*•  t.      n  (n — ) 

T>1  ni.      DD          m.       D 

f.     p     f.      ? 

NOTE.    10 ,  poetically  used  for  D  :  as  10 D3  it  covered  them. 

2.  The  suff.  are  annexed  to  the  verbal  forms  by  vowels, 
called:    Union  vowels;    to  the    pret.  by   the  A.    vowel  (— 
or  — ),  to  the  future  by  the  E.  vowel  (—  or  — ).     The  union 
vowel  is  only  applied  to  the  verbal  forms,    ending  with  a 


42.     Ix  GENERAL.  *  79 


consonant:  as  Dp  »  ^??Pp  ne  killed  me;  whilst  with  all 
the  forms  ending  with  a  vowel  the  suffixes  are  connected 
immediately:  as  1*7pb''»  ^wftp  they  k.  in. 

§  43.     THE  PRETERITE  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

1.  The  lengthening  of  the  word  hy  the  suffixes  causes 
the  dropping  of  the  pretonic  Kamets.  Hence  the  pret. 
undergoes  the  following  changes: 

Person.  Person.  Person. 

1.  ,    2.  3. 

0  A?pinto  0?ttp  (J3? 

into  ^riSrrs     T  (before^) 


p.  «gjpT 

2.  Verbs  middle  E  retain  this  vowel  before  the  suffixes: 
as  ^pHK  to  love,  D^'?1?  to  put  on  a  garment.     In  Pi.  and 
other  forms  with   final  —  ,  this  —  changes   before   the   suf 
fixes  Tj  »  D5  '  p  into  Seghol  ;   before  the  other  suff.  it  falls 
away  entirely  :  as  S^Dp  ,  ^tDp  >  D?^p  '  O^p  . 

3.  The  form  fVptOp  sometimes   undergoes   a  contraction  : 
in—  for  1(iri—  ;  nri—  for  n^l—  ,  as  inSp^  she   weaned  him, 
1.  Sam.  1,  24.  rUTtf?^  (fear)  "has  laid  hold  on  her,  Jer.  49,  24. 

EXERCISE  68. 


::£  - 

ijrNV)  :ri: 


TJIOD 


before    rave  suft*. 


80  *  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


ji  :njnp  14 
nru*  : 


to  prove1  my  servants  fear3  to  strengthen'1  my  righteousness5  to  clothe6 
(with  two  ace.  $  85,  2,  6.)  garments  of?  salvation8  the  robe  oft  why10  to  be 
willing11  to  repay12  thanksgiving13  to  deliver14  straw15  chaff16  to  carry 
off17  a  hurricane18- 

EXERCISE  69. 

She  didi  him  good  and  not  evil  all  the  days  of  2  her 
For4  a  -shorts  moment^  I  have  forsaken  thee  (s.  f.), 
with4  everlastings  kindness^  I  will  have  mercy  on^o 
thee  (s.  f.).  Thineii  (are)  (the)  heavens  also^  Thine  (is) 
(the)  earth,  Thou  hast  founded^  them.  Sarah*-*  has 
driven^  me  out  of  her  house1^.  No1*  fear  ofis  God  (is) 
in  this  place  arid  they  will  kill1^  me.  Very22  refmed20 
(is)  Thy  saying2i,  and  Thy  servants  Ioveth24  it.  Dost 
thou  (s.  f.)  know25  the  men  that  have  asked2^  thee  (s.  f.) 
for2*  my  name2«?  I  do  not  know29  them.  Who  has 
killed  him?  her?  them?  We  have  touch  edso  thee,  (s.  m.) 
thee,  (s.  f.)  her,  him.  Thou  (s.  f.)  hast  touched  her,  him, 
us,  them  (p.  f.).  Why  hast  thou  (s.  f.)  forsaken  us? 
her?  me?  him?  They  have  forsaken  them,  you.  Why 
has  she  persecuted31  him?  us?  you?  (p.  f.)  thee?  (s.  f.) 
her?  He  has  gathered  them,  you,  thee,  us. 

9DSlU    8tDn    71    6V3p    5T>JH     43     3  with  pi.  suff.  D'Tl     2"H'     1  with  ace.  S^J* 
T  *  vv  I     IT       *  -  :•  ._  ...  _T 

,fV3    15  Pi.  tin  j    14rp!#    131D'1    i2nx    H^lS     10  Pi.  with  ace.    to  have  m.  on:  nrp 

-T  TT  -T  \-  \;  ••     - 

221XD    21(f.)nniDX      20  part.    pass,    spy    19  JJ1H    18  nNT    17  r«    16  with  suff.  n"3 

.  i  .  T  .   .  1  _T  -  T  _  .  .         i  .. 

31  crn    30TTJJ    29pret.     28  with  suff.  'ntf  ,Q#    27  ^    26  SNl^    26  WT    24  3HN* 
I-T  -T  •   :  -  T  -T  ••  T 


§  44.     THE  FUTURE  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

1.  The  Cholem  of  fut,  Kal,  -before  Tj>  63  and  J3  changes 
into  Kamets-Chatuph  ;    before  the  other  suff.  it  drops  :  as 


2.  The  verbs  with  the  fut.  A.  (including  the  verbs  Ay  in 
arid  Lamed  Guttural)  not  only  retain  their  A  sound 
(Patach),  but  even  lengthen  it  into  Kamets,  the  syllable 


§  44.     THE  FUTURE  WITH  SUFFIXES.  81 

becoming  an  open  one  :  as  '3CO7?  he  will  clothe  me  ; 
irn^J^P  they  pollute  him. 

3.  PL  loses  or  shortens  its  Tsere,  like  Kal  its  Cholem  :  as 
Tj  <f3jT  he  will  gather  thee,  D¥3p_'  • 

4*  The  plur.  fern,  forms,  2.  and  3.  person  (in  j"0)  are 
changed  into  the  corresponding  masc.  forms  (in  1)  before 
connection  with  suffixes  :  as  \33£Ttn  IP  TlHDN  my  maids 
count  me  for  a  stranger.  Job  19,  15. 

5.  In  pause,  there  is  occasionally  inserted  instead  of  the 
union  vowel  a  union  syllable  f—  ,  f—  ,  called:  Nun  epenthetic, 

as  in^-n^. 

3  epenthetic  is  usually  assimilated  to  the  first  letter  of  the 
suffix  and  expressed  by  Dag.  forte.     These  suffixes  are  : 
Person.  Person.  Person. 

1.  2,  3. 

Sing.  c.    ^-  and    ^—       *]—  ,  (HD—  )    m.  ^—   f.  nj)— 

Plur.       13—  and  -l^— 

EXERCISE  TO. 


n:q  njp  nogn  ^n 
??^  run  DI 


HIPP  :DJ 


buy,  acquire1  to  embrace2  to  be  attentive3  to  sustain4  the  bed  of5  sick 
ness6  pride,  arrogance7  deed,  act8  to  bring-  near9  to  put  far  away,  remove10 
stranger,  foreigner11  lips12  to  bind13  correction14  h;ul  died15  to  pronounce 
happy16  U>  make  inferior17  to  crown18  (§  85.  '2.  b.)  our  fathers1^  to  compare20- 

11 


82  PART  1.     EXERCISES, 

EXERCISE  71. 

The  Lord  will  requite  1  me  according  to2  my  righteous- 
ness^.  The  name  of4  God  will  set  thee  on  high^,  will  send 
thee  help6  from  the  sanctuary?  and  sustains  thee  out  of 
Zion.  From  the  extremity  of9  tjie  heaven,  thy  God  jpll 
gatherio  thee.  Now11  I  shall  gather  them,  thee  (s.  f.), 
you  (p.  f.),  her.  When12  my  brother  14  will  meet  thee13 
and  ask15  thee:  whose16  (art)  thou  ?  Thou  wilt  meet  him, 
she  will  meet  you.  Thou  (s.  f.)  wilt  meet  her.  Why 
dost  thou  ask  me  (tut.).  They  (pi.  f.)  will  ask  us.  They 
(pi.  mas.)  will  ask  you.  Who  will  honor17  him,  that 
dishonoreth18  his  life1^  ?  Now  will  love^o  me  my  hus~ 
band2i.  Thou  (s.  f.)  wilt  love*  him.  They  (pi.  f.)  will 
love  her.  You  (pi.  in.)  will  love  us. 

7£Hp     6(§  93,  6.)  thee  help  5p_Tj;     5  set  on  high,  Pi.  3Jjjp    4  D#     3  'piy    23    1  ^DJ 
(usually  StfJtf)  Stftf    14TIK    13  ^J3    12*3    11 HPV    1°  Pi.  V3D    S^D    8  fut.  A.  IT»C> 

-T-T  •    T  -T  T     -  "I:  -f 

20  Alt.  A.  3HX    191^33    18  HTl'S  17  Pi.133    16  to  whom   l&with  Vav  couv.  fut.  A. 


§  45.     THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

1.  The  infin.  Kal  when  connected  with  suffixes  appears 
in  the  form  ?DD'  and  according  to  its  signification  receives 
either  the  verbal  suffixes  or  the  nominal  suffixes :  as  07t?p 
to  kill  me  ;    ^tpp  my  killing. 

2.  With  the  suffixes  ^j,  D2>  J3  a  form  sometimes  occurs 
with    Kamets    under    the    second    radical :    as    ^T^DN    thy 

J 

eating. 

3.  The  infin.  7ftp  assumes  with  suff.  the   form  ^£DD :   as 
i 

to  hinder  him. 

EXERCISE  72. 


nin? 
9onty 


§  4fi.     THE  IMPERATIVE  WITH  SUFFIXFES. 


™  nfiD>DT?ri  13Dip5  :12 
no  niiT     n;  njn  CDITI  run  Ww?  TT 


T  run  no  pjst  o  18^i  17 

give1  the  sons,  children  of2  to  sell3  Greeks4  in  order  that5  away  from,  from6 
territory7  keep  holy8  to  surround9  to  seize,  capture10  to  open11  your  eyes12 
when  rise13  become  many,  multiply14  see15  the  skirt  oft6  to  kill1''  know18- 

EXERCISE  T3. 

He  suffered1  no2  man  to  do  them  wrong-**-  And*  the 
manna6  left  off5  from  the  morrow7  after  they  had  eaten&  of 
the  produce^  of  the  land.  David  has  sent  comfortersio  unto 
thee  to  searchn  the  city,  (§  57,  5.  3  )  to  spy  it  out'  2  and 
to  overthrow!3  it.  Arid*  Kuth15  said14  entreat^  me  not 
(§  104,  2.)  to  leave  17  thee  (s.  f.).  Hamanis  has  devised^ 
againstzo  the  Jews2i  to  destroy  22  them.  Preserve23,  my 
son,  the  law  of'24  thy  mother25;  when  thou  goest26,  it 
shall  Iead27  thee,  when  thou  sleepest2^,  it  shall  keep 


4Vav    Conv.      Sp^n      2  no  y      (before   the    verb)      1  fl'SH 
-  T  I    -  T 

12Pi-  Sjl    Hln    10  part.  IM.  DHJ    91^    8  transl.  in  their  eating 

231V:  22  pi.  i3x  21 

28  inf.  with  3  .  3327     2?nnjn      26  transl.  in  thy  going,  "jn  Hithp.      25?JJ3X      2 

.29  with  pi.  suff. 


§  46.    THE  IMPERATIVE  WITH  SUFFIXES. 

1.  The   form  ?bp  changes   before   its   annexion   to   suff. 
into  7fcppT>  as   the   infinitive.    The   form  >7pp  and  17C5P  re 
main  unchanged  ;  Jl^tOp  takes  the  form  of  ^  Stpp  * 

2.  In  verbs  Ayin  and  Lamed  Guttural,  the  A  vowel  of 
the  final  syllable  is  retained  and  lengthened  into  Kamets  : 
as  '3rP£*  send  me;    ^?NC*  afsk  me. 


84  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  74. 

rrn  ob&  tr'p.3  :nplV3  nirv 
:rnrv  ^350  ^wvrj^  nrw*  >34T!'?^ 

:^j^|  rnrr  ^ij;p  :7>$n  rnrr 
:  vm^D  Dpj£  jnt^t  imS^D  nin;  10'tfy. 


pr  nin?  nj;T  rinx  :y^'n  TO 


according  to  my  rio-teousness1  to  lead2  in  Thy  truth3  to  teach4  my  sal- 
ration5  to  deliver6  to  redeem7  to  cleanse,  purify8  to  be  or  become  clean, 
pun9  ye  that  fear™  thy  throat11  the  table12  thy  heart13  to  enter14  to 
avoid15  to  revenge16  persecutor17- 

EXERCISE  75. 

Hear  me  (pi.  m.)  and  entreat1  for2  me  to1  the  king. 
Kemember  me,  prays,  and  strengthen4  me,  pray,  only5  this 
once6>  that?  I  may  be  avengeds  on®  my  enemies^.  Gather^ 
them  from  among11  the  people^  (pi.).  Fearis  the  Lord 
and  love  Him.  If14  iniquity  is  (be)  in  thy  hand,  put  it 
far  away1^  andi7  letis  not17  wrong1^  dwellis  in  thy  tents20. 
And  he  said  :  draw2i  thy  sword22,  and  thrust  me  through28 
therewith24,  lest25  these  uncircumcised27  come26  and*  thrust 
me  through  and*  abuse28  me.  Hear  (s.  f.)  us.  Hear 
(pi.  f.)  me.  Help29  (pi.  f.)  me.  Help  (pi.  m.)  him. 
Bury30  (pi.  f.)  her,  for  she  is  a  king's  daughter. 

8Ni.  optat.with  D,DpJ    71   8ig  94,  3.)  f.  DJ?3    ^K    4Pi.  pm    3  W    2  S    1  with  J  #}Q 

17  SKI    16  HI.  prn    WJIK    UDN    is  XT    i2nu;u    njp    ion.  pp    9'TN 
B^JJI   22T]3"|n    aisjS^   20T^^   19ni?!^   i8§io4,  2.  HI.  |^ 

29  ni^     *Vav.  Conv.    28  with  3,  Hith.  hhtf    27  D"1?^,    26^3^    25  |3 


§  47.     THE  PARTICIPLE  WITH  SUFFIXES. 
The  participles  of  Kal  and  Pi.  lose  their  final  Tsere  and 
like  the  infin.  according  to  their  signification,  receive  either 
the  nominal  or  verbal  suffixes:  as  ^HP^  ne  wno  keeps  me, 
my  keeper. 


§  49.     THE  PARTICIPLE  WITH  SUFFIXES.  s 

EXERCISE  76. 

nirr 


HIPP  :D»D  JOHN  rrsriiN  "0^3  16W  n??nn 

nin 


nin 


to  gird1  (§  85,  2,  b.)  strength2  (that  which  is)  holy,  consecrated  to  God3  to 
be  or  become  guilty4  to  swear5  by  his  right  (hand)6  if?  (§  108,  4.)  I  give8 
corn9  enemies10  drink11  the  alien12  new  wine,  must13  to  gather1*  to  store  up15 
to  teach16  her,  its  children17  shade18  to  clothe19  adversaries20  confusion21  as 
the  cold  of29  snow23  messenger84  faithful2^  a  ruler26  to  hearken27  word  of28 
servant29  say30  continually31  to  be  great32  salvation33  to  curse34  I  will  curse, 
devote  to  destruction35  shall  inherit36  to  be  destroyed37- 

EXERCISE  77. 

These  (are)  our  judges*  that  judge  us.  The  lands  shall  not 
be  expiated3  of4  the  blood  that  is  sheds  therein^,  but7  by8 
the  blood  of  him  that  shed^  it.  For  I  was  ashamed*0  to  ask 
of  the  king  a  force  n  to  help  us  against  12  the  enemy  is  in 
the  way:  because14  we  had  spokenis  unto  the  king,  say 
ing™,  The  hand  ofi?  our  God  (is)  upon*  all  them  that 
seekis  Him  for  goodi9;  butso  His  power  21  and  His  wrath22 
(is)  against*  all  them  that  forsake  Him23.  They  that  curse24 
thee  shall  be  cursed,  and  they  that  bless2^  thee  shall  be 
blessed.  Lord,  who  is  like  unto26  Thee,  who  deliverest27 
the  poor28  and  the  needy29  from  him  that  robbethso  him. 

83    7DN""3    63     5Pu.  ija#     4^7     3Pu.  133      2Dative=to  the  land  (f,)  1  part.  D£J# 
*S£      17  T      leibKj?      15  -^       14  »3        13TTX      12  D      H^Tt      103      9  part. 


86  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

25  Pi.  part.  rpa    24  part.  ^N    23  part.    22  f3K    21  foj,»     20)     19  mtoS      18  Pi-  Part- 
;  30  part,  ^n    29J1>3K    28-Jj»     27  S'.^    26  (before  gravr  Buff.  fo3) 


CHAPTER  IX. 

IRREGULAR    VERBS. 
§  48.     VERBS  N"2  . 

1.  The  verbs  of  which   the  first  radical  is  ft  partake  of 
all  the   peculiarities   of  the   verbs  Pe    Guttural.     In   some 
of  them,  however,    the  N  is  quiescent  in  either  Cholem  or 
Tsere,   hence  they   are  called;  tf  '£  Ttf  =  quiescent  the  £ 
i,  e.  the  first  radical  K, 

2.  In   the   fut.    Kal   the   five   following   verbs:    "ON  to 
perish,    PDN  to  be  willing,   S^K  to   eat,    "1QN  to   say  and 
i"T£)N  to   bake,    have  the  N  quiescent   in  Cholem :    as  ^3tft\ 
thou    wilt   eat,   12W  he  will  perish.     In  the   first  person 
the  N  drops:    as  "j^K  I  shall  say."    The   verbs  N1N  to  take 
hold,  f|pK  to  collect,  have  beside    the  regular  form  tHNS 
^]D{J>  the  form  of  the  N"£:  rtTN»»  ^0*1  2.  Sam.  6,  1. 

3.  The  final  syllable  has  generally  Patach,  Tsere  is  for 
the  most  part  used  in  syllables  with  a  distinctive  accent: 

Job  3,  3.       "pK»  Job  20,  7.      S^Ntfl  1.  Mos,  3,  14, 
1.  Mos.  2,  16. 

4.  With  Vav  Conv.  the  accent  is  thrown  back: 
;  hut  with  a  distinctive  accent,  Mi  Ira :  ^jtf»J, 

5.  The    inf.    Kal    of  1DX   with  S>  is  n'DNSi  for 
(§  12,  6.  B.  3.). 

6.  In  the  verbs  TfX  to  go  away,  *)(1N  to  tarry,  to  delay, 
nHK  to  come,  the  N  quiesces   in    Tsere:  as  StNSfor  ^WN» 

for  nr>stv>  inx^for  nn^\v  (cf.  §  12,  r>.  B.  3.). 


§  49.    VERBS  N"7.  87 

EXERCISE  78. 

:4mpn  *nxn  yssh  DIN  3niEQ  : 

T|  :    •  t      T  T  T  : 

10  #5:1 9w?n  xSi  8n#5  S^^n  7D"}n  :e 

13  '973  nnpw  "v?wi  SN  :12n^  "1^5  nj;i.  tr^-p  nD?Di: 

nrrx  mm*  16^D  toTvi  :^sr  »D  16vo#  ^DIID^  nin'o 

:  :    :  •-  ••  T  ;  •  T    T  T        •• 

VT 


witness1  lie,  falsehood2  §  82/5.  and  $  83,  6;  when  dies3  expectation,  (sup 
ply  /iis)4  fig  tree5  fruit6  sword7  flesh,  body8  meet,  reach  unto9  soul10  lie, 
falsehood11  ruins,  destroys12  my  way13  hight  of14  his  heaven15  sons  of16 
p.  n.  m.17  to  cut  off18  thumbs,  great  toes19  feet20  weak21  fool22  wise,  prudent23 
in  proportion,  according  to'24  dough25  cakes26  (§  85,  3)  unleavened27  leav 
ened28  drive  out29  I  have  sojourned30  now31- 

EXERCISE  79. 

Say  ye  to  the  righteous  (man),  because1  (he  is)  good, 
that2  he  shall  eat  the  fruit  of'3  his  doings4.  Not  shall  es- 
cape^  the  wicked,  and  the  patience  of6  the  righteous  shall 
not  he  in  vain7-  Ands  the  children  of  Israel9  said:  who 
shall  give10  us  flesh11  to  eat10?  We  remember  (pret.)  the 
fish^,  which  we  did  eat  in  Egypt13  freely1^  Eat  thou 
not  the  bread  of  an  evil  eye15  (i.  e.  an  envious,  malig 
nant  person),  for  eat,  saith16  he  to  thee,  but17  his  heart18 
is  not19  with20  thee.  The  children  of  Israel  are  not  will 
in  to  hearken  to  thee.  And®  the  asses21  of22  Kish23  were 


SVavConv.    7T3X    6  fern,  nipn    5  Ni.  DH    4^n    3  n3    2  '3    1  "3 
171    Wfut.    15  rn  jn    14Di)n     ISD^XD     12  HJT     lllifS     10  Hi.  SDX  (give  to  eat) 

].<-    '     -  T    •  •-:•  TT  TT 

23  ^p    22  (§  80,  10)  S  "WK  or  ^    21  (fern.)  m'jinN    20  D;>    19^73    18  fa"? 


§  49.    VERBS  N"1?  . 
1.     In  verbs  of  which    the  third  radical  is  N»the  tf  qui- 


88  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

esces  whenever  the  final  syllable  has  A  or  E,  and  length 
ens  final  Patach  into  Kamets:  as  NVO,  for  N^?  (§  14. 
Lengthening,  3.);  N^D  to  be  full. 

2.  Before  the  consonantal  afformatives  (fiO)  N  quiesces 
in    the    pret.    Kal    in    Kamets:  HK¥D>  in  the  pret.  of  all 
the  other  conjugations  in  Tsere  :   jlNVD^j  in  the  imp.  and 
fut.  of  all  the  conjugations  in  Seghol:  as  rUN^?'  rUN^Etf  , 

3.  The   verbs   middle  E,    like  K*V  to  fear,  retain  Tsere 
throughout  the  rest  of  the  forms  :  as  fiN*y  >  *fiN*7D  I  have 
filled. 

4.  The  part.  fern,  is  commonly   formed  by   contraction 

ntfmfor  n$yb  (§  12,  6.  B.  3.). 

NOTE.     The  Infinitive  sometimes  has  the  termination  F\tf  or  j"T), 
as  naOt?  Prov.  8,  IB.    nN?|H  Zech.  13,  4.    niEtT  Ez.  36,  3. 

EXERCISE  80, 


njn  jiro   nx  J19«svpp  "own 

nj; 


nin  n 


father1  one2  to  all  of  us3  to  create'1  why5  to  deal  treacherously6  against  his 
brother7  to  profane8  our  fathers9  clean10  right11  renew12  within  me13  to 
cast14  bread15  upon  (the  surface)16  multitude  of  =  after  many17  days18  to 
find19  to  heal,  cure20  to  hate21  congregation  of22  evil  doers23  agreeable, 
sweet24  afterwards25  to  fill26  his  mouth27  gravel  -  stones28  (§  85,  2.  a.) 
friends  of29  to  be  envious30  men  oft1  (§  83,  6  )  crown32  gray  hair33  to 
wound,  to  injure34  to  bind  up35  to  split,  to  dush^G  unrighteousness37  n.  p.  m.38 
s"ui39  ($  -25,  7)40  thy  hcart'll- 


§  50:     VERBS  f"£j.  89 

EXERCISE    81. 

I  said,  Lord  heal1  my  soul2-  for  I  have  sinned3  against* 
Thee..  And  Moses  said  unto  the  people:  ye  have  sinned 
a  great6  sin5-  And?  (there)  remained8  two  of9  (the)  men 
in  the  campio?  the  name  of  the  one1*  was  Eldad12  and 
the  name  of  the  other13  Medad14  and?  they  prophesied15  in 
the  camp,  and?  (there)  said  a  young  man16  to  Moses: 
Eldad  and  Medad  do  prophesy  in  the  camp.  And7  Joshua17 
said:  my  lord18  Moses  forbid19  them.  And  Moses  said  unto 
him,  enviest20  thou  for  my  sake21?  would22  G-od22  that22 
all  the  Lord's  people  (were)  prophets23.  The  ear25  is  not 
filled24  with26  hearing.  In  the  lips27  of  the  intelligent 
(man)28  wisdom  isfound2^-  And7  Jehosheba30  stole  Joash31 
and  hid32  him  from*  Athalia33,  and  he  was34  hid35  in  the 
house  of  the  Lord  six  years. 

9'rtf      8Ni.  IXtf      TVavConv. 


25  [fern.]  fTX     24fut.  Ni.  j  23  D'N'3J      22?^-^      21         20  part  Pi.  KJp     193 

U-  TT 

32  m.  fut.  nr\o  SI^ST    SO^T^IH;    29  NL  fut.    2«p3j    -7'ri3^    26:3 

.*'J£3D    37  D":^1     36  35  part.  Hith.  K3H    34  "TH 


§  50.     VERBS   f'i). 

1.  The  verbs,  of  which  the  first  radical  is  %  ,  lose  },  when 
ever  it  should  take  Sh'va,  by  assimilation,  hence   the  sec 
ond  radical   is   doubled,    i.  e.  receives   Dag.  forte:    as£*>, 
for  C^JV  t&^jn.fbr  CT'^n  (§  12,  4.).      Before  a  gtitt.    the 
assimilation  does  not    take  place:    as  pX^>  ^I^JT!  (ibid.). 
In  the  infin.  and  imp.,  i  drops  without  compensation,    the 
following  letter  commencing  the  word:  as  £*'•}  (Dag.  lene); 
before    Makkef  "^,   with  pargog.  tl>  H  W  *     The  regular 
form  of  the  imp.  is  found  occasionally:  as  C*ftJ  leave,  VHJ 
vow  ye.    (See  3  of  this  §.) 

2.  With  these  verbs,  in  order  to  make  the  infin.  dissylla 
bic,  it  takes  the  fern,  nominal"  ending  H—  —  ,or  fi—  —  when 
the  second  or  third  radical  is  a  guttural:   as  H^  '  Mjy  to 

.touch.     (See  3  of  this  §.) 

3.  In  most  cases,  these  verbs   have  a  fut.  and    imp.   0, 


90  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

many  A:  as  ^JD>  to  fall,  fcty.    The  imp.  and  infin.  of  verbs 
with  "fut.  0,  are  regular  :  as  *?b}  »  inf.  ^535  * 

4.    The  verb  JfO  to  give,  has  besides  the  irregularities  of 
the  verbs  }''£)  the  peculiarity,    that    it  also    assimilates    its 


final  3  before   the  aiformatives  Jl  and  3  :   as  DH^  for 
for  UjrU;  infin.  flfi,  for  rWl  (2)  ;  with"  D^ 
'  10*?  J  riflD;  imp,  fjl,  \Jtf-J,  ^H,  with  parag. 

' 


5.  In  njT7  to    take,  the    ^    is    analogous    to    the   3    of 
the    verbs    j"fi.     Fut.  llpUbr  Hp^  inf.  nHpj  with  D^M- 

nnp_3%nnp_^  nnpp;  imp.  np_,  ^np,  ^np,  n^np*  Ho.np;- 

for  Hp^  (§  14,  Short,  b.);  but  Ni.  always 

EXERCISE  82. 


12on  ^ 
^3« 

$&  xp  jr.K  17y:)D 


nin?  nn?  jt]  np  40: 
:nnir  npn 

to  dig1  a  pit2  to  fall3  to  break  down4  a  fence5  to  l>ite6  serpent7  to  despise, 
contemn8  all,every  thing9  for.,  in  behalf  of10  soul,  life11  to  revenge12  to  keep, 
retain  sc.  anger13  to  make  a  vow14  to  pay,  perform15  to  Iooki6  to  plant17  to 
form,  make18  the  mouth  of19  to  pour  forth,  utter20  to  turn  an~ay21  backward22 
afar  off23  knowledge24  my  son-5  thy  heart26  my  ways27  to  observe28  to  put 
off29  shoes30  from31  feet32  to  step  near33  to  kiss34  root  out,  pluck  up35  the 
chaff36  to  drive  away37  a  wind38  iron39  earth40  persons41  (coll,)  substance, 
properly42- 


§51.  Verbs  "'3*  91 

EXERCISE  83, 

Put  forth*.  thine  hand  and  touch  2  his  flesh3-  He  made-t 
a  pits,  and  digged^  it,  and  is  fallen  into  the  ditch?,  (which) 
he  made8-  Keep9  thy  tongue  10  from  evil  and  thy  lips11 
from  speaking!2  guileis.  And!-*  she  vowed15  a  vow1*?  and 
said  :  0  Lord  of  Hosts*7?  if18  Thou  wilt  remember  me  and 
wilt  give  to  thine  handmaid19  a  man-child20,  thensi  I  will 
give  him  to  the  Lord  all  the  days  of22  his  life.  And 
he  dreamed23,  and  behold24,  a  ladder25  set  up26  on*  the 
earth,  and  the  top  of  it2?  reached^8  to29  heaven.  .Right- 
eousnessso  deliverethsi  from  death32.  To  take  away33  my 
life3*  they  devised-^5-  Lord  give  us  Thy  help^e.  Thou 
shalt  not  inherit3?  in  our  father's  house88-  This  woman 
said  to  me:  give  (s.  f.)  thy  son89  and  we  will  eat  him 
to  day40  and  I  will  give*  my  son  to-morrow*!- 
lorpitfS  9fut.  o.  nyj  8^3  rnn^  ensn  5  -via  47153  s  infra  aj»jj 
is  DK  irnnoy  16TU  isnit.  OITJ  i4Couv.i  i3nD"ip  12  PI.  nan 

26  part.  Ho.  a*  J     25  D;?p      24  rm.    23oSn      22-^      211      20  D^JX  ^n? 
31  Hi.  fut.  StfJ     30  fern.  Hn        29  (§  19,  6,)  local  H    28  part.  Hi.  pU 


4innn    4ooi'n     39^33    san-a     ^Sn^     sen;^-    SSDJST    34-^33 

T  T  -  T  '-.•:• 

.($  85,  4,  6.) 

T    :  •• 

§  51.     VERB?  >"£  , 
1.    The  verbs  of  which  the  first  radical  is  '  are  divided 

into  three  classes  : 

a.  The  first  class  comprises  those,  in  which  *  is  used  as  3 
in  the  verbs  3"£,  i.  e.  '  is  assimilated  and  indicated  by 
Dagesh  in  the  next  letter.  In  this  class  are  four  verbs, 
which  all  have  ¥  as  the  second  radical:  fi¥*  (Ni.  flV-J  '  Hi. 
jTyn)  to  set  on  fire,  to  kindle,  JW  to  spread  down,  to 
strew,  py  to  pour,  pour  out,  "1^  to  form. 

?>.  The  second  class  is  but  slightly  irregular.  The  weak 
letter  *  quiesces  in  the  preceding  vowel  in  fut.  Kal  and 
all  forms  of  Hi.  The  fut.  Kal  retains  Chirek  :  as  1W\ 
from  DD'J  Hi.  changes  the  Chirek  into  Tsere:  as^tp»», 
for  D^YCPatach  +  »  =  a  +  i  -  e,  §  12,  T.  b.  2.).  To 


PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


this  class  belong  six  verbs:  T£  (fut.  W  and  T£»  apoc, 
T>>»  and  T£0  IB*  to  be  straight,  right,  3fc»  to  be  good, 
pr  to  suck,  V?T>  to  wail?  lament,  ^H»  to  awake. 
c.  The  other  verbs  '"5  belong  to  the  third  class.  The  verbs 
of  this  class  are  properly  V'£),  but  the  1  is  changed  at 
the  beginning  of  the  word  into  >:  as  H^Mbr  iVl,  Dg*, 
for  Din  (§  12,  7.  a,).  In  those  conjugations,  which  have 
a  characteristic  letter  at  the  beginning  (Ni.,  Hi.,  Ho) 
the  original  1,  being  now  in  the  middle  of  the  word,  re 

turns:  Ni.  pret.  nVu,  to.  -J^N,  Hi.  y?in,Ho.  nVin, 

In  Hithp.  the  1  in  a  few  verbs  only  is  restored:  asyi'fnn, 
from  J?T,  to  know. 

The  preformatives  ,  have  not  the  usual  vowel,  but  one 
homogeneous  to  V  TT&for  "T^U  ,  T^llTfor  T^H,  -?Wl> 
for  -l^H  (12,  7.  b.  2T.).  '  ' 

2.  In  fut,  Kal  the  »  drops.     The  preformatives  now  form 
ing  open  syllables,  lengthen  the  Oliirek  into  Tsere:  aslV, 
for  I1?"  .      With  conv.    V-   1^;  in    Hiphil  with    conv   V 
171*1  •' 

3.  About    half   these    verbs    have    the    future  E.     The 
others  with  future  A  retain  »  quiescent  in  Chirek  :   as  £''^> 
to  take  possession  of,  to  inherit. 

4.  The  infin.    const,    is  formed    as  with  y£,  i.  e.  the  t 
drops  and  the  segholate   ending  H—  —  (§  G6.)  (with  Gutt. 
ft-—  )  is  appended:  as  jfTJ^,  with"  D^DD:   H"}^,  rClS?, 

^niTO.     Occasionally,   it  has   the  fern/  termination 
*like  H"]?  to  bear,  ril-j  to  go  down. 

5.  The  imp.  "P>  DC^with  H  parag.  POp', 

6.  The  fut.   Kal  of  the  Verbs  LTT  to  take  possession  of, 
to  be  or  become  dry,  ^  to   labor,    toil,  is  formed  like 

the  second  class:  £n»,  B^**  JW  (3)»  but  in  Ni.,  Hi.,  Ho. 
they  are  inflected    like  the  third  class:    as 


, 

7.   The  verb  Tj>  to  go,  belongs  to  >"5,  taking  its  irregular 
forms  from'"jD:  iut,   Kal  T]^,  imp.   Tp,   infin.    HjS»    Hi 


§  50.     VERBS  v'2  . 


In  all  cases,    however,    where   the  verbs  v'£  are  regular 
it    is    inflected    as    from  Tj^H  :   pret.    Kal  TJ7J1,   part.  Kal 


EXERCISE  84. 


rny?  rot  :  trNrrns  rq^ 

^p  i7NjD  JWQ^  is^pin  nin 
J^nnn 

nj; 

'         ^i  nin 


niir 


i  ll\h] 


42  41  40  ''  >39 


jn 
r^^-i  *i\S£W  13 


statute,  law1  sons2  the  fear  of3  slander,  Vin  "-jSn  to  slander4  to  sit  down5 
both  of  them6  together7  the  father  of8  the  damsel9  to  consent*0  and  lodge  all 
night11  to  be  good,  merry12  Levite13  to  bear,  bring  forth14  to  add,  increase15 
days16  a  drunkard17  squanderer,  prodigal18  to  become  poor19  to  put,  place20 
before  thee21  to  be  pleased  to  do  anything22  to  make  good23  your  ways24  to 
kindle25  to  burn26  to  help,  succor27  praise,  object  of  praise28  to  be  wearied29 
to  be  fatigued30  whither31  from  thy  presence32  (prop.  f.  thy  face)  to  ascend33 
there34  to  spread  down,  make  one's  bed35  grave36  together,  at  one  time37 
to  sleep38  alone39  to  make  dwell40  to  weary,  be  troublesome41  words42 
in  what43  every  one44  thaf  doeth45  to  make  rare46  thy  foot47  to  be  satiated, 
weary48  bitter49- 


^4  PART  1. 

EXERCISE  85. 

Kebuke1  not  a  scorner2>  lests  lie  hate4  thee  ;  rebuke  a 
wise  man5;  and  he  will  love  thee.  Give  (instruction)  to  a 
wise  man,  and  he  will  be  yet7  wisei-6  ;  teach8  a  just  man 
and  he  will  increase9  in  learning10-  (It  is)  good  to  go  to 
the  house  of  mourning1  1-  Go,  eat  with12  joy  is  thy  bread^. 
And*  the  king  put  forth15  his  hand,  saying1^  lay  hold17 
on  him.  And*  his  hand  dried  up.  When18  your  children20 
shall  ask19  their  fathers21  in  time  to  come22;  saying,  what 
(mean)  these  stones23?  Then24  ye  shall  let  know25  your 
children,  saying,  Israel  came  over26  this  Jordan2?  on28 
dry  Iand29.  Forso  the  Lord  your  God  dried  up81  the  wa 
ters  of32  Jordan  from  before  you83,  until34  ye  were  passed 
over35-  That3^  all  the  people  of38  the  earth  might  know37 
the  hand  of  the  Lord.  Labor39  not  to  be  rich40-  Know 
thou  the  God  of  thy  father  and  serve41  Him.  Boast42  not 
thyself  of43  to-morrow44;  for  thou  knoweft45  not  what  a 
day47  may  bring  forth4^.  We  will  do  thee  good48- 

71HT      6  fut,  A.  (to  be  wiser)  DDQ        5  DDtlS      4KJJ#      3  J3      2  V1)      1  Hi.  Juss.  HIT 

T  T  .-  ••-[  I  •.•  I  •• 

15  nS^  HrjnnS  isnnpfr   123    u1?:^   1QnpS   9  HI.  with  ace.  ep-»    SHI.  J»T 

22  in  t.  t.  come  inn  21  DP13X  wStfltf  20  D3\D  18-2)  17  with  ace.  5^3^  16lb«S 
31  Hi.  30-)5J?kX  SOHti^r  283  27  pT  26  to  come  over  13_J?  25  Hi.  pret.  241  '23D'J3X 
37  inf.  (connect  36  and  37)  36  j^S  35  inf.  =  your  passing  over  341^  33  DD'J£3^  32  ^ 
D  DV  433  42Hith.  Juss.  SSn  4113J;  40  Hi.  inf.  with  S  39Juss.  ^^  38  T3J? 
.*Vav  Conv.  48  to  do  good  2E3"  Hi.  47  Qf  46fut.  lS"  45  tut. 


§  5-2.  ArERBs  yy  , 

The  verbs  belonging  to  this  class  are  contracted,  the 
second  radical  having  been  repeated  in  the  root,  as  D^D» 
now  DO  >  hence  termed  JTJ?  , 

Irregularities  : 

.  1.  The  repeated  letter  is  generally  written  but  once, 
with  a  Dag.,  which  is,  however,  omitted  at  the  end  of  the 
word  :  as  DQ,  for  3D»  but  !QD  (§12,  4,  Note). 

2.  The  resulting  monosyllabic  word  from  this  contraction 
is  vocalized  similarlv  to    the  regular   verbs,    but  differs  in 


§  52.     VERBS  yy .  95 

this  particular :  the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  in  the 
regular  verb  recedes  to  the  first  radical  of  the  verb  J?"J? .: 
as  imp.  DD.-  for  !Dp,  like  SfafJ?  fut.  DD>>  for  !Dp»,  like 
SbfJV  (comp.  3),  (§14,  Kising  III.). 

NOTE  I.     Infin.  and    fut.  Ni.  excepted,  which    have  Patach  in 
stead  of  Tsere. 

3.  The  preformative    forming    an  open  syllable,    which 
requires  long  vowels,    has  the  pretonic  Kamets  :    fut.  Kal 
DD>>  for  DDp>>  fut.  Hi.  2D*>  for  Mp!;   hence   this   Kamets 
drops,  when  the  tone  is  thrown  forward  :  as  n^PJI    (§  ^. 
Keject.  1.)- 

4.  When  the   aiformative    begins  with  a  consonant  (f) , 
fl;   T)<  ^»  f"U)  a  helping    vowel  is  used:  •!)  to  avoid  the 
meetin^    of    three    consonants    with    but    one    vowel :     as 
f"QD  "*  rO2D  5    2)  to  render  more  perceptible   the  doubling 
of  the  radical.     This  helping  vowel  is  Cholem  in  the  pret. 
(written  fully  or  defectively)  :    as  H13D   or  fOD  >    and    in 
the  future  '— :  as  M^3P^ . 

5.  This  helping  vowel  receiving   the  tone,  shortens  the 
vowel  in  Hi.,  and  in    the  forms   with  J"U   in  the   imp.  and 
fut.  Kal:  as  rvtopn*  H^P . 

6.  In  Pi.,    Pu.  and  Hith.,    which    require   Dag,  in  the 
second    radical,    in    order    to    avoid    the    meeting  of  three 
similar  consonants,  as  ]D5P  =  235P>  a  long  vowel  (invariably 
Cholem)    enters    instead   of   Dag.      Thus    the  forms  Poel, 
Poal,  Hithpoel,    arise,    which    are  regularly   inflected :    as 

DDiD'  :niD>  niinpn* 

7.  With  convers.  1  the  Cholem  of  the  fut.  Kal  is  short 
ened  into  Kamets-Chatuph,  and  the  Tsere  of  the  fut.  Hi.  into 
Seghol:  as  DCn>  DOT  (§  33,  4.). 

S.   Before  suffixes  the  same  change  takes  place,    for  the 


96  PART  I.  EXERCISES. 


same  reason  (§  14,  Short,  c.):  as  IIT  may  He  be  gracious 

> 
to  us  ;  Jinjnf)  ye  shall  solemnize  it  ;  or  Kubbuts  is  chosen 

instead:    as   'JtS^*  Hiph.   >J3p?,    Tsere    into    Chirek  (the 
strong  sharpening)  (§  14,  Short,  b.) 

9.    The    accent    is    not    here    thrown    forward  upon  the 
afformatives  n—»  }»  '—  »  as  with  regular  verbs:    as  POD* 


NOTE  II.  In  Kal  are  found  examples  of  middle  0  (according 
to  Vd*  §  29,  1.)  :  as  !Qh  they  shoot  arrows.  Gen.  49,  23.  ^ 
they  are  lifted  up.  Job  24,  24.  The  fut.  A.  of  these  verbs  has 
Tsere  under  the  preformatives  :  as  *")£*  it  is  bitter,  Is.  24,  9.  ^p  JO 
and  I  am  despised,  G-en.  16,  5.  OH*  it  is  hot,  De.  19,  6. 

NOTE  III.  Ni.  in  the  final  syllable  has  Tsere  occasionally:  as 
DD3  >  DOT  >  ^p.3  »  fi?P^  '  sometimes  Cliolem  p")  j  he  is  broken, 
Eze  29,  7.  VD3  they  are  spoiled,  Am.  3,  11. 

NOTE  IV.  Hi.  sometimes  takes  Patach  in  the  final  syllable, 
especially  with  gutturals:  *1DH  be  has  embittered,  Job  27,  2. 

rnn  he  cuts  off,  is.  is,  5.    in  , 


NOTE  V.  In  many  of  these  verbs  the  vowel  of  the  preforma 
tives  in  Kal,  Ni.,  Hi.  and  Ho.  is  short  and  Dag.  forte  follows. 
This  Dagesh  compensates  for  the  one  omitted  in  the  second  radi 
cal,  as  it  occurs  generally  with  this  class  of  verbs  in  Chaldee  : 
fut.  Kal  3D*  and  3CV;  DT  (fr-  DD1)>  Dfc*'?  shall  be  astonished, 
1.  Ki.  9,  8.  -fp>  to  bow  the  head;  Hi.  Dp!  Jud.  18,  23.  1™ 
Ex.  23,  21. 

EXERCISE  86. 


or?  rnrr 

n        *  lo-         »  nri 


19  D^nS-S  ^inn  Dt^  Snr  18  Sis  nin  17 


§  53.     VERBS  V'tf  AND  ^y  .  97 

mn  mix  ^Ofi^  rS&n?*  ^S  21!&jii 
27rb  ;infc  unn  M  >i?»3#n  cnn?  25rm>3  DW 

Di*n  29  wi-n  28  narrow  rnrr 


t?§'  nin?  : 

nprn^'N*  n^n  mn  >?  :4(7l.n 
44     j  ^S  wx*n  n»S  :jm^  43Sr?D 
nsrr  : 


adverb1  (§24,  3.)  to  be  many2  works3  to  roll,  to  commit4  my  outcry,  cry 
fur  help5  to  be  languid,  weakened6  then7  (§  101,  II,  b.)8  Joshua^  Arnoritelo 
sun11  Gibeon12  to  stay,  stand  still13  moon14  valley15  Ajalon16  cause  thun 
der17  thunder18  (prop,  voice,  sound)  Philistines19  to  confound20  to  defeat21 
to  celebrate22  festival23  seven24  year25  seventh?6  so,  thus27  to  break,  make 
void28  my  covenant  with29  as30  the  host  of31  to  measure32  I  will  increase/"3 
door34  to  turn35  hin£e36  his  bed37  to  inscribe  laws,  to  rule38  to  save39  to  do 
evil40  my  name41  (§  96,  2.)42  to  open,  begin43  n.  p.  f.  (my  sweetness)44  the 
Almighty45  to  embitter46  (sc.  life,)  to  be  terrified,  dismayed47  to  recede48  to 
beat  down49  to  be  astonished,  confounded50- 

EXERCISE  ST. 

Three1  times2  tliou  slialt  keep  a  feasts  to  me  in  the  year. 
And  he  rolled*  the  stone5  from6  the  mouth  of  7  the  wells. 
The  Lord  of  Hosts^  will  defend!"  Jerusalem  u.  The  soul 
of12  the  wicked  desireth13  evil,  his  neighbor  is  not  fa 
vored  i*  in  his  eyes15-  This  day  will  'I  begin16  to  mag 
nify  thee!7  in  the  sight  of!8  all  Israel.  And  I  will  de- 
fendi»  this  city,  to  save20  it.  .  And  the  Lord  discomfited2! 
Sisera22-  Hills23  melted2-*  like25  wax26-  He  that  trusteth27 
the  Lord,  mercy  2^'  shall  compass30  him  about30-  Bc- 
I  pray  you,  God,  that32  He  will  be  gracious33  unto 
us.  Hazael34?  king  of  Syria35?  oppressed3**  Israel.  And 
the  Lord  was  graciuus37  to  them  and  had  compassion-^  on 
them.  (He)  whom  thou  blesseth^a  (js)  blessed40:  and  (he) 

13 


98  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

whom  thou    curseth-u  is  cursed-12.      Why13   art    them   cast 
downH  0  my  soul45?  hope^e  thou  in-*7  Q0d  ! 

e^D    5pK     4  Hi.  fut.  with  Vav  Conv.  y?J     3  to  keep  a  feast  JUfl    2  D'S 
'VV  • 

14  HO.  fut.  pn  isnniK  ia#3j  no'S^iT  iom.  fut.  m  orn'joyrn'rr 

•-T       :  T  :      T     :  ••  : 

20  Hi.  yty     19  pret.  with  Vav  Conv.  pj     Wy%     17  Pi.  inf.  Si  J     16  Hi.  ^n    15  TJ"^ 

27part.nD|    26JJ1T    253    24  Ni.  ODD     23  Qnn    22&OCTp    21  tut.  with  Conv.  1,  DDH 

se  ^nS    35D^N    34^?n    33  pn    321     subn    SOPL  fut.  DDD    29npn    233 

40  Pu.  part.  39  Pi.  fut.  "p3    38  Pi.  fat.  with  Vav  Conv.  with  ace.  QrH     37  fut.  with  Vav  Conr. 
:47i?    46IIJ.  Sn1    45  (f.)  -B'SJ    44  Hith.  fut.  nn#    43  HD    42  Ho.  fut.    41  fut. 


§  53.    VERBS  yy  AND  i»y  t 

To  the  yay  the  verbs  ^y  are  nearly  related.  To  this 
class  belong  those  verbs  of  which  the  second  radical  is  V 
which  are  best  compared  with  the  preceding  yy,  whereby  the 
points  of  similarity  or  difference  can  be  rendered  most 
conspicuous. 

In  common  with  y'ty- 

1.  The  stem  is  monosyllabic. 

2.  The  preformatives  have  long  vowels:  in  fut.  Kal  and 
in  the  pret.  Ni.  Kamets  (Tsere  in  rare  cases), 

3.  The  forms  Poel,  Poal,  Hithpoel. 

4.  The  insertion  of  the  helping  (union)  vowel  Cholem  before 
the  consonantal  afformatives,  but  only  in  Ni.  and  Hi.    not 
in  Kal  and  Ho. 

5.  These  peculiarities  originate  from  the  principle,    that 
the  weak  letter  1  cannot    retain  its    consonantal  power  be 
tween  two  vowels;    (not   even    between  a  following    vowel 
and  a  preceding    vocal  Sh'va,)    the  1  either    drops  or  qui- 
esces,    and  as   with  y^y  its  vowel   recedes  to  the  first  radi 
cal:  pret.   Dj"5>  instead  of  DlpT5   inf.    Dip  >  for  Dp;  fut.  D^pN 
for  Dip?  (§  1T2,    6.    B.  3)  f  Hi.   D'jTT,  for  D'lbn  (§  ibid. 
§  12,  7;  a.);  Ho.  Dfmfor  DJpH  (§  12,  6,  B.,  3.)'(Kamets- 
Chat.  now  in  an  open  syllable  becomes  1  (§  14,  Length.  1.). 

6.  These  verbs  diflor  from  J7"J>  in  the  following   points  : 


§  53.     VERBS  V'y  AND 


99 


a.  The    vowel   in  Vtf  is    longer:  1  in   Kal,  >—  in  Hi.,  a 
vowel-letter  quiescing  in  it. 

b.  The  NL  has  a  final  Cholcm  DlpJ  •  for  D^5  fut.  DlpV 
for  Dip;  (the  1  becoming  \  §  12/7.  b.  2.)',  after  remov 
ing    the    mutable    Patach   in  pret.,    and  Tsere  and  the 
pretonic  Kamets  in  fut. 

7.  Intransitive  verbs  occur  with  middle  E.  and  0: 

nnp,  ns  (for  runs  §  12,  6.  B.).  Part,  no?  inf.  nto; 


NOTE.  In  some  verbs,  the  1  of  the  inf.,  imper.  and  fut,  is  al 
ways  quiescent  in  Cholera  :  as  TUX  to  be  light,  tf13  to  come, 
t^'13  to  be  ashamed,  XlD*1!  and  he  came. 

8.  The  apocopated  Fut.  is  Dp*>  with   Vav  Couv.   DJT1* 
with  gutturals  1D*1« 

9.  The  usual   form  of  2.  and  3.  pers.  pi.  fern,  is  given 
in  the  paradigm:  HMplpp;  a  form  like  jrjfc'jtl  is  sometimes 
met  with. 

10.  Several   verbs  Vj;  in  common  with  y"y  (§  52  Note  5.) 
double  the  first   radical  :    as  iTpfT  for  JTpn  .      Some   thus 
modify  the  signification:  as  IT^H  to  cause  to  rest,  (T^H  to 
permit,  suffer;   J^H   to  pass  the  night,   J^H  to  complain, 
murmur. 

11.  Verbs  '"J?,    Verbs  having  for  their  second  radical  a 
quiescent  >  have  a  twofold  inflection  in  Kal  ;  they  are  par 
tially  inflected  like  the  Kal  of  VJN  partially  like  its  Hiphil, 
after  having  removed  the   characteristic  syllable  of  Hiphil 
(H  and  H).     Several  verbs  occur  only  in  this  form,  others 
possess  both  forms  of  VJ7  and  *»y  :  as  J^  and  J^  » 

NOTE.  The  fut.  of  Hiphil  can  be  distinguished  from  that  of 
Kal,  by  the  signification  only:  as  J^  he  understands  (Kal),  DTDn 
he  gives  them  understanding,  Job  32,  8  (Tliphil). 

NOTE  II.  Not  seldom  Kal  and  Hi.  agree  in  sense  in  these 
•veVbs  (Vy  and  v'#):  ^U  to  rejoice,  Kal  and  Hi.  2T\  to  quar 
rel,  Kal  and  Hi.  D1&*  to  set,  put,  Kal  and  Hi.  etc, 


100  PAKT  1.     EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  88. 


5Din 


IK  o     DIB>;~»D  IOIK  DHN*   9n?  SD&  >p  :;pr 
nnn  njri  143T'5  :nipp  ^x  K^r?  13iy?  IK  12npt? 
raiS  18Dnpc>  17nrn  :16irv39  njn  I5pton  K1? 
pK  23iD>  noDra  niir  :221KDD  21pn  DVJ^  nin*  wy 

|      v  T  -  T          T    :    T    :  T      :  :    •  1     •    ••  •  -   T    *-          T       :  T    ^" 

n-Sx     IK  25Sba  : 


43 


vn^'Nn    42 


JJQD  nn     .      . 
nin?  ^3  :  DysTi  S 

y  61niKn 


to  despise1  (§  107,  4.)  void  of2  (§  84,  7.)  before3  gray  hair4  to  rise  up5  to 
honor6  the  face  of7  to  make8  mouth9  or10  deaf11  open-eyed12  blind13  to  re 
turn14  (§  107,  4.)  to  depart15  his  house16  to  tell17  lies18  to  be  firm,  estab 
lished19  before20  to  establish21  his  throne22  to  found,  to  lay  the  foundation 
(of  a  building)23  to  set  up,  fix24  3  bef.  inf.  const.25  (§  106,  2.)  to  exult,  re 
joice26  answer27  soft28  to  turn  .away29  wrath30  to  rest31  to  wait32  to  totter, 
to  shake33  to  raise34  vineyards35  to  shout,  sing36  to  shout  with  joy37  to  re 
move,  put  away38  anger,  grief39  to  set40  (prop,  to  come)  stones  of41  to  put, 
set,  lay42  n#K"VD  (from  CrJO)  place  of  the  head,  hence:  at  his  head43  first44 
to  raise45  pretend  .to  be  rich46  §  26,  6.  preten,d  to  be  poor47  to  mark,  attend48 
meditation,  prayer49  to  be  ashamed,  disappointed50  desire,  lust  of51  to  kill52 
horse53  to  be  prepared,  ready54  war55  help,  victory56  deed,  act57  to  bring,  lead58- 

EXERCISE  89. 

And  the  Lord  spake1  to  Moses,  saying :  Sends  men, 
that3  they  may  search4  the  land  of  Canaan.  And  tin?  men 


went  up5  and  came6  into  the  land  and  searched  it.  And 
they  returned?  from  searching  of  the  land  after®  forty9 
days™.  And  they  came  to  Moses  and  brought  back" 
wordis  to  himi2  and  said :  we  came  to  the  land  whither** 
thou  sentest  us  and  surelyis  it  is  very™  good.  Neverthe 
less^  the  people  be  strong^  that  dwell™  in  the  land. 
And  they  murmared20  against2i  Moses  and  said  :  Would 
God  that22  we  had  diedas  in  the  land  of  Egypt.  And 
wherefore  hath  the  Lord  brought24  us  to  this  land,  to' 
fal!25  by26  the  sword.  And  they  said  one  to  another2?, 
Let  us  raake28  a  captain29,  and  let  us  return  into  Egypt. 
And  David  besoughtso  God  foi-si  the  childsa,  and  he  fast- 
ed33  and  went  in  (pret.)  and  stayed  all  nights*  and  Iay35 
upon  the  earthse.  And  the  elders^?  of  his  house  arose^s 
(and  went)  to  him39,  to  raise4**  him  up  from  the  earth: 
but  he  would  not**-  And  it  came  to  pass42  on  the  sev- 
enth*s  clay  that44  the  child  died.  And  David  saw4^  that 
his  servants4**  whispered4?  and  he  perceived4^  that  the 
child*9  was  dead.  Thenso  he  arose  from  the  earth  and 
washed^1  and  anointed^  (himself52)  and  came  into  the  house 
of  God;  thenso  he  returned  into  his  (own)  house  and  (when) 
he  asked,  they  putss  bread  before  him  and  he  did  eat. 

4  (§  101,  3.  n.)  -Vr\    31   2  (§  84,  2)    1  Pi.  with  Vav  Conv.  -(31 
11  Hi.  3^      lOsing.  (§  92,  3)      9 


21^  20  Ni.  T-l1—?  IQpartic.  with  the  article  (§  96.  8)  18  (§  90,  2)  T^  I7  "3  D_2S^ 
~Sx  tf'X  26  3  25  ^3  J  24  part.  Hi.  ^13  23  pret.  n^  22  (§  116,  a)  would  God  that :  H 
32  nj?  J  31  nj»3  30  Pi.  with  Vav  Conv.  t^D3  29  Bffcn  28  pam?.  fut.  |J}3  27  (§  97,  4)  VHX 

38  with  Vav  Conv    Q-lD    37  npT    36H^1^    35pret.  33^    34 pret.  to  stay  all  night  nS 
I  -I:  •  T   :-  -T 

4«>n3y      45KT1      44  Vav  Conv.      43^3'^      42  ^\     41 H3N!      40  Hi,  CD^p 
SS^QVlC'  52Hi.  ^D  51  Vn^  50  Vav  Conv.   49  Pause  !  lS"    48  Hi.  ?-13   47  Hithp.  part.  #H 7 

I      -     T 

§  54.     VERBS  ,>S  • 

1.  The  third  radical  of  these   verbs   was  originally  V  of 
some  few  1, 

2.  All  forms  ending  with  the  third  radical,  change  t  into 


102  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


tl-  as  H^,  for  ty  (§  12,  7.  a,),  excepting  the  pass.  part. 
Kal,  which  is  regular  ^JU 

3.  To  all  those  forms  ending  with  a  consonantal  afform- 
ative,  (fi,  f\,  »fl>  Ij,  fO)  the  original  *  returns.  This  > 
quiesces  in  the  pret.  Kal  in  Chirek:  as  IV^  >  in  the  pret. 
of  the  other  active  conjugations,  promiscuously  in  Tsere 
and  Chirek:  as  ftty  and  JT^,  in  the  pret.  of  the  Passives, 
only  in  Tsere;  as  fVtyj  in  the  imperative  and  future  in 

Sehoi:  as  ' 


4.  In  the  3.  pers.  fern.  sing,  pret,,  fl  is  commuted   into 
n  >  in  order    to   avoid   the    repetition    of  ft  :  as  HD^Jl  ,  for 

nrfo, 

5.  Before  the  vocal  afformatives  p|,  *—  )  the  fi  drops  :    as 
17^  TOfb  for  ^jYUprop.  ^|,  ^n   (§  12,  6.  B.  3.). 

6.  The  ,1  quiesces 

in  all  the  pret.  forms  in  Kamets:  as  H^  >  JlS^  >  H^  etc.  ; 
in  all  the  imperat.  f.  in  Tsere:  as  fl^f.  11703  ^  etc.; 
in  all  the  fut.  and  part.  f.  in  Seghoi:  as  nSjlK 

etc, 


7.  The  inf.  const,  ends  in  all  the  conjugations  with  flV 

as  titty,  ni^n,  ni?^  etc. 

8.  The  apocopated    future    is    formed   by    throwing    off 
the   H    with    the    preceding    Seghoi,    whence   in   Kal    and 
Hiphil  forms  would  arise,  having  three  consonants  and  but 
one  vowel:    as  7^,  from  rv?#,   ^y_,   from  Jl^Jp,   which  to 
avoid  a  helping  Seghoi  is  used:  as  %  Kal,  htf'  Hi.  (formed 
like  the  Segholates  §  66.).     With  a  guttural'  the  helping 
vowel  is  Patach  :  as  y&    let  him  look,  (§  14,  Rising  IV.) 
with  Pe  Guttural,  &y«\  and  he  made,  (§  66,  10.). 

NOTE  I.  Sometimes  the  first  syllable  is  not  affected  by  the 
guttural:  as  *\rV\  and  it  was  kindled,  IITI  and  he  rejoiced, 
fD'!l  an^  ^ie  encamped. 

NOTE  II.  The  preformatives  of  the  apocopated  Future,  forming 
an  open  syllable  sometimes  has  Tsere  :  as  |£)^  and  we  turned  : 
and  she  wandered. 


§  54.     VERBS  fth  t  103 

NOTE  III.  The  helping  vowel  can  be  omitted  in  case  the  first 
radical  is  softer  in  sound  than  the  second,  (a  liquid  before  a  mute): 
as  3^*1  and  he  took  captive,  f^\  and  he  gave  to  drink. 

9.  In  the  verb  HiSn   to  see,    the    apocop.  fut.    has   two 
forms:  N'T  and  with  Yav  Conv.  NTK 

10.  rW  to  be.  pret.  2.  pers.  pi.  DfTO  '  with  V  DfVTTl; 
inf.  const  nVH  >  with  prefixes   DVH3>  ^V?;  imP-    "T.0; 
fut.  rViT»  fut  apocop.  VT>  in  pause  'IT,  with  Yav  Conv. 


11.  JIT!  to  live.    2.  pers.  pi.  pret.  Kal  DJl"rj>  inf.  Dl^rt' 
imp.  JTrT.  with  V  nTty  fut.  HW»  fut.  apoc.  TT),  in  pause 
*fT»  Hiphil  pret.  nTJil>  inf.  WQili 

12.  nnty  (original  IHJfO  to  bow  down.  Hithp.  nirj^^n. 

fut.  niqn^  ,  fut.  apoc.  Ynnt^  (for  inn0  (§  n.  Btog  iv.) 

13.  The  annexing  of  suffixes,  occasions  various  changes  : 
the   termination  H  with  the   preceding  vowel   drops  before 
the  suffix:  as  >^J£  (from  !"ttj£)  he   answered  me,  ^V  (from 
nV^)  he    has    commanded    thee.     Piel  ^j1??^'  (from  H7i), 
for  ^75^  Hiph.  ^yn.     In  the    third    person  fern.  sing. 
pret.,  the  suffix    is    attached    invariably   to  the  form  H7^  : 
as  *1"^J£»  he  has  made  me,  Piel  *40?3  '  (shaine)  has  cov 
ered  me,  §  44,  16,  in7Dl   it  shall  consume  it,  for  'i 

EXERCISE  90. 


rush 


n   nj;  23         njn  22 


104  PART  1.     EXERCISES, 


rnrv  w>  :D*D  3onp&rn  ^NE^-ONI  nnS 

T    :      '  :  v  7 

N  34nis:3  -33irrn  jrrirr  82w       rttflt?'4? 


6n^p  no 

to  build1  to  buy2  to  make  or  do  much,  increase3  words4  clouds5  to  be 
weighed6  for  thn  g-old  of?  Ophir8  to  drink9  death10  secret  of11  another  per- 
son12  to  disclose,  reveal13  to  wait14  to  stop15  his  ear16  the  cry  of  17  to  an 
swer18  lame19  to  be  equal-0  to  break  down21  to  weep22  to  laugh23  to  keep 
silence24  to  do25  a  declaration  of26  breath  of,  rnind  of27  enemy28  thirsty  2U 
to  give  to  drink30  help31  wait  for,,  hope  in32  to  hold  fast,  adhere  to33  instruc 
tion,  correction34  to  let  go35  to  associate36  possessor,  owner,  lord37  anger 
*}%  vj.^3  a  possessor  of  anger  =  an  angry  man38  §  89,  4.  perhaps39  enemy40 
sun-dial  (literally:  the  shadow  of  the  degrees)41  to  turn42  to  stop  from,  to 
desist43  help,  assistance44  to  want,,  to  be  without45  to  possess46. 

EXERCISE  91. 

If  ye  walk2  in  my  statutes1;  and  keep4  my  coramandmentss 
and  do5  them,  thenG  I  will  turn?  graciously1?  unto  you, 
and  make  you  fruitfuls  and  multiply  9  you,  and  establish  10 
my  covenant  withn  you.  Ye  shall  not  afflict^  a  father 
less  child.  If  thou  afflict13  him  and  he  cry14  at  alli5  unto 
me,  I  will  surely  16  hear  his  cry1?-  And  the  Lord  spake 
to  Joshua,  saying:  As18  I  was  with1^  Moses,  (so)  I  'will 
be  with  thee:  I  will  not  fail20  thee,  nor21  forsake  thee. 
Only22  he  thou  strong23  and  very  courageous24,  that2^ 
thou  mayest  observe26  to  do  according  to  all  the  law, 
which  Moses,  my  servant2*7*  commanded28  thee:  turn2^  -not 
from  it  to3«  the  right  hand31  or32  to  the  left33-  This34 
book35  of  the  law  shall  not1  depart^  out  of  thy  mouth  3  T, 
but38  thou  shalt  meditate3^  therein  day  and  night4^,  that41 
thou  mayest  observe42  to  do  according  to  all  that  is  writ 
ten  therein.  If  thou  return  to43  the  Almighty14*  thmi 


§  55.     VERBS  DOUBLY  ANOMALOUS.  105 

shalt  be  built  up4S-  From  the  confined  space46  I  called47 
upon  the  Lord48;  the  Lord  answered4o  me  in  the  large 
spaceso.  The  Lord  is  on  my  side51  :  what  can  (§  101,  III.  1.) 
do52  unto  me  man?  (It  is)  betted  to  trust54  in55  the 
Lord,  thanSG  to  put  confidence5^  in  man.  Thou  hast 
thrustss  sore59  at  me  thatso  I  might  fall;  butci  the  Lord 
helped  me.  Be2<3  not  wise^s  in  thine  (own)  eves.  And 
he  despised64  the  birthrightes.  My  well-belovedes  hath<n 
a  vineyard^.  And  he  fenced69  it  and  clearedit  of  stones™ 
and  built  "71  a  tower'2  in  the  midst  of  it,  and  he  looked^ 
that?4  it  should  bring  forth?5  grapes^,  and  it  brought 
forth  wild  grapes??- 

Hi.  H"»3     7HJ3     6Conv.  1      5  prot.  H^     4fut.      S-jSlXD      2Kal.  fut.  IjSn      1'nipH 

T  T  T  T  T      T 

12  Pi.  HJ.T  11  r\X  10  Hi.  with  Vav  Conv.  Q.1p  9  Hi.  with  Vav  Conv.  HJ'T.  8  with  Vav  Conv. 
18^X3  17ir»pj;V  16inf.  abs.  (§  105,  1)  15infin.  abs.  ($  105,  1)  14fut.  p^Jf  13  ftit. 
25infin.  with1?  24  (fut.  A.)  yDN  23  (fut.  A.)  pm  22  p^_  21^1  20111.  nS^  19  D^ 
SsbKD^  321  Slprp1  30  ace.  (§  85,  4)  291^0  28  Pi.  HI*  27  H3J^  26  ^ 

41'IVDS    40nl7'|l71DDr     39H:n      38  Conv.  1      S7,T3^      36  ^D       35^30      34  (§  83,  9) 
l<—  :  T:TT      T  TT 

50  arm    4onjjr    48  n1    47  with  acc,  x-jp^  46^5   4onj3    44^    43^  42iut. 

56(§91,  1)D      553      54HDH     533113     52  H^    51  on  my  side  =  to  me 
i'DS    64  with  Vav  Conv.  HT3    63  DDH    62  rTH     61  1     60  with  inf.  ^     59  inf.  abs.  (g  105  1) 


73  Pi.  HIP     72VUD     71HJ3     70  Pi.  SpD    69  Pi.  pT>»     68'TT     67  hath  =  was  to    66D^3 
•  -  -T  •  • 

76  DJJ      75  «T^    74  with  inf>    ' 


§  55.     VERBS  DOUBLY  ANOMALOUS. 

Doubly  anomalous  verbs  have  two  radicals,  both  sub 
ject  to  the  anomalies  of  the  different  irregular  verbs:  as 
XVI  to  bear,  carry,  belong  to  J"£  and  tf"7>  HDN  to  be  will 
ing"  to  N"3  and  H"1?  . 

Verbs  of  the  most  frequent  occurrence  of  this  kind  are  : 

a,  fT'S  and  N"D>  H5K  to  bake,  fut,  Kal  H^  . 

6.   H"S  and  K),  HD^  to  smite,  pret.  tli.  HDH-  part.  H^D', 

fut.  n?'>   with  Vav  Conv.   T|*V  imp.   H3H  ,  apocop.  t|H, 

inf.   nlDPI'  particip.  Ho.    H?p5  HDJ  to    bow,     incline, 

14 


106  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


fut.    Kal    H^.with  Vav  Conv.  tO?V   tut.  Hi,   i"l{£,with 
Vav  Conv.   D>1, 

c.  >£  and  X<h>  NEty  flit.  Kal  N&»,  inf.  ntttf  and  fi^ty  , 
imper.  N*£'3  and  ft&% 

d.  X"S  and  >"2,  N*£  to  go  out,  fut.  Kal  Ntf',  imp.  NJf,  inf. 

>  Hi      ret/K'^  fut.  NW  • 


26 


e.  |T^  and  *"£,  HI*  to  throw,  Hi.  to  confess,  to  give 
thanks.  Piel  fut.  VT_1  and  they  cast,  (for  !pT»l  (§  12, 
Eeject.  B.  3.),  Hi.  fut.  iT^iS  with  suff.  ^"|1kX,  pret, 

n*jin,  part,  niio* 

/.    yy  and   ^wS   Nl3Tto    come,    Kal  pret   ND^HND,  fut. 
lSt*  Hi.    to  cause  to  come,  lead,    "bring.,  pret.  NOrT* 


EXERCISE  92. 


i^*^^ 

nni^  jD'Sj;  nirr  itrn  DID  to??  DW. 


"in 


•7     niiTTi^  :43nkxr  nn^j;  nw-n!  ^  tg 

in   N 


§  5f>.     Ix  GENERAL.  10T 

the  wid,  remoteness  of1  to  go  up2  the  mountain  of3  to  teach4  ways5  paths6 
to  go  forth7  the  word  of8  to  give  thanks,  to  praise9  to  fear,  be  afraid10  to 
bear11  the  yoke12  youth13  to  vex,  to  be  extortionate14  to  oppress15  out  of  the 
bosom16  subject  of  the  sentence17  to  pervert18  the  ways  of19  to  incline20  the 
words  of21  wise  men22  to  set,  direct,  turn23  to  withhold24  to  beat25  to  die26 
to  cover27  to  prosper28  to  confess29  to  obtain  mercy30  to  incline31  the  right 
hand32  the  left  hand33  (§  85, 4.)  to  sit,  abide34  to  go  out35  to  come36  to  ask,  in 
terrogate37  the  beasts38  to  tell39  to  speak40  to  declare41  the  fishes  of42  ($  81 . 1  .)43 
to  serve44- 

EXERCISE  93. 

My  son,  fear1  them  the  Lord  and  the  king.  Jerusalem 
bear2  thy  shame3-  Peradventure4  there  be5  fifty6  right 
eous  within?  the  city :  wilt  thou  also8  destroy9  and  not 
spare10  the  place  for11  the  fifty  righteous  that  are  therein12? 
Thou  shalt  not  bear  a  false14  report13?  neither15  shalt  thou 
answer16  in1?  a  quarrel18  to  incline19  after 20  many  to 
wrest21  (judgment).  Trust22  in  the  Lord,  and  He  shall 
bring  forth23  thy  righteousness24  as  the  light.  Who 
would  not  fear 2 5  Thee,  0  King  of  nations26?  Arise27 » 
get  thee  out28  from  this  land29  and  return3®  to  the  land 
of  thy  kindred3!-  I  (am)  a  little33  lad32:  I  know34  not 
(how)  to  go  out35  or  come  in36-  Thou  coiriest  to  me  with3? 
a  sword  and  with  a  spear38?  but39  I  come  to  thee  in  the 
name  of  the  Lord  of  Hosts40-  This  day  will  the  Lord 
deliver41  thee  into42  my  hand,  and  I  will  smite43  thee  and 
take44  thine  head  from  thee4"*,  that46  all  the  earth  may 
know4?  that48  there  is49  a  God  in  Israel.  Go  and  I  will 
be  with50  thy  mouth,  and  teach51  thee  what  thou  shalt 
say 52.  Amiss  Jehu54  came  to  Jezreel55  and  Jezebel56  heard 
(of  it):  and53  she  puts?  paint58  (on)  her  eyes  and53  tired59 
her  head  and53  glanced60  out  at61  the  window62-  And 
Jehu  came  in  at63  the  gate64,  and53  he  lifted  up65  his 
face66  to  the  window,  and  said  :  Who  (is)  on  my  side6?, 
who?  And53  there  glanced  out  on68  him  two69  (or)  three70 
eunuchs?1-  And  he  said,  Throw?2  her  down.  So53  they 
threw  her  down:  and53  (some)  of  her  blood  spirted73  on 
the  wall74-  and  on  the  horses:  and  he  trod  her  under 
foot?3- 


108  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 


7}lf\3      BD'Bfon      5^     4^S'K      3}rra^      2  Jerusalem  fern,  (g  57,  5  3)  tffrj 
ir^|    16njy    15  and  not    Utf)#    13j?Dtf    12,13^3 

24>l|Tp?  23  Hi-  Pret-  with  c.  i  ,  xr  22HD3    aim. 

33jbj}      32  l£j      3irjrnSlD      SOmtf      29fem.      28  tfr      27  Dip      26  D\U      25fut.  K 
42J    41Pi.  1JD    40nW!JX      391      38^jn      373      36  inf.  gl  3      35  inf.  «r      34fut.  J» 
48^     47fut.  yV      461      45Syp    44  Hi.  pret.  with  C.  %  -|1D    43  Hi.  pret.  with  C.  1,  rD 
65  [§  19.  6J  SN|np  54N>n;.   53Conv.  1    52  Pi.  13T    51  Hi.  pret.  with  C.  1,  HT  50  D#    49 
59  Hi.  fut.  3D'     58  [transl.  she  made  with  (3)  paint  her  eyes]  ^3      57  Hi.  fnt 
67  ^X    66D'J3     65  fut.  N^j      64  Pause  !  Y^    633      62jftn     61^3    60  Hi.  fut. 
74-|^      73  fut.  with  C.  1,  nrj      72£0^>       71  iHTO^D      70  H^      69  D'J#       6 

.75  fut.  with  C.  ],  0 


CHAPTER  X: 

NOUNS. 

§  56.     IN  GENERAL. 
FORMATION  AND  INFLECTION. 

1.  The  nouns  are:  a)  Primitives,  b)  Derivatives.  The 
more  numerous  derivatives  are  for  the  most  part  derived 
from  verbs;  Verbal  nouns;  as  HJnD  a  gift,  from  |DJ  to 
give;  njTT  knowledge,  from  JH»  tcTknow.  Nouns  derived 
from  other  nouns  are  called:  Denominatives:  as  HD'p  archer, 
from  rw'n  bow. 


2.  The    derivation    is    effected    in    the    same    manner  as 
with  verbs: 

a.  By  Vocalization,  or  the  modification  of  vowels:  as  TlSp 
king,  from  Tj^O  to  reign. 

I.  By  .Reduplication,  or  the  doubling 'of  one  radical,  gen 
erally  the  second,  or  of  two  of  the  radicals:  as  33 j 
thief,  from  DJJ  to  steal,  f]p9D§  rabble,  (people  gathered 
together  from  all  quarters)' from  fptf  to  gather. 

c.  By  Augmentation,  i.  e.  the  prefixing  or  postfixing  of  one 
or  more  of  the  formative  letters  VfOENrT  (nomina  he- 


§  50.     IN  GENERAL.  109 

•  emantica)  :    as  Dlpp  place,    from  Dip  to    stand,  pS"!p 
eastern,  from  D"1p  to  be,  come  before,  in  front. 

3.  a.     By  Vocalization  : 

StOp  >  this  class  contains  as  many  adjectives  as  substan 
tives",  Twhich,  being  of  the  old  participial  form  (cf.  act. 
part,  in  verbs  Vtf  :  Dp  =  DNp .  for  D1p>>  express  either  the 
attribute,  or  the  attribute  and  subject  together:  as  Dpfl 
wise,  or  wise  man,  DHJ  gold  (the  glittering,  sc.  metal). 
Frequently  the  proMuciTor  result  of  an  action  is  signified: 
as  -6l  child,  prop,  he  that  is  born,  natus ;  3\T\  an  object 
seized  with  rottenness,  (from  Dp"!  to  rot). 

Stpp>  these  nouns  are  intransitive,  but  when  derived 
from  transitive  verbs,  passive :  as  ^DN  mourning,  NDD  un 
clean,  fp|  old,  7^5  cooked,  done. 

VitOp '  (partic.  of  verbs  mid.  0)  intransitive  and  passive 
adjectives,  &  few  only  in  use  as  substantives :  as  7l"!j  great, 
DV")p  near,  Dlb^  peace. 

Stpip*  StDp  >  (regular  act.  partic.)  (cf.  §  35). 

7lDp '  (reg.  pass,  part.)  passive  and  intransitive  adjec 
tives  :  as  nifc^D  anointed,  D1¥l?  strong. 

I  -  T  T 

^^tpp'  (Chaldaizing)  (pass,  part.)  1.  passive  substantives: 
as  TDK  prisoner,  captive,  from  ^IDK  to  bind,  to  fetter,  (it 
is  distinguished  from  SltOp  by  being  always  used  as  a 
noun,  while  the  latter  is  a  participle  only).  2.  Names  of 
dignity  are  often  thus  formed :  as  TPp^  a  sovereign,  ruler, 
Tp5  an  officer,  TJ13  overseer,  j^p  a  judge,  prince.  3.  The 
season  or  time  in  which  the  action  of  the  verb  is  perform 
ed:  as  T¥p  harvest  (prop,  time  o/ cutting,  reaping) 
time  of  plowing. 

T'LDp  (for  b'Ktpp  >  hence  the  Kamets 
ALDO '  hence    the    Tsere    immutable). 

"   |   :  i    •  v   • 

mostly  inf.  forms  of  abstract  meaning:  2H5  a  writing, 
a  howling,  plPlV  laughter,  3^)  a    military    post, 
border, 

cf.  §  00. 


110  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

3.  b.  .By  Reduplication  : 

^9p  (Kamets  immutable),  a)  adjectives  intensifying  the 
sense  :  £'Vf  very  weak,  K|[5  jealous,  b)  nouns  of  habitual 
occupation  :  TOtt  cook,  qjj  thief,  Bhn  (for  #in)  smith. 

7t?p>  adjectives,  denoting  a  permanent  bodily  defect: 
*T)#  blind,  D^N  dumb,  Bnn  (for  Bnn)  deaf. 

7l£3p>  a  small  class,  adjectives  and  substantives:  ""1123 
strong,  substantively  :  a  strong  one,  hero,  Ti3t?  adj.  and 
subst.  drunk,  intoxicated,  a  drunkard,  *Yisy  a  bird,  prop. 
the  chirping,  twittering,  from  *)£¥  (Arab.)  to  twitter,  to 
pipe. 

7l£3p>  passive  and  intransitive:  TOJ^'  bereaved,  f^ll  com 
passionate,  pnn  (for  plH)  a  diligent  one. 

Vtp[5  >  adjectives  and  substantives:  pH¥  righteous,  *VDX 
fettered.  Instruments  of  action  :  V&'i  an  axe,  a  hoe. 

77tpp.  nouns  in  which  the  third  radical  is  doubled: 
nrp$  a  young  brood,  knaves  ;  JJgg?  quit,  undisturbed;  Mjn 
green,  fresh. 

I  StoStOp  '  nouns  *n  which  the  last  two  radicals  are  dotib- 

1  Sb^^     led  :   D^'1>-  reddish,  nnnn^  blackish,  denot- 

^       =  -R'   ing  colors,    i.    e.    an   inclination  to    the    color 

specified  (English:  ish).  Many  nouns  of  this  class,  compensate 

for  the  reduplication  of  the  radical  by  doubling  or  length 

ening  the  vowel  :   DD13  star,    for  rD5?>  from  33  (Arab?)  to 

shine,    to  glitter;  fj^ljp,  for  *]&$&  a  band,    a  fillet,    from 

£]CD  (Arab.)  to  bind   about;  S^f/for  ^3^5,  Aram,  to   con 

fuse,  Hebr, 


3.  c.     /??/  Augmentation  : 

N-  Prefixed: 

I.  0  as  a  preformative  occurs  frequently,  it  comes  either 
from  p  ,  np>  to  give  the  idea  of  an  objective  :  who,  what., 
somewhat,  or  it  is  related  by  its  labial  character  to  the  prepo 
sition  3"-=  in,  %,  on.  Accordingly,  nouns  of  this  class  de 
note  something,  somewhat,  1)  in  which,  2)  by  which,  3)  at 


§  56.     IN  GENERAL.  Ill 

which,  or  on  which  the  action   expressed    by    the    root  is 
performed: 

1)  r?3tp  an  altar,  (from  POt  to  sacrifice)  i  e.  on  which  sac 
rifices  are  offered  ;  Hjnp  pasture,  (from  tlV*\  to  feed)  i.  e. 
where   there   is    feeding,    IHND   an    ambush,    (fr.   3*")X  to 
lurk)    where    there    is    lurking  ;    Dlpft  place,    (fr.    Dip  to 
stand)  where  one  stands. 

2)  finOD  key,    (from  nfl5   to    open)    an    instrument  by 
which  one  opens  a  lock;  &Tp£  a  mortar,  (fr.  £TO  to  beat 
to  pieces,  to  pound)  a  vessel  for  pulverizing. 

3)  Jllp^/J    booty,    (fr.   HpS   to   take)  =  what   is  taken; 
li/t^p   a  possession,    (fr.    rhtif  to  stretch  forth  the  hand) 
object  to  which  one  stretches  his  hand. 

II.  H  »  generally  abstract  substant.,  hence  for  the  most  part 
with  f.  formation:  Jljpfl  the  hope,  (fr.  Hip  to  hope);  jl>>$ri 
prayer,    (fr.  ^£  to    pray)    PO^II  a  return,    a  reply,    (fr. 
3W  to    return)  ;  JOTl  m.  the   south,  (fi\  JO*  to  be    on  the 
right  hand). 

III.  N  >  is  a  prepositive,    a)  usually    to    give    easy   pro 
nunciation,  when  the  first  of  the  two  initial  consonants  is 
a  sibilant  :   bO£l#  and  -Sb^)  yesterday  ;  PnjJVf?  and  i"n#  V 
bracelet:  J^hf^  and  JHf  arm;    b)  to   intensify   the   action: 
3J3^  drying    up    (properly    deceiving,  lying,    from  3ft   to 
lie),  IftK  bold,    daring.   (Aktal,  the   regular  Arabic  form 
of  the  comparative  and  superlative). 


IV.  *>  >  often  in  proper  names:  as  pHV!  Isaac,  DpJ^  Jacob, 
Some  are  formed  from  the  future,  the  3.  p.  m.  s.  having 
been  converted  into  a  substantive  :  as  *"iny*  oil,  (properly  : 
it  shines,  gives  light,  from  Tl¥  to  shine',  lighten)  ;  3H* 
adversary,  enemy,  (prop,  he  strives,  from  31")  Hi.  to  strive)^ 
Dip*?!  a  bag  (prop,  it  gathers,  from  tDp^  to  gather,  to  col 
lect)  ;  Qlp^  an  existing,  living  thing  (prop,  it  is,  stands, 
from  Dip  to  be,  stand). 


112  .PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

D ,  Affixed: 

1.  The  most  important  is  j"f—  (to  which  jl—  or  H—  cor 
responds)  :    tins,  besides  indicating  the  lem.   gender  (§57.) 
is  appended  :  a)  to  the  infinitive,    to  give  it  a  substantive 
sense:  njfi?(#  the  hearing  ;  fljn  knowledge,    b)  to  convey 
an  abstract   meaning  ;   n&'jTQ  a  request,   HKDfl  sin.   H^IN 
foolishness,  fiTIJJ.  blindness,  Hrttp  (fr.  Hip  "to    burn)    the 
burning  or  heat  of  fever. 

2.  D1>  D— >  p,  07  >  f—  *   (the    last    not    so   often,    the 
Kaniets  frequently  immutable).     These  terminations  form : 
a.   Adjectives :  p  jTH  outer,  exterior  ;   p")r?N  binder,  latter. 
6.  Concrete    and    abstract    nouns :    f^3  a  building,   pDJH 

hunger,  scarcity. 

c.  Diminutives :  p{?>tf  (from  #'N)  little  man  (of  the  eye), 
pupil ;  p"ny  (from  -)}¥  or  ^NW)  neck. 

d.  D1  occurs    many    times    as    an    adverbial    termination : 
DNrUP   suddenly,    DlB^'  and    Dfe^'  the    day    before 

-    yesterday. 

e.  D—  >  an  old  accusative  ending,  the  words  that  have  re 
tained  it,  are  mostly   adverbs:  D3H  in  vain,  DpH  emp 
tily,  vainly,  DmTO  to-morrow. 

3.  *— ,  this  termination  forms    a)  adjectives  from  nouns: 
^1£V   northern,    from   p^  the    north,   >nf7j-)  lower,    from 
rilir)  the  under  part,    b)  Gentile  nouns   and  patronymics  : 
'^Vnty  an  Israelite,  n.3J?  a  Hebrew,  HVV  a    Jew,    nVO   an 
Egyptian.     The   feminine  is  either  JT—  or  IT— J  HHVQ  an 
Egyptian  woman,  JlHDi^  a  Hebrew  woman. 

4.  fV—- »  H1  form  abstract  nouns:   rV^N"")  the   beginning, 
f^b?5  kingship,  rule. 

4*  Compound  words  are  for  the  most  part  proper  nouns: 
as  ^N'D^O  (El  is  King),  T|^^N  (Ab  is  King).  Com 
pound  appellatives  are  rare :  jT^jpNO  horrible,  frightful 
darkness  (the  appended  PP  God,  intensifies  the  idea  §  91,  d.). 

5*  The  primitive  as  well  as  the  derivative  nouns  are 
inflected,  to  indicate  : 


§  57.     THE  GENDEII.  113 

«.   the  grammatical  conditions  of  gender  and  number  ; 
b.  the  attributive  relations  of  the  noun.     These  latter  are 
twofold  : 

1.  A  noun  in  the  genitive  or  possessive   case  follows  as 
an  attribute,  with  which    the  preceding  word   is  joined  or 
put  in  the   Const,  state    (§  11),  5.):  T]^£PT  "0*1  the   king's 
word.  i 

2.  Suffixes  are  appended  to  the  noun  :  H!fJ  my  word. 


§  57.     THE  GENDER, 

1  .  The  genders  are  two  :  masculine  and  feminine  ;  a  neu 
ter  gender  in  Hebrew  is  wanting. 

2.  The  gender   can  be  ascertained  :    a)  from  the  signifi 
cation  of  the  noun,  b)  from  its  termination. 

3.  Masculine  by  signification  : 

a.  The  names  of  men  and  males  in  general  :  as  DN  father, 
7]^5  king. 

b.  The  common  and  proper  nouns  of  nations,  rivers,  mount 
ains  and  months:    as  DJ^  people,  ^H3  river,  "in  mount 
ain,    CHI!  month,   jJ/^5  Canaan,    |TV  the  Jordan,    WQ 
Sinai,  Jp^  Nisan,  the  first  month  of  the  Hebrew   yean 

t1.  The  names  of  seasons  :  as  D'DX  Spring. 
d.  The  names  of  metals  :    as  DHJ  gold  ;    except  D^fl}  cop 
per,  and  rndj?  lead,  which  are  fern. 

4.  Masculine  by  termination  : 

5$)  The  masc.  has  no  characteristic  termination,  hence 
nouns  ending  with  original  radical  letters  can  most  fre 
quently  be  considered  masculine:  as  "UljJ.a  garment. 

3)  Nouns  ending  with  i"l>  preceded  by  Seghol:  as  •Tib' 
a  field. 

j)  Most  of  those  nouns  ending  with  *—  ,  D1  >  D~  >  ]—  or 
|__:  as  v\yy  a  Hebrew,  D1H.3  a  ransom,  |5")p.  a  sacrifice, 
p&»>N  the  pupil  of  the  eye. 

5.  Feminine  by  significations 

15 


114  PART  I.     EXERCISES, 

a.  Names  of  women  and  females  in  general :  H£*N  woman, 
•"O^p  queen,  IT3J£  a  female  gazelle. 

b.  Common  and  proper   nouns    of  countries,   cities,  towns  : 
as  1*J7  city,  fltf  land,   country,  1UTX  Assyria,  Dv£HT 
Jerusalem. 

NOTE.     In  case   the  names   of  countries   or  cities    represent   the 
people  or  nation  living    in  them,    they  are  masculine;    as  HI^H 
(applied  to  the  people)  Jews.     Compare:  7i33  ni^H*  Iw«,  3,  8.  and 

iirip^  rnirr  nrrn  PS.  114,  ±  onyp  i^T.  19, 10. 

c.  Names  of  the  members  of  the  body,  which  are  in  pairs  : 
as  1*  hand,  731  foot. 

6.  Feminine  by  termination  : 

I.  Nouns  with  the  accented  final  syllable  H— •'  as  HODI"! 

T  T      :      T 

wisdom. 

II.  Nouns    with   the   unaccented   final    syllable  fl—  arid 
after  gutturals  fi— :  as  nipJ7  crown,  nj^ll^D  acquaintance, 
and  with  the  accented  ending  JV — >  H^  fl— :  as  JlHIlK  the 

T  •-:  - 

end,  J"VO*7£  kingdom,  HIIlD  the  morrow. 

7.  Many  nouns  are  used  in  both  genders  :  as  fin  wind, 
K  fire,  Tpl  way. 

EXERCISE  94. 

onyo 


nin 


o^  ^i  in  NV 


ni.  nx?  29n       :~r?  nb'y  nin^     ^  27nrn  nir 


§  57,     THE  GRXDER.  115 


n»  37njn  36[# 

Aramaea,  Syria1  Damascus2  Ephraim  (the  kingdom  of  Israel)3  Samaria4 
a  leaf5  to  sprout,  blossom6  with7  inhabitant  of*  n.  p.  of  a  city9  take  pos 
session  of  10  to  dispossess,  drive  out11  (  §  83,  6.)12  spear13  javelin14  *yv* 
(H  of  Hi.  retained)  (§  117)15  preeminence,  excellence16  more  than1?  (§  91,  2.) 
follyis  (§  12,  6.  B.  3.)19  Tyre2<>  fortress2i  (§  97,  2.)22  to  heap  up23  fine 
gold24  the  mire  of25  street26  to  be  high,  lofty27  strength,  Vn  nfrj?  to  do 
valiantlyss  (§96,  4)29  nnp\  const,  st.  of  HHp'  obedience,  respect^0  mother31 
to  pick  out32  ravens  of33  the  valley34  young  eagles3-1*  tooth,  masc.36  Hjn 
(part  m.  from  ]?}Q>  with  accentless  H—  )  to  be  broken,  to  be  rotten37  (for 
rnj,Vpp  ],  37,  5  Note  I)  to  be  made  to  waver38  trust  in39  (§  88,  4.)  an 
unfaithful  man.40 

EXERCISE  95. 

By  reason  of1  (the)  cold2  (the)  sluggards  will  not  plow4? 
therefore5  shall  he  beg6  in  harvest,  and  have  nothing7- 
The  ravens^  brought^  to  Elijah1®  bread  and  flesh  in  the 
morning,  and  bread  and  flesh  in  the  evening.  Tyre11  wan 
a  mart  of12  nations.  Beprobate1^  (§  90,  2.)  silver  they  call 
them,  because  the  Lord  hath  rejected14  them.  Their  landir> 
is  full15  of  silver  and  gold1"-  The  silver  and  the  gold  was 
weighed  in  the  house  of  God  by  the  hand  of18  the  priest1-'- 
Lo,  the  winter2o  is  past21)  the  rain22  is  over23  (and)  gone24; 
the  fig  tree25  putteth  forth26  her  green27  figs2*7-  When2« 
a  wicked.29  man'dieth,  (his)  expectation31  shall  perish^: 
and  the  hope32  of  unjust33  (men)  perisheth.  Weepiiig3^ 
may  endure35  for  a  night34)  but37  joy3''  (cometh)  in  38  the 
morning.  The  realm41  of  Jehoshaphat42  was  quiet40; 
and  his  God  gave  him  rest43  round  about44-  When4**, 
pride46  cometh4^  then47  cometh  shame48-  The  end4^  of 
the  wicked  shall  be  cut  off50-  A  river  went  out  to  water^i 
the  land.  Gihon52  coinpasseth^s  the  whole  land  of  Ethi 
opia^.  8inair>5  and  Tabor-™  are57  mountains.  SivW  isr»7 
Hie  second59  month.  HebronGO  \^7  the  city  of  graves6*- 
The  eye'>2  sees63,  the  ear  hears. 

7  to  have  nulling    'K,  Pause!    6S«        5  C«nv.  1     4^^n     3  Sy>»    2  rSp     1  By  roawju  of  n 


MO  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


ISpart.  Ni.  OXD      12  ^Hp      11  12f     lOirrx     9  part.  Hi.  Ni3     SQ'SS;? 
20  vnO    19  jrU)    18  T_  Sj?     17  3ri7    M  DV"IN    15  Ni.  fut.  with  Conv.  1,  with  ace.  (§  85,  2  a) 

28  inf.  with  3  (§  106,  2)    27  rVJ3    26  gjn  25  rUiXJl    24  (§  84,  2)  }Sn  23  n^p  22  D#3  21  13  Tt 
T    v-  ~T  T  ••  :  I*-  T  I-  T  v  v  *•  -T 

38  ^    371    36'33    35  pS    34  31;»3     SSQ'jiX      32nSnifi      3013K      31  mpn      29t»Bh 

'•'    VT  VV  -  T  Tl:     •  T    -T 

to  give  rest  n-1J  Hi.      42  DS^l'lT       4iroS]0      40  to  bo  quiet  JOpr,  with  Conv.  1    39nj1 

50Ni.  part.  r\"O    4gr\'"»nX    48-n'Sp    47  Con  v.  1  46  nil    45  part.   44  3'3DD    43  with  Conv  1 
~T  ""r-IlT  IT  •  T  • 

69  ^    58  H    57f§77,3j    56  113^     65'J'D    54*^3     53  part.  33D    52  pp'J     51  Fli.  HDiT 

ITT 


§_r>8.     THE  PLURAL  AND  DUAL. 

1.  Masculine   nouns    form    their   plural  by  adding  D'—  » 
feminine  by  adding  j"V)  to  the  singular:  as  D'D1D>  from  DID 
horse,  rVTUS'5  ,  from  IN?  a  well. 

NOTE  I.  The  mnsc.  plural  sometimes  is  p  —  :  as  p^*J  Job  18,  2. 
Prov.  31,  3.  Micha  3,  1*2.  More  seldom  ^—  :  as  ^"\  Cant,  8,  '2. 
*jp  Ps.  45,  9.  In  later  Hebrew  (Mishna)  the  ending  p—  is  the 
common  pne:  as  fHIp  >  pp^DSD'  PpJ^'D  5  sometimes  ^ithout  the  ?  : 
asHTDO.  nU>  ^H.  A  few  add'—  after  the  Syriac:  HCS 
and  thus  ^"iX  Lord  (§  82,  4.  b.). 

2.  Nouns    ending    with  ^—  ,take  D  only:    as  DH^'^1'0111 
H!)J^orthe  'final  ^  of  the  noun  is  omitted  and   indicated  by 
Dagesh  :  as  D'V?'  from  ^  , 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  !"T—  drop  this    syllable   when   form 

ing   the   plural:    as  DUfT  from  rijtl  (part,    act,    from  H^n 
to  encamp.) 

4.  Fern,    nouns    in  H—  »   D—  >  HI  change   these   termina 
tions    into  HV  as  rTTiri  law,    pi.    rinlH;   rnrJD  a   crown, 

pi.  nlinb  (§  72.)  nnj;  a  precept,  pi.  nny.. 

5.  The  fern,  ending  j"V—  is  to  be  considered  as  a  contrac 
tion  from  JT—  ;  hence  the  plural  (fl—  being    changed   into 
Hi)  HV-:  as  H^3P  pattern,  model,  pi.  nWJfl  • 

Nouns  with  two  fern,  terminations  in  JT—  and  IT—  »  form 
the  plural  from  the  latter,  thus  nVJirtfl  the  lowest  parts, 
the  depths:  DlH^i*  Hebrew  women,  f.  HHDJ*  and 


§    5$.       PU'KAL    AND    Dl'AL.  117 


NOTE  II.     Some  nouns  form  the  plural  irregularly :    as 
kingdom,  pi.  nl^P »  *"^P  and  rfiJOO'from  ^39  a  Part', por 
tion;  fiiTOX*  for  fiiftN/from   H/pN  a  maid4  servant,  D'N^t? » 
for  D'Stt,  from  nStO  a  lamb,  HINDOO  >  for  flTOP*  fr°m  HTDP 

.    T  •.•   T  :     :    •  :     '  T    : 

a  fold.  Such,  or  similar  plural  terminations  by  prefixing  S  X  or  Jl, 
are  very  common  in  the  language  of  the  Mishna:  as  HinDX* 
from  QX  mother ;  niTV)N»  fr°m  H1N  letter  ;  fTfap'D ,  from  |£'p 
*i£n;  hifrOlt^'  from  JTVT^  back-bone,  spine. 

T    :  v  T    :  v 

Of.   Geigcr,  Lelirlnch  znr  Spraclie  der  Misclma.  P.  49,   8. 

6.  Nouns  used  in  both  genders  (§  57,  7.),    in  the  plural 
often  terminate  both  in  D*—  and  HI :  as  D^f£5^J  and  nlt^S)^ ' 

7.  Nouns  (both  masc.  and  fern.)  representing  objects,  con 
sisting    naturally  or  artificially    of  two    parts    or  in    pairs 
(especially  the  members  of  human  or  animal  bodies)  term 
inate  in  D' — »  called  the  Dual   ending:  as  D^"l  feet,  DH* 
hands  :  D'dpVj  (m.)  tongs,  snuffers. 

8.  In  a  few  instances  the  dual   denotes    not  a  pair,  hut- 
simply    the    number    two:    as  D)OV   two    days,  DT^ti^'  two 
years. 

NOTE  III.  In  the  dual  ending  the  tone  rests  on  the  penult  (— ), 
the  Chirek  being  only  a  helping  vowel,  which  drops,  when  the 
word  is  lengthened. 

9.  Many  nouns  occur  only   in  the  form  of  a  plural  :    as 
D\J£)  lace,  D"fl  life,  DUIpt  old  age. 

10.  A  considerable    number  of   rnasc.    nouns    form  their 
plural    in  HI :  as  DiSt  father,    pi.  rVOK;  IVIN  treasure,    pi. 
j"TnViN ;  ")X3  or  112  cistern  ;   JJ  roof,    PO^P  altar  ;   D'l /H 
dream;    JV-iH  vision;    ND3   s°at,   throne;    ITi^  tablet;    ^ 
night;  Titfb  light;  1DO  rain;  DlpO  place;  ^pD  staff',  stick; 
p^'P  habitation;  "U  lamp:  *T\y  skin;  "tojMust-,  D1V  a  fast, 
fasting;  ^ip  voice;  Dip  encounter,  battle;   *")£}<it^  trumpet, 
curved  horn ;  JH^  a  table ;  DL^  name,  etc.,  and  vice  versa 
many    fern,    nouns  in  D*~ :   as  !"U^  y^ar,  pi.  D\?l 
woman,  pi.   DW;  \*3$  stone,    D'JDX;  H^5  egg  ; 

cake  of  dried    figs  ;   ni'iD'l  a  bee  f  h"1  law  ;    H^fl  wheat  ', 
]  darkness  ;  Jl^V  dove  :  n^D^  brick  or  tile  ;  Jl^D  word; 


IKS  P.UIT  L     EXKKCTSKS. 


O,}   ant:  TJ,*  city,  pi.  DHJ/*;  HfC'S  flax:  rnj'fc'  harloy: 
fi-tree  etc. 


EXERCISE  96. 


D'MnS  tfS  D   nnS^n  atos 


T3 


j?  07^ 


i? 


^•ccj   :36nio/p  -35^3>x  34npj;  33pT-rp  j^ 

41n.jpT3  40ni^  39D^r  38r5'  nani  njn§ 
jn  :n?rr 


n.  p.1  light,  swift2  one  of3  roebucks4  Samson5  to  bore  through,  put 
out6  to  bring  down7"  to  Gaza8  to  land9  fetters  of  copper10  to  grind11 
(  #  107,  8.)  captives,  prisoners1'2  a  running,  race18  men  of  understanding14 
men  of  skilU5  favor16  chance17  to  happen18  tongue19  tribe  of-0  priesthood, 
oiHce  of  the  priest21  possession,  estate  of--  the  tectli-3  the  srnoke'-4  de- 
lijrht25  burnt  offering26  sacrifice27  hear,  obey28  decay,  rottenness'29  bone:i() 
jealousy,  envy'11  gent,  noun  fern,  pi.32  p.  n.  of  a  son  of  Japhet  (Gen.  10, 
(L  4)  the  founder  of  the  Greeks,  Ionian^'3  stand  up.  arise-'14  four15  king 
dom30  to  dream37  seven38  ears  of  corn39  come  up40  stalk,  cane41  full42 
souls43  a  drop  of44  a  bucket45  the  small  dust46  a  balance47  to  count48- 

EXERCISE  D7. 

The  Lord  hearethi  the  poor2-  And3  AbsalonH  pre 
pared5  him  horses  and  men  to  run6  before7  him.  There 
is  no8  God,  are  the  thoughts9  of  the  wicked.  Clod  know- 
ethio  the  secrets11  of  the  heart.  J  wl^mcutsis  are  pre- 


§  59.     THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE.  119 

pared12  for  scorners,  and  stripes14  for  the  back15  of  fools. 
And16  Uzziah17  built  towers  in  Jerusalem  and  in  the  des 
ert  and  digged18  many  wells19*  for  lie  had20  much  cattle21  > 
husbandmen22  (also)  and  vine-dressers23  in  the  mountains 
and  in  Carmel24:  for  he  loved  husbandry25-  There  are27 
six**?  (things),  which28  the  Eternal  liateth29:  yea^o,  sevens  1 
(are)  an  abomination32  unto  Him33:  lofty34  eyes,  a  lying 
tongue35?  and  hands  that  shed  innocent  blood36?  a  heart 
that28  devisetli37  thoughts38  of  iniquity,  feet  that2S  are 
swift39  in  running40  to  mischief41;  a  false  witness42  (that) 
breatheth43  lies44  and  (he  that)  soweth45  discord46  among47 
brethren.  Many  sorrows48  (shall  be)  to  the  wicked. 
Job49  was  a  father  to  the  poor,  eyes  to  the  blind50  and 
feet  to  the  lame51-  God  (is)  father  of  the  orphans52  and 
judge  of  the  widows. 

7<J3S  with  stiff..  '3£)S      Cpart.VO     5  nfe1^      4  QiSfc'SK     Sc-onv.  1      2  |V3N      1  part. 
-  T  :  ......  T  T  T   :  -  I     :•  v 

12  Ni.  pret.  TJG    lin^Sl'D     10  part.    9711310    8  there  is  no  Vtf,  before  n  noun  Vtf  [§  108.  1J 
T   "•  •*:•""  T  •  :  I  •• 

183¥n  171JTTJ?  IGconv.  1  15  1J  MJTDSrp  13  [£9£J#  before  the  pi.  ending:]  [33$ 
24  SD^  23  [the  Tsere  drops]  0*12  22-»3K  21  HJprp  20  to  him  [was]  19  113 
32n3j,»in  31y?^  3°1  29Nri'  28[g96,4J  2771271  26^  SSnrDIN,  part,  he  waa  loving 

37p:irt.  ^'"\n      36'pJ-D"T      861DB^  tf^S      34  D"l      33  [an  abomination  of  his  soul]  T^DJ 
-  T  I  •  T         T  I  v  T    I         :  T  :  - 

inf.   fr.  V-n     39  Pi.  purl.  "1J1D      38[beforo  the  genitive  the  pretonic  Kamete  drops]  rOttfTIE 

44[1p*^  bef.  the  pi.  ending]  ^p^r        43  Hi.  fut.  n-13        42  Ip'uJ.'  1^'      41  n>'1      40  to  run, 
•  •• 


'I  P33       501?t»      493VX-     48318OD      47  "3      46  only  in  plural  pS      45  Pi.  part. 
-  ..  .  ..*.  .  _  I  T  . 

.[the  prctouic  Kainets  drops] 


§  59.     THE  CONSTRUCT  STATE. 

The    word    standing    in  the    construct  state  (§  19,  5.) 
suffers  an  alteration  of  its  form: 


a.  Nouns,    in    ,1—   change    it    into    H—  :    as    ("UpD   camp, 
\>n£"  n3Pjg  Israel's  camp. 

b.  Nouns    in   ^—   change    it    into   t>—'    as   *H   living,    life, 
rijTlS  ^11  by  the  life  of  Pharaoli  ! 

c.  Feminine    nouns    with    final  jr—  change  it  into  fl—  :  as 


120  '  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

d.  The    plural    arid    dual    terminations    D'~   and   D*—   arc 
changed  into  '—  :  as  'DID  the  horses  of,  *JT#  the  eyes  of, 
NOTE  I.     The  vowel   changes,    which    the  word  in   const,  state 
undergoes  will  be  shown  in  the  following  §  §. 

NOTE  IT.     In  poetry  the  const,  st.  sometimes  is  found  with  pa- 
ragogic  1  or->—  :  as  1^  4.  Mos.  23,  18,  tyjflg  Ps.  114,  8. 
1.  Mos.  49,  11.  'tt     '2.  Mos.  15,  6.   fy  5.  Mos.  33,  16. 


EXERCISE  98. 

ran 


n^r  nn^nri      n  ^     Sb  i7!irrNirii 


nrir 


:26npin        ^90     ^^5  25pyvv  f? 
nin?  30n^7  ;  D?S 
'       l^  jn 
'-pa 

_  . 


hedge,  fence1  (a  species  of)  thorn2  wickedness3  p.  n.  m.4  to  carry  captive5 
the  force6  engraver,  artificer7  smith8  to  remain9  save10  poverty,  hence  the 
poorest  sort11  p.  n.12  to  kill,  (animals)  to  slay  (persons)13  Elijah14  Baal,  the 
tutelary  god  of  the  Phenicians15  idols16  to  give  ear,  to  listen1?  fathers18  my 
land19  mightySO  number21  lion22  the  appearance23  horseman,  rider2*  to  run25 
a  wall,  rampart26  stone,  weight27  an  Ephah,  (a  corn  measure)28  a  Hin,  (a 
liquid  measure)29  the  fear30  to  imagine31  to  counsel32  to  morrow33  the  camp34- 

EXERCISE  99. 

The  wisdom1  of  a  man  maketh  his  iace^  to  shine2-  The 
Lord  smote-*  the  first-born5  of  Egypt.  The  inhabitants^ 


§  60.     INFLECTION  OF  MASCULINE  NOUNS.  121 

of  Jebus7  said  to  David,  Thou  slialt  not  come  hither8- 
Nevertheless9  David  took10  the  castle11  of  Zion12>  'which  is 
the  city  of  David.  The  Lord  is  far13  (§  79,  3.  a.)  from 
the  wicked:  but27  HehearethJS  the  prayer14  of  the  righteous. 
All  Israel  saw  that  the  wisdom  of  God  was  m1^  Solo 
mon,  to  do  judgment17-  The  queen18  of  Sheba19  heard 
(of)  the  fame20  of  Solomon  and  she  came  to  prove21  him 
with  hard22  questions22-  Of  the  Lord  (are)  the  goings23  of 
man24-  Man's25  are  the  projects26  of  the  heart,  but27  from 
the  Lord  (comes)  the  answer28  to  the  tongue's  (request) 
(transl.)  :  the  answer  of  the  tongue.  Abel29  was  a  keeper30 
of  sheep31  and,  Cain32  was  a  tiller33  of  the  ground34-  And 
the  man  Moses  was  very  great  in  the  land  of  Egypt,  in 
the  eyes  of  Pharaoh,  and  in  the  eyes  of  the  people. 

9Conv.  1     Spun     7DW     63'^    5  TG3    *  Hi.  HDJ    3  D"J3    2  -\-\X  Hi.  fut. 


13  pirn   i2?rjr   nrroa   io-dS 

T  :  -  T  :    •  vv  :  T  •    :  IT  T  \  :  -  T 

271     ifrnn)      25D1K1?      24  "Oil      23i;*tfD      22  HTH      21  HDJ  W. 
'T-:-  TT  ;  vv  T  :  •  T    • 

*(T)  drops  -34n:rm    ss-iiy    32  pp    SIJK^    son^'i 

§  60.    RULES  FOR  THE  INFLECTION  OF  MASCULINE  NOUNS. 

1.  The  formation  of  the  Feminine,    Plural,    Dual,    Con 
struct  state,  and  the  connection  of  the  noun  with  suffixes,  in 
addition  to  the  changes  mentioned  in  the  preceding  para 
graphs,  cause  considerable  vowel  changes. 

2.  These  changes  are    principally   effected    by  the  tone, 
which    moves    forward    one    or  more    syllables,    producing 
greater  or  less  modifications  in  the  form  of  the  word. 

3.  Generally  the  two  last  vowels   only  of  the    word  are 
changed  by  the  inflection,  the    third    from    the  end  being 
very  seldom  affected. 

4.  The  penultimate    vowel,    being  mutable,    may  be  re 
jected,  the  ultimate  either  rejected  or  shortened. 

5.  Two    grades    occur  in  the    change  of  vowels,    which 
are  represented  by  the  two    forms  of  the    construct   state: 
the  const,  state  in  the  singular  :  "Q*!  and  the  construct  st. 

16 


122  Run  1.     EXERCISES, 


in  the  plural:  n^  ,      The  comparison  of  these   two    forms 
shows  : 

a.  In  the    construct  st.    sing,    the    vowel    in  penult  is  re 
jected  and   that  of  the   ultimate  is  retained,    but  short 

ened:  "im,  fr. 


b.  In  the  construct  st.  plur.  both  vowels  of  the  penult  as 
well  as  of  the  ultimate  are  rejected:  HITI,  properly  it 
is  H^TT*  the  Chirek  under  1  being  only  a  helping  vowel. 

6.  In  the  vowel  changes  therefore  are  distinguished  two 
classes:  a  lower   grade,    corresponding  to  the    const,   state 
sing.,  and  a  higher  grade,  corresponding  to  the  const,  state 
plural. 

7.  The    following    forms    are    inflected    according  to  the 
lower  grade:    the  singular    forms  with    suffixes,  the  femi 
nine  form,  the  plural  in  the  absolute  state,  and  the  plural 
forms  with  light  suffixes.     According  to  the  higher  grade  : 
the  plural  forms  with  the  grave  suffixes:  as  DDfT  const,  st. 
sing.  D?rf>  const,  st.  pi.  'gjfi  (prop.  'Dpp),  fern.  HEOq  , 
pi.  D>DDf>  with    light    stiff,  'sing,  and    plur.  >/Mp*  '/MP:' 
with  grave  suff.  pi.  Dp^/P^p  , 

NOTE  I.  For  Segholate  forms,  (which  are  not  included  in  the 
above  rules)  see  §  66. 

NOTE  II.  Feminine  nouns  having  no  distinctive  feminine  termi 
nation  :  as  *)N5  a  well,  are  inflected  like  the  masculine,  except 
ing  that  they  regularly  form  their  plural  in  ffi,  which  form  re 
mains  unchanged  before  suffixes  and  in  the  construct  state. 

§  61.     DECLENSION  OF  MASCULINE  NOUNS, 

1,  With  reference  to  the  vowel  changes  exhibited  in  the 
foregoing  paragraph,  the  nouns  are  classed  as  follows: 
CLASS    I.     Nouns  with  immutable  vowels. 
CLASS  II.     Nouns  with  a  mutable  vowel  in  the  ultimate. 
CLASS  III.    Nouns  with  a  mutable  vowel  in  the  penult. 
CLASS  IV.    Nouns  with  mutable  vowels  in  both  syllables  : 

the  ultimate  and  penult. 
CLASS    V.  The  Segholate  forms. 


§  02.     FIRST  DECLENSION.  1'2:> 

2.  This  division  is  observed  in  the  Paradigms.  For  the 
sake  of  brevity  we  will  use  the  terms  :  first,  second,  third, 
fourth  and  fifth  declensions.* 


§  62.     FIRST  DECLENSION. 

1.  To  this  "belong  all  nouns,    of  which    the    vowels    are 
immutable,    (§  14,   1.*)  :    as  Ttf  city,   *7ip  voice,  B*Q*J  gar 
ment,  *TQ3  hero,  JTpCJ'to  destroyer. 

2.  Some  difficulty  arises  with  Kamets  and  Tsere,  as  these 
vowels  are  sometimes  mutable  and   sometimes   immutable. 
In  forms  similar  to  Dp  and  ^,  Kamets  and  Tsere   are  im 
mutable,  being  derived  from  D^p  and  1^  and  standing  for 
OXpr>  TJ1  (§  3,  6.  Note  4.).     In  forms  like  ^tpp_,  ^j^the 
Kamets  is  immutable,  standing  for  ^Nt3p_>  ^Npp  (§56,  3/a.b.): 
p3J  thief,    POD  executioner,    DH?  writing.       To   the   form 
Spp_  belong  fc*n<D  rider,  for  ^'*1£)',  ^H  engraver,  artificer, 
for  ty*5D'. 

EXERCISE  100. 


^j;  ND 

*'  nin 


run 


124  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

beginning1  small-  to  increase3  contention,  quarrel4  hastily5  for  fear  that6  to 
put,  to  shame7  to  harness8  to  go  up9  ($  80.  5.)10  to  put  on11  coats  ofmail^ 
•to  flee13  escape14  a  spoiler^  to  conquer16  the  recompense17  (§  91,  2.)18 
(§  118)19  the  hosts20  control  near**  ($  96,  3.)2a  turn  back,  return^  to  be 
high2-5  (§  96,  4.)  to  give,  to  wm/ce'-6  fortification,  hence  :  a  fortified  city-7 
(§  83,  6.)  a  column28  copper29  to  give  light,  illuminate-'50 

EXERCISE  101. 

Hear  counsel,  and  receive!  instruction-:  that3  thou  may- 
est4  be  wise  in  thy  (latter)  end.  And5  David  ran,  and 
stood  upon6  the  Philistine'  and  slew  him8  and  cut  off9 
his  head.  And  when1®  the  Philistines  saw  their  cham 
pion11  was  dead,  they  fled12-  And  David  took13  the  head 
of  the  Philistine  and  brought14  it  to  Jerusalem.  And 
Hainan  took  the  apparel15  of  the  king  arid  the  liorse  of 
the  king  and  arrayed16  Mordecai1^  and  brought  him  on 
horseback18  through  l^  the  street2o  of  the  city,  and  pro- 
claimedsi  before  him,  Thus22  shall  it  be  done  unto  the 
man  whom  the  king  delighteth  to  honor23.  Her  lamp24 
goeth  not  out25  by26  night.  And5  Delilah2"?  said  to 
Samson28?  Tell29  me,  I  pray  thee,  wherein3*)  thy  great 
strength  (lieth),  and  'wherewith31  thou  mightest  be  bound32 
to  afflict  thee?  Then  5  Samuel33  took  a  vial34  of  oil35, 
and  poured36  it  upon  his  head,  and  kissed3*?  him,  and 
said,  Is  it  not  because38  the  Lord  hath  anointed39  thee  to 
(be)  captain40  over  His  inheritance41?  And5  the  king  of 
Babylon  43  slew42  all  the  princes44  of  JudalH5  jn 

8Pi.  TUB     7'P#S3     fi^N      5Conv.  1     4  tut.  [§101,111.  a)] 


14  Hi.  X13     !3np        12  D:J    ntransl:  that  ('3)  their  champion  -n'33     10  Conv.  1      QfpJD 

I-T  -  T 

21JOP    2031JTP    193    18  to  bring  on  horseback  331  Hi.     J7OT1D    16  Hi.  ^/^    15  V-.l*! 
T|  T  :  -   :   :  T  -  T  ; 

transl.    in    whose    honor   the  king  is  delighting,  delighting  in  3  VSI")  >  honor   ID"1      22  DIG 

:    I   ••  T  IT:  T  T 

29  Fli.  parag.  imp.  (§  34,  4.  §  104,  1)  1JJ    28  jl^plfir    27  nV1?"!    26  3  25  nD.2)   24  1J   23  (g  96,  2) 
36  (§  51,  1.  a)  pr     35  >fiV    34^3     33Sx-,D^     32Ni.fut.npK    31  H^2    3°n'£.3 

'    44D"V!P  plur.  *]'$;      43  S^3      42t3nJt*      41  1'^Sn:      40  1"  JJ      39H^rD      38  "3 
T;  *T  v  T  -T  T-:-  -T  -T 

.  nr»S31  here  with  par.  fl,  71^31 
T  T  ;    •  T  :    • 

§  68.     SECOND  DECLENSION. 
1.   Under  this  are  included  all  nouns  having  a  mutable 


§  C3.     SECOND  DECLENSION.  .  125 

vowel  in  the  final  syllable  ;   they  are  either  monosyllabic, 
or  their  preceding  vowels  are  immutable* 

Ad  I.  (in  the  Paradigm.)  Monosyllabic  words  with  a 
mutable  A  sound  (Kamets  or  Patach). 

a.  Nouns  with  Kamets:  as  M  roof,    T  hand   CTV>  D3"T)» 
D1  blood  (D3?TT) » 

b.  Nouns  with  Kamets,  doubling  the  final  consonant,  when 
the  word  is  lengthened  at  the  end:  as  D'r  sea,  pi.  DW' 
JDr  time,  D|P| .         The    Kamets    is    shortened    (§     14, 
Short,  c.).  T 

c.  Nouns    with    Patach:  12^ >   dual   DH&*  breasts,   *Q  son, 

H5  mv  son- 

d.  Nouns  with  Patach,    which    double    the    final    radical 
(derivates    from  J?"Jf) :   as  1H  mountain,     (with   article 

nnrt)  piur.  Dnr?(for  DHD)>Dy_  people,  pi.  D>py.»  T? 

living,  pi.  D'TT/lfc'  chief,  prince,  pi.  OHC'  (for  DHfc>) . 

Ad  If.  Polysyllabic  nouns  with  final  Kamets  .or  Patach : 
as  OS^'p  judgment,  33113  star.  Several  nouns  double  the 
last  radical:  a)  D^IN  vestibule,  porch,  D'p^N;  JplN  a 
wheel,  D^§1N;  TjCTTp  darkness,  dark  place,  D^r?5J  l^W 
gift,  D^3r*^'  f|^^  a(^j«  quiet,  subst.  wantonness,  pride, 
1*^%'  a'liiy,  p^l^' .  b)  ^"TiQ  threshing-sledge, 
|7l  wheel,  B*$fy. 

•  Ad  III.  Monosyllabic  nouns  with  mutable  Tsere.  Chirek 
in  "Hpt^  is  the  helping  vowel.  Other  nouns  of  this  kijid, 
drop  the  Tsere  only  in  the  construct  state  plural,  hence 
also  with  the  grave  plur.  suffixes:  as  W  tree,  ^#,  ^|Vi?.' 
D»V3?.'  'VJ?:'  ^..'  DyVt:'  13  1)ack>  ^.'  ^.'i  n  knowledge, 
^jn,  J^l  companion,  friend,  'JH ,  IJ^I , 

^4c?  /F.  1)  Several  nouns  of  this  class  in  the  const, 
st.  have  final  Patach:  as  liDPP  lamentation,  ISpp;  HJtp 
altar,  TOfp;  pip  couching  place,  IJJ^p  tithe.'  2)  Be 
fore  the  suffixes  Tl ,  D5  *  J3  some  of  these  take  Seghol  :  as 
DD /pP  your  staff;  DJnii/D  your  sign,  wonder.  3)  Some 
nouns  retain  the  Tsere  in  the  plural  absolute:  as 


126  PART  I.     EXERCISES, 

descendant   of  the    third   generation,   D'£*S&*  •      4)    Several 
double  the  last   consonant:    as   TD.5P  palm-branch, 
cultivated  plain-orchard,  1 


Ad  V.     Nouns  with  Cholem,    changing  it  into  Kubbuts 
before  the  doubled  final  radical:  as  D""Hp  an 


in  sacred  writer,  person  skilled  in  hieroglyphics  D^'0""|D' 
JS  margin,  border,  D'Sp^S;  p^  hight,  summit,  D'JEtf  . 
To  these  also  belong  the  derived  nouns  in  *—  ,  which  oi'ten 
double  the  *,  when,  the  word  is  lengthened:  as  HD3  a  stranger, 
nn^Ji  HIPP  a  Jew,  D'HIPP  and  DHIIT. 

Ad  VI.  Participles  Kal,  Piel  and  Hithpael,  with  the 
exception  of  JT'7  »  Observe  here  that  the  forms  with  the  suf 
fixes  Tj,  D5>  f?  are  fourfold:  1)  ^yCpp'  in  Pause  ^?£?p  . 
2)  With  Ayin  guttural  T]5»1kX  ,  3)  With  Lamed  guttural 
3$&  .  4)  rj5\X  (on  account  of  the  ')  . 

Ad  VII.  Participles  and  other  derivatives  from  verbs 
n"b*  which  terminate  in  H—  •'  as  r\$T\  seer,  HVp.  enc^ 
change  H—  in  fl—  in  the  const,  state  and  drop  H—  en 
tirely  before  any  of  the  afformatives:  as  HKI  :  const,  state 
nXT»  with  suff.  ^l.plur.  D\\h,  with  local  r\~-  as  HDD 
downwards,  from  HtSD  »  H7J^D  upwards,  from  H1?]/*?  • 

In  a  few  instances  the  original  termination  *  —  (§  13,  7.  a.) 
is  restored.  Thus  with  stiff.  ?TMQ  (s^nff-)  thy  covering 
(as  'from  ^DD);  ^pp  (sing.)  Is!  ~30,  23,  TjtJHD  (sing.) 
(erroneously  taken  for  the  plural).  Ca.  2,  14.  VtTJ?  his 
Creator  Ps.  149,  2. 

EXERCISE  102. 

l?^  nin?  noN-ri^  :nin?  rj^n-i  raj];  N1? 


§  63.     SECOND  DECLENSION.  127 

crj  :  rnrr  n, 


-try  nrw*  nint  :npN  ninptps^o   :12^prtnp  "^s^' 


T 


supply:  my  desire1  kingdom2  to  wait  on3  (§  18.  Note)4  to  be  ashamed5 
compassion,  pity6  '(^  97,  4,)7  to  strike8  to  become  a  surety,  to  pledge9  debt10 
couch,  bed11  (§  75,  7.)12  lamentation13  dance14  to  loosen,  untie15  sackcloth16 
to  gird1?  (§85,  1.  b.)  iniquity18  in  the  power  of™  niD  with  suff.20  (g  66,  14.) 
to.  be  or  become  little,  few21  to  envy'22  a  torch23  intoxicated,  drunk24  do 
minion,  rule25  wicked,  foolish26  friend2?  to  help,  assist28  without29  to  go  out, 
be  extinguished30- 

• 

EXERCISE  103. 

And1  the  scribes2  of  the  king  were  called  at3  that  time4? 
and  it  was  written  according  to  all  that  Morclecai  com 
manded  to  the  Jews  and  to  the  rulers5  of  the  provinces6- 
Keceive7  my  instruction,  the  fathers'  instruction,  our  in 
struction.  The  angels  of  the  Lord  encampeths  roundabout 
the  just  and  delivereth10  them.  And1  the  Philistines 
gathered11  their  camps  together11  to  fight*2  with13  Israel. 
The  Lord  thy  God  walkethi*  in  the  midst  of  thy  camp, 
to  deliver15  thee  and  to  give  up16  thine  enemies17  before 
thee;  therefore1  shall  is  thy  camp  be1^  holy  i».  And1  Jethro2o, 
the  priest  of  Midian21.  Moses'  father-in-law^2,  heard  (of)  all 
that  God  had  done  for23  Moses,  and  for  Israel,  his  people, 
and  he  said:  I,  thy  father-in-law,  am  come24  to  thee* 
Blessed'^5  (be)  the  Lord,  my  strength26,  which  teacheth27 
my  hands  to  war2^.  My  refuge^,  my  deliverer30  and  (He) 


128  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

in  whom31  I  trust8'-*;  who  subdueth33  my  people  under 
me34-  The  Lord  is  thy  keepers  :  the  Lord  is  thy  shades^. 
The  Lord  upholdeth3?  all  that  fallss.  My  son  meftdle*9 
not  with  rebels40-  Whoso  moeketh41  the  poor  reproach- 
eth-*2  his  Maker43-  He  that  trusteth44  in  his  (own)  hearths 
is  a  fool.  Deceit  (is)  in  the  heart  of  them  that  imagine46 
evil:  but  to  the  counselors47  of  peace  (is)  joy. 
STINTS  s  part.  run  fnpS  enyn  snip  4fem.  r\y  33  2120  iconv.  i 

IT:-  *r  -r  ]~r  T     •  : 

17  TX    16  mj    15Hi.  bvj     14  Hit.  part.  -j^H     13  3      12Ni.  QnS      UpP      10  Pi.  vSn 

l--r  -  T  I  -|T  I    -T 

26  IIV      25part.  Kal.  -p3      24  part.      23  ^      22  m'n    21  pi  3    SOn/V     59IJT1P     18  rm 

IT  :  •  :  •  IT  TT 

3113    30  Pi    part.  CoS3      29  (doubles  the  last  cons.)  3  jti/D     28  S^p    27  Pi   part  (6  96,  8)  "]^S 
-  T  T  :   •  T  |  .- 

(doubles  the  last  ^V      35  part.  nDU>      34  (§  75,  7)  ^DHH    33  part.  (6  96.  8)  T\^    32  pret.  HDH 

-  T  T     ;    ~  T  T 

41  with  S,  Paft-  tyh      40npty      39  HitO^p      38  part  (§  96,  8J       37  part,  ^OD      36  cone.) 
45  [doubles  the  last  cons.]  lh        44  with  3,  part.  HD3        43  part,  nfrj?        42  Pi.  pret. 

.47  part.        "     46  part, 


§  64.     THIRD  DECLENSION. 

1.  This  declension  comprises  all  nouns  with  an  immuta 
ble  vowel    in  the    final    syllable    and    mutable  Kamets  or 
Tsere  in  the  penult:  as  Vj-U  great;  p£N  faithfulness^  truth; 
fit"Ot  remembrance. 

2.  The  Kamets  or  Tscre  of  the  penult  is  dropped  in  the 
const,  state  and   invariably  when  the  word  is  lengthened. 
In   forms   like  pl^N  Dagesh  of  the   middle  radical  is  like 
wise   dropped  :    as   f1*"l?t  •      Words    as   pHS  ruler,  leader, 
with    suff.    fainS    (Chirek    helping    vowel)  ;  p3]n  famine, 
with  suff.  pDjn,  for  pDJH  (§  14,  Rising  I.  b.  B.). 

3.  Some   nouns  of  the   form  p^3t'  when   inflected,    take 
Seghol    instead  of  Chirek.     Thus  p'tH  vision,    const,    state 
jVtll,  plur.  n^Vrtl;  \\*W?y.  a  tenth  part  (dry  measure),  plur. 


4.  A  few  nouns  of  this  class  retain  the  Kamets  :  as  C?vC-* 
a  measure,  (prob.  the  third  part  of  an  Ephah),  and  a  peculiar 
class  of  soldiers.  H^  refuge,  fortress  njJO  ;  po  shield 
week  PL  DD'  and  ni3'»  const. 


§  64.     THIRD  DECLENSION.  129 

5.  In  tliis  class  are  comprehended  several  nouns,  which 
double  the  last  radical:  as  Dl"lJ^  naked,  D'E*1#;  ^TlPf  net- 

T  '     '•.  ~:  •      T 

tie,  D  *7*")n » 

6.  In  several   nouns  of  the   form  DlpD  place,    especially 
those  derived  from   verbs  ]"y ,  1  is  changed  into  *) :  as  DUE 
flight,  with  suff.  »pUp;  flUp  rest,  pi.  D'fTUp;  pJ^E  hahita- 
tion,  pi.  D\WE;  HUE  fear,  pi.  DHUEJ  *T)VE  fortress,  with 

T  '      A  T 

sufF.  r|"11VE;  plnE  sweetness,  pi.  Q'p 


.  EXERCISE  104. 

sn  nS  :np"ip  nrip  sjjte^  "hq  :2  0*9133  ^p)  nirr 
nijoy  mrr  &'np  trnp  srnp  :  l^Kb{?S 

T    :  T      :  IT  1  T  I  T 


16 


"inn 


nirr  :iDipaD 

T      :  |      :    •  • 

-Sist  :  H73  ni^i^  nin^  22  jn  91073  21  njp 


34  ^  :  33 


iN* 


to  raise1  to  bend,  bow  down2  the  fullness  of3  glory,  majesty*  (supply  :  is 
=  His  majesty  fills  the  whole  earth)  remembrance5  (§  83,  6)6  wantonness7 
ignominy8  with9  lowlyio  faithful11  weight12  perfect13  delight,  acceptance14 
proverb15  to  conceal16  to  search  out17  to  wander18  nest19  mighty20  word21 
behold2'3  to  touch23  the  anointed  (applied  to  priests,  kings,)24  old,  aged  man25 
healing26  a  dream27  to  fly  away,  vanish28  (§  76,  2.  c.)-J  Hi.  to  chase  away30 
vision3l  foundation,  basis32  1%  perpetuity,  eternity,  "l.l£  D^J^  «  eternity 
and  eternity  ==•  forever  and  ever33,  avaricious,  hard  hearted34  riches35  but36- 

17 


130  PART  1.  EXERCISES. 

EXERCISE  105. 

Our  Redeemer1*  the  Lord  of  Hosts  (is)  His  name,  the 
Holy  One  of  Israel.  The  multitudes  of  all  the  nations3 
that  fight4  against5  Israel  and  that  distress^  them  shall 
he  as  a  dream  of  a  night  vision7  (of  the  vision  of  night). 
The  uprights  shall  inherits  (what  is)  good.  A  son10  hon- 
oreth11  (his)  father,  and  a  servant  his  master^.-  if  then13 
I  (he)  a  father,  where14  (is)  mine  honor15?  and  if  I  (he) 
a  master16;  where  is  my  fear17?  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts 
unto  you,  O18  priests,  that  despise19  my  name.  As20  a 
dew21  upon  the  grass  (is)  the  favor22  of  a  king.  God  still- 
eth23  the  noise24  of  the  scas25»  the  noise  of  their  waves2** 
and  the  tumult27  of  the  people28-  The  Lord  reigneth^, 
clouds30  and  darknesssi  (are)  round  about  Him32:  right 
eousness  and  judgment  (are)  the  habitation83  of  His  throne34- 
He  that  walketh35  uprightly36  and  worketh37  righteous 
ness38*  and  speaketh39  truth  in  his  heart40-  He  (that) 
hackhiteth41  not  with42  his  tongue,  nor  doeth  evil  to  his 
fellow43?  nor  taketh  up45  a  reproach44  against  his  neigh 
bor^;  He  that  doeth47  these  (tilings)  shall  never49  totter48- 
God  stands^0  at51  the  right  hand  of  the  poor. 

8  D'DFl     7  mn     6  Hi.  part,  with  S,  p?¥     5  Stf    4  part,  (g  96,  8)  JOV    3  "U    '2  PDH    1  Stf'JI 

•   T  I      T  -  T  T  IT 

16  (g  82,  4  b.)  D-jnK    15  1O3     14  JTN'    13  DK1     12  ri"IX    11  tut.  (§  101,  I.  c.)    10  n    9  ^HJ 
-.  T  —  .  .  T  I ..  _T 

24  jmar      23  Hi.  part,  n^^      22  p'i'1      21^     20J      19  part.  HT3      18  (§80,  5)      17KTb 

T  -T  I  T  TT  T 

plur.,  doubles  Q^S  27  JIIDH  26  (doubles  the  last  cons.)  S.3  25  (doubles  the  last  cons.)  Q"1 
29  pret.  Pause  !  ^D  28  [strong  shortening  of  the  vowel  g  14,  IF.  Shortening  c)]  the  last  cons.  — 
36Q'Jpfi  35  part.  Kal  341KD3  33JOO  32  with  plur.  suff.  T3D  31S3*1J,»  30^ing. 
44n2"|Pl  4a;n  ^y_  tipret.  Sjl  40^3S  39  part.  Kal.  13H  38  p^  37  part.  Sj'S 

.51  S    50iut.    |9'DSl'vS     48  Ni.  fut    LD1D    47  part,  in  const,  state    46  311  p    45  prct    Nt£'3 
r        :  IT  T  T 

§  65.     FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

1.  To  this  belong  nouns  of  two  syllables  either  with 
mutable  Kamets  in  both,  or  with  Kamets  in  the  second 
•and  Tsere  in  the  first,  or  with  Kamets  in  the  first  and 
in  the  last:  as  "CTJ  word,  DD^  heart,  JPlJ  old 


§  09.     FOURTH  DECLENSION. 


131 


2.   Vowel  changes  in   this  declension  ; 

a,  Kamets   or    Tsere    in    the    first    syllable    always    drop: 

nrj,  'pr^'jpr. 

b.  Kamets  and  Tsere  in  the  last  syllable,  are  changed  in 
the  const,   state  sing,  and   before  the  suffixes  Dp>  |p  in 
sing,   into   Patacli:  as  1T1»  \\X.>  33  " 


c.  In  the  plural  and  before  the  light  suffixes  sing,  and  pi. 
final  Kamets  and  Tsere  are  retained:  as 


tZ.  In  the  const,   state  plur.   and   before   the  grave  suffixes 

plur.  final  Kamets    and    Tsere    drop:    as    Hpl,  Dp^pP 

but  >Dpn>  HJW'»   ^'  the  helping  vowel  is  Patacli  on 

account  of  the  guttural. 

3  In  fp3  wing,  2%  tail,  J?7V  rib,  the   helping   vowel  in 

the  .plural  is    Patacli    instead  of   Clrirek:    as  ' 


4.  In    a    few.  nouns    of   the    form   ^pp    and  7DD  »   the 
Segholate  form  (§  00.)  is  used  in  the   const,  st.  and   before 
suffixes:    as   Jt»jj   smoke,    const,    state   J^and  JtTp_;  t]JJ£ 
l>ranch,    with  "sirff.    D?5^;  y^V   rib,    const,    st.  J^V   and 
J'Sjr  ,  with  suffixes  ^^V  • 

5.  Borne  nouns  of  the  form  ^tpp  take  the    Segholate  form 
in  the  const,   st.   e.   g.  J"|rO  shoulder,    const,   st.  t]r\5;  ^14 
wall,    const,  st.  T^J  T|T  hip,    const,   st.    T]T.;  ^M  robbery, 
const,  st.  ^;  Tj^N  long,  const,  st.  Tp5<;  lii)   heavy,    once 
const,  st.  "1DD;  7*JJ^  uncircumcised,  const,  st.  ^j;  and  *T3JJ« 

0.  Some  nouns  of  the  form  ^Op  retain  Tsere  in  the  plur. 
const,  st.  e.  g.  Jg^  sleeping,  const,  0£'y;  ^DK  mourning, 
^DN*;  DDtr  joyful',  T^TO^  (but  also  «?{?)  H?^'  forgetful, 
^'i  fin  delighting,  ^£)H  . 


EXERCISE  100. 

2rnr  tDdjTjS  orjS  jn^  nin*.  :nr^:  nin? 
:nn  3*3D"S    rSnp  nin*  :bn 


132  PART  1.     EXERCISES. 

7p5'n  S'pgn  :8«§no  nS  •C 
S  mrr 

•  T       :  T     :  V 

nan1 


I7 


p?n 


29 

:  H33 

the  summit1  to  break  forth2  wing3  lightning4  flesh,  body5  quietness,  soft 
ness6  to  fold7  counsel8  four9  little10  ($  83,  7.)  Pual  :  to  he  made  wise,  hence: 
exceeding  wise11  strong12  to  prepare13  the  coney14  rock15  locust  ($  82,  I.)16 
division17  (by  bands)  a  spider*8  to  catch19  ($  76,  2.  d.)  ornament20  circle21 
locust  (a  peculiar  species,  small  and  edible)22  upright  one23  conjointly24 
worthlessnes8;  lowness25  (#  89,  4.)  an  assembly26'  to  rejoice,  to  play,  dance 
(Pi.)97  to  laugh,  rejoice,  dance28  a  circle,  an  assembly29-1 

EXERCISE  107. 

The  Word  of  our  God  shall  stand  1  forever.  And2  the 
Lord  had  rained  down3  manna4  upon  the  Israelites  to  eat, 
and  had  given  them  (of)  the  corn  5  of  heaven.  The  Lord 
is  far  from  the  wicked.  Two6  (things)  have  I  required? 
of  TheeS,  deny9  me™  (them)  not  before"  I  die  12!  Remove 
far13  from  me  vanity  13  and  lies  (transl.  the  word  of  lie)*4: 
give  me  not  poverty16  nor17  riches18-  Lest  I  be  full  1  9, 
and  deny  (Thee)  20,  and  say,  Who  is  the  Lord?  or  lest  I 
be  poor21'  and  steal22*  and.take2^  the  name  of  my  Grod  (in 
vain).  Fear  the  Lord,  (ye)  his  saints24:  for  there  is  no2^ 
want26  to  them  that  fear27  Him.  If  ye  hearken28  to 
these  judgments  and  keep2»  and  do29  them,  the  Lord  thy 
God  shall  keep29  unto  thee  His  covenant.  And  He  will 
Iove29  thee  and  bless29  thee  and  multiply  29  thee:  he  will 
bless29  thy  corn,  thy  wine30;  thine  oilsl>  thy  flocks32  and 
thy  herds33-  Speak  ye  to34  the  heart  of  Jerusalem,  and 


§  C>6.     FIFTH  DECLENSION.  133 

call  unto35  her,  that  her  warfare36  is  accomplished37,  that 
her  iniquity39  is  pardonedss,  for  she  hath  received^  of 
the  hand  of  the  l^ord,  double*!  foH2  all  her  sins*3- 

transl.  from     9pm    8  IjntfS     7^W&    6  D'jTtf    5j;n    4  |D     3  Hi.  "IB D   '2  C.I 

19 fut.  y3&  Wffy  171  i6$jo  io Hi.  pro  14313  isxr#  12 rut. 

25  pK  there  is  no  :    24  imp    23pret.  ferflfl    22pret.  3JJ    21  Ni.  fut.  #T    20  Pi.  pret. 

I    ••  IT  -  T  -T 

31"in]T    30-i#VVn    29  pret.  with  C.  1     28  with  ace.  J/'Ettf    27  to  his  fearers  =  XT 

(generally  masc.  «3^      35  with  pi.  suff.  SN      34^      33  (§  82,  1.)  ^D3      32  (§  82,  1.)  jtfi' 

T  T  V  I  T  T 

41D'Si)3    40nS    39  (gen.  masc.,  here  fern.)     ^    38  Ni.  pret.  Hi'"!    37  xSo     36  Acre /cm.) 


§  66.     FIFTH  DECLENSION. 

1.  In  this  are  embraced  the  large  class  of  nouns  called 
Seglwlates,  which  had  originally  three  consonants,  with 
but  one  vowel,  following  the  first  one.  In  order  to 
make  them  dissyllabic,  a  helping  vowel  has  been  added, 
regularly  Seghol,  hence  the  term:  Segholate  forms.  The 
original  vowel  was:  short  a,  i,  or  o  (—  ,  —  ,  —  )  •  as  TJ7«?' 
")9P'  ^'"Ij^*  By  t^e  addition  of  the  helping  Seghol  under 
the  second  consonant,  the  short  vowel  being  now  in  an 
open  syllable  is  lengthened.  The  Chirek  becomes  Tsere, 
the  Kamets-Chatuph,  Cholem,  the  Patach,  however,  ir 
regularly  changes  into  Seghol,  in  pause  only  does  it 
lengthen  regularly  into  Kamets  ;  thus  the  original  TPO  » 
^£3p  ,  l?np  become  rj^Q  >  in  pause  T]Sb  ,  1$P  ,  8r"jp  . 


2.  Tlie    second    vowel    being    only  a  helping  vowel,  all 
words  of  this  declension  are  Milel.. 

3.  On  the  lengthening  of  the  word  the  original  form  is 
resumed:  as  if 


NOTE  I.     Hence  He  local  (§  19,  6.)  appended  to  a  Segholate, 

> 
requires   the  original    form  :    as  n^""!^  to  the  land    (T^lNt 


134  PART  I.     EXERCISES, 


N);    HJV3    to    the    house    (JTp,    orig.     JV^)  ,      When    the 
original   vowel   in   the    segholate   form   is    o,     If—  is  accented:    as 


4.  In  the  const,  state   sing,  the   forms  T]S/9>  1£p>  CH 
remain  unaltered. 


NOTE  II.   jnt  seed,  *nn  an  apartment,  room,  ^ftp  gain,  profit, 
plantation,  plant,  J        a  breath,  a  vain  thing,  in  const,  st.  : 


5.  A  kindred  form  of  this  class,  embraces  all  those 
words  of  three  consonants  with  but  one  vowel  after  the 
second  one  :  as  B>3^  honey  ;  "O|  and  "U^  man  ;  D^ 
shoulder  ;  Ig^  moisture  ;  1H  ink  ;  DjX  marsh,  marshy 
place,  and  the  infinitives  of  Kal,  of  the  form  ">Dp  > 
They  agree  with  the  Segholates  in  inflection:  as 


6.  From  this  form  (5.  vowel  under  the  second  consonant)' 
are  taken  the  plural    absolute  and   the  plural    forms  with 
light  suffixes:  as  D^^Dn£p,  D»gHj?:»  '5^9  >  ^.£)p  . 

7.  From  the  regular  (Tj'p/p  etc'.)  are  formed  the  plural  con 
struct  state  and  the  plural  with    grave    suffixes:    as 


NOTE  II  L  When  the  final  radical  is  one  of  the 
the  aspirated  pronunciation  of  the  plural  absolute  is  retained  in 
the  const,  st.  and  before  the  grave  suffixes;  as  *2*7'2  '  DrTp^O> 
but  in  sing,  p'pg,  DJP^O  • 

8.  In  the  form   of  two   Seghols,  as  ^Q,  the   first   gene 
rally  stands  for  the  original  Patach  (?f?b)«    But  a  consid- 
ei-able    number    had    Cfrirek    originally;    as  "J^p  garment,, 
(1D3  trust,    confidence,    Tj^p  knee,    D^  rain,    hp?  remem 
brance  etc.,  with  suffixes:  ^IJpj  Hp?  , 

9.  In  the  forms  with  two  Seghols  (Tto)  and  Tsere  witli 
Seghol  ("lipp)  ?  some    (most   of  which   are    Pe  gutt.)    have 
Seghol  as  the    original  short  vowel:    as  "OK  pinion,  with 


§  66.     FIFTH  DECLENSION.  135 

f  rq^,  r^n  fat,  p^n  part,  pgr?  delight,  h$,  caif,  i# 

help,  'Tty*  valuation,  i^  before,  over  against,  (IIJ^Gen. 
2,  18,  20.  as  over  against  him,  i.  e.  the  counterpart  of  him), 
*|JJ>#  ten  etc. 

10.  When  the  third  radical  is  a  guttural,  the  helping- 
vowel  under  the  second  radical  is  Patach :  as  JHJ  seed, 
y&»  salvation,  rHK  way.  When  the  second  radical  is  a 
guttural,  both  vowels  of  the  forms  ^tpp  and  Sfcpp  are  Patach; 
as  *}#}  boy,  lad,  -)]£  wood,  forest. 

12.  The  form  ^tjp  has  in  a  few  instances  Kubbuts  in 
the  inflection  before  suffixes:  as  Tj^D  thicket,  lD3p;  ^"1J| 
greatness,  iS^  (also  lS"|^) ;  fpp  handful,  V^/pp , 

12.  The   form   ^tpp   with    middle    letter  guttural    takes 
Kamets  before   the  suffixes  ^| ,  D5  *  p :  as  ^^?K  tnv   tent3 
TlS^3  thy  deed,  work  (Inf.  with 'stiff.  §  45). 

13.  The  form  7iDp  vocalizes  the  plural  absolute : 

1)  D v]£3  actions,    DHip5    cypress-flowers,    D^nQH   s]>ears. 

2)  with   Pe    gutt.:   DHpJ^  gazelles,  nlH^X  ways,  but  also 
without  guttural:  D^HpH  (thus  always  with   the  article). 

3)  The    two   nouns  t£Hb*'    root,    and  £Hp    holiness,    have 
D'BntP  and  D^'"Jp .    The  noun  SllN  tent,  has  ])1.  D^^TIK , 
whence  vS'liSV  ^riK,    but     also     »^HK>  D^SnN*;   HIN* 

T     T  |      V    T  "  T:     T  V      "    T:     T 

way,  makes  WtTlN  >  DrinnX  » 

14.  With  T'J7  and  v']^  the  segholate  form  is  only  distin 
guishable    in    the  sing,    absolute.       With  1  the   form  ^pp 
lengthens  the  Patach  before  1  into  Kamets:  as  DVJ  death, 
before  *  the  Patach   remains    unchanged:    as  JT?  olive.     In 
all  the  other  forms  the  1  and  >  lose  their  consonantal  power 
and  are  contracted  with  the  preceding  vowel  into  a  diph 
thong:  a  +  V=1  ;  a  +  *  =     r  (§  12,  7.  b.  2.)  ;  hence 

rVt'  P.**  adversity,  with  suff.  ^1N;  Tjiri  midst,    const.  t 
with  suff.  *3in;fV3  house,  const.  D^j,  with  suff. 

15.  I.    -The    Scgholates    of  the    verb  H"S   exhibit    the 


136  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


three  original  forms  as  follows:  H§  fruit,  C*"^)'  'VD  l^a-lf, 
0>T])>  vH  sickness,  Cvll)j  hence  H£  in  pause  H$>  suiF. 
>nS;  'Vt|>  'Vn»  suff.  »yfT,  ^P  in  pause  >Vn»  suif.  »Sn  . 

II.  From  such  nouns  of  JT  7  »  the  third  radical  of  which 
was  originally  1  ,  arise  mt^  »  from  IfU^  ,  ^jin  ,  1PQ  from 
inn,  IPO  (§12,  7,1).  3.) 


EXERCISE  108. 

4  phi  vyy$  3T 


nin  :nin  ninn 


?  rru  mn»  :nii^ 

I  ••  T      :  :  \ 


rrn 

- 

;2 
n    n       T>    itr'     now  nio 


26 


nip  an>n  N 
^  vfc'sp  SD  Sj;  nin!  ^orn  p  SbS 


the  path1  brightness,  splendor2  purt.3  to  weigh4  shield5  to  plant6  rill7 
fruit8  to  wither9  intelligence10  greatness11  food12  wickedness13  possessor, 
person  given  or  addicted  to  a  thing14  the  wall15  stone16  to  break,  pull 
down17  (§  93,  7.)  magnificence18  the  deed*9  sacrifice  (§  83,  4.)20  to  flatted1 


§  66.     FIFTH  DECLENSION,  137 

to  spread22  step,  footstep23  to  seek  early,  diligently24  ($  93,  3.  =  seeks  early 
it,  the  correction)  to  devise25  to  direct,  prepare26  step27  poor,  afflicted'-28 
fr.  'JJ7  affliction,  misery29  wisdom30  company31  scorner,  scoffer32  to  testify, 
bear  witness33  hard,  vehement34  flame,  burning35  the  flame  of  Jah,  i.  e. 
kindled  by  God36- 

EXERCISE  109. 

Bless  the  Lord  my  soul1,  and  my  innermost2  (bless) 
His  holy3  name.  I  will  lift  up4  mine  eyes  to  the  hills  5, 
from  whence6  cometh  my  help7-  My  help  (cometli)  from8 
the  Lord,  who  made9  heaven  and  earth.  He  will  not 
suffer-™  thy  foot12  to  totter11-  The  earth  is  Mil*  of  the 
goodness13  of  the  Lord.  Say  not,  I  will  do  so16  to  him 
as15  he  has  done  to  me:  I  will  render17  to  the  man  ac 
cording  to  his  work18-  And19  Hiram20  sent  to  Solomon, 
saying,  I  have  heard  what21  thou  sentest  to  me  for21: 
(and)  I22  will  do  all  thy  desire23  concerning24  cedar-trees 
(trees  of  cedars)25?  and  concerning  fir26-trees.  My  servants 
shall  bring27  (them)  down27  from  Lebanon28  unto29  the 
sea,  and  thou30  shalt  do  my  desire  in31  giving  bread  for 
my  household  (bread  of  my  house).  Saul32  and  Jona 
than33;  lovely34  and  pleasant35  in  their  lives,  also36  in 
their  death  were  not  parted37,  they  were  swifter40  than38 
eagles39?  they  were  stronger42  than  lions41-  Arise,  walk 
through43  the  land  in44  the  length45  of  it  and  in  the 
breadth46  of  it;  for  I  will  give  it  unto  thee.  My  flesh48 
and  my  heart49  faileth47,  (but)  God  (is)  the  strength50  of 
my  heart,  and  rny  portion51  for  ever. 

5  (with  the  art.  inn  5  in  plur.  §  17, 1)  "IH     4  xfrj    3  (§  83,  6.  b.)    2  plur.  ^    1  fern,  #3  J 
12(subst.  with  art.)  BID    H  hy)    1°  jflJ  9  =  the  maker  of  (part.  H^J7)  8  D#D  7  ")?#.   6  j'KD 
2QDTT1      19Conv.  1     18^3     17  Hi.  3^      16  j  3    15"1#N3    14  (§  85,  2.)  fc^D 
27  Hi.  TV    262Tha    25pK    24^     23}'3n     22  [§  93,  Note]  -JN     21  (§  111,  2.) 
33tnjV     32^^^     31  with  inf.  S     30  [§  93,  Note]  HP K    29  [§19, '6.]    28 [§  80,  3.J 

ITT  T 

38 i§  91,  1.  2.]     37Ni.  Y13     36 }     35with  art.  Q^J    34 Part.  Ni.  with  art. 

4"7    43^   42 [naa  —  naj  pi.]  i3i    41  pi,  rn, 

.51pSn    50 1«    493n"7 
I    .•  ••  T  • 

18 


138  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

§  67.     THE  FORMATION  OF  FEMININES. 
1.    The    feminine    termination  Jl—  is   appended  to   the 
masc.  noun,  affecting  it  in  the  same   manner   as   the   light 
suffixes.        L  DID,  fern.  JlCttD;  NttO,  HNVlO;   II.    Decl. 

.  rnpio;  rn.K»  nrnfc;  nrn.fem.  run,  in.  Deci. 
,  nSn|;  D'ptj'  nppJ?;  iv.  i)eci.  DDR, 
v.  Deci.  ^p,  ns^Qj  D*?JN  np^Jti 

'  (TV!*. 


2.  The  toneless  fern,  ending  ft—,  modifies  a)  the  ante 
penult  like  H—  :  as  rn."U  wall,  from  TTU;  b)  the  penult 
like  the  Seghol  in  Tj^b*  for  T|^5'  v^z-  ^7  ^ne  Seghol  of 
H—  the  preceding  vowel,  with  a  few  exceptions,  be 
comes  like  it  in  sound:  Patach  and  Kamets  become 
Seghol:  as  JlfTfi,  fijll^D;  rTTV^  FT$yj  Tsere  becomes 
Seghol:  m»  Hj;  C'hirek  0—)  becomes  Seghol:  TD 


When  n  —  is  appended  to  the  nouns  in  ^  —  and  *|  (Deriva 
tives  from  r\"^),  i-et  and  u-et  are  contracted  into  JT—  and 

m  .  w'»  rvyp  (for  np^')»  nni^'  (for  rvpt?). 


§  68.    DECLENSION  OF  FEMININES. 

In  inflection  feminine  nouns  undergo  less  change  than 
masculine  ones,  and  are  classed  as  follows  : 

CLASS  I.  Nouns  with  immutable  vowels  before  the  fem 
inine  termination  Jl—  :  as  jlTTtJI  >  H7bp  >  HpH  statute,  law. 

T  T          :  T    :  T  |T   \ 

CLASS  II.  Nouns  with  mutable  Kamets  or  Tsere  before 
the  fern,  termination  H—  :  as  jlV#  counsel,  rDJ^In  abomi 
nation,  njTiy  righteousness. 

CLASS  III.  Nouns  derived  from  the  segholate  form  of 
the  masculine:  as  rQ^D*  from  TPO;  rnj£3  a  young  wo 
man,  from  *)J^;  rrnpX  word,  saying,  from  T)pN;  Hptfl 
strength,  from  ptfl  » 

CLASS  IV.    Nouns    properly   Segholates,    terminating  in 


§  69.     FIP^T  DECLENSION  OF  FEM.  NOUNS.          139 

ft—-  (with    gutturals  fi——)  ft—  —  >  ft-  —  :   as  ftT}^  mis 
tress;  flg'tf  wife:  njrO  coat. 

§  69.     FIRST  DECLENSION. 

In  this  declension   the  ending   only   undergoes   changes 
in  the  const,  st.  :  H—  is  commuted  into  ft—:  as  HpH  const. 


Before  light  suffixes  the  Patach  of  ft—  being  in  an  open 
syllable   becomes    Kamets  :    as  TlpID  >  but  D3fiD;lD  «      The 

plural  JTiDID  remains  unchanged  in  all  forms. 

> 
He    local  (H—  )  changes   the    fern,    termination   ft—  into 

»  >  T  >  T 

ft—  •  as  J"irn!p>  from  PPO  n.  p.   (bitter  fountain). 
EXERCISE  110. 

jfc  :nirr  nsrp.  HMH  zrbn$  :nS  ^ioSn  ^T  rnrr 


nnin 


nir  nisi  :  13  nmo  np^'  i^i^i  22  v$  np^'  : 


secreti  the  beginnings  perfects  (g  g3,  7:)  (g  90,  8.)4  bridegroom5  bridal- 
chamber6  to  rejoice7  the  end,  extremity8  a  going  out,  a  rising9  circuit10  to 
hide,  conceal11  the  heat12  only13  silent  resignation14  (i.  e.  perfectly  resigned) 
to  deliver,  rescue15  path16  far  off,  remote17  near18  to  utter19  righteousness20 
praise21  *  his  mouth22  push,  thrust  down23  unless24  delight95  searching, 
^  ^  unsearchable26.  4$  108,  1.)* 


140  PART  I.     EXERCISES, 

EXERCISE  111. 

My  soul,  waits  thou  only1  upon2  God;  for  my  hope4 
(is)  from  Him.  He  only  (is)  my  rock5  and  my  salva- 
vationG:  He  (is)  my  defence?*  I  shall  not  totters.  As  9 
the  man  '  (is),  (so  is)  his  might  10.  Thou  shatterest  the 
ships11  of  Tarshish  with12  an  east14  wind13-  According 
to  Thy  name  0  God,  so  (is)  Thy  praise15  unto1^  the  ends1? 
of  the  earth.  The  fear  is  of  the  Lord  (is)  clean1*),  endur- 
ing2o  forever.  My  son21,  walk22  not  thou  in  the  way  of 
wicked;  refrain23  thy  foot  from  their  path24-  And  Re- 
chah25  and  Baanah26  came  into2?  the  midst2^  of  the  house, 
and  the  king  Iay29  on3°  his  bed31  in  his  bed3_2chamber33, 
(in  the  chamber  of  h.  b.)  and  they  smote  him,  and  slew34 
him.  Behold,  we  (were)  binding35  sheaves3^  in  the  field, 
and,  Jo,  my  sheaf  arose,  and  also3?  stood  upright^  ;  and 
behold,  your  sheaves  surrounded39?  and  prostrated  tliem- 
selves4o  to  my  sheaf.  Go  and  cry4!  unto  the  gods,  which 
ye  have  chosen;  let  them  save42  you43  in  the  time44  of 
your  distress4^  And  ye  have  this  day  scorned4^  your 
God,  who  himself4?  saved48  you  out  of  all  your  evils4^ 
and  your  troubles50- 

8Ni.  DID    7  [doubles  the  last  cons.]  ;ui#p     6nj^t#'    5  "N3f    4mpjl    3  QD^    21?    l^jfl 

isnn    123   nrrjx   lomoj  93 

22  Kal     21  |3     20[part.]  ^DJ* 
35  Pi.  D?^     34  Hi.  n-1D      33  33^D      32  IIH      31  HtSD     30  ^y     29  part.  33^     28  " 


40Hith.  with  C.  1,  nn^   39  fut.  3^0    38Ni.  Pause!  3^J    37  QJ    SOfplur.  D'—  and  JT)],  H^x 

-  T  *•  T  •  T   \  ~; 

48  part.      47  f^PI      46DKD       totTW       44  n  43  dative       42  Hi.  fut.  y&      41  n 


§  70.     SECOND  DECLENSION. 

1.  The  words  of  this   declension   drop  the   Kamets   and 
Tsere  in  the  inflection,  excepting  in  the   plural   absolute: 
as  rut?  year,  rOfcT,  7W,  but  Hl^'» 

2.  When    8h'va    precedes    the   termination  H — --,  H — 
(as  in  paradigm)  a  helping   vowel  is   used:    as 

from  npny. 


§  70.     SECOND  DECLENSION  OF  FEM.  NOUNS.        141 

3.  In    the    following    words    Kamets    and    Tsere    are 
immutable,    hence    all    these    words    belong    to    the    first 
declension:  nt^'3?  (the  feminine  of  ^p  §  62,  2.)  dry  land; 
iTDJ^n   (for   i*"O*tJTj)   darkness ;    nj^'pS  request ;    nVJO  re 
proach  ;   n^HS   (for  n^*15)  exposition  ;    ni^N  memorial ; 
pfen  deliverance;  11*1311  a  knowing;  ,11¥  (fr.  11V>  Kamets 
to  comp.  the  Dagesh),  HJH  evil,  (fr.  Jfjn)  5  ni3  pure,  (fr. 
TO);  ni3   rumination,  (TU);  niNp  curse,    (UN) ; 

a  saw,  (fr!  TU);  nit   strange,  (fr.  itf);  ,103  hight; 
witness  ;    ilNVp   foil ;    ilNptD   unclean  ;    71*13^   something 
lost ;    n  /M   robber v ',    n^?bX   darkness  ;    Jl.'Dl^  pool ;   i*l!3^Jl 

'  T   *'  '  ^  T  T       M^|  '  T    " 

something  stolen ;  Hllp  gall ;    «1i3l^  burning ;  n^NII  fig ; 
nD^np  overthrow;  nfiJJO  plague  etc. 

4.  Several  nouns  take  in  the   const,  st.  and  before  suff. 
^the  Segholate  form  H or  f]— — :  as 

np^Pp  kingdom,     const,  'jlp/pp^  with  suff. 
nnBJ^p  family,  n     jlfliD^pj        " 

n^N^D  work,  '  i' 

T         T   : 

n^DlD  chariot.  " 

T  T     :  v 

government,     »     HytTpP » 


war 


ornament,         •» 

norj3  cattle,  with  suff.  ^PD?^   W^D?5   ^^  crown 
const.   n*)tpj?.5   rn'lljl  mistress,  const. 
const.  nDH1?  . 

EXERCISE  112. 


nin 

:np?p 
nin 


142  PART  1.     EXERCISES, 

:23pn  22         2l       20 


38  37    '       36        35 


sweet1  sleep2  laborer3  to  be  exalted4  a  city5  snare,  gin6  righteous  acts7 
to  search8  form,  imagination9  thought10  to  understand11  the  breath,  spirit12 
to  search13  chamber,  inward  part14  abomination15  high,  proud  (§  83,  7.)16 
messenger17  the  multitude18  the  honor19  the  want20  people21  destruction, 
ruin22  prince23  to  know,  regard24  the  life25  beast26  ground27  to  be  satisfied28 
throughout  all  ages  ($  91,  3.  b.)29  above,  more  than  all30  a  watching,  guard-" 
ing31  issue,  result32  slumber33  folding3*  one  that  travels35  poverty36  want37 
a  man  of  a  shield  =  armed  with  a  shield38  to  stand39* 

EXERCISE  113* 

The  Lord  will  render1  to  every2  man2  his  righteousness3 
and  his  faithfulness4-  The  lips-5  of  a  fool  enter6  into7  con 
tention8-  How9  shall  we  sing10  the  Lord's  song11  in  a 
strangeis  land12  (in  the  land  of  a.  st.  §  83,  6.  b.).  My 
sighs15  (are)  many14-  Andie  if16  there  be  (fut.)  in  a  man 
a  sin17  (deserving)  the  judgment  of  death,  and  he  be  put18 
to  death18,  and  thou  hang19  him  on20  a  tree;  his  body22 
shall  not  remain21  all  night21  upon  the  tree,  for  he  that 
is  hanged24  is  a  curse23  of  God,  that25  thou  defile26  not 
the  land,  which  the  Lord  thy  God  giveth  thee  (for)  an 
inheritance27-  And  he  said,  Thy  brother  came  with28 
subtlety29  and  hath  taken30  thy  blessing31-  Whoso  stop- 
peth32  his  ear  at33  the  cry34  of  (the)  poor,  he  also  shall 
cry35  (himself)  but36  shall  not  be  answered.  Jealousy37 
(is)  the  rage38  of  a  man39?  therefore40  he  will  not  spare41 
in  the  day  of  vengeance42-  The  sacrifice-  of  wicked  ones 
(is)  an  abomination  to  the  Lord:  but  3  6  the  prayer  of  up 
right  ones  (is)  His  delight43-  My  rigteousness  I  hold 


§71.     TflnlP  DECLENSION  OF  FEM.  NOUNS.          143 

fast-H  and  will  not  let  it  go45  all-is  the  while46  my  breath.-*? 
(is)  in  me. 

lOHi.-Utf    9TK    8  3  -"I    73    6fut.  K13    5H£3^    irWEX    SHpIV    2BTK    1  Hi.  3^ 

T  T  T      v:  I  TT  : 


18  Hophal  pret.  ma    l^X^H    16  Ol     ISnfUK    14pret.  33*1    13  "OJ    12riO1K    H  Ttf 

...  .  .  T  T_.  _  T  T  ..  T  T~: 

26  Pi.  KDD     251      24  part.  pass.      23nSSp      22pS3J      21  Hi.  p1?      20^      19prot.  flSfi 

T  T  I  .-  T  ••  :  T  T 

S3  part.  DDK      31HD12      30Conv.  1,  HpS      29HOnn     283      27 
T  T  :  T    :  • 

401      39  ^3J      36  HDH      37,—lKJp      361 
vv  T  ••  T  :  |  • 

a  45m.  HSJI  44m.  pret.  with  3, 


T    T 


§  71.     THIRD  DECLENSION. 

The  nouns  of  this  class,  having  already  been  changed 
in  form  by  the  addition  of  the  feminine  ending,  remain 
unaltered,  with  the  exception  of  the  plural  absolute, 
which  is  formed  like  that  of  the  masculine  Segholates  in 
—  —  ••  as  rVD^-p  queens,  from  HD^D  >  like  D'D^D^  from  T 
king,  but  const,  st.  niD?>  and  so  with  suffixes 


EXERCISE  114. 

x^S  DSITDX  ^  nh^nvhi  n$h  p 


inns  np)  np.^i  ipp  nin;nin>x-^  :  0.^x03  23nijn:n 
annri  rn^S  nirr  ^piniN'  :24vnij;i 
'nyfyp  nn^i  ^to^  ^S  Tjnxp  npni  nr 


reins,  kidneys1  (§  94,  2,)2  to  exult3  right  things4  the  saying5  furnace6 
(§  83,  10.)7  to  refine8  seven-fold  ($  92,  4.)9  to  comfortio  ruinii  Edeni2  the 
plain13  a  fox14  to  measure15  the  palm  of  his  hand16  the  span17  to  mete  out1® 
to  comprehend19  a  measure  (prob.  a  third  part  of  an  Ephah)-0  to  weigh2l 
the  scales22  the  hill23  testimony2-1  to  give  way^  to  depart25- 


144  PART  1. 

EXERCISE  115. 

The  land  of  Canaan  (is)  a  land  of  mountains  and  val~ 
Jeys1*  (and)  drinketh4  water  of  2  the  rain3  of  heaven.  And 
the  inhabitants  of  Gibeon5  took  worn**"  shoes6  upon  their  feet 
and  worn  outer8  garments8  upon  them.  My  belovedio  is  like^ 
to  a  gazelle11;  behold,  he12  cometh  leaping13  over14  the 
mountains,  bounding15  over  the  hills16-  Ye,  mountains  of 
Israel,  ye  shall  shoot  forth18  your  branches1^  and  bear20 
your  fruitio  for2i  my  people  of  Israel.  For,  behold,  122 
(am)  for23  you,  and24  I  will  turn25  unto  you,  and24  the  cities26 
shall  be  inhabited2^  and  the  ruins28  shall  be  built,  and24  I 
will  settle^  you  afterso  your  formers1  state31-  Thou  hast 
said  in  thy  heart  I  will  go  up33  into32  the  heaven  ;  I  will 
sit  upon  the  mount  of  appointment34;  in  the  two  sides35 
(the  remotest  parts)  of  the  north36;  yet3?  thou  shalt  be 
brought  down39  to  the  grave38;  to  the  two  sides  of  the  pit. 
They  went  up  the  ascent40  to  the  city  and  found  damsels41; 
going  out.  to  draw  water. 

SnoSfr      7  nb3  fern.  r63      6  fern.  S^J     5  Tty3J     4  nn#      3  IBB      2*7      1  Hj?p3 

TT  V  T  T"  T  T  T  T  I  :  * 

17  sing.  W    16njJ3jJ    15Pi.  1'Sp    14  S#   13  Pi.  jS"!    12  HI    u^¥    l<Hn     9  part. 
27Ni.3^    26DnV    25HJ2     24Conv.  1     23  W    22  (§75,  3.)    21  "7    20  N^J    19  nS    18 

-  T  •'-(  TT  V  T   T  '    : 

3")s   34^10    33  rhp    32  (§55,4)    31  Piur.  nn"ip_   303    29  m.  3^ 

40  c.  st.  (g  83,  4)  nS^D    39  Ho.  HT    wSl'KB'    37  !|K    36   ^'flV    35  Dual.  c.  st. 


§  72.     FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

1.  The  nouns  of  this  class  generally  agree  with  the  mas 
culine  Segholates.  The  const,  st.  sing,  remains  unchanged, 
and  before  suffixes  the  original  short  vowel  (—>—>—)  re 
appears:  as  rn.5^'P>  with  suff.  'JTlOKto.  In  the  pi.  ab 
solute  the  following  is  peculiar  to  nouns  of  this  class,  that 
the  vowel  preceding  the  plural  termination  (which  in  the 
masc.  Segholates  is  Kamets:  D'57?)  drops:  as  fil^lD^p; 
in  the  form  fi—  —  a  trace  of  the  (o)  is  preserved  in  —  : 
as  n%  plur.  iSfy^ftflT^f^'  plur.  nl^3»  const,  state 

;  but  ft|?ife>:.  pi.  hwi;  nSn/?,  pi. 


§  72.  *  FOURTH  DECLENSION  OF  FEM.  NOUNS.         145 

NOTE.  There  are  several  nouns-  of  this  class  in  whose  plural 
absolute,  Kamets  and  Tsere  appear  in  the  penult :  fnrO  chapi 
ter,  pi.  nvunis;  H?31$o  knife,  pi.  rrtSjHffii  nroin  reproof, 
pi.  nwjwl  njftib  ring»  PL rnj^tD;  nj;Spp>  pi.  niySpp 

carved  work,    ilpJPD  nurse,    pi.  Hlp^D    (as  if  from   Hp^'p); 
-np    plowshare,    pfdr.    nifchDO  J  fiT^    Astarte,    plur. 

rn>'3  draught,  pi.  niTj?3 . 

2.  As  ^tpp  in   general,  the  form  in  fi— —  takes    before 
suffixes    either    Patach  or     Chirek :    Patach,    if  the  masc. 
terminates  in  A     (—  or  — ) ;    Chirek,   if  the   masc.  termin 
ates,  in    Tsere    or    Chirek :    fTtpp'O ,  with    suff.  ^O^b  > 
from   the   masc.  IDlTb;  D!?^  (infinites,) W^ ,  from  'the 
masc.  2#;  ^|?.^5  nurse,  ihpTO.from  the  masc.  p^D . 

3.  Before   the   suffix  ^  Seghol   occasionally   occurs  :    as 
Ttfl^'i*  thy  wife,    otherwise   ^ri!^'N ,  H^    (Inf,   from   ^H) 
has :  Seghol  with  all  the  suffixes  'fl?1?*  ^4^2'  ^?*?  • 

4.  The  form  M~  -  is  inflected    in    certain    words    (espe 
cially    when    the    masculine    has   })    with     Kubbuts :     as 
ngtlj    (masc.    trin^),   with  suff.    'frW'm',   n^3i^3   wages, 
njDriD  measure,  np.^DO  division. 

5.  In    many    words    the    two    forms  H—  and  H—  exis^ 
either  by  the  use  of  both*  in  the  absolute,    or  of  the  form 
H —  in  the  absolute  only.     In  both   cases  the  form  in  H— 
is  most  frequently   used  in   the  const,  state:    as  PnVJf  as 
sembly  and  rr$y_>  const,  nn^;  rnfe'# and  rrj&%>  fCy&BQ 

thought  and  rij^pO*  HDxSp'work,  HD'jpO  kingdom"  do 


minion. 

EXERCISE  116. 


:5nin 


p 

.   19 


146  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

HIP 


onrnn 

|S  wpr  nirr  ION  rb 
22ni:n    j 


to  blossom1  the  lily2  sucker,  sprout3  the  olive  tree4  beauty5  the  crown6 
glory,  honor7  the  dog8  to  return9  the  vomit10  to  repeat11  master,  lord12  fe 
male  servant,  handmaid13  mistress14  dominion15  vain16  profit17  the  charge. 
law18  a  kingdom19  kindness20  boyhood21  to  increase22  fall,  ruin23- 

EXERCISE  117. 

Beforetime1  in  Israel,  when  a  man  went  (transl.  in  his 
Agoing)  to  inquires  (of)  God,  thus  he  spake,  corned  let  us 
go  to  the  seer4-  The  hope5  of  righteous  ones  (shall  be) 
gladness6'  hut  the  expectation^  of  wicked  ones  shall  perish. 
And8  Hezekiahs  wrote  letters1**  ton  all  Israel,  thati2  they 
should  come  to  the  House  of  the  Lord  at  Jerusalem.  Arid** 
the  Lord  made  garments13  for  the  skin14  (of  the  skin 
§  82,  4.)  to  Adam15  and  his  wife16  and  clothed  them.  And 
^e  shall  keep  mine  ordinance1^  Ands  he  took  the  crown1® 
of  their  king  from  off1^  his  head;  Though^  thou  should- 
est  bray  21  the  foo!22  jn  the  mortar23  among^4  the  ground- 
corn25  with  the  pestle26^  (yet)  will  not  his  foolishness28  de 
part2?  from  him1^  Thy  kingdom^  (is)  an  everlastingso 
kingdom,  and  Thy  dominion31  (endureth)  throughout32  all33 
generations.  And8  a  certain34  woman  cast35  an  upper3? 
millstone36  upon  Ahimelech's38  head,  and  shivered39  his 
skull4^.  And  it  shall  he,  when41  he  sitteth  (about  (the 
time  of)  his  sitting)  upon  the  throne42  of  his  kingdom43, 
that44  he  shall  write  him  a  copy45  of  this  'law  in46  a  book. 
so.  i  7rnn  ennnfr  BnSnfrt  -crnih  3  imp.  pi.  bn  2  with  ace. 


15D"1S       14  ll;      ISnj'n          12  with  inf. 


§  71.     IRREGULAR  XOUNS.  147 


30  (of  all  eternity  §  M,  6  j  DVplJ'-.a    aQjToa     28  nlK    271?D     26 
36(331  lit.  the  rider,  hence  :  the  upper)  nS:3    3723?    35  Hi.  IjV^   34finX   33  (§  88,  c.)   32  3 
.40  SjJ  45r»J^D    44Conv.i  43  rpSaa  42  ND3  41  with  inf.  D  40nSjSj  39  ^V*J  38  ^D'3N 

§  73.     IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 

A.  Derivatives  of  H"y  * 

1.  2X  father,  const,  st.  >5N  (like  a  Segholate  form  from 
n"%  with  light  suffixes:    ON,  ^3^<  with    Srave   suffixes 

Q3'3tf>  Drp38'  i)lur-  ntiK»  const  st.  nin^ 

2.  HK.  brother,  const  TUX,  with  suiF.  :  TINS  but  DJTHg' 
plural  D'nN  ,  const,  TUX,  with  sufT.:  'HX»  VrttsV-  ?|'t?N'. 

3.  nlflX  sister,  const.  nlfUX,  with  sutf.:  ^111^  »  (pi.  abs. 
and  const,  does  not   occur),    plur.  with  suff.:  T)iTTX>  also 
THin>?.     (The  ending  jll  in  the  singular  niPfN  is  not  the 
plural  ending,  but  contracted  from  nTTN*  cf.  HlO*   c.  st. 
from  HID)  » 

4.  DH  stepfather,  with  suif. 

5.  DlOn  stepmother,  with  sutf. 

6.  J3  son    (for  H^^  from  nj3  to    build),    const,    st.    p, 
before  Makkcph  -f^j  seldom  p;  once  ^5>arid  1^3  Num.  24, 
3,  Gen.  49,  11.    With  suffixes  *&,  T]^3;'])lural  b^3,  const. 
st.  ^3,  with  suff.  'J3  etc. 

7.  J13  daughter    (for  n.53»  iein.  from  J3^  const,  st.  H3' 
with  suff.:  'H3  (for  ^3)  i  plur.  n^3,  const,   st.  niJ3» 

8.  JV?  house  (supposed  to  be  derived  from  |"l!D  to  build), 
const,  st.  rV3*  with  suff.  W3;  plur.  DTO*  const,  st.  TO' 
with  suff.  ^3. 

9.  iTDN  maid-servant,  const,  st,  n?iS%  with  suff.  \1D^  ; 
plur,  niTON*,  const,  st.  nlHDN. 

10.  ^3  vessel",  plur.  D^3- 

11.  H5  mouth  (prop,  for  HKD^  '  const,  st,  ^'  with  suff. 
S?  my   mouth,    V?  and  VT$;  plural  D'?  (from  Dwfl) 
(Prov.  5,  4.)  and  HV3  (Jud.  3,  16.). 

B.  Derivatives  from  Vei'bs  ^"J^  » 

1.  ^N  man  (from  tTJN)  ,  const,  st,  C'^,  with  suff. 


US  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

In  plur.  the  original  form  reappears,  D'u^X  (probably  at 
first  D^'i^>  fr.  the  sing.  &}$$)  (seldom  oV'W'  const<  st- 
^N%  with'suff.:  mx>  D3'g>JN. 

2.  rt£*K  woman  (for  H^NX  const,  st.  H^K*  witl1 


C.  Derivatives  from  Y'Jf  and  v']/» 

1.  DV  day,  with  suff.:  *plS  dual    D^pV'  plur.  D*P*>  c.  st. 
*P>  >  with  local  (Jl— )  HOW  » 

2.  TJ/f  city,  pi.  DHJf  (once  DHJJ7  Ju.  10,  4.)  c.  st.  HJ£. 

D.  A    derivative    from  N"J^  is  J^K")  head,    (for   ^K^ 
Segholate  form)  plur.  D^'N^  (for  D^N^  (§  14,  Rising  III.) 
const,  st.  *$NT\ ,  with  suff.    ^N*)»  once  with  suif.   Vt^N^  • 

T  -  T  T 

E.  D'P  water,  c.  st.  *p  and  *P*P>  w.  suff.  ^p?  ^P^P  » 

EXERCISE  118. 

:2nWf  p  ntsto  nin^pi  ninx  xnSffl  pni 
nninn  n§p  trto^S  JD^D  t^NnS  4jn 
.^33  r^Soj  5P^O-  D^8  ^iri3  ^3^fp  nnj; 


IN*  n 


^ijSkx  nin*  ^':N  :rjS  jri^  ^ijSef 


the  inheritance1  prudent2  wreath3  grace  (§  89,  2-)4  divide,  have  part5 
bird-cage6  judge,  defender7  apparel8  garment9  chance  to  be10  the  young  of 
birds,  a  brood11  egg12  to  crouch13  jealous14-  (§  83,  9.)* 

EXERCISE  119. 

Who   can2   find  a   virtuous1   woman  (a.  w.  of  virtue  1)  ? 
her  price5  (is)  far3   above4  rubies.     The  heart  of  her  bus- 


§  74,     THE  NUMERALS.  14y 

band  does  trusts  in  her.  Her  children  arise  up?  and  call 
her  blessed8-  Many  daughters  have  done  virtuouslyij  butt* 
thoui°  excellestn  jhem  all^2-  And^  Isaac^  abode^  inie 
Gerar^.  And13  the  men  of  the  place  asked  (him)  of18 
his  wife  ;  and  he  said,  She  isi9  my  sister:  for  he  feared 
to  say,  She  is  my  wife  ;  lest  (said  he),  the  men  of  the 
place  should  slay 20  me  £01-21  Rebekah22.  These  (are)  the 
words  of  the  letter23,  that  Jeremiah2-*,  the  prophet,  sent 
from  Jerusalem  to  the  children  of  Israel,  whom  Nebuchad- 
ne?zar26  had  carried  into  exile25  to  Babylon  :  Thus  saith 
the  Lord:  Build  ye  houses  and  abide  (in  them);  and  plant2? 
gardens28,  and  eat  the  fruit  of  them;  Take29  ye  wives,  and 
begetso  y0ns  and  daughters  ;  and  take  wives  for  your  sons 
and  give  your  daughters  to  husbands31,  that  they  may 
bear32  sons  and  daughters.  And  seek33  the  peace  of  the 
cities,  whither3^  I  have  caused  you  to  be  carried  into  exile35- 

7pret.  D^p    6  pret.  with  3,  HD3    5 IDD    4  (g  91)  Q     3  pfpp     2  fut.  [§  101  III,  a)]    1  Vn 
11  pret.  with  following  ljyj  rhtf    10  (g  93  Note.)    91    8 to  call  blessed :  Y^X  PL>  with  Conv<  1 

19  (6  77,  3)    18  S    17  "nj    16  3    15  pn^'    14  3W   13  Conv.  1    12(witli  suff.  1^3,  )£)3  etc.)  S*3 
T;  IT:'  -T  T  \ 

25  to  carry  into  exile  nSi  Hi.    24n"DT1    23  ^SD    ^2np^"1     21^    20  fut.  (g  108,  2)  J^n 
TT  T  :    :  •  v "  IT  :    •  -T 

31  ^X    30  Hi.  iV    29HpS     28  com.  (doubles  the  last  cons.)  jj     27  ^DJ    2 

.35  to  cause  to  be  c.  i.  e.  nSj  Hi.    34nr3^-*l^;X    33!£hl    32 


§  74.     THE  NUMERALS. 

1.  The  numerals   are   either   cardinal  or   ordinal.     The 
cardinals  must  be   considered  as   nouns,    having   two  gen 
ders  and  the  const,   state. 

2.  CARDINALS. 

Feminine.  Masculine. 

CONST.  ABSOL.  CONST.  ABSOL. 

nntf  nrrtf  "iru*  "in^    L   N 

2.  3 

3.  3 

4.  1 


150 


FART  i.     EXERCISES. 


Feminine. 
CONST.  AUSOL. 

trton 


yyy 


nnx 
rnety  'fifty 


40. 


K  ) 


Masculine. 
CONST.  ABSOL. 

•       iltfon     5.     n 


7.  r 

8-  n 

9.  0 
10.*    * 

1 1  •  N* 

12.  3* 

13.  ^ 

14.  *p 
I 

15.  1J3 

16.  V 

17.  p 

is.  rr 

19.  ^ 

20.  ^ 


n£"x 


i«K  n^ 

21.   J 


30- 


0-  y    ,D^'^'  60-  D     'D^'PD  50- 

c.  st.  ,/1Np    10°-     p    :  Hundreds  and  Thousands  .D^pTl  90- 

300.   j^  ,[(§  13,  6.  B.  3.)  D?HNp  forJ  D1J1NO  20(J- 

500.  pn    ,niN»  HHN  40()-  n    .- 

3000.  j  ^g^  2000.  3  ,fj^  1000.  ^  or 
(myriads  niD^plur.)  13-1  ,nD!in  10000.  ,0^X^3^4000.  - 

T      :  T   T     :  •    T  -.-        ~-  -     :    - 

,(EZ.  45,  i 


§  74.     THE  NUMERALS.  151 


,CNeh.  7,  7-2.  N121  *fjij?  Ps.  68.  18.  DTn3"])    *$*  DnJ?.  20000. 
1000000.  100000.  etc.        kX  D'  30000, 


NOTE  1.  From  13  to  19  incl.  the  units  with  the  masculine, 
stand  in  the  absolute  state  ;  with  the  feminine  in  the  const,  st, 

NOTE  II.  The  numerals  are  denoted  by  letters.  The  Unit,"  : 
from  X  to  0  5  the  Tens :  from  »  to  ¥ 5  the  Hundreds:  from  p  to  f} 
and  the  final  letters  P*'  £] »  [  >  D  ,  T|  •  7j  =  500,  Q  ==  GOO,.  J  =  700, 
£|  =  800,  V  =  900;  but  more  usually  pfi  =  500;  iri=  MO  etc. 
The  connection  of  a  decimal  and  a  unit  is  seen  in  the  table  above . 
For  15  is  employed  V'D  and  not  H"*  •  this  last  being  the  abbre 
viation  for  HirP  (§  18.  Note)^^For  the  thousands  and  the  higher 
numbers  the  dotted  alphabet^  used:  as  X  (or  {O=  1000  ; 
5=2000,  3  =  3000  etc. 

NOTE  III.     The  termination  (}"?—)  of  the  numerals  with  masc. 

T 

nouns  is  the  adverbial-ending  (§  75,  1.  Note).  Before  feni.  nouns 
(H — )  is  dropped,  lest  it  ba  considered  as  the  feni.  ending  (J"| — ) 
(§  57,  6,  I). 

3.  ORDINALS. 

FEM.  MASC.  FEM.  MASC. 

/  6th 


7th 

sth  wt 

9th  rvyin         ^3^1 4th 


From  the  eleventh,  the  cardinals  with  the  article  are 
used  instead  of  the  ordinals,  and  follow  the  noun;  when 
without  the  article,  they  are  found  both  before  and  after  it, 
especially  in  the  numbering  of  years,  months  and  days:  as 
01*  T^T  nj£j&?3  Gen.  8,  4.  and  H^3*1J*!  DH^R.DVS  Hag.  1,  W. 

4.  Syntactical  rules  see  §  92. 

EXERCISE  120. 

rrrr 


152  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 


:nirv 
5npg 
nin^S  6ni^?n  ^n  njn  nS  DV 


Kin  15Dn$5n  DI*  njn 
D^jr 
18?)n:jt'n 


,£j"p  pr?y>. 


how1  put  to  flight2  appointed  festival3  between  the  two  evenings,  twilight* 
the  passover5  unleavened  bread6  week7  the  sickle8  standing  corn9  strict  rest10 
a  memorial11  a  sound  of  a  trumpet12  a  convocation13  only,  but14  expiation15 
to  make  an  expiation16  to  afflict,  humble17  to  celebrate,  to  keep18  booth,  tab 
ernacle19  creation20  world21  a  measure  for  dry  goods22- 

EXERCISE  121. 

We  (are)  all  one  man's  sons.  We  (are)  twelve  breth 
ren,  sons  of  our  father,  one  (is)  not*,  and  the  little  one  is 
this  day  with2  our  father  in  the  land  of  Canaan.  The 
whole  congregation  together3  (was)  forty  and  two  thousand 
three  hundred  and  three  score,,  beside4  their  man-servants 
and  their  maid-servants,  of  whom5  (there  were)  seven  thou 
sand  three  hundred  thirty  and  seven:  and  they  hads  two 
hundred  forty  and  five  singing-men7  and  singing-women7- 
Their  horses,  seven  hundred  thirty  and  six:  their  mules8  » 
two  hundred  forty  and  five:  (Their)  camel  s9»  four  hundred 


§  75.     IN  GENERAL.  153 

thirty  and  five:  six  thousand  seven  hundred  and  twenty 
asses.  Two  women  went  out.  Ifio  thou  buyii  a  He 
brew^  servant,  six  years1^  he  shall  serve:  and  in  the  sev 
enth  he  shall  go"  out  free' 4,  for  nothing^-  Seven  abomina 
tions  (are)  in  the  heart  of  the  wicked.  Whenie  I  break" 
the  staff18'  of  your  bread,  ten  women  shall  bake19  your 
bread  in  one  oven20  ancl2i  ye  shall  eat,  and  not  be  satis- 
fied22.  Eve23  was  the  first  woman.  And  the  Lord  spake 
to  Moses  on'24  the  first25  (day)  of26  the  second  month,  in2? 
the  second  year  aftei-28  they  were  come29  out  of  the  land 
of  Egypt. 

6  to  them  (were)      5  of  whom  H;7N    4"^P     3"^n«3     2f\K      1  (§  75,  3.)  with  suff.  j'K 
limp    10'3     9  (doubles  the  last  cons.)  Stt-l    8TJ3    7 part.  Pi.  masc.  and  fem.  pi. 
17 (in  my  breaking)  "130      16  with  inf.  3     15  DJH    U^flH    13  (§  58,  10.)  HJK'    12 
25-IHX      243      23n-in     22t»3fr     21  Conv.  1      20  V-ifl      19pret.  with  Conv.  ) 

TV  T-  "-t 

.29  XV    28  with  inf.  and  suff.  (after  their  coming  out)  *?    273    26  (§  83,  10.) 


CHAPTER  XL 

PARTICLES. 
§  75.     IN  GENERAL. 

1.  The  particles   which   comprise   adverbs,    prepositions, 
conjunctions  and  interjections   are  divided  into  inseparable 
and  separable.     The   inseparable  are   prefixed  or  postfixed 
syllables,  of  the  most  of  them  we  have  already  treated,  as 
D^M  §  §  18,  19,  local  Jl—  §  19,  6. 

2.  The  separable   consisting   of  entire  words   are   partly 

I.  primitive:  as    (a)  the  negations  7^^  ^  and  the   poetic 

> 
^3  not ;  (b)  local  and  temporal  terms :  as  D£2>>  n£t£>'  (with 

local  i"D  there,  H£D  here,  >#  where?  tN  then;  (c)  expressing 

the  manner   and   mode   of  actions:    as  HD  thus,  #}  a  par- 

20 


154  PART  I.     EXERCISES. 

tide  of  entreaty  ;  partly  II  derivative :  as  JT3P  within, 
VTfT  together,  ^?p  circuit,  fi^fi  (Inf.  Hi.)  much,  the  in 
terrogative  adverbs  fitzfr  why,  J^IID  (compounded  of  the  in- 
terrog.  HO  and  JftT  (p.  pass,  perceived,  seen)  why  =  what 
hast  thou  seen?  of/ Gen.  20,  10. 

NOTE.  Fern,  forms  are  frequently  converted  into  adverbs,  e.  g. 
fTh&'&nS  sooner,  rUllflN!}  later,  Jl^nO  quickly,  fifty  now 
(fr.  fij;  time,  prop,  at  the  time),  j"|73  wholly,  completely"  rtiJ?K 
truly.  On  adverbs  in  D— >see  (§  56  3,  2.  e  )  Nouns  in  the 
accus.  are  often  adverbs,  e.g.  fift1}*)  haughtily,  HiD3  safely,  HND 
a  hundred-fold,  a  hundred-times"  Prov.  17,  10.  Cf.  (§  85,  4.). 
On  Adverbs  formed  by  S  (see  §  84,  3). 

3.  Some  of  the  derivative  adverbs,  which  include  the 
signification  of  the  verb  or  noun  from  which  they  are  de 
rived,  are  connected  with  suffixes:  as  fi}fi  behold !  lo! 
with  suffixes :  v^Pl,  ^fi  and  ^fi  behold  I,  (properly :  be 
hold  me)  ^H,  Tprj  beiiold  thou,  tyft  behold  he,  etc. 
Ity  yet,  as  yet,  still,  w.  suff.:  ^^Jly,  ^y,  ZTlty,  ^*!l^>  fltty 
I  am,  thou  art,  he,  she  is  as  yet  or  still  ;  iiJD,  "ij;3  while, 
while  yet :  H^3  while  yet  I  am  ;  ntyjp  since:  H1])0  since 
I  am. 

\i#,  const,  st.  PN  not,  with  suff.  ^^\X  I  am  or  was   not,  I 


»  there  is,  there  are,  with  suff.:  T]^  thou  art,  1 
he  is,  DD^  ye  are. 


^N*,  const,  st.  ^  where,  H^K  where  art  thou?  1\V  where 
is  he?  D\X  where  are  they?'  The  force  of  the  substantive 
verb  to  be  is  conveyed  by  all  these  adverbs. 

4.  Prepositions.     The  greater  number  of  prepositions  are 
nouns   in  the   accusative  or  const,    st.:  as  ^VK  (subst,  the 
side)  by,   near,  f'J  (^3  separation,    interval)  "between,    and 
they  can  be  connected  with  other  prepositions:  as  nnjTO  from 
under,    from   beneath,  rU\*D  from  with,  i.  e.  from,  or  they 
appear  abbreviated  as  prefixes :  thus  D"7'JD"3  • 

5.  The   prepositions   being  nouns  can  take  suffixes  (the 


%    §  75.     IN  GENERAL.  155 


nominal  suif.,  seldom  the  verbal  snff.):  as  rUlfi  under,  with 
suff.:  Vinr);  fiX  with,  is  distinguished  from  HX  the  accu 
sative  particle,  that  the  former  with  |uffixes  is  commuted 
into  flX>  the  latter  into  DX  (filX):  as  V1X  with  me;  T)X  me. 

6.  Several  prepositions  were  originally  plural  nouns,  ac 
cordingly  they  receive  only  plural  suffixes.  To  these  he- 
long:  *inX>  HP1X  behind,  after,  HPlX  behind  me,  TjHHX 
behind  thee,  VinX  behind  him  etc. 

^  (^  poet.)  towards,  to:  ^X  to  me,  ^X,  vSx,  D3^?N  , 
j>3  between,  with  suff.  ^3,  T]^  but  also  with  pi.  inasc. 
and'plur.  fern.  suff.   ^3,  Dp^i^ntt1?'  Dfiti'3* 
1#  as  far  as,  unto,  (H^.poet.)  with  suffixes:  HJJ,  ^"U£> 


upon,  over  o#  poet.)  w.  suff. 
under,  below,  beneath,  'fiflfl, 
i  (with  the  sing,    only,  ^Hfiri  (verb,  suff.) 


7.  Conjunctions.     The    conjunctions    are    unchangeable. 
On  the  conjunction  1  and  its  vocalization,  see  (§  12,  7.  b.), 

8.  Interjections.    HH,  HpS'  HNV-  »ttl<»  ^H  ,  nj1»»  IX,  \\* 
ah  !  ^X  woe  !  alas  f 

Other  parts  of  speech  used  as  interjections  :  ^  (it  is  sup 
posed  to  be  contracted  from  »#3  entreaty)  I  pray  :  always 
with  ^'"1X  '  ^'"ISf  my  Lord. 

Poll  and  ^H  (Imp.  of  HIT  to  give)  come!  come  on!  go  to! 

DH  hist!  hush!  pi.  1DH  (Imp.  Piel  of  HDJl  to  be  silent.) 

tTyhfi  (fr.  7^fl  to  violate,  break  a  covenant)  profane!  fie  ! 
far  be  it!  followed  by  ^  of  the  person  and  inf.  with  JD: 
as  nifcVJp  ^  nV^H  far  be  it  from  thee  to  do. 

XJ  I  pray  ;  used:  I.  with  the  imp.  opt.  and  fut.  II.  with 
particles  :  X^  H£X  say,  I  pray  thee,  X|"ni)SN  let  me  go, 
I  pray  the,  Vo~Sx  nay,  or  not  so,  I  pray  thee  ;  XJP1X  woe 
now!  alas!  Atxthe  beginning  of  a  sentence:  X|X  (written 
also  H3X)  contracted  from  XmX  oh  now!  I  pray. 


156  PART  I.     EXERCISES, 

EXERCISE  122. 

-ox)  *h  n^n  ^i^T)k\*  n^}  npri  w&y  D^-DN  nnjn 
rnrr  :S 


ptr  :n"jiM  n/ppn  i 


on?  vrra      ni  ^75    :»  :rh 


nSnr 

-  -    - 


nx  wio  nin»D 

•      •    •  T      :  ••  T      •    T  T    :    - 

to  turn  one's  self1  to  walk,  live2  angel3  to  remain  over  night*  wages5  hire 
ling,  hired  laborer6  supplication,  prayer7  to,  unto8  to  roll9  to  act  wickedly, 
to  be  guiltyio  yetii  diligently  consider12  (§  97,  2.)18  p.  n.  m.14  the  Jezreelite15 
herbs16  (§91,  I.)17'  money1®  the  price19- 

EXERCISE  123. 

Inquire1  (after)  good,  and  not2  evil,  that3  ye  may4  live: 
ands  so6  the  Lord,  the  God  of  Hosts,  shall  be  with7  you, 
as8  ye  have  said.  How9  do  ye  sayio»  we  (are)  wise,  and 
the  law  of  the  Lord  (is)  with7  us  ?  Lo,  certainly  n  irii2 
vain13  made  he  (it),  the  pen14  of  the  Scribes15  (is)  in 
vain.  Deborah16  abode  under17  the  palm-tree18  of  De 
borah,  between19  Bamah20  and  between  Beth-el20  in  mount 
Ephraim21;  and22  the  children  of  Israel  came  up  to  her 
for12  judgment.  Hezekiah  trusted  in  the  Lord  God  of 
Israel;  so  that23  after24  him  was  none25  Hke2«  him 


§  75.     THE  SUBJECT.  157 

all  the  kings  of  Judah.  To  the  hired  servant,  at  his  day 
thou  shalt  give  his  hire28;  neither  shall  the  sun  go  down29 
upon30  it;  for  he  is  poor31*  and  setteth  his  heart  upon  it., 
(and  to  it  he  beareth32  his  soul)  lest33  he  call34  against 
thee  unto  the  Lord,  and  it  be35  sin  unto36  thee.  • 

6P    5  to  connect  with  the  verb    4fut.    Sn1?    2^    1  with  ace. 


15130      14  BJ?      13">p.^      12  with  the  art.  (§  84,  3.)  ^      11  |DX     lOfut. 
22Conv.  1    2lDn3K    20^-^3    20(§  80,  3.)  HD1     19  pa    18  ID 

2813'^      273      26  before  light  suff.  )D3,  103      25^      24  plur.  const.  ^IlK,  1HX      231 
.363    35  pret.  with  Conv.  1    34fut     33  x'Sl    32  part.  NJPJ     31  "3  j?    30  S^ 


PART  II. 

S     T     N     T  .  A     X . 
CHAPTER    I. 

THE  ESSENTIAL  PARTS  OF  A  SENTENCE. 
§  76.     THE  SUBJECT 

1.  The   subject   of  a  proposition   appears   either   in  the 
form  of  a  substantive  or  in  that  of  an  adjective,  const,  in 
finitive  or  pronoun,  supplying  the  place  of  the  substantive. 

2.  When  the  sentence  is  without  a  definite  subject,  the 
impersonal  construction  is  employed.     The   subject  is  then 
indicated  : 

a.  By  the  third  person  of  the  passive  conjugations  (Ni.  Pu. 

Ho.),  e.  g.  il&'N  fcTir^  fiNt*7  it  is  called  to  this  woman  = 

she  is  called  woman.     Gen.  2.  23. 
h.  By  the  third  person  of  the  sing,  active,  e.  g.  IDI^  N*J£ 

he  (some  one)  called  his  name.     Gen.  11,  9. 

c.  By  the  third  person  of  the  plural   active:  as  VT^A  and 
they  told,  i.  e.  certain  men  told.     1.  Sam.   19,  21. 

d.  By  the  second  person  of  the  future:   as 


158  PART  II.     SYNTAX.' 

there  shall  no  one  go  thither.  Isa.  7,  25,  or  by  the  in- 
fin.  with  the  suff.  of  the  second  person  ;  with  regard  to 
the  latter  a  phrase  of  frequent  occurrence  is:  ruSft  "f^ 
till  thy  coining  =  till  one  comes. 

3.  The  third  pers.  sing,  often  has  for  a  subject  it  under 
stood:  as  VT1  and  it  happened  ;  ^  Dfl  it  was  warm  to  me. 

4.  The  impersonal  construction  expressed  by  the  3.  pers. 
passive,  is    often    found    with    a   following    accusative:    as 
ng'OVlN  D^-V1  it  was  brought   back  Moses   (ace.)  =  some 
one  brought  back  Moses. 

NOTE.  A  noun  often  is  made  prominent  as  subject  at  the  be 
ginning  of  a  sentence  or  clause  by  fitf,  -fitf,  or  flN  is  used  for  the 
purpose  of  emphasizing  the  subject  in  a  passive  or  intransitive 
connection,  e.  g.  Gen.  4,  18,  Ex.  10,  8,  21,  28.  Nu.  32,  5. 

5.  When  the  active  subject  can  be  conjectured  from  the 
action  itself,  the  participle  of  the  same  verb  is  used  as  sub 
ject:  as  TjTlH  TpT  K^  the   treader    (some   one)   shall  not 
tread. 

§  77.     THE  COPULA. 

1.  The  copula  is  generally  not  expressed,  the  relation  of 
the  subject  and  predicate  being  shown  by  placing  them  to 
gether  :  as  £"Nn  ^Il|  the  man  is  great ;  fTifT  DliO  God  is 
good. 

2.  The  verb  JTH  to  be,  is  used  to  exactly  define  the  time: 
as  Dnj?  rrn  B>rrin  the  serpent  was  crafty;  ^^  rV?T  pfJN 
Aaron  shall  be  thy  prophet,    or  to  convey  the  proper  con 
ception  of  the   verb :    the   existence   or   non-existence  of  the 
subject,  which  may  be  still  more   forcibly   rendered  by  £'* 
or  Jig  (§  75,  3.)  :  as  JV^S*  Tj3  PITT  ^  no   needy   shall   be 
among   you,  Deut.  15/4.  J\X"DN  ttTJp?  HIIT  t^H  Is  the 
Lord  among  us  or  not,  Ex.   17,  7. 

3.  The  third   person   of  the   pers.  pron.  N1J1»  N*n>  DH  > 
n?D(>  fn»"n|ilidropping  the   pronominal  idea  entirely  and 
expressing    only    the    verb    to    be,    is    employed    to    avoid 
ambiguity     and     to     distinctly   point     out    the    noun     or 
adjective  standing  in  the  predicate :  as  "l^ll  tOJl  TTT  Da- 


§  78.     THE  PREDICATE  AND  ITS  AGREEMENT  &c.         159 


vid  is  the  king,  whereas  TtDH  TPf  could  be  taken  as  : 
the  king  David  ;  or  it  is  used,  when  the  preceding 
subject  is  more  remote  from  the  predicate  than  usual  :  as 

inSrrj  Kin  Danes'?  *rib$  nirr  n#N  the  fire-offerings  (coi- 

lectively)  of  the  Lord,  the  God  of  Israel,  are  their  inherit 
ance,  Jos.  13,  14.  Even  when  the  subject  is  of  the  first  or 
second  person,  Nin  can  be  used  as  the  copula:  as  JiriK 
DTfal*  Kin  Thou  art  God;  HEPf  Dfltf  ye  are.  Zepli.  2,  12. 

4.  This  use  of  the  3.  pers.  pron.  as  copula,  particularly 
comes  forth  in  union  with  the  demonstr.  pronoun,  e.  g. 
DH  n^N  these  are,  Gen.  25,  16.  -H^N  !"Tjn  HD  what  are 
these?  Gen.  21,  29.  H?.  Nlft  >£>  who  is'  this?  Esth.  7.  5. 


§  78.    THE  PREDICATE  AND  ITS  AGREEMENT  WITH 
THE  SUBJECT. 

1.  The  predicate  appears  either  in  the  form  of  a  verb,  sub 
stantive,  adjective,  adj.  pron.,  or  even  in  that  of  a  derivative 
adverb:    as    tl3T\jl    much,    BJ#p  little,    Itf 

thy  reward  (shall  be)  very  great,    Gen.   15,  1. 
DJfl?  the  men  within  it  (were)  few.  Eccl.  9,  14. 

2.  When   the   predicate   is   an   adjective,    adj.    pronoun, 
participle  or  noun,  it  has  no  article  (excepting  the  adject 
ive  in  superlative  [§  91,  3.]),  and  by  this  it  is  distinguished 
from  the  subject,  in  case  the  latter  is  defined  by  the  arti 
cle  or  otherwise  :  JlVyil  POID  X^>  the  counsel  is  not  good, 
2.  Sam.  17,  7  ^TpN*  SlirO  for  thy  father  is  a  hero,  ibi.  10. 

3.  The  predicate  generally  agrees  with  the  subject,  when 
a  verb,  in  gender,  number  and   person  :  JlJttJlp  ^'$3  tl£tyl 
my  soul   melteth  for   sadness,    Ps.  119,  28.,    when  an  ad 
jective,  participle  or  adj.  pronoun,  in  gender  and  lyimber  : 

tne  worcl  OI>  tne  Lord  is  upright,  Ps.  33,  4. 
tft  this  (is)  the*  woman,  and  this  (is)  her 
son,  II.  Kings  8,  5.  Nevertheless  the  Hebrew  allows  more 
freedom  in  this  respect  than  other  languages,  using  a 
construction  correspondent  to  the  sense  more  than  to  the 
external  form. 


160  PART.  II.     SYNTAX, 

4.  Exceptions. 

a.  When  the  predicate  commences  the  sentence,  the  third 
person  masc.  sing,  is  occasionally  used  impersonally :  as 
D'p  D'fc^Sf  I1?  *nn  an(i  he  had  thirty  sons. 

b.  Nouns  of  multitude   frequently   take  a  plural   verb :   as 
DJ^n  W*l^  and  the  people  saw,  and  vice  versa  substan 
tives  used  in  the  plural  form  (§  82,  4.)  are  often  joined 
with  a  verb  singular:  as  D'Ji^N  N""D  G-od  created. 

v:  T  T 

c.  The  predicate  does  not  agree  with  the  subject,  but  with 
the  genitive  belonging  to  it,  in  case  the  genitive  is  the 

more  important  word:  as  D'pJT^  ^H^  '91  '1p  tne  v°ice 
of  thy  brothers  blood  cries  (Gen.  4,  10.),  the  predicate 
is  governed  by  'jp^  the  drops  of  blood.  NB^  DHJ5PI  trW) 
n31N!TfiK  and  the  east  wind  brought  the  locusts, 
Ex.' 10,  13.  nn  feminine,  but  NBtf  refers  to  DHpr*  In 
the  same  manner  with  D'l  :  FlD^T  tyHV  D W  2H  the 
multitude  of  years  teach  wisdom,  Job  32,  7.  and  nearly 
always  with  ^3 ,  D"JK  W~^>3  VJT5  and  all  the  days  of 
Adam  were. 

d.  A  verb  singular  joined  with  the   subject  in  plural  and 
vice   versa,    often    has  a   distributive    signification :    as 
)T\yjT\  rnfc'  ni£il3  the  beasts  (i.  e.  each  of  the  beasts) 
of  the"  fieldl "shall  cry,  Joel  1,  20.    J^n  *]TrjW:  ^DJ  the 
wicked  (every  wicked  man)  flee,   although  no  one  pur- 
sueth.  Prov.  25,  1. 

5.  When  the  predicate  belongs  to  several  nouns  or  pro 
nouns,  the  following   rules  must  be   observed:    a)  It  gen 
erally   takes    the    plural:    as  D'NtpH  PlbS^'  Vy\  W  I  and 
my  sorfrSolomon  are  sinners,  I.  Kings  I,  21.    b)  When  they 
are  of  different  genders,  the  masculine  is  preferred  to  the 
feminine:  as  D'1??^  VHl^  *^?  n^s  sons  anc^  n^s  daughters 
(were)  eating,  Job  1,  13.    c)  When  they   are  of  different 
persons,  the  predicate  follows  the  most  important,  i.  e.  the 
first  person  rather  than  the  second,  and  the  second  in  pref 
erence,  to  the  third ;  HfttO  W  JTO  HiTCM  let  us  make  a 


VERBAL  ARRANGEMENT.  161 


covenant,  I  and  tliou,  Gen.  31,  44.:  as 
ri3~iy  I  and  the  lad  will  go  yonder,  Gen.  22,  5.  d)  Some 
times,  especially  when  the  predicate  precedes  the  subject, 
it  agrees  only  with  one  of  the  nouns,  most  frequently  with 
the  nearest,  being  understood  for  the  others  :  as  rp  K^l 
1D&W  V$y\  and  Noah  came  in,  and  his  sons  and  his  wife 
(came  m)  ;  "pHK']  DHQ  ^31^1  and  Miriam  spoke  and  Aaron 
(spoke)  . 

§  79.     VERBAL  ARRANGEMENT. 

1.  As   a   leading  principle,    the   word   upon    which  the 
most  stress  is  to  be  laid,    always  begins   the  sentence:   as 
D'rfjN  JO3  fV2J>&O.3  -fn  the  beginning  God  created,  fWiTgJ 
as  the  most  important  word  taking  the  lead;  hence  every 
word  to  be  emphatic,  precedes  the  rest. 

2.  In  a  simple   and   independent  normal   sentence,    the 
words  are  in  the   natural   succession  of  Subject,    Predicate 
and  Object:  as  f»  D7W:  D^?X  ^3  thy  sons  were  eating 
and  drinking  wjje,  Job  1,  18. 

3.  The  predicate  precedes  the  subject: 

a.  When  it   is  an   adjective:    as  >j|j;  THJl  my   iniquity   is 
great;    Gen.    4,    13.    r6pJ3  Dtf  'nMnVoitO  wisdom  'is 
good  with  an  inheritance,  Eccl.   7,  11. 

b.  When  it  is  a  verb  connected  with  Conversive  Vav  ;  with 
out  this  'connection  with  *)  the  succession  is  regular:  as 

O^  and  Isaac  came,  but  N3  pHV^  and  I-  came, 
Tt*1  and  the  man  was,  but  JTH  ^^H1  * 

*    ;  ~  T  T    .  *    T    ; 

c.  When  *\$$>  an   adverb  of  negation  K7  etc.,   an   inter 
rogative  pronoun  or  prefix,    and   particles  like  *D?  ^X 
stand  before   the   predicate  :    as  N^  H^'N*  in^N^/p  ^3 
D^ri^K  all  his  work  which  God  had  created,  Gen,  2,  3. 
p*V"Vi)  *")fTb  tfb  there   was  not  left   any   green   thin 
r±JN  TIN  nOty'rj  am  I  my  brother's  keeper? 

for  T!  languish  ;'  H^PPJ  D^pHafD  D^l?n 
peradventure  there  shall  lack  five  of  the  fifty  righteous. 

d.  When  a  verb  stands  in  jussive  or    the    construction  is 

•21 


162  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 


impersonal:  as  D'£H  11|^  the  waters  shall  be  drawn  to 
gether,  rhtfp  VT  let  there  be  luminaries. 
4.  When  the   subject   follows   the   predicate,    the   object 
Jakes  its  place   after   the  subject:    as 


5.  The  object  connected   with  an    interrogative  pronoun 
or    prefix,  stands    before    the   verb:    as  VinD1?  '0  ^I^TlN 
^Hp.1?  1P  *"VJ£D5  whose  ox  have  I  taken?  or  whose  ass  have 
I  taken?  1.  Sam.  12,  3. 

6.  Of  two  accusatives,  the  one  of  a  person,  the  other  of 
a  thing,  the  former  precedes;    and  the   same   rule   obtains 
when  besides  the   accusative  of  a  thing   the  person  stands 
in  indirect  relation  to  the  verb  :  as  D^HTlN  S'rpf)  HfiK  '3 
f"\NrrriN  nfn  for  unto  this   people   shalt  thou  divide  for 
an  inheritance  the  land  Jos.  1,6.    nipiTfiN  ^  n&y  JOM 

VnjJil  he  has  done  us  this  great  evil,  ij  Sam/6,  9. 
pO'l^  rtipyw  that  I  may  do  the  mercy  of  God 
unto  him,  2.  Sam,  9,  3. 

NOTE.  Many  exceptions  are  to  be  found  tdfthe  foregoing  rules, 
but  as  by  giving  them,  we  would  only  confuse  the  mind  of  the 
student,  they  are  omitted. 


CHAPTER  IL 

SYNTAX  OF  THE  PAKTS  OF  SPEECH.* 
§  80     THE  ARTICLE. 

1.  The  article  is  omitted,  when  the  noun  is  defined  by 
a  suffix,  or  a  following  genitive,  or  if  it  is  a  proper  name: 
as  T]St?n  JT5  t^6  house  of  the  king;  7V3  my  house;  DH^DN 
Abraham. 

*  The  dependence  of  the  several  parts  of  compound  sentences  cannot 
be  understood,  until  the  student  has  become  acquainted  with  the  syntax  of 
the  parts  of  speech  and  the  influence  which  they  mutually  exert  in  a 
proposition. 


§  80.     THE  ARTICLE.  103 

2.  The  adjective  or  the   demonstrative   pronoun   attribu 
tively  employed  requires  the  article,  when  they  belong  to  a 
determined  substantive:    as   ^"UPf  VV3  mv    large -house  ; 
Vn^n  Tl^P  j"V3  the  large  house  of  the  king. 

3.  Proper  names  originally  appellative,  take  the  article: 
as  pttD^n  the  Lebanon  (the  white  mountain),  Jl-p^H  Kamah 
(the  Hight,  the  high  city). 

4.  The  article  has  occasionally  demonstrative  power:  as 
D1*PT  this  day;  DJ/*£)n  this  time;  H^'H  this  year. 

5.  The  vocative   case  often   takes   the   article:    as  T 
0  king  ! 

NOTE.     Except  when  the  article  could  not  have  been  joined  to 
the  nominative :  not  "1  Yin  0  David ! 

6.  The  indefinite  article  is  indicated  by  the  omission  of 
the  H :  as  JT.3  a  house,  £^K  a  man ;  though  sometimes  ex 
pressed  by  the   numeral  1fl5<:  as  1HK  tf'DJ  a  prophet,  or 
C"X  in  the  sense  of  person  indefinitely  used,  standing  before 
nouns    or    adjectives,     particularly    before    gentile   names: 

ajust(man),  TilJ  tTN  a  hero,  HIIT  WX  a  Jew, 
a  Hebrew. 

T.  Tjn  HgX.  D^raisn  nb>  13J?,  inniOrp  may  mean 
the  baker,  or  a  baker  of  the  king;  the  servant,  or  a  servant 
of  the  officer  of  the  executioners ;  the  song,  or  a  song  of 
David;  to  avoid  Ambiguity  a  circumlocution  O£'N>  7)  is 
used:  as  ^N  ^^  ^5^  I  am  a  baker  of  the  king;  H^H 
Tib??1?  nt^'^the  baker  of  the  king  ;  TH^  *11D|0  a  song  of 
David;  D'TOtOn  ^W^  "!3J^  a  servant  of  the  officer  of  the 
executioners. 

8.  The  article  must  be  repeated  before  several  nouns  follow 
ing  one  another,  even  when  of  the  same  gender  or  number:  as 

nprnn  -pro  D'nfibm  nhfcm  ^yy.  wn  n^'s  riVn^n  niogn 

|  T  T  - :  ~         T  -    :  T    :       |  •/ 

:  H^tO^n  ]7^?ni  the  great  trials  which  thine  eyes  saw,  and 
the  signs,  and  the  wonders,  and  the  strong  hand,  and  the 
stretched-out  arm. 

9.  On  the  article  used  as  a  relative  pronoun,  see  (§  96,  8.). 


104  PART  II.     SVXTAX. 

THE     NOUN. 

§  81.    GENDER. 

1.  For  the  neuter  the  masculine  is  sometimes  used  :  as 
DHIp^rrSjf  -Diyrr^  UJT  nj  this  (hoc)  they  shall  give 
every  one  that  passeth  among  them  that  are  mustered, 
the  feminine,  however,  most  frequently :  as  JlftO  J?lDt^  *p 
who  has  heard  such  a  thing?  (*O*1  res,  negotiurn,  a  thing, 
must  be  considered  here  as  omitted,  and  the  part  of  speech 
agreeing  with  it,  is  employed  most  commonly  in  the  fem 
inine,  as  in  German  :  triefeS,  for  bicfe  <£ad)C,  and  in  Latin: 
factum,  for  res  fact  a).  Hence  a  verh  being  the  predicate 
of  an  antecedent  sentence  either  expressed  or  understood, 
takes  the  feminine  form  :  as  /JOb^3  ph  *nfJ1  and  it  was 

£  ••    T  :     •  :      I  •     :  -- 

a   custom    in    Israel,    Jtul.    11,    39.    (ph  masc.)    for   *JT1 

ph  njn  wrr;  ruxr  nrvn  rnrr  HNO  from  God  was  this, 

for  fijn  "O^il  irn;   »  nNO  ^Kfc>  nntf  one  (thing)  have 
I  desired   of  the    Lord,    for  %^7Kt2>'  "infcs*  ^*J.     Comp. 

nxr  n^j;  ^  i.  MOS.  s,  14.  and  njn  ^n-n^  n^j;  D 

1.   Mos.  20,  10. 

Adjectives  with  the  feminine  ending  either  in  singular  or 
plural,  are  often.; considered  as  abstract  nouns,  conveying  a 
neuter  sense:  Hflb^  righteousness;  ilWr  nlN^HI  nlV^H 
the  great  and  fearful  things  (magna  et  timenda). 

2.  When  the  abstract  stands  for  the  concrete,  the  signi 
fication  often  determines  the  gender :  as  W?V  , , «  W2J!  antl 
the  exile  =  the  exiles  shall  possess.  Obad.  1,  20. 

§  82.     NUMBER. 

1.  The  singular  is  often   used  in  a  collective   sense:    as 
"IpD  cattle;  JK¥  small  cattle,  flock;  tjp3  silver;  H^H  wheat, 

2.  When  these  collectives  occur  in  plural,  their  meaning 
is  modified :  as  D^DH  grains  of  wheat,  D'^DD  money  pieces. 


§  82.     NUMBER.  165 

3.  The   singular   of  patronymics   with  the   article,  very 
often  has  a  plural  signification :  as  ^p^H  the  Jebusites. 

4.  The  plural  in  some  instances  is  employed  to  express 
dignity  or  majesty,   hence  it  is  called  :  Plural  of  Majesty. 

To  this  helong: 

«.  D'ri/J*  God,  when  meaning  the  true  God  most  frequent 
ly  takes  a  singular  verb :  as  D'li^Jjf  *O3  fV^aO?  In 
the  beginning  God  created.  Sometimes  the  verb  stands 
in  plural  JD'?f?$,TViN  Wftn  1gftf3  when  God  caused 
me  to*  wander,  Gen.  20,  13.  At  a  later  period,  how 
ever,  the  construction  with  the  plural  was  avoided  as 
polytheistic. 

N  (antiquated  form  of  plural),  the  regular  form  is 
const,  st.  'jnat»  fr°m  tne  s^n&-  P"^  master,  lord. 
In  addressing  the  Supreme  Deity  the  form  ^'"1^  is  em 
ployed;  in  accosting  a  person  of  rank  'fltil  (with  Patach) 
Gentlemen !  instead  of  U"IN  Sir  ! 

c.  **T&  the   Almighty,    ancient  plural  of  *Jg>  (Arab.  T"UP 
strong,  vehement). 

d.  D^'ilP  the  Holiest,  plur.  of  fcTnp  holy. 

e.  bj7?  Lord,  master,  superior,  when  connected  with  suff. 
the   plural  commonly  occurs:    as  V^J£5'  0^^?  ^S)  ^ier 
master,  but  ^J£j}  my  husband. 

With  the  plural  of  majesty  the  verbs  stand  in  the 
singular,  the  adjectives  and  appositions  either  in  the 
singular  or  plural. 

5.  Words  with  a  plural  form  and  singular  signification 
occasionally    occur :    as  fiiftj"^  =  DfJ^   or  nOfDJ   vengeance. 
The  poets  frequently  take  advantage  of  this  license,  to  add 
power  to  their  language,  or  to  give  a  period  a  more  musical 
termination,    §  58,  9. 

6.  The  plural  of.  a  compound   expression  conveying  one 
idea  (a  noun  in  the  const,  state  followed  by  a  genitive)  is 
formed  by  giving   the  first    noun  the  plural   termination : 
as  ^nC>>  >33  Israelites,  the  children  of  Israel. 


PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

THE  CASES. 
§  83.     CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  THE  GENITIVE. 

1.  The  genitive   having   no   proper   form  is  only   recog 
nised  by  the  preceding  construct  state:  as  fjpV  >J)5  Joseph's 
sons. 

2.  Nouns  in  the   const,  state  cannot  be   connected  by  *); 
the    cattle    and    horses  of   the  king   cannot    be   translated 
^H  D1D1 1p_3>but  ID^DI  Tj^gn  ")p_5;  not  Tj^p  PTgK)  np#P 

onyp,  but  n$fcrn  cpnyp  ^o  np#p  Gen.  4Q,  i.  'or 
onyp  TJ7P7  ^$x/h$xr\i'ri\)$&n.  Tb.~5.  Nouns  in  the 

genitive  may  be  connected :  as  j^NI  O*pt^  POp  possessor 
of  heaven  and  earth,  or  more  usually  the  word  in  the  con 
struct  state  is  repeated  :  as  f"lNPT  'pfriO  D!P#H  'pftjtf * 

3 .  Several  words  in  construction  may  follow  each  other : 
as  pNPTDl?  WIT!  th  the  heart  of  the  chiefs  of  the  people 
of  a  land,   DPHDN  "PT^'  W  Jl^NI   and   these    (are)    the 

'  T    T  :    -  ••   :         ••   :          v    ••  : 

days  of  the  years  of  the  life  of  Abraham.  The  predicate  must 
agree  with  the  first  as  the  principal  noun;  in  case  the  first  is 
of  less  importance,  the  predicate  is  governed  by  the  follow 
ing  noun:  as  in  connection  with  73  all,  Dl  multitude,  *")f"pp 
choice,  best,  especially  with  ^D  and  following  participle:  as 
IX^O  Tj'pDJ/^  IPpp  thy  choicest  valleys  are  full,  prop,  the 
choice  of  thy  valleys  is  full. 

4.  The  genitive  is  sometimes  to  be  understood  objectively: 
as  HIPP  nK-V  the  fear  of  the  Lord;  DHVP  ^JTJ  the  Wa7  to 
Egypt;  DVH  n^t^'PP  the  ruler  of  the  day  =  which  rules  the 
day;  DIP  fipy.t  the  cry  of  Sodom  =  against  Sodom. 

5.  The  const,  st.  is  often  used  when  nouns  are  in  appo 
sition,  especially  when  the   genus  is  to  be   defined  by  the 
species:  rn$  ^iPtt  the  river  Euphrates:  ril^D  fiHp  the  city 
Chutzoth;  PI^PP  h?  PlVin?  the  virgin,  fhe  daughter  Judah. 

6.  The  Hebrew  being  deficient  in  adjectives   a)  the  ma 
terial  is  expressed  by  a  substantive  in  genitive:  as 


§  83.     CONSTRUCT  STATE  AND  THE;  GENITIVE.  167 


a  dish  of  silver,  i.  e.  a  silver  dish;  PO  v3  vessels  of.  iron, 
i.  e.  iron  vessels;  b)  other  adjective  conceptions:  as^^Hp^j-f 
the  mountain  of  thy  holiness,  for  thy  holy  mountain  ; 
*\fi$  V?9fc>  lips  of  a  lie,  for  lying  lips;  ^Jfi?  £*N  a  man  of 
understanding,  for  a  prudent  man. 

7.  Participles  or  adjectives  to  be  more  nearly  limited  or 
defined  by  a  following  substantive  stand  in  the  const,  st.: 
as  nyjTl  ^ITJ  great  in  counsel.;  ^N*j"l  il&  masc.,  ^Nfi  fig* 
fem.    beautiful   of  form;  pTif  '§*t1  the   pursuers    of  right 
eousness;  31?  H^^  *ne  broken  of  heart  =  the  broken-heart 
ed.     Infinitives  being  considered  as  substantives  and  even 
adverbs  with  a  subtantive  meaning  can  stand  in  the  const. 
st.:  D'flN  fO??  tne  Dwelling  of  brethren;  F|p5  £3j?Jp  a  little 
silver,  literally  :   the  smallness  or  fewness  of  silver. 

8.  The  word  in  the  genitive  may  be  any   word  capable 
of   defining    the    preceding  const.  st.r'W  pronoun,  interro 
gative  or  demonstrative:  '£  D3  whose  daughter? 

who  does  these  (prop,  doing  of  these);  an  adjective: 
(Song  of  Sol.  7,  10.)  good  wine  ;  a  numeral: 
one  judgment,  JTj$nft  MJ^'S  in  the  fourth  year;  a  noun 
preceded  by  a  preposition:  TV£3  Mnpt^ip  as  joy  of  in  har 
vest  =  as  joy  of  (a  man)  in  h.  ;  j£}^J5  HH  mountains  of 
the  Gilboa;  a  whole,  sentence:  T!#T  i^S  n§^  (cf.  9.). 

9.  The  noun  following  the  const,  st.  is  sometimes  omit 
ted  and  must  be  supplied.     Often  the  relative  ,£>'  follows: 
'TO"^  ^  ^ty   a  language  (of  a  man)  which  I  inow  not, 

PS.'  si,  6.  h^n-T?  KjiW  EX.  4,  is.  r^D^^nzTN 

Ps.  137  8.    cfr.  §  96^  45T. 

10.  No  third  word  can  be  interposed  between  the  const. 
st.  and  its  genitive  :    hence  the  adjective  or  demonstrative 
qualifying    the   const,    st.    must  follow  the  genitive:     the 
good  hand  of  God  JlDIDh  D'fl1?^  T;  this  book  of  the  law, 

;  the  little  children    of  the  king  ^iSp  >JD 
Occasionally  intervene:  a)  prepositions  (8)  : 
b)  the  local  H  :  as  n*]t^  n^0KTl   into   the   tent   of  Sarah  ; 
into  the  land  of  Canaan. 


168  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

c)  Tjy  yet,  still,  after  Sb ,'  >?  TIDPU  "MjH?|  all  the  wliile 
my  breath  is  in  me. 

11.  The  genitive  is  also  indicated  by  7  ")gJK  (which  be 
long  to):  as  ^N^.n^  D'Jpn  the  herdsmen  of  Saul,  or 
by  ^  alone  :  as  Tpj?  "ilbfp  a  psalm  of  David  ;  the  latter 
especially  occurring  (a)  in  enumerations:  as  DHb^l  njftt?'? 
CH.n4?  Dl*  on  the  twenty-seventh  day  of  the  month,  (b)  when 
many  genitives  follow  one  another :  as  ^D^D1?  DWH  HITT 
^7^!  the  books  of  the  Chronicles  (literally :  the  words 
of  the  days)  of* the  kings  of  Israel,  (cf.  §  80,  7.);  (c)  when 
the  governing  noun  is  separated  from  the  governed  by 
words  inserted:  pff^S  fi^iTjl  T#  a  great  city  of  God, 
Jon.  1,  3.  T|*7{p7  DTI??'  rtf^'3  in  the  second  year  of  the 
king,  (d)  to  avoid  ambiguity,  cf.  §  80,  7. 

§  84.     DATIVE. 

1.  The  common  sign  for  the  dative  is  7N  or  7,  its  abbre 
viation.     The  verb  jTil  to  be,  when  followed  by  ^  has  the 
meaning    of  to  become:    as  in$<  ^^1  VH1  and   tneJ   ^e~ 
come  one  flesh. 

2.  7  with  a  suffix  of  the  same  person  as  that  of  the  verb 
is  often    used    pleonastically    after    verbs  of  motion,    rest, 
going,  coming,  sending  etc.    especially,  with  imp.  and  fu 
ture:  as  ^-rj1?  go;  >tr?|7#  I  will  go  ;    rtfl  DJ^Qt?  abide 
ye  here.     It  is  a  dativus  commodi,  indicating  that  the  action 
is  done  for  the  benefit  of  the  subject  performing  it. 

3.  By  7  are  formed   adverbs,  which  express  a  becoming 
of  what  the  noun  says,  e.  g.  J^  (Ez.  12,  12.)  to  the  eye, 
i.  e.  plainly;  HD^S  (Job  11,  18.)  to  safety,  i.  e.  safe;  y-fy 
(2.  Chr.  20,  25.)  "to  a  multitude,  i,  e.  much. 

§  85.     ACCUSATIVE. 

1.  The  accusative  is  employed  for  the  nearer  object  (with 
or  without  DK  §  19,  4.)  after  transitive  verbs. 

2.  The  accusative  stands  to  indicate  the  remoter  object: 
a)  After   verbs    denoting    abundance  or   want :  }OO  to  be   , 


§  85.  .  ACCUSATIVE.  169 


full,  to  fill;  y_y&  to  be  satiated;  JH&*'  to  swarm  with; 
J^9*T.  to  creep;  C"|tb^  and  ^JH  to  .drop,  distill.  Kindred 
conceptions  are:  TTD  to  bless;  7|7il  in  the  sense  of  over 
flow:  njpn  rur^fi  niJDjn  the  hills  shall  flow  with  milk; 
*)pn  to  want;  ^"111  to  cease,  leave  off  (with  fjp,  rarely 
with  an  ace.);  7bt^'  to  lose  (children). 

b)  After  verbs  which   signify  to  cover,    in  which-  are   em 
braced   all   those    denoting  :    to  clothe  or   unclothe,    to 
gird,    to  crown,    to  plant,    to   sow:  HDD  to   cover;  VJ^h 
and   Vfyj   to  put  on  a  garment,  t^J^n  Hi.    with    two 
accus.;  f\Qy  to  cover,  to  clothe;  D^'B  to  strip  or  put  off 
a  garment;  il'ljf  to  put  on,  sc.  an  ornament;  7J^3  to  tie 
or  latch  the  sandals   for  any  one;  "Un  to  gird;  ^DJ?  to 
crown;  y®}  to  plant;  JH|  to  sow. 

c)  After  the  verbs  of  teaching,    commanding,    questioning 
and  answering  :  "15*7  to  learn  ;    "1/3^7  to  teach  ;  ^Vfitn  to 
enlighten,  to  teach,  to  warn;  Jl^V  ^°  command;  ^NC*  to 
ask,  question;  r\^y  to  answer. 

d)  After  the  verbs  to  do  good  or  evil  to  any  one,  to  reward 
or  to  punish:  ^D|  to  retribute,  to  recompense  ;  D1?^'  to 
requite,  recompense;  pn  to  be  gracious,    merciful,  com- 
.passionate  to  any  one  ;  5£OJ£  to  punish. 

3.  The  accusative  stands  in   apposition  with   the  nearer 
object  after  the  verbs  which  signify  to  make,    to  form,  to 
build  :  as  pQ?p  DVQKPrnj*  HJM  and   with   the  stones  he 
built  an  altar;  Tj^'nn  HV1?  DV  he  makes  the  day  dark  with 
night.     The  verbs  D^  to  set,  constitute/  jrO  to  give,    con 
stitute,  make,  H^J£  to  make,  are  more  usually  constructed 
with  ^  to  express  the  making  or  converting  of  an  object  in 
to  any  special  thing. 

4.  The  accusative  is  also  used  adverbially  and  then  an 
swers  :  a)  the  questions  of  place:    Whither?  after  the  verbs 
of  motion  :  as  H^H  Bfth  I^JJ  they  went  up  to  the  top  of 
the  hill  ;  H^H  D^H  NJH  the"  people    went   out   into  the 
field.      Where?  SrJKrrnn9  D^V  {Oil1)  and   he   sat   in   the 
entrance  of  the  tent,     b)  the  questions  of  time:  How  long? 

22 


170  PART.  II.     SYNTAX. 


;  DVl^  twelve  years  they  served.  When? 
^j  fining  DIpN  nS'9'rm'rr  at  midnight  I  will  rise  to  give 
thanks  unto  Thee";  DJWT!  ^T#  Ex>  16>  6'  c)  the  <luestions 
of  mood:  How?  Dj^ljjt  BhJ>  B''"U  H^  Ex.  11,  1.  he  shall, 
thrust  you  out  entirely  ((1*73  completion).  D^Hb'53  ""I3PP 
Ex.  16,  16.  according  to  the  number  of  your  persons. 

NOTE  J.  The  above  questions  are  more  frequently  answered  by  pre 
positions:  as  D^HfrO  DB^-fl  and  we  abode  in  tents.  >33  ?>S"  D^ID 

•      T    T:    T  •     •'-  •  T  V     '•  T 

Ps.  30,  6. 

NOTE  II.  How  old?  is  commonly  expressed  by  ?5  or  Jl5  with 
the  addition  of  the  year:  as  rtfB>  D'Jpp'l  D'JB^  B^fTf  J  D"ON 
J  pn/tp  1HNV5  Abrain  was  seventy  and  five  years  old,  when  he 
went  out  from  Haran. 

d)  To  define  the  extent  of  the  action  expressed  by  the 
verb,  or  to  indicate  the  part  to  which  this  action  applies 
(concerning,  in  relation  to,  as  to):  V^TTIK  Jl^H  he  was 
diseased  (concerning)  his  feet;  ^Q  ^H-3^  N92D  (as  to)  the 
throne  will  I  be  greater  than  thou. 

NOTE  III.     This  is  the  Greek  ace.  synecdochical. 
5.  The  accusative  sometimes  expresses  the  means  or  in 
struments  :  as  J3^  Ifiitf  ^-jn  ^ney  overwhelmed   him  with 
stones;  ^D^H  i""tn  ye  shall  be  devoured   with  the  sword. 


§  86.     THE  ABSOLUTE  CASE. 

1.  A  noun   beginning   a   proposition,    which   forming  a 
clause  by  itself  is  not  connected  with  what  follows,  is  said 
to  be  in  the  absolute  case,  and  is  usually  explained  by  sup 
plying:  as  to,  concerning,  etc. 

2.  This  case  is  used  to  give  emphasis  or  prominence  to 
a  word. 

3.  It  stands  a)  for  the  nominative  :  as  HDI135  T&jl  B^S 
a  lion,  the  strongest  among  the  beasts;   b)  for  the  dative: 
as  *f*M7  "fr  VT\\  &*$  ^ie   man  °f  power,    to  him   belongs 
the  earth;    c)  for  the  accusative:  as  DJTW  HnX  ^PIT)  pp 
as  to  summer  and  winter,    thou   hast   made  them  ;    d)  for 
the  ablative:   f-H  TjlH?  "l^  yj;r|-n$p1  but  of  the  fruit 
of  the  tree  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  garden,  God  hath 
said,  ye  shall  not  eat  of  it. 


§  87.     APPOSITION.  171 

§  87.     APPOSITION. 

1.  Nouns  are  often  found  in  apposition  in  Hebrew,  where 
in  other  languages,    an  adjective   or   another   noun  in  the 
genitive  would  be  employed,    especially  in  the   determina 
tion  of  number,  measure,  weight  and  time:  as  DHlJ^  H£)*X 
an  ephah  of  barley,  n&TUn  "1p3n  the  oxen,  the  brass,  i.  e. 
the  brazen  oxen. 

2.  When    the    first  noun  in  accus.    has  fiK»  the    second 
noun  can  take  or  omit  it :  as  ^HT^  VflNTl^  his  brother 
Abel,  0*1$  '3$  TO^Tfi^  Kemuel,'  the  father   of  Aram. 
Thus  it  is  with  the    prepositions :    as  ^HJSt  *Tin^7   to    thy 
brother  Nahor.     The  repetition  takes  place,   when  the  sec 
ond  noun  is  not  only  an  attribute  to  the  first,  but  is  employed 
to  give  a  more   complete   and   correct  idea  than  the  first : 
as  £01^3  t^''8?  fny$!!!  and  they  pressed  sore  upon  the  man, 
upon  Lot;  •&$*?  *fttib  to  my  Lord,  Esau;  TT1E3  Hnb'3 
in  the  field,  in  the  desert.  Jos.  8,  24. 

3.  The  noun  which  limits   or  qualifies  the  other,    takes 
the  second  place,  except  TI^L!' whicn  stands  regularly  be 
fore:  |"ib /Cy  n/Sn  the  king  Solomon. 

§  88.     DUPLICATION  OF  NOUNS. 

The  immediate  repetition  of  the  same  noun  indicates  : 
a)  a  strengthening  of  the  original  meaning,  or  an  empha 
sis:  as  f"lX  P*)jK  flK  0  earth,  earth,  earth,  hear  the  word 
of  the  Lord !  ?\1~\fi  p"!^  p"$  justice,  justice  thou  shalt 
follow;  b)  a  great  number :  as  hpfl  £"11^83  ni*)N3  the  vale 
of  Shiddim  was  pits,  pits  of  slime  i.  e.  full  of  slime  pits ; 
c)  a  distributive  sense,  expressed  in  English  by:  each,  by: 
as  1p33  1p33  in  the  morning,  in  the  morning  i.  e.  every 
morning,  DV  Dl*  day  by  day;  d)  a  diversity  or  variety,  in 
which  case  they  are  connected  by  V  as  \2W  P^  thou  shalt 

I  *."    V  T      I  V    V  .  * 

not  have  stone  and  stone,  i.  e.  diverse  weights;  'HS'V  D7J  D?3 
with  heart  and  heart  they  speak,  i.  e.  with  different  hearts, 
with  duplicity. 

$  89.   SUBSTANTIVES  USED  IN  THE  PLACE  OF  ADJECTIVES. 
1.    A  deficiency  in  adjectives    is    partially    supplied    by 


172  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 


verbs:  as  TU  to  be  great;  N70  to  be  'full,  partially  by  sub 
stantives  in  the  genitive  or  in  apposition. 

2.  Abstract  nouns  in  the  relation  of  a  genitive,  take  the 
place  of  adjectives:  as  73  the  whole  of,  expressive  of  total 
ity,    stands   for    the   whole  (adj.)  :    as  j^NIT^S  the  whole 
earth,  or  for  all:  D'UT^?  a11  nations;  TOH  continuance, 
permanence,   for  continual  :    as  TDfi  *}}  a  continual  light, 
lamp  ;    TDJFlil  fi^ty  continual,    i.  e.    daily   burnt-offering, 
^'•p  holiness,  for  holy:  as  &'"1pn  H.JQ  the  holy  garments; 
DTlJf  eternity,    for  eternal  :    as  DViJ?  fi^H  generations    for 
ever  (prop,   generations  of  eternity). 

3.  Substantives  are  used  for  adjectives  of  material  (§  83, 
6.)  :  fl^n?  £'11}  a  serpent  of  copper. 

4.  Personal  qualities    are  expressed  by  a  circumlocution 
with  the  nouns  fc>>tf,  ^#3  lord,  possessor,  f^:  as  tiyty  fc"N 
an  old  man  (a  man  of  gray  hair);  Dlbbpil  *7JD  the  dream 
er  ;  7*(T|3  a  warrior  (son  of  strength)  ;  H^J^'p  a  perverse 
man  (son  of  perverseness). 

NOTE.  A  kind  of  adjectives  are  formed  poetically  by  PN»^?3 
V17?  before  the  noun,  corresponding  to  the  English  in,  less:  as 
^  J'N  strengthless,  "Ipjl  f^N  unsearchable,  &^  ^3  un 
clothed. 

§  90.     ADJECTIVES. 

1.  The  adjectives  agree  with  their  substantives  in  gender,, 
number  and  definition  by  the  article  (§  80,  2.). 

2.  When  following  the  noun,  they  represent  the  attribute: 
as  rnniil  TJ?n  the  great  city;  when  preceding,  the  predi 
cate:  yyn  nVh|  the  city  is  great. 

NOTE  I  Sometimes  the  adjective  as  predicate  follows  the  noun, 
viz:  when  several  words  follow,  which  limit  more  nearly  the  sig 
nification  of  the  adjective  :  as  r\12W  D)£?  ^?""IP  fiNtr?  ^^H 
this  city  is  near  to  flee  unto;  t]DKn  hj?  tik  *7l"!^  bT<l(l  11^  fil 
rijpfin  L°>  it  is  yet  high  day,  it  is  not  yet  time  for  the  cattle 
to  be  gathered. 

§  91.     COMPARISON. 
1.  The  comparative  having  no  proper  form  is  expressed 


§  92.     NUMERALS.  173 

by  the  simple  adjective  with  Jp  of,  fromy    which  precedes 
the  object  compared:  as  t^D^P  P^?  sweeter  than  honey. 

2.  Hence  this  form  of  the  comparative  is  also  employed 
after  verbs  and  nouns  of  quality:  as  D5P  rwp*  *Wi*  "l^lfl 
the  cause  that  is  too  hard  for  you  ;  ^gQ  Tt4#  NDSJl  p^ 
only  in  the   throne  will  I  be  greater   than  thou.      Before 
the  infinitive,  this  fp  is  translated:  than  that  :  as  *$\y  ^1"!^l 
Kiby?  my  iniquity  is  greater  than  that  it  can  be  forgiven, 

3.  Superlative.    The  superlative  also  possessing  no  proper 
form  is  indicated:   a)  by  the  article   before   the   adjective: 
as  JCpjijn  JOT  "in  David  was  the  youngest. 

N*irrnD  w^n  ^noixn  by 

v  T  -  T    T  -:  T         ••*-: 


^  njn 

,onnt<  7ir^  man 

jj  ..      -;  ..    ;  .  |     _  - 

precious1  bitter2  poverty3  good   fortune4  (modern   Hebrew)    hard, 
difficult5  value6  blemish,  defect7-     * 

b)  By  doubling  the  adjective  or  noun,  so  that  the  latter 
stands    in    the    genitive    plural:    as  DHDK.^S]?.  servant  of 
servants,    i.   e.  the  lowest  servant  ;   Q'CHpn  CHp  holy  of 
holies,  i.  e.  the  most  holy  place. 

c)  In  poetry   the   words  D^yjf'  7K»  HIIT*  HID  convey  a 
superlative  meaning  :    as  ^N  ^TID  mountains  of  God,  i.e. 
the  highest  mountains;   D^H^N  N^4  a  Prince  of  God,  i.  e. 
an  eminent    prince  ;    niJT  npl.in    a  deep  sleep    from  the 
Lord  =  the  deepest  sleep]  JTlD  ndlilp  a  tumult  of  death,  i.  e. 
a  most  fearful  tumult. 

§  92.     NUMERALS. 

1.  The  numerals   can  either   follow  or  precede   the  sub 
stantive,  with  the  exception  of  "1HN  which  invariably  fol 
lows  it.  0 

2.  In  combinations  of  higher  numbers  either  the  higher 
or  the  lower  takes  the  lead  connected  by  1  :  as 

tr  jDri  rotr  onfc>jn  nyy  HNP  Gen.  23,  i. 


174  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 


runp  ntfoi  Estu.  1,1.  m#  075^1  &) 

:  plIlD  VW5RI  G-en.  12,  4.  T 

3.  The  nouns  to  which  are  joined   the   cardinals   2  —  10 
are  invariably  plural.     In  higher  numbers  the  singular  is 
frequently  found,  as  with  DV  day,  D1>  *")&'J£  HW  16  days, 
ny?  night,    Gen.   7,  4.    rOB>  year,    £»N  man,"   f||?£  thou 
sand,  TON  a  cubit  (prop.:  the  fore-arm),  etc.  but  the  plur. 
is  used,  when  they  precede  the  numeral:  as  *\&y  nJO^  D^P' 
18  clays,  pyb?*l  D'1D*]K  DHJf  forty-eight  cities,  Jos.  21,  40., 
but  T#  n^D^l  D'JEHK  NunT.  35,  6,  7. 

4.  To  the  numerals  suffixes  may  be  appended:  as  D<T3£* 
they  two,  or  both  of  them;  D3fi^£''  you  three.     With  the 
dual  ending,  they  indicate  multiplication:  as  DTlJfaty  sev 
en-fold  ;    for  which  purpose  ^JH  >.  DJ^§  time  (properly  foot, 
tread  or  step)   are   often   employed:    as  D^-in  wTNt'-*  VfoW 
D^DJ^5  three  times. 

5.  The  feminine  of  the  ordinals   also  signifies  a  part  of 
a  unit,  hence  it  expresses  the  fractional  numbers:  as  JV&'J^ 
the  sixth  part  of  =  J,  fyj^yi  the  fourth  part  of  =  J. 

6.  The  distributive  numerals  are  expressed  by  the  doub 
ling  of  the  cardinals:  as  D.^  D?3tp>  two  by  two. 

7.  When  something  is  summed  up,  3  before  numbers  is 
used,    in    which    case  it  is  to  be  translated    consisting  of: 

'  consisting  of  seventy,  Deut,  10,  22.  Job  23,  13. 


PKONOUNS. 
§  92.     PERSONAL  PRONOUN. 

1  .  In  the  separate  personal  pronoun  may  be  contained  both 
the  subject  and  substantive  verb:  as  'DrtJjK  pJHD  DIl^  f^D 
whence  are  ye?  of  Haran  we  are. 

2.  To  give  emphasis  to  a  noun  or  a  suffix  (verbal  or 
nominal),  a  separate  pronoun  of  the  san£  gender,  number 
and  person  is  added  pleonastically:  TlJlX  TV*")?  ^3H  ^ 
Gen.  17,  4.;  the  separate  pronoun  being  often  preceded  by 
D^:  as  *DK  ^N  D3  ^5  I>ICBS  me,  even  me  (Hebr.  even  I), 


§  94.     DEMONSTRATIVE.  175 


Gen.  27,  38.  }3  1      tflfl  DJ  HB       and  to  Seth,  to  him  also 
(Hebr.  he)  there  was  born  a  son,  Gen.  4,  26. 

3.  Vice  versa,  the  noun  sometimes  occurs,  after  it  has  been 
indicated  by  a  verbal  or  nominal  suffix:  as 

she  saw  it—  the  child,  Exod.  2,  6.  HlIT 

he  shall  bring  her  (it),  the  offering  of  the  Lord,  Exoci  35  ,  5. 

t^NH  1KM  when  he  came,  the  man,  Ex.  10.  3. 

4.  The  verbal  suffix  conveys  the  meaning  of  an  accusa 
tive,    in  rare   instances,    as  with  jfi^  to  give,    of  a  dative: 
'3fjn3  thou  hast  given  to  me  (Josh.   15,  19.);  ^pJJH  and 
they  cried  to  Thee  (Neb.  9,  28.). 

5.  When   the  verb   has  a  double  pronominal  accusative, 
the  former  is  connected  with  the  verb,  the  latter  with  HN  : 
as  inirnNyinX  ^N^rn  and  he  will  show  me  both  it  and 
his  abode,  2.  Sam.   15,  25. 

6.  The   nominal   suffix   is   often   objective  in   sense  :    as 
in^7  fear  before  Him;  D^HI  Dp^nlDI  and  the  fear  of 
you  and  the  dread  of  you.  Gen,  9,  2. 

7.  When  a  noun  in  the  const,  st.  conveys  with  its  fol 
lowing  genitive  one   conception,    the   suffix  is   attached  to 
the  genitive:  as  Ifiprte  ^5  ^'ls  instruments  of  war  (prop 
erly:  the  instrument  of  his  war);  'JJHJ2  ^H  my  holy  mount 
ain  (prop.:  the  mountain  of  my  holiness). 

NOTE  I.  The  personal  pronouns  are  implied  in  the  preforma- 
tives  and  afformatives  of  the  verb,  and  are  expressed  only,  when 
they  denote  emphasis  or  opposition:  as 
thou  hast  said  in  thy  heart,  Isa.  14,13.  y 

Ds^n^'W  CDWS9  Dftott  .M  cq^p  Nnn    thus 

saith  the  Lord  :  I,  I  brought  up  Israel  out  of  Egypt  and  ye,  ye 
have  scorned  your  God;  tfnn  B»JO  ^B'HkX  *}#  *ftQ&]  I, 
I  will  set  my  face  against  that  man* 

§  94.     DEMONSTRATIVE. 

1  .  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  is  used  de 
monstratively  :  as  fcOnn  01*3  in  that  day,  pointing  out  the 
more  remote  object.  §  22,  2. 


176  §  PART  II.    SYNTAX. 

2.  The  demonstrative  when  standing  "before  the  noun  must 
be  considered  as  the  predicate  of  a  clause:  as  *|gft*  TPlpn  fit 
na#  '£'#£)  this  is  thy  kindness,  which  thou  shalt  do  unto 
me;  M,,  DPI  ^pfl1?  fij  this  is  our  bread,  we  took  it  hot  for 
our  provision;  fi&'Nfi  fiNt  this   is   the  woman;  £"Nfi  N^lJl 
that  is  the  man. 

3.  The  demonstrative  when  following  the  noun  is  consid 
ered  an  attribute,  and  usually  has  the  article:  as  fi-ffi  fi^fi 
this  house;  fi|?tffi  D'B^gfi  these  men. 

NOTE  L  \$\T\  is  used  to  make  the  subject  very  prominent  and 
distinguish  it  from  other  things,  and  so  it  may  be  rendered  self: 
as  Num,  18,  22.,  hence  frOn  may  be  joined  to  the  first  or  sec 


ond  pers.  pronoun,  e.  g.  Nlfi  *m$  I  myself,  Isa.  43,  55.  $<!}fi  fifitf 
thou  thyself,  Jer.  49,   12. 


NOTE  II.  frOi"!,  Wtl  before  a  noun  with  a  following  demon 
strative  makes  the  meaning  stronger:  fiffi  fiV?n  N1H  this 
same  night,  Ex.  12,  42. 

NOTE  III.  fi^K  in  connection  with  numbers  is  always  placed 
after  them:  Gen.'  9,  19;  22,  23;  Ex.  21,  11. 

4.  WJien  a  demonstrative  and  an  adjective  are  both  at 
tributes,  the  adjective  is  second  in  order,  the  demonstrative 
third:  as  fijfi  VhJfi  "Ififi  this  high  mountain.     If  the  ad 
jective  follows  the  demonstrative,  the  sense  will  be  altered: 
as  Vi"J  JIH  iltJl  inil  this  mountain  (which  is)  the  high. 

5.  The  feminine  DX?  ivhen  separate  has  a  neuter   mean 
ing:  as  Wy:  fM  Gen.  45.  17.  HND)  DXD  thus  and  thus, 
so  and  so  ;   JlNf  JWJJ  ^M1?  DH?  in   the   integrity   of  thy 
heart  thou  didst  this^thing).  Gen.  20,  6.  §  81,  1. 

6.  ill;  is  occasionally   used   relatively:   as  JTTDJ  Jl.f  Dlpp 
H^  the  place  which  thou  hast  founded. 

NOTE.  Ht  in  connection  with  interrogative  particles  or  appended 
to  words  of  exclamation  makes  the  question  more  animated  and  gives 
emphasis:  Ht  *P  who  there  ?  H?  *J$  who  ?  nt'llO  what  then  ? 
Ht  Hjn  see  there  !  Relating  to  time  it  is  equivalent  to  the 
German  fcfyon,  English  now:  D*QJ^iD  H?  now  twice,  cf.  Gen,  31, 
38,  43,  10. 


§  95.     INTERROGATIVE.  177 

§  95.     INTERROGATIVE. 

1.  Theinterrog.  ^D  relates  to  both  genders  and  numbers, 
usually  it  refers  to  persons,   rarely   to  things:  as  TOgHp 
what  is  thy  name?  Jud.  13,  17.  HO*  "HD  what?  of  things, 
in  questions  either  direct  or  indirect,  Num.  13,  18. 

NOTE  I,  Sometimes  *p  and  esp.  J1D  are  used  in  a  prohibitory, 
denying,  blaming  sense:  JID^JTHO  why  tempt  ye?  Ex.  17,  2. 
pDHfrnO  what  do  ye  strive  about?  ib.  so  that  it  forms  the 
transition  to  a  negation;  sometimes  it  is  quite  negative:  1.  Kings, 
12,  16.  Job  6,  25.  Num.  23,  10.  Is.  53,  1. 

2.  rr  in  a  direct  interrogation  :  DVX  n^jf^t  ^S  FttptPrj 
hast  thou  considered  my  servant  Job  ?     In  an  indirect  inter 
rogation,  whether:  niJT'fltf  D'?DN  D?P*D  to  know—  wheth 
er  ye  love  the  Lord. 

3.  In  disjunctive  questions  ft  is  used  in  the  first,  DN  in 
the  second  clause:  ^H'^7  EN  rifltf  ^bll  art  thou  for  us  or 
for  our  adversaries? 

NOTE  II.    *ft  and  flft  followed  by  a  relative,  become  also  rela- 

T  i     •       • 
tive  in  signification:    *"Ju7    "H^N  ^P  he  who  learned;  rpnt!/'  J1D 

that  which  was. 

§  96.     RELATIVE. 

1.  The  particle  ^t^jSt  gives  to  pronouns,  substantives,  ad 
verbs  and  even  to  a  whole  sentence  a  relative  signification. 

Kelating  to  a  preceding  noun  that  expresses  plate,  time 
and  manner,  it  can  denote  with  respect  to  place  where,  with 
respect  to  time  then,  ivhen,  with  respect  to  manner  that, 
wherefore. 

2.  The  verb  or   other  part  of  speech   that   governs  the 
word  belonging  to  *^N  (which  as  relative  begins  the  clause), 
is   interposed   between'  them:  as  1HK  *fllV?i# 

the  messenger  (angel)  whom  I  have  sent,  not 


3.  *")C^  often  appears  with  prefixes,  in  which  case  that, 
the  personal  pronoun,  or  another  antecedent,  that  has  been 
omitted  must  be  supplied:  as  »fOr?£  1^3  D'9Jfl95 

23  " 


178  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

f 

make  unto  me   savory   meat,  as  which  I  love  (i.  e.  such — 
as  that);  Dfi?  Nlfl  H^'N'3  for   God   has  heard   the   voice  of 
the  lad — in  which  he  is  there,  (i.  e.  in  the  place  in  which): 
^7  to  that  person  or  thing,  who  or  which; 
him  who,  that  which; 
from  or  of  that  which; 
5  as  that,  according  to  etc. 
is  often   omitted,    not   only   as   the   relative   in 
English,  when  governed  by  the  verb  or  by  a  particle,  but 
also  when  governing   the   verb   itself:    as  (Isa.  42,  16.)  I 
will  cause  the  blind  to  go  in  a  way  -I^T  ^  (which)  they 
know  not,  (Exod.  6,  28.).    And  it  was  in  the  day  fTlJT  ""0*1 
(in  which)  the  Lord  spake  to  Moses. 

5.  When  an  entire  sentence  is  the  object  of  the  princi 
pal  sentence,  ^C/K  DK  precedes  the  sentence  in  the  objective: 

as  rpotr  >D"n#  nin*  c"5in^'N*  rux  ujw  we  have 

heard  how  the  Lord  dried  up  the  water  of  the  Bed  Sea. 

6.  7  "|^£  another  form  of  the  genitive,  see  §  83,  10. 

7.  Sometimes,  especially  before  participles,  the  article  ?1 
(Il»  n)  stands   for  the  relative:  as  ^VD^Jl  that  are  found, 
L  Chron.  29,  17.  HliT  H'Tin?'  D'5*?rin  who   walk  in  the 
law  of  the  Lord,   Ps"  Il9,  1. ' 

§  97.    REFLEXIVE  AND  RECIPROCAL  PRONOUNS. 

1.  Tlje  reflexive  pronoun  signifying  the  accusative,  is  ex 
pressed  by  the  reflexive  conjugations  Niphal  and  Hithpael 
or  in  case   these   cannot  be   employed,   by  IflX*  PlDKetc.: 
Do  they  provoke  Me  to   anger?    DHN  tflSn  (do  they)  not 
(provoke)   themselves  to  the   confusion  of  their   own  faces? 
Jer.  7,  19.      Woe  be  to   the  shepherds  of  Israel  VH  ")^ 
DnlN  D'JH  that  do  feed  themselves!  Ez.  34,  2,  8,  10. 

2.  Denoting  the   remoter   object  i.  e.  the   dative  or  the 
case  governed  by  a  preposition,  it  is  expressed  by  the  suff. 
of  the  third  person:  as  (Jud.  8.  33.)  and  made  Baal-berith 
God  D!lb  to  them    (themselves)    (Geri.  46,  7.).      His   sons, 
his  daughters  and  all  his  seed  IflK  N^H  brought  he  with 
himself  (him)  into  Egypt. 


§  98.     OTHER  PRONOUNS.  179 


on 

to  chastise,  to  instruct1  disgrace2  to  be  like3  physician4  (§  83,  6.)5- 

3.  By  certain  substantives  with  suffixes,  conveying  simi 
lar  ideas  to  the  following:  C^pJ  soul.  ^  heart,  TD3  honor, 
D")p  inward  part,    DV#  hone,  [»J£  eye,  (fyj?  I  myself,    Joh 
19,  "27.  *y#  "J.J30  before  me,  Isa.  1,  16.),  or:  my  flesh,  my 
name,  etc.:  as  }^b3  *")DN  he  hath    said   in  his   heart  =  to 
himself,  Ps.  10;  6.     And  Sarah  laughed  niZHp?  within  her 
self,  Gen.   18,  12.    DV#  commonly   used    in   this  sense   in 
modern   Hebrew   (Mishna):  10VJ77  ^°  himself.    Comp.    Job 
2,  5.    10VJ?  he  himself;  »PV#  I  '  myself,  Job  30,  30. 

4.  The   reciprocals:   the  one,  the  other,  one  another,  are 
expressed  by  VPTiJ  t^tf  the  man—  his  brother;  HrilH^  H^'N 
tlie  woman  —  his  sister;  inj/^)  ^N  the  man  —  his  neighbor; 

the  woman  —  her  companion. 


§  98.     OTHER  PRONOUNS. 

1.  t^'*N  or  DIN  used  indefinitely,   signify   some  one,   any 
one.    *O1>  ^3*  ID^l'bD  without  the  article,  something,  any 
thing.    N1?  or  pN  connected    with  the   foregoing:    ^3  pt<, 
*Q1  T^'  HDINtD  N*S  (HOWO  for  HOI  HO  i.   e.    whatever) 

IT!"  T  :  T  :  T  T 

not  anything  =  nothing. 

2.  For  eac/i,  e^er?/  when  substantive,  tT^»  nt£'N  are  em 
ployed,    sometimes   in   repetition:    aB-fift$  &ft$»  t^W;  ^N 

To  convey  the  sense  of  an  adjective,  the  noun  is  either 
doubled,  or  72  is  used  :  as  *lpi3  *O33  every  morning  ; 
D1N/3  (without  the  article)  every  man.  73  with  the  ar 
ticle  after  it,  expresses  all,  the  tvhole:  D"TNI1  ^3  all  men, 
*14TT/?  tlle  whole  nation,  D?lJpH??  all  nations.  Thus  Sb 
with  suffixes:  DD^  ^e  a^'  ^^??  *hey  all. 

3.  The  same,  himself,  with  persons  Nin>  N^n  (Num.  18. 
23.  Ps.  50,  6,);  the  meaning  appears  stronger,  when  NVf 
or  N*n   precedes  the  noun,    and  ntPl»  HXtri  follows   it: 

this  same  night,  Ex.  12,  42,;  §  94,  Note  II. 

I 


180  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 


with   things   by  DV#  same,    selfsame  :    ftyP?  Di*il  D¥#3  in 
the    selfsame  day. 

4.  No,    nobody,    no    one   is   expressed  by  J'tf  following  : 
PN  D"1K  »  and  pjtf  preceding  or  following:   D'jT7$  fiN*V  f'X 
the  fear  of  God  is  not  ;    by  ^,  or  by  D£)?<:  QipO-D§#  "!# 
till  (there  was)  no  place. 

5.  Whoever:  >0;  whosoever:  "I^N  >0;  whatever,  anything, 
something:  H0>  HO   or  HDIN?  following   the   const,  st.  in 
the    genitive"  HO  "Q"]  Num   23,    3.  H01KP  DN&D  Deut. 
24,  10.     TOo*  wAt'cft:  ht$$  HO,  '#  no"" 

6.  Some,  several  of,  by  jp:  DJ/*H  JO  several  of  the  people, 
Ex.  16,  27.    D^O  some  of  the  blood,  Ex.  12,  7. 

THE    VERB. 
§  99.     IN  GENERAL. 

1.  The    Preterite   and    the    Future,    properly    the  only 
tenses,  convey  in  different  ways  almost  all  the  conceptions 
of  time. 

2.  Their  primary  inherent  meanings   are  however:  Pre 
terite  —  what  is   past   or   completed;    Future  —  what  is  in 
complete,  what  still  continues,  and  what  is  to  come. 

§  100,    THE  PRETERITE. 
The  preterite  denotes: 
I.  The  Past. 

a)  The  absolutely  past:  as  ^  T#T  *9  who  told  thee? 

b)  The  historical  tense  (Aorist)  :    as   "IKfrrisD'  nfVJl  SlT} 
Rachel  was  of  beautiful  form. 

c.  The  Pluperfect:  as  Sb?  DnTO$"fM$  *p5  HllTI  and  the 
Lord  had  blessed  Abraham  in  all  things,  1.  Mos.  24,  1., 
especially  1)  in  relative  or  dependent  sentences  and  clauses, 
which  define  the  principal  action  and  in  the  point  of  time 
precede  it:  as  rnPT  VTjy  "Mg'ijj  Sb?  Hi  fe>J£!  and  Noah 
did  according  to  all  that  the  Lord  had  commanded  him; 
2)  when  it  is  connected  in  the  same  sentence  with  an 
other  past  tense  :  as  HX3  ^^'H  'PH.  and  the  sun  had 
gone  down. 

* 

* 


§  100.     THE  PRETERITE.  181 

II.  The  Present: 

a)  In  verbs  of  quality,  as  DDH  to  be  or  become  wise,  7"lJ 
to  be  or  become  great,  JtOp  to  be  little,   small:    Tl^tDj") 
DHDnil  730  I  am    unworthy   (prop,    little)  of  all  the 
mercies,  *- 

b)  In  verbs  of  habit  or  frequency:  ntjfiDN/N  'W^?^3*'jW 
my  G-od  I  trust  in  Thee,  let  me  not  be  ashamed,  Ps*  25, 2. 

c)  In  verbs  of  state  or  condition:  TJ^fi  V7$3  f"T$7\T|7  PHIl  fi&7 
wherefore  art   thou   wrath  ?    and   wherefore  is   thy  face 
fallen  ? 

d)  Of  a  state  or  condition  commenced  in  the  past,  and  yet 
continuing:  ^"O£  VH  rtlpP  'flWtf  thy  servants  are  cat 
tle-keepers  (men  of  cattle). 

III.  The  Future: 

a)  In  predictions,  prophesies  and  assurances,  which  are  re 
garded  as  certain,  as  though  already  fulfilled:  Isa.  9,  1, 
11,  8. 

If)  When  indicating  the  consequence  of  an  action  in  the 
present  or  past,  or  when  connected  with  a  sentence  ex 
pressing  a  result :  JNVrrS:)  VT3D1  "Hi!*  DV  DIpiTp  and 
if  (men)  should  overdrive  them  one  day,  all  the  flocks 
will  die,  1.  Mos.  33,  13. 

c)  Connected  with  a  sentence  standing  in  the  future,   when 
it  has   conversive  Vav:  HOJO  lijn.3  05*7  $*lp!  '5  'TC^ 
D3^y?D"nO  and'  it  shall  come  to  pass,    when  Pharaoh 
shall  call  you  and  say,  what  is  your  occupation? 

d)  Or  with  a  sentence  containing  a  future  condition,  when 
it  is    either  itself  conditional  or  expresses  the  result  of 

the  condition :    DfnDtiH  '^p2  • 


tt   ^H?"nK      ow,   therefore,'  if  ye   will  obey    my 
voice  indeed  and  keep  my  covenant,  then  ye  shall  be 

IV.     The  Subjunctive: 

When  joined  to  such  a  sentence:  as  'TO1  Hjn 
lest  some  evil  cleave  unto  me,  and  I  die,  1.  Mos.  19.  19. 


182  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

V.     The  Imperative  and  Optative: 

1)  By    connection    with  a  similar    sentence : 

0?7!?$  OT9£!  W^!  M|?rfl#  go  and  gather  the  elders  of 
Israel  together  and  say  unto  them. 

2)  After  a  conditional  sentence:  as  inK  fflprjl  tflH  f?  DN* 
JTm  X'H  rQ  ONI  if  it  be  a  son,  then  ye  shall  put  him  to 
death,  but  if  it  be  a  daughter,  then  she  shall  live,  2.  Mos. 
1,  16. 

VL  The  Future  perfect:  as  Tp^H  IDIil  MJ?D  from  the 
time  that  the  continual  (sacrifice)  will  be  taken  away, 
Dan.  12,  11.  fl'irntt?  HK¥  DN  7"!$  {TTyDK  when  the 
Lord  shall  have  washed  away  the  filth  of  the  daughters 
of  Zion,  Isa.  4,  4. 

§  101.     THE  FUTURE. 
The  Future  expresses: 

I.  a)  The  future  absolute:  as  DINiTTltf  UTON  I  will  blot 

f  *  TT     T  V  V      :      V 

out  the  man,  1.  Mos.  6,  7. 

b)  The  future  perfect:  as  "OJ^S  JTiT.  ^  ^Jf^.^'8  he 
with  whom  it    shall    have    been  found,   shall   be  my 
servant,  L  Mos.  44,  10. 

c)  The  present,    especially  when   conveying  the  ideas  of 
quality,  permanence,  iteration  or  frequency,  or  in  gen 
eral  and  moral  truths:  VJ'IJ?  IJJII  D{J  "I??*  J?  a  son 
honoreth  (his)  father,  and  a  servant  his  lord,  Mai.  1,  6, 

II.  The  Past. 

K)  In  all  states  or  actions  continuing  in  the  past,  and  in 
those,  which  were  often  repeated  in  the  past :  1{O'T  1&'tf 
which  (often)  came;  \r\\  PD  thus  Solomon  gave  to  Hiram 
year  by  year,  or  13)  when  the  past  is  expressly  indicated 
by  an  external  sign.  Such  are  1)  adverbs  of  time  fN  then, 
D*\D  not  yet;  2)  conversive  Vav. 
///.  The  following  Moods  : 

a)  The  subjunctive    and    the    auxiliaries    may,    can,  might, 
would,  should  etc.:  SjXn  SbX  J$l  j>#  Ssp  Gen,  2,  16. 

mb-S?  rrm  ib.  4,  14. 


§  102.     THE  CONVBRSIVE  VAV.  183 

b)  The  imperative  ,  a)  in  prohibitions,  the  imp.  never  being 
used  negatively:  t?>N  TtyWp  ^  ^tOJTK^)  tobtfl  fcfe 
ifVDJD  ^ev-  19?  11  •»  b)  after  a  preceding  imperative: 

urn  "b^n  Sjnfc"  ri3  s$  -131  EX.  u,  2. 

NOTE.     The  third  person  of  the  imperative,  which  is  wanting,  is 
always  expressed  by  the  future  (Jussive):  *)ij$  VT  be  there  light. 


c)  For  the  optative,  especially  with  the  particle  frO  :  frO  "1DJ* 
Oh,  let  come  to  an  end,  Ps.  7,  10. 

§  102.     THE  CONVERSIVE  VAV. 

1.  The  conception  of  time,  contained  in  the  principal  sen 
tence  of  an   argument  or  narration,    affects    the    following 
sentences,  determining  their  respective  tenses. 

2.  This    influence,    however,  is  only    exerted    when    the 
verb  begins  the   sentence,  but  is  entirely  neutralized  when 
the  sentence  commences  with  any  other  word. 

3.  The  converted  tenses  (preterite  and  future  with  conv. 
Vav)  substituted  for  the  simple  tenses,  are  the  same  in  sig 
nification. 

4.  The  preterite  with  convers.  1  must  be   preceded  by  a 
future,  an  imperative,  or  by  some  word  or  phrase  expressing 
futurity:  as  DrVJOl  "Ipi  tomorrow,  and   you  will  see;  TJJJ 

'^fJP1!  ^#P  yet  a  little?  an(l  tnev  would  stone  me.  Vice 
versa  the  future  with  convers.  1  must  follow  a  preterite 
with  its  original  signification  or  another  word  or  phrase  re 
ferring  to  past  time  :  n?OJO  tfVIJ?  T]^H  nlO"nj{?3  In 
the  year  of  the  death  of  the  Idng  Uzziah.  I  saw...  Isa.  6,  1. 

5.  The  converted  tenses  are  only  employed  when  the  verb 
commences  the   clause,    so   that   the    copulative   force  con 
veyed  by    the    convers.  1  relates    also   to    the    time  of  the 
preceding  sentence  (which  may  be  either  expressed  or  under 
stood).     But  if  any  other  word  commences  ,  the  clause,  the 
simple  tense  must  be   used:  as  "DX1  ^?b01  ^  ^JTDN 
r^N  N^  *&y  *3*7n  *6  If  thou    wilt    go  Vith  nic,    then  I 
will  go,  but  if  thou  wilt  not  go  with  me,  then  I  will  not  go. 


184  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

(The  converted  tense  TD /HI  is  used,  because  it  commences 

*    ; .       T    :  * 

the  clause,  the  simple  THX* because  K7  precedes). 

6.  The  converted  future,  following  a  preterite   with  the 
pluperfect  signification,  must  often  be  translated  as  pluper 
fect  :  as  tog  n§n  "i#g  D?@n  flhKj-rn*  "ism  pny  ngfrj 

DTKjftS  DttaflpVvSK  DPI?**  And  Isaac  digged  a'gain  the 
wells  of  water,  which  they  had  digged  in  the  days  of 
Abraham,  his  father;  and  the  Philistines  had  stopped  them. 

7.  The  connecting  influence  of  the  convers.  1  is  not  con 
fined  to  the  time,  but  also  extends  to  the  mood,  so  that  a 
preterite  with  convers.  1'  takes  the  meaning  of  the  subjunc 
tive  or  imperative,  if  the  preceding  verb  is  used  in  either 
signification:  ft  fWJtt  ...  liltf  fcO'fl  ^N  fear  him  not ...  and 
thou  shalt  do  him  ...  4.  Mos.  21,  34.;  DJ  H^Vl  IT  fftl2*  }Q 
D^fin  fJ$J  lest  he  put  forth  his  hand,  and  take  also  of  the 
tree  of  life;   D'jaftjf  DN  ^3iTl  Ni2Tf|  lest  he  will   come 
and  smite  me,  the  mother  with  the  children. 

NOTE.  Books  and  chapters  commence  witli  a  converted  future, 
(H/pK^  'fT1[  frequently  occur)  past  time  being  presumed  and  the 
books  being  considered  as  continuations  of  a  preceding  narration, 

§  103.     PARAGOOIC  AND  APOCOPATED  FUTURE. 

1.  The  future  lengthened  by  Jl—  usually  occurs  in  the 
first  person  (§  32).  It  has  the  signification  of  exciting  or 
urging  one's  self  to  action.  It  also  expresses  wish  or  pur 
pose,  when  connected  by  1  with  the  antecedent,  which  ^ 
may  be  translated  in  order  that:  H^Nl  ft  nK'Drn  bring 
it  to  me  in  order  that  I  may  eat,  Gen.  27,  4. 

NOTE.  The  apocopated  future,  in  Hiphil  only  possesses  a  proper 
distinctive  form,  with  the  exception  of  jlft»  in  which  it  is  found 
in  all  conjugations.  It  supplies  the  third  person  in  the  imperative 
(wanting),  and  in  the  second  person,  when  expressing  a  command 
has  a  less  forcible  signification. 

§  104.     THE  IMPERATIVE. 

1.  The  imperative  commands  or  encourages.  In  the 
latter  sense  the  particle  Nl  denoting  respectful  entreaty  or 
exhortation  is  added:  as  fcO  HQN  say,  I  pray  thee. 


§  105.     INFINITIVE  ABSOLUTE,  185 

2.  Prohibition  and  dissuasion  is  expressed  by  the  future 
(jussive)    with  *7N  or  K^:  &^N  JW  *7K  let  no  man  go  out. 
^  chiefly  precedes  the  preterite,,  and  if  the  future,  it  de 
notes  a  distinct    command  :    nV^fi'^N  kill    not !  n"^\f\  tib 
tJwu  shalt  not  kill! 

3.  The  imperative  following  the  future,  is  sometimes  trans 
lated  by  the  future  :  as  ^?N"|  D5^  \D$  I  wiU  giye  to  you 
and  ye  shall  eat. 

4.  Two  imperatives   following  each  other,    stand   in  the 
relation  of  cause  and  effect:    VH1  ^J£  flNt  this  do,  that  ye 
may  live,  (prop,  and  live)  JH  ^V^'W?  rtfr  ty_  CD3TO 
write   them    upon    the   table    of  thy  heart,    so  shalt  thou 
find  favor,  (prop,  and  find  favor)  Prov.  3,  3. 

§  105.     INFINITIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

1 .  The  infinitive   absolute  being  for  the  most  part  used 
adverbially,    and  either   preceding  or  following   the   finite 
verb,  denotes  increased  intensity  of  action,  certainty  or  con 
firmation:    as   ^j^TOS  Tpyi?   I  will    greatly   bless   thee ; 
?|jnrn#  n^N  nijnrn  and   I   will   exceedingly    multiply 
thy  seed. 

2.  The  inf.  abs.  is  employed  for  the  finite   verb,    when 
several  actions  of  the  same   person   are   spoken  of  success 
ively.     The  first  verb  is  then  found  in  the  requisite  finite 
form,  the  following  verbs  taking  the  form  of  abstract  nouns  in 
the  infin.  abs.:  as  Gen.  41,  43.;  1.  Sam.  2,  28.;  Jer.  14,  5. 

3.  The  infin.  abs.    occasionally    begins    the   sentence  in 
an  animated   style,    which   resembles   the  case   absolute  of 
nouns.      The   context   determines  the  translation:   as  jhn 

rooj  nro  *D  Wi  StoN  p  ninn  ~\&z  SbN  raft  ohn  ipi 

TTT-  T     :  T]—  T:  TT  T|  T;|TT 

slaying  oxen  and  slaughtering  sheep,  eating  flush  and 
drinking  wine,  let  us  eat  and  drink,  for  to-morrow  we 
shall  die,  Isa.  22,  13. 

4.  Most  frequently,  the  infin.  absolute  has  the  sense  of 
a  very  emphatic  imperative :    as  HN'IDI  HI^H  Go  and  call 
Jer.  2,  2.  Ittf'pJ?  fOtfn  DV'H^  ntof /Remember  the  sab 
bath  day  to  sanctify  it,  2.  Mos,  20,  9. 

24 


186  PART  II.    SYNTAX. 

5.  To  give  more  emphasis,  the  infin.  absol.  is  often  used 
in  expressions,  where  we  would  expect  the  inf.  construct: 
as  DB»n  110*7  learn  to  do  well,  Isa.  1,  17.  VyTp  toN  X^> 
Tjl7n  they  would  not  walk  in  His  ways,  Isa.  42,  24. 

6.  The   infinitive   absolute   is   sometimes   employed  as  a 
mere  adverb  :    as  p*]?l  JlJJfJDp  fipn&'l  and   thou   shalt   rub 
(some)  of  it  very  small,  (from  Dpi  Inf.  Hi.  to  beat  small, 
break  in  pieces). 

7.  An  inf.  absol.  immediately  following  the  same  verb, 
and  appearing  to  convey  one  idea,  adds  to  its  signification 
completeness   and   duration.     This   infinitive   is   translated 
by:  always,  further,    continually,    totally,   utterly  etc.:  as 

«jfon  =1^  he  is  ^ie  £°ne'  ^"J  ^T  #10{?''  WQV  heai<  ye 

indeed,  and  see  ye  indeed.  When  two  infinitives  of  this 
kind  (one  of  the  same,  the  other  of  another  verb)  follow 
the  verb,  the  expression  receives  additional  force  :  as 


i*  went  out   to  and   fro  (going   and  returning) 

'8«* 


i31$l  and  I  si)ake  lmto  y°u>  n' 

up  early  and  speaking,  Jer.  7.  13.  Tj^Jl  is  most  fre 
quently  used  in  this  manner.  By  its  infinitive  HlS*!  the 
continuance  or  the  gradual  progress  of  an  action  is  indi 
cated:  as  *T)Drn  Til  7J1  Vn  D!£?rn  and  the  waters  decreased 
continually  (were  going  and  decreasing).  Sometimes  by 
the  participle:  D1BJ  ^"f^  *fin  n»H  ^jill  and  the  lad 
became  greater  and  better  (went  and  grew  and  was  good). 

§  106.     INFINITIVE  CONSTRUCT. 

1.  The  infinitive  constructs  are  considered  as  verbal  nouns 
(the  English:  ing)  and   occur   in   all   cases,    with    suffixes 
and  prepositions:  as  DD1??^  DV3  in  the  day  of  your  eating. 

2.  The  abbreviated  D"S:Q  (§  30,  1.)  are  joined  with  the 
infin.  —  constituting  gerunds  —  :  as  1D  IJ/JlM  ^n  n^s   light 
ening   upon    him,    i.  e.    when   he    alighted.      Subordinate 
clauses   conveying    the  idea   of  time,    are  most   frequently 
denoted  by  the  infinitive  with  %  and  D,    When  the  'action 
is  understood  as  of  prior  occurrence  D  is  used  (most  gener- 


§  106.     INFINITIVE  CONSTRUCT.  187 

erally,  giving  the  infinitive  the  meaning  of  the  pluperfect), 
but  $  when  taking  place  at  the  same  time:  £"N  TEi^Tl 

vnN"^N  ^ipv  jninn?  ifitf  and  tliere  Ktood  no  man  with 

himj  while  Joseph  made  himself  known  unto  his  brethren, 

i.  MOS.  45,  2.  U^N  i:n:nnrn  itr'aj  mv  iraq  -^  that 

we  saw  the   distress    of 'his  soul,    when    he   implored  us, 

i.  MOS. 42, 21.  m*opS pjn3ipK?.y5^>* i?1? ypvi wi 

when  Laban  had  heard  the  report  of  Jacob,  he  ran  to 
wards  him,  i.  MOS.  29,  is.  oj;p^3  rrj&rrjP  NO  ipJ£'£K 

and  the  sons  of  Jacob  came  from  the  field,  when  they  had 
heard. ..1.  Mos.  43,  7.  ^  maybe  variously  rendered:  to,  till, 
that,  so  that,  because,  ivhen,  about:  "D"!1?  H1??  he  finished 
to  speak.  When  a  noun  as  regens  precedes,  it  expresses 
the  genitive  of  the  infinitive  noun  or  the  Latin  gerund, 
e.  g.  rr^S  n#  Eccles.  3,  2. 

The  infinit.  with  0  is  used  as  a  noun  in  the  ablative: 
|»-)Xn  1in.p  ID^l  and  they  returned  from  searching  of  the 
land.T  Often  it  includes  negation:  Hlpipp  from  visiting,  i.  e. 
that  he  may  not  visit;  ^3*19  that  thou  speakest  not,  Gen. 
31,  29,;  "O#p  that  they  not  pass  over,  Num.  32,  7. 

NOTE.  D  before  the  inf.  const,  denotes  comparison  of  the  two 
actions  with  one  another.  ^  must  be  considered  as  the  shortened 
PJ?3 '  DV?  >  which  sometimes  is  still  retained:  as  J^i*n  DP?!  fij£3 
Gen!  31,  10.,  for  DH^nn^;  ft  T^H  H]?.?  Chro.  II.  28,  2~2.,  for 

ib  T*7O,  Thus  ^pb  D?)?N*  DV?  Gen-  3'  5)'  for  W1??^ 
^J5P  (it  cannot  be  taken  literally:  at  the  day,  because  Adam  lived 
after  having  eaten  of  the  forbidden  fruit  900  years). 

3.  The  inf.  const,  can  be    (a)  the  subject  of  a  science: 
Vb  DltO  better  (were  it)  for  us  to  return,  Num.  14,  3.; 

pl  IT!  Jer.    2,    19.;    (b)  the   object:   JND 
4.T  Mos.  22,  14.;    (c)    the   attribute   of   a 
noun:  llp^  nj?l  115D  HJ?.  Eccl.  3,  4. 

4.  The  infinitive  of  a  transit,  verb   takes  the  accusative 
of  the  object  and  the  genitive  of  the  subject;  the  genitive 
immediately  succeeding   the  infin.,    and  the  accus.    taking 
the  third  place:  UJIN*  nliT  HN^?  I)eut-  l>  2^ 


188  PART.  II.     SYNTAX, 

5.  The  infinitive  partaking  of  the  properties  of  both  noun 
and  verb,  uses  a  verbal  suffix,  if  the  suffix  denotes  an  ob 
ject,  a  nominal  suffix,  if  it  expresses  a  subject:  as  \Jjnn1? 
to  slay  me,  2.  Mos.  2,  14.  >Slp  'OnrQ  as  I  lifted   up   my 
voice  (prop,  my  lifting  up). 

6.  The    infinitive,    when    representing    a    finite    verb, 
commences   the   sentence  :    as    D^S^/T^lD  J^bt^'3  *JT1  J°s- 
9,  1.     As  subject  it  takes  its   proper   place:    riVH  DID  K^ 
IID1?  Cn^O  i*  *s  not  g°°d>  tnat  man  should  be  alone  (prop, 
the   being  of  man).      As   object    it    follows   the   verb :    as 

iJTDr!  B>j23>i  2.  MOS.  4, 24.  rvrfo  nriN  NTDK  Jud.  7, 10. 

7.  The  verb  JTH  to  be,    the   particles  W  and  f'K  (inclu 
ding  the  verb  to  be),  with  ^  and  the   inf.    const,    express: 

1)  to  be    about   to   do   something,    to  be  on   the   point  of 
doing:  as  NlD^  W12$r\  'iTI  and  the  sun  was  about  to  go  down; 

2)  it  is  to  be  done,  must  be  accomplished:  as  *p  rWJ^7  TO 
what  is  to  be   done   unto  thec?     Tj^gn  \^  t]S"^3*lS"'  ^H 
wouldst  thou  be  spoken  for  to  the  king,  2.  KL  4,  13. 

8.  The  verb  JJ1J[  to  give,  with  S  and  the  inf.  const,   and 
the   accusative  of  person,  expresses  to  allow,  to  permit:   as 
TjSrn  Dpr^  ]W  tih  he  will  not  let  you  go,  2.  Mos,  3.  19. 

9.4  A  peculiar  construction  is,  that  the  inf.  with  or  with 
out  ^,  following  the  finite  form  of  the  verbs:  v1p>>  jV?5> 
in£>  y\&  ^^IH  etc.  expresses  the  principal  idea,  the 
finite  verb  being  rendered  adverbially:  as  Hhj^  nfrOPQ  H/^^ 
wherefore  didst  thou  flee  secretly?  (prop.:  wherefore  hast 
thou  Ridden  thyself  to  flee?);  Tip  V*7N  ^tr  HDp^V^  and 
it  returned  not  a^/m  (prop.:  it  added  not  again  to  return), 
"ftfj?1?  ^^  n^5  H^DJl  ^  thou  shalt  not  M?Ao%  reap  the 
corner  of  thy  field  (prop.:  thou  shalt  not  complete  to  reap 
the...). 

Sometimes  the  verbs  are  both  finite,  either  connected 
by  lor  without!:  n^l  ?Cn  2.  Kings  1,  11.  rppiN* 
IIP  »&>|33*f  Prov.  23,  35.  rjSK  S\Xin  he  walked  willingly 
(he  was  willing,  walked),  Hos.  5,  1L 


§  107.     THE  PARTICIPLE.  189 

§  107.     THE  PARTICIPLE. 

1.  The  participle  associating  in  itself  the  nature  of  both 
the  verb  and  noun    (substant,  and  adject.),    as  substantive 
represents  either  the  subject,    the  object,    or  stands  in  ap 
position,    being   inflected 'precisely  as  a  noun:    as  subject: 
DpVjftifMTO'l^  niy  Prov,   12,    11.    as   object :   'nj?5B> 

nyrh "niSj Trinj?'N  Gen.  37,  17.,  in  apposition:  r\$i 

"D"i?  ^3N~JTI#  >fU?9g>  Glen.  27,  6.  As  adjective  it  agrees 
with 'the  noun"  in  gender,  number  and  definition  by  the 
article. 

2.  The  participle   of  a  trans,  verb,    when   substantively 
employed,  is  followed  by  the  genitive,  as  object:  ?J$$  *3£JK 
they  that  love  thy  name  ;   t]DH  n.9#  they  that  keep   the 
door. 

3.  The  participle  as  verb  but  faintly  conveys  the  notion 
of  time:  tijBbart.  act.  most  frequently  expressing  present 
time,    especially  when  connected   with    the   pers.  pronoun: 
Tfth  >5iN  I  go;  the  part,  passive  past  time:  *>1Dp  killed  = 
who  hasTbeen  killed.     Sometimes  the  latter  is  used  for  the 
partic.    pass.    fut.    (in   Latin  :    ndus):   as   "1^13  to  be  born 
(nascendus),    Ps,    22,    23.    &TDJ  to   be   created  (creandus), 
Ps.   102,  19.    V?n9  to  be  praised  (laudandus),  Ps.  48,  2., 
or  if  formed  from'  an  intrans.  verb  it  represents  the  Latin 
deponens:  rtttD3  nixus,  confidens. 

NOTE.  The  pers,  pron.  regularly  precedes  the  partic.,  to  convey 
the  notion  of  present,  0dom  following:  Tl^p1?  >g>#9  W  ")DlK 
Ps.  45,  2.  ^X  HNll  Glen.  31,  5.  In  later  Hebrew  this  con 
struction  is  the  "most  common  ;  ^J<  JHV  J  know  5  ^^  PHID  I 
confess;  ^^  J/Ot^O  I  adjure. 

4.  The  participle  without  pronoun   and  without  copula, 
is  very  frequently  used   for  the  present,    in  sentences  con 
veying  truths  of  a  practical  or  moral  nature.     This  present 
generally  includes  the  subject  and  relative  or  the  conjunc 
tions:  he   who — whosoever,    or :  as   he — when   he,    so  that 
we    would    render    in    Hebrew :  he    who    kills    by :    ^tpp , 

in;j;p  iviy  B»I:  rtusD  vojp*  rp  tr'ncjo  ^  There 


190  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

is  (one  that)  keepeth  silence,  because  he  hath  no  answer 
in  his  mouth,  and  there  is  (one  that)  holdeth  back  his  an 
swer  for  his  time.  D'?J3  H31D  DnS"!  H^ID  (He  that) 
useth  many  words,  useth  many  lies. 

5.  The  participle  standing  in  the  place  of  a  finite  verb, 
of  the   past,,  present  or   future,    always   adds   the   idea   of 

permanence  or  duration:  DTl?^  JTT  Q°&  knows ;  N¥>  ^113 
a  river  goes  out;  JTiJOn  DD^J?  your  eyes  have  seen.  Often 
the  copula  is  expressed:  rvit^'P  iTn  HJfail  and  the  lad  min 
istered  (was  ministering),  PD1?"^  n*")31P  N'jl  nTH  and 
Hannah  spake  in  her  heart,  1.  Sam.  1,  13. 

6.  The    participle    according    to   its    verbal    or  nominal 
meaning,   is  connected  with   either   the  verbal  or  nominal 
suffix  (§  47.)- 

7.  Sometimes  one  participle  is  added  to  another,  object 
ively,  (instead  of  an  infinitive)  to   complete  Ms  meaning : 
as  ^)13D3  ]%y?  y~i?  t^'N  a  man  knowing  to  play  on  a  harp. 

NOTE.     The  participle  in  a  few  instances  is  connected  with 
to   express   the    perfect :    Ttf   tl$2  VT1 5   Dl'lT^D  Jfllj 
In  later   Hebrew,  this  construction  frequently  occurs :  JO 
Tj^3  I  came  on  the  way  (JTD  N"fl  H1D^D)J  tlfl\&  tltVi 
she  "did   not   drink   n/70  V'fi  HtDlD)  HDlK  fTH  TJ3  thus    he 
spoke  Q"0  T'fi  «DV) 

The  future  of  JTH »  being  also  employed  to  express  future  time: 

piDN  vnn  ("T?3Tn"D  nioinn) 

P  ARTICLED 
§  108.    PARTICLES  OF  NEGATIVE  SENTENCES. 

1.  ^7;  ?N:  N7  expressing  the  direct  and  real  negation, 
is  used  before  verbs  in  the  preterite  and  future,  ^X  the 
desired,  intended  or  supposed  negation  is  used  only  before 
verbs  in  the  future;  both  regularly  precede  the  verb.  NT"» 
f'NS  ^3»  VI1??:  tib  and  ^3  (the  latter  chiefly  used  in  po 
etry)  deny  the  predicate,  J'NS  J^N  the  subject:  'fJ^JK  K^ 
I  have  not  eaten;  pK  ^'T1)  J|Dj?»  ^3  they  'dV  not 
rise  nor  possess  the  land;  Dtft»  1^13*73  ^  "13DN  the 


§  108.     PARTICLES  OF  NEGATIVE  SENTENCES.          191 

base  man  saith  in  his  heart,  there  is  no  God.  TV75  chiefly 
found  before  an  infinitive  (where  K7  never  stands):  7!3N7 
to  eat,  SbkNt  W??1?  =  Sb^  *fh%  not  to  eat- 

pX  (absol.  st.)  closes  a  member  of  the  sentence:  ptf  D'TKI 
Gen.  2,  5.  pX  (const,  st.)  appears  before  the  noun,  inf.  or 
partic.  ^liDpD  pSt  without  number,  Gen.  41,  49. 

NOTE  I.  The  partic.  mostly  representing  the  noun  is  preceded 
by  ptf,  more  rarely  by  tf1?  J  ng>3  ^  ^V"^  ZcPh>  3'  5" 
In  the  Mislma  ^^  is  often  used,  when  standing  immediately  before 
the  participle,  pfr$  when  a  pronoun  intervenes:  X*71  T^DIN  N7 

P£TW  (.TO  N" 

nptrto  ^:N  rx  ( 

•L 
NOTE  II.    X7  and  7^  may  be  best  compared  with  the   Latin 

non  and  ne 

2.  |§  £es£,  indicating  a  prevention  of  what  follows,  is  with 
but  few   exceptions,    connected   with  the  future: 

lest  ye  die. 

3.  The  preposition  |p,  ,/p  conveying  the  notion  of 
from,  is  occasionally  used  as  a  negation:  TJ^/tpp  ^DN 
DH^y  Sam.  8,  7.  ...that  I  should   not   reign   over  them; 
Ttppnb  J1;|VK  DOJjn  *?#  Isa.  5,  6.  ...that  they  reign  not. 
§  106^  2. 

4.  The    conjunction  Di<  in   swearing   is   properly   condi 
tional:  ?/,  provided:  as  in  Sam.  3,  17.  God  do  so  to  thee, 
and   more  so,  "O"!  ^?P  ^HDri  DK  if  thou   hide   anything 
from  me;   but   when   the   form  of  imprecation   is   omitted, 
it   is   best   rendered   by  a   negative:    not,    and   the   phrase 
tfr  DJ^  by  an  affirmative:  pXH  H^  }N"V.  DX  if  they  shall 
see  the  land  =  they  shall  not  see,  4.  Mos.  14,  23.  K7  DN 
D5^  ng^JJj^  p  if  I  will   not   do  so  unto  you  =  I  will  do, 
4.'  Mos.'  14,  28. 

5.  Two  negations  in  the  same  sentence  do  not  affirm,  as 
in  English,  but   give   more   emphasis  to  the  negation:   as 
D&T15  ^  £|P3  J'N  silver  was  nothing  accounted  of  (in  the 
days 'of  Solomon),  1.  Ki.  10,  21. 


192  §  PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

§  109.     PARTICLES  OF  INTERROGATIVE  SENTENCES. 
1-L>  N^D  (§  24>  4-)-  *&     is  als°  used  elliptically  for  a 


whole  sentence:  D'tpfi  DN  NH  is  it  not  so?  Gen.  4,  7. 

2  Dtf  £/,  is  an  interrogative  particle  in  indirect  questions: 
as  }£}jin  nm5~DK  JlN^U  let  us  see  if  the  vine  flourish:  or 

I  Y  Y  -  T     :  T  :  • 

in  indirect  disjunctive  questions  before  the  second  member: 
as  K^'DN  1&#  *J3  HJ  MflNn  whether  thou  be  my  son 
Esau  or  not. 

NOTE.     The   second   member   is  but  seldom   introduced  by  Itf  : 
(TIT  D3lin  JHV  >P  Eccl.  2,  19.  or  by  H  repeated:  as 
JOri  b?nn  whether  they  are  strong  or  weak,  4.  Mos.  13,  18. 

3.  Sometimes  the  interrogative  particle  is  wanting,  and 
the  question  indicated  by  the   collocation  of  the  words,  or 
by  the  tone  of  the  voice:  nt  HflK  art  thou?  DID  pnrjQ  ?p:iJ7 
wilt  thou  hold  them  still? 

4.  The  answer  ,,yes"  is  regularly  expressed  by  a  repeti 
tion  of  the   word  to   be  affirmed   or   denied  :    as  "O1  t^Jl 

r     T          •   -: 

W*  "IDK*!  '""fyT  ^^?9  ig    there    any    word    from    the  Lord? 
And  he  said,  There  is,  Jer.  37,  17. 

§  110,     PARTICLES  OF  OPTATIVE  SENTENCES. 

1.  J|S   (negatively  $bh  or  >W?)  0  if  !    0  that!   utinam  I 
It    is    coupled    with    the    future  :    as    rTIT   Sw.D^   *h 
1,    Mos.    17,    18.,    with   the  jussive:  ?|^5"J3  W  ^""d  that 
it  might  be  according  to  thy  word,   1.  Mos.  30,  34.,  with 
the   imperative  :   ^#0^'   ^S  njpN"DN   T|N  if  thou   wouldst 
only  hear  me!  1.  Mos.  23,  18.,  with  the  elliptic  participle: 
^  yiytf  *1$y_  ^  0  that  my  people  would  hearken  unto  me, 
Ps.  81,  13.  if  the  wish  refer  to  the  future.     If  referring  to 
the  past,  to  what  should  have  happened,  but  has  not,  the 
perfect  is  employed,    where  we  would   use  the   pluperfect: 
as  ^JID  ^  0  that  we  had  been  dead!  0  si  mortui  essemus! 
Sometimes  DN  is  used  as  an    optative   particle  :    as  ^NH£^ 
^  ynUffi  DK  0  Israel,  if  thou  wilt  hearken  unto  me,  Ps.81^  9. 

2.  A  wish  is  often  expressed  in  the  form  of  a  question: 
as  DlIO  UN*V">0  DHON  D'3!  many  say,  who  will  show  us 


§  111.     PARTICLES  OF  OBJECTIVE  SENTENCES.  193 

any  good,  Ps.  4,  7.  A  peculiar  formula  of  wishing,  for 
0  that!  is:  JJT  'P  who  will  give,  with  following  accusative: 
:n#  fJV  >P  would  it  were  even!  5.  Mos.  28,  67.;  with  fol 
lowing  infinitive:  as  ^fVlD  Jfi?"*9  would  that  we  had  died, 

2.  Mos.  16,  3.;  with  following  finite  verb  with  or  without 
1 :  as  DPI1?  r?£  DM*?  iTm  tJT  >P  0  that  there  were  such  an 
heart  in  them!  S/Mos^S,  26.;  T)tfTT  JJT  >P  0  that  I  knew  ! 
Job  23,  3. 

§  111.     PARTICLES  OF  OBJECTIVE  SENTENCES. 

1.  After  the  verbs  of  seeing,  knowing,  saying,  hearing, 
believing  etc.  the   sentence   employed   as  the,  object  is  in 
troduced  by  >5  or  less  frequently  by  *)£«>$  •  "D1?  '?  IfrO  they 
saw  that  they  had  conquered,  Jos.  S,  21.;   >?  ^  TJH  >p 
iiriK  Di")#  who  told  thee  that  thou  wast  naked?  Gen.  3,  11. 
After  verbs  denoting  the  operations  of  the  senses,  the  sub 
ject  of  the    dependent    clause    becomes    the   object   of  the 
principal  sentence,  and  is  followed  by  the  dependent  clause 
with  its  introductory  particle:  D1CO  >?  TiNiTn$  D'lf?,*  N'T! 
instead    of:    nlNH  !l1tD  ^5  I  D^rJ7N  N"in_  (almost   the  ''Latin 
Accusat.  before  the  Infin.) 

2.  "1^:  nin^H^  -|g%  that   ye    may   know,  that  the 
Lord  distinguishes,'  Ex.  ll',  7.  or  I^X  HN  cf.  (§  96,  5'.) 

§  112.  PARTICLES  OF  FINAL  SENTENCES. 
Dependent  sentences  in  which  intention  or  purpose  is 
expressed,  take  the  particle:  (a)  ~\$X:  ^  3D"  "WJK  that 
it  may  be  well  with  thee,  Deut.  6.  3.,  or  the  more  precise 
JK!'  1$?^'  *tt2J?3  with  or  without  *)£'& ;  as  prepositions, 
they  are  connected  with  the  infinitive,  as  conjunctions 
with  the  future:  njfT  K*7  1^'K  [^  that  he  may  not  see. 
Ez.  12,  12.;  HIV*  ^'8  fj^p1?  Gen."  18,  19.;  ^jl  f^p1?  ib.; 

rny^  ^-i^.nn  11^3  Gen.  22.  so.;  ^ns-nj?  ^niinn  nbj;3 

Ex.   9.   IH."  (b)  S  with     the    infinitive:    HlX^  "ID    Ex. 

3,  4.  Ez.   12,  2.    (c)  V  and  bring  your  youngest  brother  unto 
me  njnNl  that  I  know,  Gen.  42,  34.  7f?  W>v)  Hli"^  HlfJ 
Prov   T20,  22.    (d)  J$,  ^D1?  lest:  IT  H^V'!  I?  Gen.  3,  2i 

ib.  3/il/ 

25 


194  PART  II,     SYNTAX. 

§  113.     PARTICLES  OF  INFERENTIAL  SENTENCES. 

Inferential  sentences  are  usually  introduced  in  English 
by  that.  In  Hebrew  that  is  expressed  by  :  a)  V  as  God 
is  not  a  man  DJ3*1  that  he  lies,  b)  *7  with  infinitive: 
^!?2~riK  riiTTiY?  (thou  hast  magnified  Thy  mercy)  in  keep 
ing  alive  my'  soul,  1.  Mos.  19,  19.  c)  '"l^Sp  HIIT  HD?' 
#E~$h  ^y\rr$h  *\$$  the  Lord  will  smite"  thee,  that  thou 
canst  not  be  healed,  Deut,  28,  27.  d)  *3  after  interroga- 
tives:  as  ^ITN  >D  ^flD'H^  what  is  my  strength,  that  I  should 
hope.  Job  6,  11. 

§  114.     PARTICLES  OF  TEMPORAL  SENTENCES. 

a)  The  introductory  *?T1  is  of  especial  importance,  as  it 
occurs  with  the  greatest  frequency  in  adverbial  sentences 
relating  to  time;  b)  the  prefixes  3  and  3  with  the  infini 
tive  (§  106,  2.);  e)  1  connected  with  the  finite  verb  or  par 
ticiple:  as,  the  angel  came  to  the  woman  D^V  N7p  while 
she  was  sitting;  d)  the  conjunctions:  t>3:  'fipHnn  '3  when 
I  kept  silence,  my  bones  withered,  Ps.  32,  3.  ^l^ND- 
:npT  ^83  VT1  2.  Mos.  32,  19.  DNJ  TV?  H1??  DK  when 
the  vintage  is  finished,  Isa.  24,  13.  D*ltD>  DH1D3J  D"")£Q 
^WT  1^33  ?p:!W  Jer.  1,  5.  tKD:  *W^tO  since  I  came 
to  Pharaoh,  Ex.'X  23.  1J£,  O  ij;,  T^  "lV_»  Jos-  2,  16. 
2.  Sam.  23,  10.  Deut.  2,  14. 

NOTE.     Sometimes    conjunctions    denoting    time    are    omitted  : 

so  toiSi     Nn-Sj;  x    tr'/'n  oen.  19,  23. 


§  115.     PARTICLES  OF  CAUSAL  SENTENCES. 

a)  >?  because:   HNt  Jl^lJ  »3  Gen.  3,  14,  17.  b)  fj£  be 
cause,  n^  J37»,  »3  f^.T:  Num.  20,  12.    Gen.  22,  16.   Num. 

11,  20.  n^'N  alone:  ^'OiH  "l^'K  for  the  Lord  dried  up  the 
waters  of  the  Jordan,  Jos.  2,  23.  'c)  Dp#,  >D  l&y,  1^VK  DpJT 
because,  because  that:  Num.  14,  24.;  Gen.  22,  18.;  '2.'  Sam. 

12,  10.    d)  p-1?^  '3:  Gen.  38,  26.    e)  V  N^HI  DJH  1*7  niTiX* 
B^JJ  Whose  is  the  sea,  ibr  He  made  it,  Ps.  95,  5. 

§  116;     PARTICLES  OF  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 
1.  a)  For  conditional  sentences  the  two  particles  DN  arid 


§  116.     PARTICLES  OF  CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES.       195 


1  are  used,  or  their  negations:  DN  and 
DX  in  case  the  condition  and  consequence  are  real,  fftl  when 
they  are  only  presumed  :  „,'£#  yfytTOQ  •••  '^H  N^  DN1 
if  thou  wilt  go  with  me,  then  I  will  go,  but  if  thou  wilt  not 
go  with  me,  (then)  I  will  not  go,  Jud.  4,  8.  HllT  j^tDfl  H 
t»«.  'Orvpn^  if  the  Lord  were  pleased  to  put  us  to  death... 
Jud.  13,  23.  Frequently  the  expression  is  elliptical,  the 
subordinate  sentence,  expressing  the  consequence,  being 
omitted,  whereby  ^  gives  an  optative  signification  to  the 
verb:  DHVP  f"!^5  "OJIP"^  would  that  we  had  died  in  the 
land  of  Egypt,  Num.  14,  2.  ^3*7  ITIT  ^KgOtf'!  ^  0  that 
Ishmael  might  live  before  Thee,  Gen.  17,  18. 

DX  with  the  preterite  immediately  folio-wing  gives  t«  the 
latter  the  signification  of  the  future  perfect:  ^pl  TlPl^'DX 
Tib  '3PP  if  I  shall  have  been  shaven,  then  my  strength 
will  depart  from  me,  Jud.  16,  IT. 

b)  »D  if,  supposed  that:  njtf  "q#  H^H  »3  Ex.  21,  2. 

NOTE  I.  D^s  is  purely  conditional,  in  '3  the  conditional  idea  is 
often  incorporated  with  the  clause  of  time.  Compare  Ex.  21,  2. 
3,  5,  14,  18. 

c)  nC*'$:  "M.IJWTl  "W'8  tlie  blessing,  if  ye  obey  ...  Dent. 
11,  27.'" 

d)  jn  or  mri:  h  irpX^S  jni;  if  they  will  not   believe 
me,   Ex.  4,  1.    r\\2T}$  T\\&y  Hin?  H^H  if  the   Lord   make 
windows  in  the  heaven,  2.  Ki.  7,  2. 

e)  V  VDN  njjt  ntlJI  -=  Dfe  D^VGen.    44,    22. 

i^-ni?  -  hofr  oVl  EX.  3/13,  in^'1?  JNOPI  =  }»Dp    n 

Ex.  4,  23. 

f)  3  with  the  inf.  const,:  Gen.  44,  30,  31.  \Nfc3  , 
NOTE  II.     The    conditional  particle  is  frequently   omitted: 

if  a  thousand  sha11  fal1  at      sidc  •••  Ps-  9 


2.  The  second  member  most  frequently  commences  1)  with 
out  any  particle:  iO  njfT  ...  ^NyD  NfDX  if  now  I  have 
found  favor  in  your  eyes,  speak,  I  pray  you,  in,ftie  ears  of 
Pharaoh,  Gen.  50.  4.;  2)  with  V  ToSrn  >$#  'D^fl  DN* 


PART  II.     SYNTAX. 

3)  with  stronger  particles:  as  ftf,  'J$  , 

'?a£  >fr|3N  rN  Ps.   119,  92.     int'had  not  been  the  Lord, 

who  was  for  us  ,M  Wjl  0>?fi  WJ  Ps.  124,  2,  3. 


§  117.     PARTICLES  OF  DISJUNCTIVE  SENTENCES. 
As  well-as  )  V-  1  •  pHN)  nflN1)  5  m- 
both-and    J  Gen.  24,  25.   CDJV-OJ: 
0^08'W  1-  Sam.  2,  26.;  1J^4*UTH 
10.;  Gen.  19,  11.;  Gen.  9—10.    Neither—  nor: 
ftW  &  Tj*7-D3  ^'0.1  1.  Ki.  3,  26.     Either  or:  IN—IN'  Ex. 
<;  DN-tJN:  Ex.  19,  13.;  DN1-DN: 
Eccl.  5,  11. 


§•118.     PARTICLES  OF  ADVERSATIVE  SENTENCES. 

The  most  frequent  adversative  particle  is  V  W/?*!  but 
from  the  tree,  Gen.  2,  IT.  All  this  is  come  upon  us 
^rQJ^'  N71  yet  have  we  not  forgotten  Thee,  Ps.  44,  18. 
Stronger:  DT-'JNi  D^Vbut:  Gen.  28,  19.  DkX  »3  but:  thy 
name  shall  be  called  no  more  Jacob  ^JO{J»"DN  '?  but  Israel, 
Gen.  32,  29.  T]N  but,  pN  but,  limiting  what  precedes: 
N1?  T]N  but  not,  Gen.  20,  12.  Ps.  31,  23. 

'5"Ej  although,  usually  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  : 
fi^SO  to^rPlp  D|  although  you  multiply  prayers,  Isa.  1,  15  . 
DN  although:  come  now  and  let  us  argue  DJ^NDri  VIT~DN 
D^^3  though  your  sins  be  as  scarlet,  Isa.  1.  is.  ]  although: 
thou  shalt  die  for  the  woman,  whom  thou  hast  taken 
Hl  altliough  she  is  a  man's  wife,  Gen.  20.  3. 


v      §   119.     INTERJECTIONS. 

'IN*  *ln*  (in*  HN»  n^lN»  ^8  exclamations  of  grief,  com 
plaint:  ah!  woe!  alas!  for  the  most  part  with  following  *?: 
DN10  ^1N  Num.  21,  29.:  D1^  HH  Ez.  30,  2.  Ez.  6,  11. 
^  ^N'Micha.  7,  1.  HH^  with  b  Jo.  1,  15.^  for  the  most 
part  with  D'H1^  Hp^  Josh.  T,  7.  HNr?  exclamation  of  joy, 
aha!  Ps.  35,  25.,  of  terror  or  mockery:  Vs.  40.  16.  Isa.  44,  16. 
>5  an  exclamation  of  pressing  entreaty:  0  that!  in  addressing 
God  with  fn£?  Jos.  7,  8.,  with  \ru^  in  addressing  superiors; 
1.  Ki.  3,  17. 


PARADIGMS. 


A.     P  ARTICLES  WITH  SUFFIXES. 


7  to,  sign  of  the  dative          3  in. 

Sing. 

I.e.     *n   to  me 


Sm-  7]7  m  p.  ^ 

2  *  to  thee. 

]f-  T]1? 

Cm.  "j^  to  him 

'jf.  pl^toher 

Ptor. 

1.    c.  SY5   to  us 


2. 


to  you 


,    to  them 


\  m  P-  |i 

in  thee 


in  her 

in  us 
in  you 

f 

in  them 


3  as,  for  which 
.also  1723,  1D3, 
as  I 


03  as  thou 


as  he 


as  she 


as  we 


as  ye, 


seldom 


2)  as  tliey 


>oet.  »3o, 

from  me 
in  pause 

)  from  thee 


poet. 
^ 713 D,  from  him 
from  her 

from  us 
from  yo» 


on9»  p°et- 

from  them 


i?n  °^  tne  accusative.        J"|£$  at,  with. 

Plur.  Sing.  Plur. 


me  us 


|m-  TJrlK.  ln  P 
2. -I  1™*  thee 

i 

fm.    "inj^  him 


at,  with  me      ^JflN  with  us 

,inp-^K     D3flN 

with  thee  with  you 

BW 

,  with  him 


with  them 


'  (  f-    nn^X  her 

Qj;  with. 
w.  me       w.thce 

in  P- 


,  with  her 


them 


w.  him     w.  Jier       w.  us        w.  you  w.  them 


198  B.     REGULAR 

Kal.  Ni^lwl.  Fid. 

Transitive,      f          Intransitive. 

Pret.    3.    m.         \    *Sbp 

3.    f."       -Irffc'' 
2.    m. 


-iv  •      T':    r|T 

2.    f. 


.    3.  7, 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 


inf.  const .      *S'bD  abs°L  (l?l'I3R.)  *Sibpn  ^Dp^  *Stbp  ^®p 

)  =  -  |  T-      /L-.LJ_;_V          ••  I  - 


Imp.  m 

f. 
PUir.  m, 

f.  mbbp  nnaa          n:Scopn 

T:|:  T  :-  :  T:~|T 


Kut.     3.    m.  Sfrp' 

3.  f.        Sbpn        ns^n       StDpn 

»         I   :   '  »     "  I  T 

2.    m. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.    3.    in. 

3.  f.         J 

2.  m. 

2.    f.          f 
1.    c. 


The  length.  Fut. 

(Optativ 
Fut.  apoc.  ( 


(Optative)  T  :  '  :  '•' 

c.  Jussive         —  — 


Part.  act. 

1  'fi^O"  in  P-        2      O'  in  p. 


VERB,  §  §  29—39.  199 

Paul.  HiphiL  Hoplicd.  Hitlipael, 


\  nSppn 

rj^pn  $ps/p!$ 

ii%p        nSi:pn  nSropn        n^Dnn 
^nSbp       ^ 


S^nn 


wanting.    ;         '.^R?  wanting. 


L  L    •  i  - :  • 

:,J         ^RO         7Dpnn 

S*L)pn       S^cpbri          S^pn 


200 


C.     VERB  PE  GUTTURAL,   (§  40) 


KoA. 


Pret,  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 

2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Plur.  3. 


2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Inf.  const. 


Imp.  m. 

f. 
Plur.  m. 

f. 


Niplial 


Hipliil. 


Hoplial. 


n7PJfT 


abs. 


log 

noy 


'pm 

ipm 

rnpm 


Fut.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2,  m. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.  f. 

'     2.  m. 

2.  f. 
1.  c. 


prnn 
ntnn 


Fut.  apoc.  (Jussive) 


Part.  act. 


pass. 


D.     VERB  AYIN  GUTTURAL.  (§  41). 


201 


•-•.  •• 

Pret.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 
2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  c. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Kal. 


Inf. 

Inf.  absol. 


npntr 


Pid.          raal.          lUthpad. 


Imp.  m. 

f. 

Plur.  m. 
f. 


rutantf 


Fut.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 

2.  m.     LDn^n 

2.  f. 
I.e. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.f.  rupni#i 

o 

2.  f . 
I.e. 


wanting. 


Part, 
pass. 


T  I 


202  E.     VERB 

Kal.  Nipliol.  Piel. 


Pret.   3.  m. 
3.  f. 

2.  m. 

2.  f.  fjgg^ 

Plur.  2.  m. 


Inf. 

Inf.  absol. 


Imp.  m. 


Fut.    3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.   3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Fut.  with.  Suff. 


Part.  act.  J?9^  Pass-  y^Dfc^  l^Dt^'3  1/tDu^'O 


LAMED  GUTTURAL.  (§  42)  203 

PuaL  Ilipliil.  ffophal.  Hithpad. 


wanting.  :  '  '  -  wanting 


Fut.  apoc. 


Inf. 


204  F;    VEKB  LAMEDII 

Kal.  Niplial.  Pid 

Pret.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 
2.  f. 

1,  c. 
Plur.  3.  c. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Imp.         m. 

f. 
Plur.        m. 


f.  njx¥D  njxvr3n 

TV:  T    v  T  • 


Fut.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 


2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3- f-  ruNjfpn         njNVDn         nixypn 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
l.'.c. 


:   |T   • 


Fut.  apoc.       (Jussive) 


Fut.  with  Suff. 


Part.  act.  KV/^   Pass-  K1V,; 


ALEPH  (*O),  (§  49)  205 

Pual.  Hiphil.  JIopJiaL  Hitlipad. 


nxvon 


wanting.  M,v '-  wanting 


KRS? 


206  G.     VERB  PE  ALEPH  (N"fl).  §  48. 

Kd.  Niphal.  Hiphil.  Hophal. 


Pret.  3.  m. 


Inf. 


Like  the  Verb  Pe  Guttural,    in  Paradigm  C. 


Imp.       m. 

f. 
Plur.        m.  *>*  6tG-      Bating- 

f. 


Fut.    3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 

2.  f.  77JNFI  etc-  etc,  etc. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Fut.  Vav  Conv. 


Part.  act.  ^fc  pass.  SlDN*    S^N^ 


H.     VERB  J"£3  (§  50).  207 

Kal.  NiphoH.  HipJiil.  Hopjial. 


Pret.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 

2.  m.  etc. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Inf.  constr. 


Imp.        m.  *J^j| 

Plur.      1  S  *|n  ,^n     wantinS' 

f.  rwj  ruttfji-in 


Fut.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


The  length. 
Fut.  apoc. 


Part.  act.  $%$  pass 


208  I.     VERB  PE  YODTT 

Kal.  NiphuL 

Pret.  3.  nu  *Dt£^ 

-    T 

3.  f.  TOfc'» 

•*•    :    IT 

s- .  m.  J"*?._j Ly 

2.  f.  fljfc* 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  c. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Inf.  niW,   abs. 


Imp.        m. 

Plur.        m.  W? 

f. 


Fut.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m, 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Fut.  apoc.       (Jussive) 
Fut.  with  Vav  Conv. 


Part.  act. 


>"S  <orig.  Yfl)  (§  51.) 
Hipliil. 


J.  Verb  prop.  PK  YODH  (»"£)     209 
Kal.  Hipliil. 


regular. 


DIB) 


wanting. 


OB 


27 


210  K.     VERB  AYIN  DOU- 

Kal.  Niphal. 


Pret.  3.  m. 

*ap                                         *aD3 

3.  f. 

mD                               naD:) 

T    -                                                                                                       T   ~   T 

2.  m. 

nap                   nap} 

2.  f. 

nap                   map} 

1.  c. 

>nap                  'niap? 

Plur.  3.  c. 

13D                              ttpj 

2.  m. 

oniap                  oniap} 

2.  f. 

jniap                   jni3p4 

1.  c. 

W                    «api 

Inf.  constr. 

*20  abs-  (ai'39>     *DDH  (31fDri) 

Imp.        m. 

Db                      apn 

f. 

sab                               s2Dn 

Plur.        m. 

dD                                              13DH 

f. 

nrao                              ^^aon 

Fut.  3.  m. 

ab^          D'D*              DD^ 

3.  f. 

non         abn             apn 

2.  m. 

aon         abn             apn 

2.  f. 

^aon         ^apn            >apn 

1.  c. 

abx         abN             apx 

Plur.  3.  m. 

^ao^          iaD*             lao*1 

T                                                        I    *                                                                       ~     ' 

3.  f. 

rwapn       n^aon          n^apn 

2.  m. 

iaon         ^aon            ^aon 

T 

2.  f. 

nyapn       »"ii?Dn          nrapn 

1.  c. 

DDJ              3'DJ                    DDJ 

F«t.  with  Vav  Conv.                      20*1 

Fut.  with  Suff.                              '3aD> 

Part.  act. 


3DJ 


BLED  (#"#),  (§  52). 

HipJiiL  Hoplml. 

•spin 


'SDH 

"  T 

nraon 


nopn          ni^pin 


ontoon        oni^Din 


Dpin 


wanting. 


JQSID 

Df)33lD 


3310 


DD1D 


MID 


211 
P*al. 


HDD1D 


^3310 
onmiD 


wanting. 


apv 
DDin 


nin 


aaiop 


nmion 


DD1D 


aaioo 


aaiop 


2.12 


Fret.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 

2.  m. 

2.  f. 

1,  c. 
Plur.  3.  c. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 

•  1.  c. 


AW. 


"PR 


L.     VERB  A  YIN  VAV 

Niphal.  IRpliil.  IIopJtaL 

HB&tfi 


rr 


Inf.  const. 


Imp.    m. 

f. 

Plur.    m. 
f. 


Fut.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 

Fut.  apoc. 
eonv. 

Fut.  with  suff. 
Part.  act. 


*D1p 


abs.  (Di 


p) 


Dip 

}Q:)p 

runp 


Din 


Dn 


Dipri 
Dipn 


'nin 


D^ 

op: 


wanting. 


DpV 

Dpjin 
Dpin 
'ippin 


njppin 


D 


Di 


(§53). 


M.  Verb  AYIN  YODII  0"J?)  §  53.       213 

Kal.  Niplinl. 

-—        — £  *p^ 


nopip 


rooi 


rippip 


DpDOlp 

t^ppip 
^OOID 


onii' 


Dpip 

Dpip 

^rppip 


DOl 


wanting. 


Wr 


wo* 


FK 


pan 

as  Dlpn 


113'. 


W 


214  N.     VERB  LAMEDH 

Kal.  Niphal. 

Pret.  3.  m. 
3.  f. 
2.  m. 
2.  f.  . 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  c. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Inf.  constr.          filSjl  abs.  (fiSj)  (poet.  l^J 


Imp.        m. 

f. 

Plur.        m. 
f. 


Fut.   3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  rn. 

2.  f. 

1.  c. 
Plur.  3.  m. 

3.  f. 

2.  m. 
2.  f. 
1.  c. 


Fut.  apoc. 


Fut.  with  Suff. 


Part,  act, 


HE  (IT'S)*  (§  54).  215 

Pual.  HiphH.  Hophal.  Hiihpad. 


wanting.  ^^  wanting. 


in 


216  Q.     REGULAR  VERB 

SUFFIXES  for  1  Sing.     2  Sivy.  m.  '2.  Sing.  f.    3.  Sing.  m 

Fret.  Kal.  3.  m.  i<jW>  ^tSp  ^P 


2.  m. 


3.  c. 
2.  m. 


suff.  nom. 
Inf.  Kal. 

suff.  verb. 


Imp.  Kal. 


Fut.  Kal.    3.  m. 


, 
with  Nun  epenthetic 

Plur.  3.  m. 


Pret.  Piel. 


WITH  SUFFIXES.     §42—47.  217 

3.  Sing.  f.     1  Plur.      2  Plur.  m.    2  Plur.  f.   3  Plur.  m    3  Plur.  f. 


rnStpp 
rnn^top 


oStop)      jS?pp 
Stop   f3r»Sop: 


p^tgp     oStpp     }St?p 


28 


218  P.  MASCULINE 

1.  Declension.  SECOND 

i_  ii. 

Sing,  absol.  hero  *")13J?       nanc'    *V         star   3313  name 

•     constr.  -VfoJ  T  3313 

Light  Suffixes.  H13J  H>  ^3313 


Grave  Suffixes.  03*113-3  D3T 

riur.  absol.  DH13-1  DVTTDu-  OH*          0*3313 

—     constr.  H13JI  'T  '3313  nllDt^ 

Light  Suffixes.  H13JI  *T  O313 

Grave  Suffixes. 


Fourth  Declension.  FIFTH 

Sing,  absol.      word  *")31    grape  3^      old    Jp)1  King  T]7p  ^°°^ 

constr.              ^3*1              3^J/%              fpf  n/P 

Light  Suffixes          H31            *3^            ^pt  $3^D            HtDD 


Grave  Suffixes 
Plur.  absol. 

—    constr.  ^yi 

Light 'Suffixes          H31  ^ty  Opt  *3^D  H5D 

Grave  Suffixes 


1.   Declension.         SECOND    DECLENSION. 

Sing,  absol.  law  Hptl       year  Hjl^    s^eeP  tlM     right-    J" 

—       constr. 
Light  Suffixes 


Grave  Suffixes 

Plur.  absol.  Dlpl!  D1^  Dl^^  nlpTV 

I      -.  T  IT; 


—      constr.  rilpfT 

Light  Suffixes  ^jllpfl  TllJt^ 

Crave  Suffixes 


NOUNS.     §  61  —  66.  219 

DECLENSION.  3.    Declension. 

staff   Sntt      £    n*Tin  enemy  ^V  seer 


;3    D33rpr 

*J     D'BTjp.      D^\N*       D7h       D'3H3       i 

^ihp      ^\s*       nh      ^H3 


B  DT)|5  '     3>*      nth  | 


vy 


DECLENSILON. 

fin  vv        va» 


t^'"iD    ^ac'  *^I^^  power  nV.!)  work^t^JJ  fruit  ^^  death  j")*lD>°live  j"Vt 

nto,     m 


§  G9-72- 

Third  'Declension.  FOURTH    DECLENSION. 

queen  ^Q    word  rTOX    desert  nD^ifl      twig 


nonn 


CHRESTOMATHY. 


I.  Abraham  is  commanded  to  offer  up  his  child  as  a 
burnt  sacrifice.     (Genesis  22). 

no  D>r6  m  nn  onrnn  nr?»  >rn 


nj??5  :D?' 
r'Nn-nx  n^  npn  1:3  prwSy  ar-n  nSyn 

..  T  v  T.  )-•-  :       |     T    :    •       w-  v  T  -          T        T 


-     pny 


'Vtfni  ir«n  n^n 
2 


ipjn  D^j;n 
i  ....      ..T 

rr?f's3  :  D 

vSi\*  Nnp?i  :  i^-n.x  ton^S  rtW  nri 
:>MH  10^1  D?*33^  onn 
^y?  ripwp  iS  iriyrSN1 
n^  r»3^n 

S\x-n  -in  NI  i'n   ornx  Nfe'-n  is 
nnn  nS' 
ovn  fi 


:  1:3  nnn  nr?  in^i   \xn-n^  np'i 


ClIRESTOMATHY,  221 

Lrn-pn^DrnsN-^N*  nirr  ri^So  *np»i :  7nNT  nin^ 

T     -      I  •  T      T  :  v          T      :       I  -    ;    -  T  |  :  •  -  •/    T  •  •        T 


njn 

ojrr  nzy-hz  *\tf$  Sin?1;  Dyj^'n  »3?tt3  ^ 
i8p>s*rr  ^iji  Sb  Tjos  ^a^ni  :VD\V  11;^  nx 


i  §  87,  2.  2  §  84,  2  3  §  97,  2.  4  §  92,  4.  5  §  83,  7. 
§  76,  2,  a.  7  yj*y  the  south-western  hill  of  Jerusalem  to  which 
'  with  Solomo's  temple  on  it,  belonged,  was  called  HiPP  ^n» 
D  or.  fullcr  Hln*  D*3  ")n  (Isa.  2,  2.)  the  temple-mount- 
ain.  About  this  mountain  the  proverbial  adage  was  current: 
n^T  nlrV  iri^  on  tnc  mountain  of  God  one  is  seen,  i.  e.  is  pro 
vided  for.  8  with  3  °f  *ne  person  or  thing  by  whom  one  swears; 
here  God  swears  by  Himself.  9  §  111,  1. 


II.  Birth  of  Moses.    Hi.s  flight  to  Midian.   (Exodus  2.) 


inx 


hS  n^p  4n^  prno  irinj? 


snrp^nr^ni 


*xn  nni      tr-nN*  n^  ^N*I  ^  inprm  njn 


222  CIIRESTOMATHY. 

*0p™  p4?  nV  >rr\  riinsTO1?  injojii  n^rr  Snri  :  inp^rn  10 
onn  DW3  »rn  nnn^i?  D'on-jo  o  Sprint  ntp'o  IO?MI 
.150  nyo  E*N*  N*i  onSp?  ann  vnarS  N^n  no 


^^-o^'  mni  ^trn  01*3  Njn  :Sin?  in:rpcp^ 


HD 


nSn  ffrroii  &$-\n  TO  ^^^n  nyp  ^ 


anp-n  fa  nni  :n^?  inn 


VTJ  jnn?:      3  ^ri^rr  ^  ION* 

ono 


1  The  sibilants  y,  $  and  the 'letters  7,  p,  }  sometimes  are  doub 
led  for  the  sake  of  euphony  (Dagesh  euphonic).  2  The  third  f.  s. 
suff.  often  without  Mappik  :  Jl —  instead  of  H — »  3  f°r  DVTUl! 
cf.  §  12,  6,  B.  3.  and  §  14,  II.  1.  ^  inf.  of  y-p  §  51,  4.  6  §'93,  3. 
€  Hi.  II.  of  TjT^  (only  in  imp.  fern.)  regul.  "Tj^lH  «  7  §  55,  b. 

8  n^nni  -  m^nfn  fr.  n^n .    9  o^n^n  for  rim  vi ,  the 


_ 

masc.  suffix  sometimes  used  irregularly  for  the  fern,  thus  Q3K  i>  for 
\     10  §  106?  9.     11  §  94.  0.  Note. 


:onp 


12 


CilKESTOMATIlY.  223 

III.     The  Appointment  of  Moses.     (Exodus  III.) 

-n$  jnyi  IHO  jrp  urin  IT?  fanrntf  'nip  rrn  ntp 
:n:rin 

rypn  mrn  arn  rtjpn  '•pnp  tr^rr©1??  vS#  nin* 
3  n^?r»-n 
4niN*f?  np  *D  nin 
:  ^n  ^N'l  n^'o  n^b  npN-n  n^pn  rjinp  D^rikv  vx  N*jp»i 


D  v:i|5  n^to  "inpn  bpj;;.  ^riNi  prty?  *rt     D?*!}?^  *n 
nin*  •19^1  :D*rlSn-S    tono  N 


ni  "inrn  *n§m  Ho^n  ^HDi       ?n  oi 
f  nSn- 


x3  :  njn  -inn  Sj;  p^?»rrnH  inp^n  onypp 


-vox  HD  IO^-HD  ^xt  DDN* 

'  '"'     "  "'  ~   T    : 


^ 


t  *n^  rnrr  ^-i^^  '3 


"    ixn  H 


2  2  1  ClIHESTOMATIl  Y  . 


'ptsrnt  Dytf  ^n^  npj;>_  'px)  pre* 

i  in1  nr  nn 


i  §  107,  7.  Note.  2  §  37,  Note  I.  3  §  94,  4.  4  In  the  East  a 
mark  of  respect  and  reverence.  5  §  83,  6.  6  const,  st.  part.  fern,  of 
y\t  ,  7  I  remain  always  the  same,  I  am  unchangeable.  8  With  this 
name  the  tetragrammaton  HilT  in  the  following  verse  is  identical. 
(See  §  18,  I.  Note.)  The  correct  pronunciation  of  the  latter  was 
Jahaveh  or  Jahveli,  according  to  the  Samaritans  Jabe* 


IV.     The   Proclamation  of  the   Decalogue   on   Mount 
Sinai.     (Exodus  19.  20,  1—18.) 

2  run  ov 


?3inn 


tow  onvp?  wtrj;  *ig^  Dfi'Nn  op??  j  NH^  4 
'"D^  nni?)  :  ^KQt^  xiw  on^j  ^5  5 
Jt-Sso  rt^jp  'S  DPVHI  *nn?-nN  op-joiri 
n  n^  o^rja  nj^oo  >Vrpp  opx)  :  p«n  G 


ax 

JI  ng>#j  nin?  n^-n^x  S'D  npN^i 
N*  n^n  n^'o-Sgt  nirr  -19^3  :ninr^»  Dj^ 


*  135^1  :  rn      o^n  nnn-nNn^'D  15-11  oi^  irrj^  10 


vm  n 

D  Dj;n-n«c  nS?:irn  :  70  nn-Sj;  Dj;n  12 
tnv  mo  inn  .  jtitfr     in 


ClIRESTOMATIIY. 


nrn        nan573>n  r|Wp3  rvrr 
ttiiTO^ 

#8*5  mjT  v^j; 
i96prm  rjin  ipt^n^ip  »nn  nxp 

ti   :Sip?  ^^.  D^riSiSin'!  ^3-!^  ng^o 
Sx  nin  »j«  :  *ioxS  nxn 

onv/p 

1?  :  7  ^ 

n  njpnn  K    :pN?  nnnp  0.^3  n^i  nnnp 

"nin 


x  nin 

9  :  r-    12  ' 


3^1  ^331  n 

p{jn-nsi  DW'1^"^  nin*  nj;  o^-n^'  ^ 
oi^n^  nin?  rp3  p-Sj;  T3?*n  01*3  m-n  D^n^N-S 
12  ?w  fon^  f  j;9*p  ^TiN)  ^3^-n??  n?3  :  intr^ 
:rjS  fro  ^n'^  ninp^  non^ 


D>JO 
prnb  n^jn  ^1  Di;n  xnn  \&yr  nnn-n^i  i^'rr  Sip  nxi 


29 


226  ClllMKrOMATHY  , 

an*  rtnn  'roini  D>nS#n  ao  D3fl$ 


is 


"ln  the  new  moon,  the  first  day  on  which  the  new  moon  i 
visible.  2  On  the  same  (the  first)  day.  3  The  Sinai.  4  §  117. 
5  ^31'!"!  WO  or  fuller  b^tl  pp.3  Tj^JD  (Jos.  6,  5.)  to  blow 
the  trumpet  in  protracted  sounds,  i.  e.  continually.  6  §  105,  7. 
7  D>J£3  face,  then  person  generally,  *J£3  my  person,  myself.  8  Q""OJ^n 
not  Ho.  but  Kal  =  D"13J^  •  9  ^  denotes  here:  as  to,  witli  respect 
to.  10  §105,  4.  n§85,T4.  b.  12  §  102.  7.  13  §  118.  14  §  98,  1. 
15  §  104,  2. 


V.     Moral  Laws.     (Leviticus  19,  1—4,  9—18.) 


nin!  ^^  trnpr  ^3  vnn 
(1*7fif  nin?  ^^  rto?to  w 

03^  ^^n  xS  npDD  ^HJ 

3 


2^       ^7Vp: 
oni* 


^313 

nprny  ^rix  73^  n1?^  firrtib  yytify  ^Tn^14 
0^9  n^7)'S^D  jnn  xS  njj?  ^i  trnn  S^p_n 

:nintis 


:nin?  ^ 
txin  v     Nmx  n   nin 


1  §  100,  V.  1).     2  §  98,  1.     3  The  inf.  with  suff.  like  the  Seghol- 
ate  ^b     sometimes  has  Kubbuts.  cf.  §  45,  1.  and  §  66,  11.  4  §  106,  9. 


GlIRESTOMATTIY.  227 


5  ^y  "Jpy    to   stan(*   UP    ayainst,    D*1  the  blood,  i.  c.  the  life,  the 
slandererer  standing  up   against  the  life  of  the  slandered  (Ibn  Es'ra)  . 

6  !Dnj$  with  accus.  :  to  love  in  the  widest  sense,  with  7  of  the  person: 
to  bestow  love  upon  one,  to  be  devoted  to.  (Fuerst.  Lex.). 


VI.     The  Priests  Benediction.     (Num.  6,  22—27.) 

DN  "^  *vn  •'  "toN1?  n^'D-Stf  nin»  -o-n 
24  j  se*1!  nirv  ?"o?  :  onS  1  nioK  Sao?>!  ^?"n^  1^511  rb 
i3  nin*        J2-r»'  ?       V:Q  rnrv 


1  §  105,  §.     2  §  52,   8. 

Vir.     Exhortation   to   love*  the  One   God.   (Dent,   f>, 
4-9.) 

run*  lyrrJK  nin»  Vxiti* 


^33      33  0 
vm 


l  Refers  to  DHDIH  .    2  §  51,  7, 


VIII.     Exhortation  to  revere  God  and  to  observe  His 
commandments.     (Deut.'lO,  12—22.) 

n  no 


^       nin? 

H  ^ris;  nin^  jn  :  Tj  DID?  ovn  TJ^P  ^^  "vfi*  vnpn-n^i. 
15  ptrn  ^ri3N3  pn  :  nrnt^-S:^  pjjn  o^'n  »p^i  own 


228  CIIRESTOMATIIY. 

D»oj;rrS:pp  035  DrinnN  ojnr?  ~\ny\  oniK  rnq^  rnrv 


2  01*3  is 

tfn  ^rt§  ron  byrtj*  nirr  >3  nijM? 
n>  a*S)  ens  Nt^-N1?  n^  NiT^n 

oin* 


:j/n  101     -rn  mi    nj;n  in    arn 


vn  '1:0  ?i1     nin 


1  Inf.  of  ^*^*  cf.  §  30,  4.     2  as  it  is  this  day,  just  now.     3  §  81,  1. 
4  §  92,  7.     5  §  84,  3. 


IX.     Appointment  of  Joshua  to  succeed  Moses.  (Joshua 
1,  1-9.) 

•  2  1  3  J^'in;-S^  rnrr  np^i  nirr  131?.  n^'D  nio  nrrjst  l  \ 
;.  Dip  nnjri  no  H3U  n^'o  n'ONb  n^' 

nin  Djrr      nnx  mn 


;1!  5D>nnn  p>st     nnginw     |D  "iron 


»nvn  n^s^rr 
oj;ri-nN    ^n  nnx  ^3  yow  prrre 


prp  pi_  j 


n^o 
:rjSn  np'j 

3  n^ni  n*5o  n-rn  minn 

• 


ClIRESTOMATHY.  229 


1  §  102  Note.  2  §  73,  6.  3  §  86.  4  §  96,  2.  5  All  the  in 
terior  of  the  Phenician  inland.  6  The  Mediterranean  Sea.  7  §  56, 
2,  2.  e.  and  §  85,  4.  b. 


X.  David  slayeth  the  giant  Goliath.     (1.  Sam.  17,  1—54.) 

*!•$*  l  rbitr  ispNn  npn^  Dp^no-n**  D'fipSs  ispan 

i  :  D^T  D5t<3  n^-j^i  rtDltr-pa  won  rnirvS 
nnS    iDnr    nWn       s  w 


np  inn 
;  n^nj  J?DUI  :  rvri  nisx  tr^'  in?^  rap  10^'  n^ 


G  :vsri5  pa  n^  pn^i  v 

7  Snj  D^Sp^'  niNO"^'  in^p 

sSjoc"  rir)nj;p-S5\*  N^p-n  ioj?n.  svjp^  ^H  njyn  N^I 

»nty*7£)n  »DJN  N*iSn  nnnS^  n'^  WOT  n^S  onS  nQN-n 

•    :     •     :    -  T  -:  T   T    :    •         |        -:~  T    T  v   T 

9  snhrh  SDVDX  :  'Stt  inn  ^\v  D?S-n3  S^^'S  DHDJ;  Dpxi 


11  yop'n  *^D  nor      tr^    -wri  n;n  DI*O 


n^p  njn  ^5^  ^^"13  Till  : 
ipr  SiN%tr  ^3  tr'vm  D^n  rrjb 
'-nnx  oSn  6D^'n;in  ^"!"^3  f 
N^  nonSsa  iD^n  ntr'N  v»  nt 


230  (JlIRESTOMATIIY. 

Kin  Tin1  :  not?' 


:DV  D'tfriN  D-TJTL  9:riyrn  og'n  *rw?$n  Btyi  :8DnSle 

17 


5fn-n^  tr'^n  ^[533  in  05^  :a^e 


ip?  rji  :nonss  13unrn 
V>];JD  D'sn-av  -in 


^  n^ij;  DOJH  tr\v  mni  DDJ? 
nxn  on?  -)T         ' 


nn  n 

''*  tr>Nn  rvr 


n.   s     x  njn  1513  DJJH 
N'n-Sj*  11313  hnxi  VPTN 


I  jNirr  17im  Nin  nny  w^j?  no  in  ID^I  ;nn^ 

T        :      TT 


nrn  1515 


ClIKESTOMATJIY. 


32  ^ra;  2°  vty  DIN- 


35  inri 

22 


37 


1T 


231 


ian  : 


roni  nnK  -#r>3  isj?  Dnnp  n-^n 
34  v?^^  ?p!3j;  n^n  nj;.^  ^^^  n 


nj?rr 


HDH 

:D»rr  D^ri     nbnj;?  t]iin  ^3  Dr 
TOI  nrr 


rrrrr 

^nj  ynip  fnri  IHP  nn-n^ 
'?  n  ^  SJ;D  lain-nj*  nn  Sji 


1T 


onk  0 


Thorn 
nn 


nin? 
njr 


232  CHRESTOMATHY. 

rui  nprten  nirrS  ^  niir  Mjw'iiT  rurai  r 
^S  Dnp-n  rj^i  »p#bgi?  Djr27*?  irm  :irv3  03 


")npn  TH  49 
Sj*  i 
n  »pjm  -'irnnK  v^j;       invo?  ^n  rjtpni 


nrm 

TPT 


l§  85,  4.  2§  83,  10.  3§  52,  Note  II.  4tf*y  fat. 
ceptionally  WV  cf.  v.  24.  5  the  oM  men  ;  some  read 
D^P^ID  to  advance  in  days,  years.  6  §  91,  3.  7  §  105,  7.1  8  §  85^ 
4.  9  §  105,  6,  7.  10  and  thou  shalt  take  a  phdgc  in  return  from 
them,  i.e.  a  token  of  their  happiness.  (Fucrst.  Lex.)  Use.  V^jn 
cf.  Gen.  29,  1.  12  §  96,  7.  IS  fr.  #n.  «  -|  was  in  this  word 
doubly  pronounced.  15  —  ^*W}^  »  16  §  22,  Note.  17  an  en 
quiry.  18  §  76,  2,  c,  19  D1?  ^  to  lose  heart,  courage.  20  y^j? 
refers  either  to  Goliath,  or  to  D1K,  cf.  Ps.  42  7.  142  '  4? 
21  §  76,  4.  Note  or  HK  =  with,  §  75,  5.  22  HTO,  Hi. 
§  53,  7.  23  §  117.  .  24  §  83,  7.  25  rcguiar  ^.^  "  26  for 

27  §    114,    d.      28  §   9lf    2.      29  §    70,    2,    d. 


XI.     Solomo's  Wisdom.     (1.  Kings  3,  5—28.) 

?<  nx-n 


5 
np       ' 


p 


Gil  BESTOM  AT1I Y .  23) 

pi  np#3  ^*b  rjSn  ig%3  Si-n  npo  ^ks 
!  njn  Sn|rr  nptin-n^  i^nptrni  rjoj; 
nx  ^rtS^  rrjn?  nngi:  :n-tn  01*3  IN*D 
'bp 1  nj;^  ^NI  *3^  in  nnn  T 
?$  nvDg  010? 


:n-?n 
:nrn 


Sxtr' 


}  HTD 

:          •.*•  T 

X  ^^  nS 

v  v    f    : 

^  run  ^5*13 


n-in  : 


^'K  pan  0511 


rjS  *nn^ 


n'        _ 

nir  D^ 

nn^rn  nNn    N  'i^  »? 

»nn 


:rv:n 


npni 
nn 


npr?  ^331  *nrr  ^ 


23 


nn 


n^n 

30 


234  CHRESTOMATHY. 

>3  xb  rnpfc  nxn  nsr?  ^31  Tin  >^r8nj  rnpK 
rnrn  «CQ$3vr^  inp  TJ^H  n^i  J'TTPT  <yy\  nan24 


n*i 


nxri  niypp     nom  *nn 

ng^i  rj^n  jj;-n  :lon' 
^p^_  :  I^N*  x^n  inrvop  K^  non1!  28 


l  Inexperienced.  2  ^31  NV^  to  go  out  and  in,  denotes  me 
taphorically  the  actions  and  conduct  of  a  man.  (Fuerst  Lex.) 
«  §  100,  III.  a)  .4  §  101,  II.  5).  5  §  88,  11,  (c).  6  >~  para- 
gogic  —  rfttf  .  7  An  expression  of  humility  for  I.  8  §  94,  2. 
9  In  pause..  10  §  34,  6. 

XII.     The  happiness  of  the  godly,  the  misery  of  the 
wicked  (Ps.   1.) 


nin»  ming  DN  ^3  J'  ^   D^  ^31 

01^  nn» 


:r?n  2J 


p-iK  133-0$  ^  DT^n 

*      •      t  '  T     ;  T 


1  ^J^'N  happiness;   only    in    plur.    construct  in  the%haracter  of 
an  interjection  :  0  the  happiness  of  the  man  !  2  §  44,  5. 

XIII.     The  character  of  a  godly  man.     (Ps.   15.) 


ClIRRSTOMATirY.  285 

-4L 


TTi  njn 


l  §  83,  '11,  2  §  107,  4.  8  Accusative,  §  85,  4.  c)  and  §  75,  2, 
Note.  4  '7  7^  Vp  to  bear  slander  upon  his  tongue,  i.  e.  to  slan 
der.  5  The  subject  of  the  clause.  6  Inf.  fr.  yy~\  ,  supply  1^  to 
do  evil  to  himself,  i.  e.  to  his  own  hurt,  cf.  3  Mos.  5,  4.: 


XIV.  Confidence  in  God's  grace.     (Ps.   23.) 

^tWl.niK33  :"iDru?  N^  y^  nin»  in 
3  ;  iEC''  j;  ?       ^n1  Dl^    '$3  :  ^Snr   niip 


nm  nio  rN*  :3nn 


1  To  lead  back,  refresh  (the  soul).  2  Shadow  of  death  =  the 
thickest  darkness,  cf.  §  91,  c).  3  Abundance;  in  poetry  often  an 
abstract  noun  takes  the  place  of  an  adjective,  =  my  cup  is  abun 
dant,  overflowing.  4  =  ^3^>V  as  1"]  (Jud.  19,  11.)  for  -\y  . 


.    XV.     God's  excellency  and  providence.     (Ps.  113.) 

rnrv  DC?'  >n!  :  np^  D^'ns  iS^n  nin»  HDJ;  i^^n  n*  iSSn 
j?  trp^mjpp  tD^ijnjf!  nnj;p  rjnnp 
own  ^.  mTn^:  DnrS?"^  D-J  :niir 


T  ") 


2  3  0  C II R  ESTOMA  Til  V , 


1  §  106,  9  and  page  17  Note  1.  2  Inf.  with  paragogic  * —  in 
poetry  not  unfrequent.  3  Barreness  was  considered  among  the  He 
brews  a  great  .ignominy,  cf.  1.  Sam/  c.  1.  4  Accusative,  answer 
ing  the  question  where  ?  §  85,  4.  or  apposition  to  3  =  as  a.  5  §  83,  10. 


XVI.     Israels'  exodus  from  Egypt.     (Ps.  114.) 

iiT  nrvn  :ryb  D#Q  ipj?!_JV3  DVT>'<?P  Sane>» 
:  linx"?  DD>  prrn  Din  nan  DTT  :  2  vn  WOD  ^flfift  iBnp?  3 

T    :  .(..   ...  -  T-         TT        T-  T  .._  ..    T  .    .  :)T: 


jo  npnp  onnri  :  iirm?  son  ptTD  e 


T      V     t> 


vn  *3|3rrn  :pj£  rjisf  ^.P  p.^     n  JIIN*     T 


1  §  57,  Note.     2  The  plural  poetically,  §  82,  5.   3  Of.  Exodus  19, 
18,  4  Cf.  Exocl  17,  6.     5  §  59  Note  II. 


XVII.     Feelings  of  an  exile  in  captivity.     (Ps.  137.) 

>  SM  ninn 

Sn  J  nrnro 


•T    T 


6ov  n^  DHN*  ^n   nin^  n^r  :>nrofe>  5^ 


1  Refers  to  Babel,     2  Of  the  song  =  one  of  the  songs.     3  Let  my 
right  forget   .....   to    do    its    duty,    or    play    on    an    instrument 


ClIRESTOMATTIY.  287 

(Kimchi)  4  poetically  =  T]"l3tN •  5  The  summit  =  the  highest 
joy.  6  The  day  of  downfall,  misfortune.  7  Inf.  Pi ;  to  lay  bare 
the  ground  TJD'  l-  e-  to  destroy  to  the  ground.  8  In  poetry  very 
common,  either  for  the  city  or  the  inhabitants.  9  Cf.  2  Kings  8, 
12. 

XVIII.     The  preciousness  and  true    character  of  wis 
dom.     (Job  28,  12  —  28.) 

\l&ft$  npft  :nra  Dipp  l\ 

T  :  •          •  -    T  : 

15 :  n^np  np?  ^$&\  xh]  n^fin  iwp  jnr^  » H?J?  1^  n?kS? 


is  non  rci  *ar 


n 


24  ^H'O  :  npipp-njc  j;n^T  4  ^ni  nsni  pnn  3 

2snn*7  nibT:S  :n^n>  DVJ^H-SD  nnn  to 

20  :  niVip  r^rnS  ^ni]  ph  Sp^"?  intr  j?:?  :  n^ps  pn  D:PI  pT 


gnN*^  rn  Dix   10^1  rnnpn-b^  rn^n  nison  n*n  i 

28         -:•!••  TTT          •:  -  T|T-:          -:         T     -v:  T  :    -  :  -  T     T          T 


1   §94,    6    Note.      2   Supply    the    antecedent    JO,      3    §93,  6. 
4  §  93,  Note. 


XIX.  Judah    is    threatened    for    her    ingratitude  and 
rebellion.     (Isa.  1,  1  —  21.) 

1  >p*3  p^'rn  nnin^  rnn  n^  p^-j?  ^n;^  prrj 

2  owm  D'pitf  lyp^'  :  nnin!  ^p  in^prn^  rntj  onv 
s  J;T  pa  ^^3  orn  ^ppi*i)  ^n1?^  D'3?  ^31  n^n: 

n;  xS  b^ntr*  v1?^  DIDN  niopi  inp 


ClIRESTOMATHY. 

p?  DTvns'p  DO?  D'jnp  jnj.  pjj  1-i55  oy_  Nbn  'tt  'i 
i  tn5f^g  mnx  n'u  SNTJ^'.  crnp-n^  way 
)39  :  TT  a#rV?i  3  4r£  0N  vS?  'rnp 
4nrNil?  nntp  ."opi  nn^ni  r^  bn/p  tt-pN 
Rnifl^  ojnj;  npD?v  D^V'IN*  :  fo^  ro;n 
:onr  nD^rirjp  noo^  nnx  D^N  onr 
iiT  Tp  :  nnr^  175  ntr'pp?  n^Sp?  0*5??  n^p?  ji'vvn  9 


v*  rrnn 

•-:-  :        ^r:    "_•*      :      J    ^  ' T~ 

, ^.....  ^.  •  ^ 


N»n  nj;in 


,.         U 

.  VK  15 

D*pn  DjH*  y_ft&  O^N  n^&n  ^Tn-*?  04  ogp 
jnn  ?Wi  o^.  "TJ.3P  oj^S^p  jn  n^pr 
13iDn  oirr  ^5^'  pon  ntp'N  tosi^p 


:v 


nin?  ^ 

l  §  65,  5.  2  Upon  what  ?  3  Supply  JTJ1  *  with  following  *?  to 
become,  §  84,  1  :  to  become  sick.  4  ^  (Kal  in  the  form  -jf) 
5  =  nl^^n^  .  6  05  =  Ofi^  before  me.  7  Apposition  to  nk\f  . 
8  Cf.  2  Kings;  4,  23.  9  Supply  f)N^  to  bear.  10  On  the  Ka- 
mets  of  ^  see  §18,  II.  3»  11  Inf.  const,  of  Xt^lmore  frequently 
nNt^  and  nNg>,  12  =  05^.5  inf.  Pi.,  Tsere  "becoming  Chirek. 

13  For  iDrnn  §  39,  3.  u  Vio"5,  5.   is  suPPiy  ^n.  i6 

here  reciprocal  §  26,   1.      17  §  85.  5. 


CHRESTOMATIIY.  239 

XX.     Description  of  the   Messianic   time.     (Isa.    11. 
1-10. 

2  fin  vSjf  nmi  :rri$>  wn&'    T     >£»   u   in  « 


i  njn  nn  rrvajn  nv#.  nn  mgi  ,10317  nn  niir 
^*  vry.  njODS'tfS'i  nirv  11x73  Mnnrn  :nirp 
n»?iiTj  D^I  pnyg  05^1  :  ri^v 
vs  DDtri  px- 

.•••:)      •:  •: 

n^D^ni:  VI^D  nitt?  pnj 

:  05  ^i  jfj  ^31  wi  ^npi  1^31  S^i  ^7.  n  JJ-DJ;  np 

mi 


:  TOD  inmp  nn?n)  ^'17?  D^IJ  vv  DV^J;  D    iby  n^v  *^> 

1  His  delight,  fT^H  with  ^  to  smell  with  pleasure,  hence  gene 
rally  to  enjoy,  delight  in.  2  Pilpel  of  J?J^"»  3  §  76,  2.  c 
4  Inf.  of  yT  §  30,  4,  hence  with  following  fUV  ,  5  HDD  com 
monly  with  ^j;  ,  here  with  ^  ,  6  §  86,  3  b. 

XXI.     Jeremiah's  letter  to  the  captives  in  Babylon. 
(Jcr.  29,  4  —  14.) 

^utr^  ^xn^  Tt^x  niksov  nin?  I^N*  riD 
pxi  nun  vips'j  ^^'i  o^n?  ^3  :n^33  pS^'n^  ^n^ 
^j  o?^1?  inpi  ni^  0^3 


\M3p  Dp  IN^-N*  xn^  ^ri^  nirav  nin»  -JDN  H 


240  CHKESTOMATIIY. 

?B>3  03*?  D'N9J  Oil 

na^D  *zh  ^  nin>  IDN  rl^D  jninMo 

T      :  -    T  T 

i30?<  3^177  niton  H^Y^  D3*fe  *rioprji  03^^ 


>3N  n^s  raparrn^  ^T     N  »?  :njn  Dip^n-kst 
o?S  nnS  njnS  xh\  DiW  ntit^no  nin»:  D^  oyfgj  n^'n 


:npn) 


*  Dne>p3i  : 

SffflaoVi4 


i  §  49,  4,  Note.     2  To  be  found    by   one   i.   c.   to  show  himself 
inclined  toward  one.     (Fuerst  Lex.) 


XXII.     The  new  convcnant.     (Jer,  31,  31—84.) 

^  o*N3  D<PT>  nin  3l 
S  :  nann  nn? 


SixS  DnS  ^n 


o  ^3  ninrn$ 
^  D^1?  nboks* 

J  §  96,  2.     2  1  although,  §  118.    3  For  nSN  .  4  §  9^,  4 


ClIRESTOMATHY.  241 

XXIII.     Resurrection  of  Israel  by  the  reviving  Spirit 
of  God.     (Ezek  37,  1  —  14.) 

rnrr  rrr    UNW  nirr-T       nrvn 


rum  rrnp  M 
3D-TN-J3  'Stf  iptf]  :IN 


n^n  n^\*n  niovj^S  nin?  ^'i 

wSyiii  DHU  03^  ^n:i  :DJ-)»rn  nn  035-^39 


ip'!  nSyT  it^ni  DHU  djg 
9  nnrjiNt)  D>x-|3  N33n  nnrrS^  ND^n  ^ 
?1  2nnn  »N3  ninn  ^v  rnrr   'i 


11  ipNn  :iNp  INP  n|   ^n  oriT.  npjn  vm  nnn 


"nk\*  nra  ^gf  n^n  nin;: 
DSJTO  W3ni:  Mpy  o 
13  »ni?;r?i  D^nnn-n  »nn     nirv  »j«-» 


i  For  n-JSnpn,    2  §  80,  5.      3  gc.  H1H\    4  §  77,    3.     5  Dat. 
Commod.  $j  ')  we  are  so    entirely   cut   of.    (Fucrst  Lex.)     6  Ap 

position  to  Dipnx  « 

31 


VOCABULARY  I. 

NOTE.     The  numbers  refer  to  the  exercises.     A  num 
ber  with  preceding  p.  indicates  the  number  of  the  page. 


3X  38,  35  J"l*p"TJ$  96,  32  fX  86,  7  J-pX  38,  16 

*T3tf  31,  8  p£  58,  14  <7JX  p-   86,  6  ;>V»X  34,  21 

66,  12      ty-jX  42,  18  JfX  Hi.  98,  17  fi^X  120,  1 

68,  11         *HK  60,  25  JfX  f-  38,  11  p^X  86,  16 

38,  23         3J1N  52,  1  irhfX  P-  HI  Ptf  31,  18 

•""      T  "*  1   V  I   *    *" 

Pi.  Hit.  76, 1  pX3  44,  1 


54,  28 
X  56,  31        2JTJX  \  fix  21,  7  f-j£*X  98,  28 


p.  109         HHK  42,  17  HHN  80,  2  J^>X  24,  6 

T   -:  T    v 

104,  36       ^jnjx  40,  40  *TJffX  82,  22  ?1^>X  P-  H2 

J5kX  50,  9.98,27  -jx  88,  10  H1HK  29,  17  rjx   HO,  13, 

p.  134         *-jx  38,  22  ttlK  36,  5  120,    14 

~      T 

26,  7        ^vjx  21,  2  S^h^HN*  40,  48  ^^N  P-  HI.  HI 

•    -:  T   :    - 

p.  n.      ^X  62,  15  ^f-fiV  Pi-  38,  30  *lpX  ib- 

40,  48  ^!|X  90,  39  *]|-|X  66'  27  W^?3N  62,  46 

40,  11           QJp'iX  p.  196  «npX  62,  24  ^pX  40,  16 

p.  68,  6      j-j^X  44,  38  HHX  48,  23  ^JX  27,  25 

*  p.  n.          pX  44,   25  fhDK  29,  5  ^JX  I08,  12 

58,  9           ^Jj-JX  90,  8  nnpN   50,   31,  pX  60,  17 

nX  78,  17  fp-JX  P-  125  54,  47  *^X  44,  20 

104,  20      -)yjx  p-  117  jinx  56,  51  ^X21,  9.  102, 19 

31,  17         *VJX  Hi.  100,  30  QftX  90,  15  D'flVK  27,  9 

"    T  •        v: 

HO    ^)1X  23,  4  *XinterJ-  36,  14  ^in^SjSt  98,  14 

23,  22     H1K  c.  p.  163  yx  76,  10  ^X  29,  7 


VOCAEULVRY       I.  243 

100,  8.      ntrK  ?u  4.  HI.    HU.  122,  12 

-       T 

Pi.  96,  9  62,  22  -)1^  21,  6 

62,  29.  Pi.  ttK62,  49.  58,21  JiSp&'N  94,  9  &ft  88,  50 

I        |  :    :     - 

76,  16  f|N  conj.  31,  22    -)gf'tf  Pi.  70,  16.  JD  p.  96 

P-  150         13  ^K  42,  35          74,  14  -yifQ  26,  45 

50> 19       HSK  P-  se,  2    nir>o  n^st  jra  62, 21 

38,  8,  40,  8  n^gJN  54,  3  36,  21  ^fft  34,  12 

N  P-  147         D5N,  ..3  102,  29  *]#N,  ,,,3  52,  2  n£D!J  36,  13 

*.*  :  Y    "*;  ~~  ""  T 

HI.  62, 32  rh^x  118'  n  n^'N  P-  148  n^?  62, 9 

104,  11         D.np.^  29,  29     nnK  P-  86,  6  J^g  38,  36 
50,  26,         Vi  N  beside,by,at.  SlOH^  p.  1 1 1 ,  III  |g  52,  4 

pi.  es,  4       nijrv^p-injnji'i^  p.  125.  nyg  ss,  40 

26, 28     n^iX  106, 16  n^3  m> 12 

v   :  •*  T    •• 

114, 5    n^  P-  195    -KO  f.  P.  171  n^  21, 5 

86,  10       Jto-jK  96,  35       ^  f.  56,  1  HM  90>  22 

27, 6      rm  c.  62,  ss  ^^  so,  6  ^5  P.  190 

84,   31.       nX  26,  30  1J.3  64,  1  S^S?  106,  25 

56,    11  nnN  98>  22        1^5,0^84, 39  QJ^g  p.  n. 

44,  14        T|1X  Hi.  62,  45    ^-53  Hi.  58,  3  -JJ^J  29,  21 

Ni.  62,  30    rp£  58,  20          !|rta  p.  30  ^3  p.  190 

3i,  33       Q^X  94,  1  HDH3  f-  92,  38  n  29,  20 

T  • :  T     ••    ;  J  •• 

52,  30     p£  c.  23,  2       JJJ3  f.  78,  19  HID  90,  1 

96,  12        -HN  36,  17         ^13  27,  20.  88,  J^3  p,  112 

-T  IT:- 

TD5^  P-  1°9        &$  c.  21,  3  40.  Hi.  88,  58  S^90,37.  98, 15 

TDK  P-  no     iTf  K  f.  29, 3    na  88,  i  -)j;_5  PI.  p.  74, 3 

14  nt^'N  p.  159     na  «•  so,  10  ^v?  p- 194 

'  l14          Hi- 88'  48-  ^     62> 44 


244  VOCABULARY    I. 


pv?  78>  2-r>      n^M  P-  169'  4  IDJ  ¥'  4  .  rran  110'  *4 

1p3  c.  p.  164       --  p.  n.  29,  31  nSlDJ  f-  1°°>  *7  "ill  21,  12 

\rr  T          , 

-Ijp  23,  11           pyrfcl  86,  12  ^Q|  56,  5  J-||-n  HO,  23 

wn3  Pi.  56,  19  ^^  21,  11  n  c.  42,  24  ?n  27,  35 

|  -  T                                                           V    -•  I  "  I 

nC'M  P-  H2,  !  rnDJ  U6>  14  !}^H  19.68,17  jn  118,  7 

T    )  T  -                                      ••••-•:  -  T  IT- 

"I?  p.  125             ^  p.  117  315  26.  39  ^  44,  22     . 

80,  4           Sin*  48,  30  n^P-  51,5  H^.  98,  11 

>  39     SiJ  4°'  !•  pi-  my  ^  f-  66,  2G  *h*i  9G'  45 

64,  11          56,  22.  Hi.  60,  32  ^  29,  9  SSl  86,  6 

,  42        S"!H  108^  n  ?H5  an  axe  tlSl  P-  159 
?"'                                                      •   T 

xn^f-  120,20  rnT[|  f.  si.  520  ^  PI.  64,  9  n^  f.  86,  34 

n?  f.  21,  10    -n^l  c.  82,  5  Q^  p.  134  Q^  48,  21 

|34G,  19-29,  1.  -l-?3  108,  15  Jgf'jj  p.  n.  fip^  p.  179 

Pi.  64,  8           U  27,  49  1  fi^  p.  30  II 

f.  p.  134      ^  people  ^^  27,  21  QQ^  86,  13 

f-  27,  3  Su  ^  26  nn^'i  P-  117  HJ;OT  f.  52,  5 

106,  4          W3M  82',  2  fiS^  P-  H7  pfcfQ^  94,  2 

TT                                              IT  T     •      :  I     v      v      - 

3  78,  8           -)U  29,  30  p^  44,  18  fiJH  62,  14 

T      T  |        '      T                                                              ft   - 

p.  109         tt-l  42,  1  ")D1  88,  17.  Pi.  p£H  P.  181,  III 

- 


44,  33  44>  21  34,  14  pp_-|  p.  186,  6 


-  147    J5    P-  1G7'  8  *i;n  34,  2  -ii  21,  12 

;  S^3  P-  125         #y|  42,  11         rj^  Hi.  74,  2 

f-  70-  7      H^  90,  13.  Hi.  ft  36,  4  ^  21,  1 

34,  3               98,  5                  ftft  f.  40,  15      ^^40,36.46,13 

H2,  10        filSjJ  f.  p.  164     9ft  76,  9  f^  Pi.  56,  44. 

T                                      ITT  I-      , 

Pu.  p.  195  3^  94  p.  44,  1 

i  21,  4            S_Sj|  86,.  4.  122,  9  I)4!  P-  n.  Jgf«rj  p.  44,  1 

-  31,  4     DJ  26,  34              ^  70,  6  fi-|  p.  117 


VOCABULARY    1 .  245 

n                T  rnr loe.  ~  coin  21,  17 

San  29, 8       n_3?  27, 8  jnj  44, 23  Sin  Hit.  88, 32 

mn  no,  19    npr  96, 27  jn?  23, 12  Sm  21,  is 

1 23, 27     fin?  104, 7  nit 114>  17  npin  58, 43 

^  49     nnr  20,12  n  pn  94,20.  ...3 

>n  88  6   Hit,  "in?  Ni-  f-  54,  29  ^nNi-P-188'9  26,  31 

-V                                                            -   T  T     T 

60,  24                    Hi.  58,  30  ^fl  23,  l4-  j1?(l  56,  33 

23,  26         nn?  58,  31  108,  31  nWl  23,  32 

!9          S^l?  84'  I8  p3ll  H2'  34  p?n  50,  25.  Pi. 

vjn  42,  2              rV?  116,  4  ign  Hit.  62,  37  56,  23.  Hit.  p.  70, 4 

jin  56, 10       if  108, 3  ign  52, 17  p?n  §.  109,  N. 

n»n  26,  38           -\y  Hi.  34.  25  {1*131}  21,  15  K^n  80?  39- 

S^n  21,  is     -qt  27,  i  tygn  8°» 35  Hi- ib- 40 

J^n  98,  29            fhD?  104,  5  ^fl  86,  23  X&n  56,  16 

f  46,  7          {J^  p.  125  rjjin  106,  22  nBfl  f-  P-  164 

26,  4,           -)pr  Pi-  56,  56  ^n  86,  22  ^  23,  13 

Hit.   122,  2        ^t  P-  131  "Un  P-  I69,  b  D^PI  ib-  24 

^n  P"-  26, 5i.  pyj  48, 29  nnn  p- 102,  N.  i  nTn  f-  ib- 

Hit.  60,  i      npj;?  90, 17  nnn  23,  si  so 

in  86,  20         nfi?  f-  62,  36  ^"in  62,  33  n*n  to  live-  Pi- 

T                                                                V  V  -  T  T  T 

in  adv.  40,  27   Iffi  64,  5  pin  98,  2  to  make  to  live 

T    •  •                                                          I  }  *"  T  I 

n^n  34> 8       ip?  29, 26  *nn  n2, 14  S^n  76, 2 

Tjgn  62, 2      wip?  104,  i  Bnn pi-  so,  12  S^nn^94, 28 

in  29, 28       npr  114, 8  ^in  23,  ie  ?i^n  p-  n2 

|      |    -T  T   T 

,n  72,  17          It  60,  26  £Hn  21,  16  nSn  Pi-  90,  14 

•  T  V  T     T 


240 


VOCABULARY     I. 


D?n  40,  9.  Hit. 

60.  8.  Pu.  106,  11 
Djjfl  23,  10 

np?n  f-  34,  10 

*7n  58,  2 

21,  19 

23,  18 
P-  170,  d. 

?  104,  27 
p-  so,  2 
23,  20 
p-  ^  s 

Pi-  80,  8. 

Hi.  86.  43. 

Sn  96,  37 
Hi.  64,  21 
Pi.  74,  6. 

Ni.  62,  13 

n  us,  5.  Hi. 

-     T 

108,  21 

6°'  7 

78,  21 

D      44,  40 
DP?  34,  21 

npn  p-  73,  7 

non  62.  47 

nan  110'  12 
27,  47 


30,  25 

P-  96,  9.  N. 
it.  p.  46,  6 

78,  28 

50,  2 

ion  P-  171 

T     " 

-),pn  21,  20. 

120,  22 

jn  96,  16 
P.  102,  N. 
p.  n. 
j  f-  94,  is 

38,  27 
56,  30 
40,  33 
31,  15 
Pi.  70,  17 
adj.  88,  2 

••     T 

nan  f-  no,  6 

T     \ 

|>gn  36,  7.  52,  21 

jn  96,  25 

82,  i 

112,  13 
64,  7 

p-  170 

23,  15 

ioe.  17 

80,  28 


.  54,  32  nn  p.  175,  G 

92,  16  JTJin  96,  32 

p.  164,  1         fn  110>  5 


nprn  f- 


i    nnn  86,  47. 

86,  38  B 

npn  02,  23     n^to  P-  103,  7 

I  ~  T  T     ~ 

HO,  26       ^tO  48,  10 

*'•  26,  42      tn£  Ho.  58,  15 

~     T 

"4,  n  nj;?to  f-  P-  145 
-  24,  3  ^niD  8°'  1° 

T 

p-  102,  N.  -HD  pi-  74  s 
44^  26.    y^  26,  46 

94,  24  rOlft  f-  50,  5. 

P-  109,  3       54,  24 

120,  8     ^Q  36,  11.  62,  10 
p.  174          ^1D  P-  HO,  36 
44,  41         f|-|^  96,  11 
Hi.  62,  16    ft'ft  94,  25 

98,  7      So  21,  21 

- 

88,  11        H^D  P-  117 

nnn  p-  73,  s    NVJ^D  p-  109,  3  a 
62,  25     ptp  54,  12 

^'n  Ni.  62,  17  Qj;jj  42,  7 
Pi.  56,  37          QlgJ  54,  30. 

n^'n  90,  24 

i.p.  169,3^  Hi.  84,  10 

23,,  3      ^  p.  28,  4 
nc*n  p-  n?         4o;  35 


VOCABULARY    I.  247 

. 

$y  Hi.  p.  178,5  1(T  106,  '24.         ^W  P-  111,1V  t^T   84,  17.  Ni. 

pur:)*  23,  8         "HIT  54*  46         pH^  ib-  84,  19.  Hi.  94,  11 

I      -    :•  . 

yy  84,  30.  Hi.    TPP  29,  13         y^  Hi.  84,  35  7tf*^?!  26,  6 

ib.  41  SlT  Pi-  P.  194     pVJ.  P-  91'  X  '^n^V  P-  112 

-fr  p,  60.,  4         3££  84,  12  n>>>  34,  23  ty,  -#>  38,  34 

-V  f.  21,  22          p  38,  31  ^  112>  9  Dg^84,5.  27,32. 

HT  Hi.  92,  9.     Sb>  40>  37  ^\  Ho>  84>  2G        Hi  84'  40 

31,  32         -iV  29,  19       nnp!  94>  3°  nyw\  26,  17 

WT  34,  5  TlS>  P-  92^  7         Dip*  P-  1U'  1V  ^^  1°4,  25 

*^     -T  '  I  -  T  I    :  '    T 

PV  abbreviated       S^>  p.  92  t*n>  p.  92  ?^>  84,  38 

T  f-  T  I    |-T 

from  H1iT         7F     P-  109>  3  a  IPJ  Hl'  84'  46  yW\  HL  29'  22 

D.T  58,  44  tOlp^.P-  IIMV.^JT  P'  173,  3  j;^>  68,  8 

n^in*  21,  23      D*  26,  50  XT  68,  3  ^^  P-  ^ 

T        :  T  "T 

HiJT  26,  16         po*  f.  76,  6         XT  adj.  34,  28  ^^>  31,  16 

" 


T     T 


rmirr  )        nr  Hi.  92,  14  HXT  84,  3      om^  so,  s 

|TT       =(48,  5  .    T    : 

jn:v  ^        pr  P-  92        7j;?T  21,  29    pry  94,  10. 


p.  n.             FID*  Hi.  84,  15  -p*  42,  23  Hi.  ^JO  26,  36. 

|   -  T  -T  ~    T 

DV  21.  24            -)D»    P-  179  96,  7  Hi  80,  34 

-  T 

Q^P>  p.  148          ny  84,  29  n*V  P-  H3  TDD  56,  Ni.  8. 

TV  72,  4                fiW  52,  33  HT  Hi.  92,  4  Pi.  9  Hit.  60,  27 

I  TT                                                                     I      "T  TT 

f.  p.  117       pj;»  40,  47  D'WVT  P-  n-  "IDD  acJ-  26,  8 

116,  3          ^pj;*  48,  32  HT  86,  14  HDD  102,  30 

48, 19      rny>  43,  n  inn*  21, 25  -1^3  27, 43 

98,  32          *£»inp.  ^40,19  y*\>  p.  Ill,  IV  ODD  Pi-  56»  28 

•  T:  •  T  ~  T 

54,  18         rw  34,  21  WT  f-  27,  16  -)DD  Hi.  60,  34 

v  v  T      • : 

^^  26, 19.  27, 26  *ry  p.  131  H3  86'  27 

'  15  W  Ho,  84,  20  |TV  p.  161,  3  ] 


248  VOCABULARY    I. 

96'  21    *vtop  p-  190>  7  fjro  p.  131  54,  13 

23,  21         Jjyj  p.  113          JVjfp  p.  116  I?1?  48,  36 
H4,  19          *JJ£3  n.  Gent.     nrO  Ho.  86,49.  HpS  46,  1.  Pi. 

|!)3  88.  Ni.  19  Pi.  C^3  f.  72,  16                    ^  74,  4 

ib.  24.  Hi.il>.  21  ND3  27,  34         ^,  ^  26,  1  noS»  nftS68, 

T      T  T    T 

Ho.  ib.  54          HD3  Pi-  92,  27   ft^S  48,  27  -f^  64,  2 

*#!|3  62,  3           ^D5  26,  13         DtfS  112,  21  ^  64,  4 

3D  78>  H            So?  48>  35          S|?.26»  37  *|»§^  102,  23 

TO  34,  18            Sp?  60,  35          33^  31,  19  ^jpS  27,  5 

i-  64,  17   Cp")  26,  11.         p^  p.  n.  •>>  56,  20 

«T  '  ", 

D  Pi.  64,  23      34,  11                rp  Hit.  60,  21  ftf}1)  p.  90,  5 

T                                                                                                                                  I  ~     T  |-    T 

13  40,28.  40,  41  DJJ3  88,  39          n^1?  f.  p.  117  ^S  42,  25 

T  ••    :  |  -  T 

94               fj3  f.  42,  31         p^  p.  163,  3  p^  c.  50,  11 

2  104,  34        t|£)3  104,  2          ^S  Hi.  68,  6  f^  Hi.  58,  8. 
36,  30          *-|£2  Pu.  56,  54  ^  p.  192 

~     T  'J 


27,  12       on^3  120,  15  rn   74,  12  -j^p  26,  9 

H6,  8          n^D  31,  12          ^  p.  171,  2  HNO  P-  150 

78'  12   D"]3  31^  1  nS  84,  13  DTJXtt  ib. 

P.  170         rro  48,  14.  so,  rviS  us,  3  npixp  p.  179,  i 

'S?  P-  167,  118,8      20  Ni.  76,  37    K^S^S^P'192  ^INO  P-  162 

nvS   114,  i    nn?n"i-)  48,14  p^  m.  se,  28  o^rxD  96,  47 

58,  25         S^'3  P-  110?  36  pS  Pi.  108,  32  ^Ntt  27,  27 

s  40'  19    S^'s  40,  22.  Hi.  nirS  f-  ss  17  ?xo  H.  64,  15 

-     T  T  I    '•      T 

p.  47  58,  4  Df-^  c.  42,  22  DNO  42,  19 

Hi.  100,  7  3H3  50,  13         Vph  92,  15  3^^    P.  Ill,  l 

~T  |-  T  ~:  - 

76,  21    sro  P-  109  s  a  nS>S  24,  i  -JTOJD  p.  lee,  s 

J3  29,  6.  27,  41  DHp  90.  7  J^>7  p.  170,  3  flp?/?  36,  23 

J3  ^  66,  8          njTO  48,  20       -gS  10,  30.  1V39  100>  27 


VOCABULARY     1. 
J10  108,  5  rm  26,  43          -qa  72,  3  rjpD  42>  3 

n|yp  f.  p-  141  rap  p-  in,  i  n5£opp.65,N.  op/p  p.  95,  N 
27,  si    Sip  P-  173,  3    ##50  p-  m,  2  -rspo  l02^  l3 


26,  47 

P-  182,  I 

Sino  102,  14       104,  3 


29,  23 


122,  19 

f-  56,  14 


86,  32 
44,  4 

8o,  5 
jnp  ss,  24 

82,  24 

>  no  36>  9  njno  98»  34 
noinpf-p-  173,3  nppp  31,  24 
r?Vno  112,  35  Diono  46,  is 

:   - 

HDiDH/P  f-  P-  141  niDPTO  H2,  37   '070  Pi-to  deliver,  Jj;g 
-)HP  100,  5          t»np  80,  36 

nino  5°»  33    ^no  98,  33 

T  ••    :  T   T 

p.  n.      ornno  p-  33,  N  rjp  24,  9 
96,  32  nntr'     f-  4-°>  5  nDS   f.  p- 


112,  17 

P-  141 

.  39 
f.  40,  si 

-  88,55 


-jCj)DO  98,  21 

T    :    • 

?«•  94,  38 

P.  129 
102,  21 

42,  10 


Ni.  to  escape 

HI.  58,  7 


f-  90,  41 

GO,  22 

"^72,  5 

88,  27 

i°°,  21 
26>  48 


40,  2 

nj;iio  P-  n4  rj^'rjp  p.  125   rro^p  f-  96,  se  *\&yg  P.  125 
i.  ss,  33  nnnp  us,  22  nipSp  p-  m,  3  n|?§o  f-  HG,  23 
70,  14     ntso  42,  9      o^npSo  p-  117  ^30  88 

V    -  --  |T  :     v  ••  :    • 

40,  40.  nt^p  f-  86,  37  n^pf-nG,  19  nnipp  p.  in,  3 

120,  3  DJftOO  P-  I77,  3  nStrb 

T  T      : 


O  P-  !G3,  8 
HO.  9 
112,  G 
P-  175,  6 

88,  15 

70,   15.  Hi. 


.  p.  191,3      25 
24,  8 
23,  5 
p.  37,  4 


O  f-  102,  *>£  68,  16 

:   v  | 

X^O  80,  19 

T  T 

P-  H7      JT2TO  f-  78,  27 

T   - 

31,  9          MI^PH  JP!  120,  6 
f.  58,  24  36,  6 


ty'o  114,  4  ^30  GG,  i        niyo  26  21 


104,  32 


98,  8 


p- 


94,  21 


250  VOCABULARY     I. 


DHVP  f-  P-  n-     *]£'0  48,  18.  I'u.  jTd:i  122,   14  |-|J  34,  21 

p.  112  56,  13  ft^  Hi.  38,  15  Sptf  Hi.  p.  162,  6 

-    T  ~   t 

c.  23,  7     %yyft   102,   11     X'23  26,  3  SpM    98,    river, 

•t    :  •  T  -  - 

p.  117          f3^9  40,  46       "J^NytDSJ  98, 4      94,  34 

26,  10     ,  ^&ft  31,  30.  Hi.  ^53  108,  9  J-jSpn  96,  22 

120,  13         70,  20  ^  102,  26  Qrt}  Pi-  H4,  10 

3  84,  49. 96,  44  ^£  104,  15       H^J  56,  52  Hit.  64,  16 

gp9  98,  23      il^'9  P-  HI,  3  yi}  Hi.  82,  20  pnj  82  7 

88,  43  ^EtT'9  H2,  31     *jjg  Hi.  92,  39  n^'PO  100>  29 

p.  125       rn/JJ^'/p  f.  116,  -j;g  •»«»I7  88,  D7nt£TT3  96,  10 

58,  37  18  20  H^  27,'  15.  Hi. 

T    T 

96,  is     nns&'Df-p-i4iruJ  ios,  2        92,  is 

p.  141  05^'p  48,  13      *|»^  p.  109  j;^  38,  10 

f.  64,-  26  npt^D  P-  166,  2  M}  Pi.  p.  190,  7  fl^JJ  p.  169 

3,  23          n*!^'9  76,  29      j;^  104,  23  ^^J  82,  13 

p.  Ill,  1  f|9  46,  3  y^j  p.  173,  3  tfto}  31,  5 

104,  26.   ^np  27,  46          fjjj  Ni.  86,  21  p*j  p.  113 

106,  6  P^P  27'  29        ^3  82'  33  ^?^  Hi'  92'  25 

Hi.  86,  46   ^HD  44,  9  -J"U  40,  7.  104,  Hllbj  P-  1«4,  1 

-    T  -  T  T        : 

52,  25         nSrO f-  P- 108, 1       30  ^p}  Hit.  60,  23 

102,  10    pjnp  52,  22          rnj  82,  37  *)^J  76,  12 

31,  7  *nj  82,  14  1*)3}  70,  11 

J  -  T  •  :   T 

98,  1      JO  48,  2  -)pU  24,  7  nSoj  40,  10 

T  T  T  T   T    ; 

78,  23     ntiO  27,  42         p[^  P-  175,  5  J)DJ  Ho.  82,  21 

T  V  T  -  T 

26,  5          Q^  29,  24  f-j!fl  p.  99,  10  HD^  Pi-  P- 177,  N 

66,  2          jp^  76,  25         Qft  100,  13.  Hi.  rr»pj  p.  109 

52,  18    V^  82,  8  120,  2  J^p^  27,  30 

10-1,  24      fOJ  31,  11  ^ij  50,  8  nnjj  84,  83 


VOCABULARY  I.  251 

4,  42  tf*{£M  p.  173,  U  nSSb  f-  5o>  24  52,  28  3  58,  42 

82,  30  Q>£*3  50,  17  J^D  106^  15  TJ?1DSlJ*104,33 

i  86,  44  T[CO  82,  6  ftSp  Pi.  56,  48  -fjf  78,  1 

42,  30  S^  82,  29  *VJD  52>  29«  Ni.  J-f-fj;  P-  169,  b. 

36, 16. 44,  no£^  90' 27  54> 41  rn#  f-  iu,  24 

29  p£»j  82, 34  njp  P-  60,  5  nj*. 114> 12 

84,  9  n^  94,  35  H#D  70,  4  "ny  27,  24 

53  31,  14  2713  110,  16  tip  P-  189>  2  *j?|y  Hi.  108,  33 

33  34,  22  ?n3  38,  38.  100,  *t^p  42,   13  -fty  26,  4.  34, 

£}  Ni.  p.  62,  6       26  m*£)D  ^'  ^  1^-  46,   12 

>£J  c.  54,  15.                   D  ^§D  44,  5.  Pi.  Sty*  44,  7 

82,  11.  112,  25  X2D  84>   17  92,  41  H^IJ*  f-  40,  21 

1,  28  :nD  86,  35  -)i]p  52,  9  n^lj?  f-  96,  26 

;^  p.  109  j|?)D  Ni.  86  48  JHD  100^  l2  50'  G.   120,  21 

^  Hi.  110,  15.  TJO  90,  11.  106,  QnpPi.p.  184,6  pj^  56,  55 

Ni.  54,  35              8,  29  ^HD  Ni-  54,  38.  ft\y  104,  28 

50,  10  DID   27>  45  Hit.  60,  18  tr\y  24,  4 

60,  14  Hi31D  f-  C8'  18  y  Y^\y  ^4,  21 

82,  12.  Ni.  niD  34,  29.  Hi.  ^  c.  90,  5  -]y  Pi.  56,  46 

74,  16                     88,  38  -f^J*  92,  44  -yg;  88,  13 

ib.  iyB  p.  113  13^  42,  36  fT};!!?  P-  112'  1 

.|x,j  ^.,  32.  Pi.  HDD  120>  19  1DJ*  50»  32-  62,  ty  27,  28 

I    -  T                                                                     T      ';  ~      T 

96,  6  S^D  78,  22  41  fj;  31,  25 

ij  26, 20  ntop  94, 18  HDj*  P-  112  yy  ®*> 27 

44,  2  nSo  Pu-  90,  6  njJ/J  78'  26  HTJ7  91,  9 

11.  Pi.  58,  38  nSp  29,  10  iy  26,  25 ^  *]$  52,  8 

T      ~  ~  T  "      T 


252  VOCABULARY     I. 


62,  26            70y  38,  41  y^y  adj,  80,  24  y$Q  96,  17 

27,  13         ^ftj;  5G>  40  !ny  102,  9  E0£  Ni-  54,  7 

p.  169,  b     p£j;  40,  4  ^y  c.  23,  6  Q1H£)  p.  113 

72,  9.  Pi.     ppy  86,  15  D'3*)]?  120>  4  HB  46.  14 

70,  18               •  *}fty  a  measure  yiy  94,  33  >£^  78,  24 

f.  80,  32  ^y  Hit  60,  16  rn*)J£  f-  114*  13  HD  46,  10 

f.  38,  14         J-gj;  90,  18.  Pi.  jnjf  p.  160,  d  H3  54,  17 

23,  19                 120,  17  Q'fty  p.  129  ^H?)  48,  37 

f.  34,  1          J-fJjj;  56,  26  Q?ny  62,  39  J^£)  108,  7 

92,  12             vjj;  108,  28  Q»-m  p.  148  nSi)  58,  11 

•      T                                                                         •     T  -   V 

27,33.50,  23  ^y  ib.  29,  in  p.  *?r\y  p.  173,  3  tf}£  Pi.  68,  14 

27,  37              ^y  56,  32  ^y  p.  131  p^£j  114,  22 

"     T  V  '.* 

r  94,  5           JJJJ  23,  28  jjnj;  70,  5  ^fc^f  86,  19 

114,  3    •        &yy  Ni.  62,  42  ^j;  23,  9  J£)  54,  33 

"    T                                                           V     "  I    V 

)  56,  39         W£#  P-  47,  N  H^  3G.  8  H^3  90,  42 

114,  6         ^rm  29,  10  SkVnSW  96,  1  Q^£3  48,  28 

T      T                                                                                    T         "I  '    T 

Elit.  p.70,4  rn^y  p.  113  }&y  p.  192,  2  ^"Sj^  80,  16 

38,  7            W  50,  21  *V&y  23,  17  pfDiD  12°;  5 

f.  21,  27    ygy  Hit.  60,30  f^n^j;  the  tenth  Hpg  90,  19 

62,  11           fli^J?  Go>  33  Jjyj;  96,  24  S]/i3  34^  4 

c.  31,  6          n^y  f-  5r>,  "4  *\&y  Hi.  62,  19  ^£)  1°8,  19 

51,  3               QV^T  98,  20            Hit  60,  4  J-J7J?*?  f-  122,  5, 

40,  38         ^W  26,  29  ^j^'j;  52,  11  DJ?§  c.  108,  p. 

ID  ...  90,  43      Q^j;  f.  56,  45  ^y  c.  42,  12  163,  4 

38,  21          ^y  p.  189,  4  nfl#  31,  31  D*PJ^3  P-  I74'  4 

^  100,  28      ^r\y  48,  12                       a  y^£  38,  26 

p.  n.             *)p^  82,  35  p|^£j  p.  188,  9  *•)•££)  p.  171,  2 

96,  32      fhpj?  04,  9  ^jsjrj  Hit.  64,  6  1p£)  4~2,  5.  48,  1 

'•  64,  25,  ^«  48,  38  Ufe  78,  9  Hi.  58.   16 


VOCABULARY    I. 


DH1p2  40,  25  y  »7V?y  p.  47,  N 


np3  Ni.  72,  11    nX¥f-P-182>VI  tfpy  90,  29          QHD  P-  160,  c. 
56,  47         J^y  c  27,  19       fift  f.  76,  22      pQ-jp_  p,  109 
p.  109, 3  a    JOy  86,  31          yjy  104,  10          £Hp  Pi.  72,  8 

NI.  54, 21  jTjjoy  rhir    *T#y  108>  27     ^'ip  58>  i 
rns  94, 6         100, 20        rnyy  f.  p-  m,  Snp  so,  22 

n£}  78,  6  v^y  96,  4  III  HID  Pi-  90,  32. 

T   |  T 

JH3  74,  15          "qy  94,  23  pyy  p.  160,  c.     *7jp  40,  6.  52,  19 

rijn§ a  title  °f  pny  27, 2      p^y  c.  26, 49   nip  26, 2.  Hi. 

the  Egyptian  H'^'lV  96,  32       ^j)l£3y  P-  112  to  raise  up 

kings.  piy  44,  13.  Hi.    11^^  c-  ^4, 16     ttOp  40,  32 
V"-^  82,  4  66, 21.  Hit.  60,11  ?£y  36,  12  ^p  Ho.  58,  26 

-H3  8G^  28  piy  48,  15          J7"T.1.5y  P-  28,  4  pp  27,  39 

\Q  98,  24.  p*)iy  p.  112         -py  38,  9  ^p  96,  2 

100,  10  niVpi-P-  169,  c.  -jy  f.  40,  17  p^p  104,  8 

166,  5  Qiy  p.  117  HTi  f-  60,  19  ^?p  P-   96,  N. 

»4j  p.  169,.  b.  ^*jy  94,  20  -)^y  60,  13  Pi.  76,  34 


3  54,  44          -fly  31,  23  ft^y  60,  20          Jl77p  f-  a  curse 

'•§  52, 16.     piny  P.  109, 3  a          p         nap  'f.  120, 9 

62,  34  pfiy  Pi.  74,  3     ^p  116,  10  |p  104,  19 


3  f.  p.  117    p^y  f.  54  ilTDp  f-  34,  6   ftjp  Pi.  80,  30 

j-\g  50,  1  *vy  76, 24. 86, 36  ^p  Pi.  56,  53    ^p  118,  14 


|£j  p.  112  TV  34  9  |/*^p  46,  8.  Pi,  HiOp  f-  62,  50 

(5  66,9.  Pi.  rf?¥  Hi.  66,  20        76,  15  J-f^p  70,  1 

102,  15  oSy  24,  2  -Qp  46,  2  n,3p  96,  41 

66,  25  HID/V  f-  54?  37    Tip  p.  96,  N  mj?p  f-  P-  !66, 6 

^D  62,  40.  ySy  f.  p.  131       n"lp  84,  25 

•     :  T    ••  "It 


VoC.ABrLAKY      I. 

f-  HO,  8                   ^  88,  34                 3JH  to  hunger 

P-  109'  3  a  rttO  48,  3  J£n  Pu.  88,  37    y£\  adj.  42,  21 

07,  40         tTtfl    21,    28.  f«n  98,  25            fftjn  p.  112 

54>  ~5              106>  X  &*n  Hit-  88'  47  Hjn  Hit.  90,30 

Pi.  78,  18    a'&\>n  4G,  9  nn  P-  n.              HJjn  27,  18 

44,  24          ^\nr44  17,  pn  H2,  23          nijn.  P-  179,  4 

44,  39             fc'jo  112,  3G  ^pH  40,  23        Q^l  Hi.  86,  17 

50,  30.  86  pp  JO  29,  4  pini  82,  23        pjn  p.  47,  N 

to  name            •  JTgW"!  r-  1()0,  1  DH"!  ?"•  ^2,  30  J^  p.  110,  3  b 

36'  10-  92  D'9tH- 102' G  WT- 94j  37  ffl' 

Ni.  118,  10            many  ripp  58,  40.  Pi.       86,  40 

'   "   T 

P-   187    ^*l  -r>4,  36  70, 10.  Hi.  58, 19  t\y*\  p.  169,  a 

46,  6.  Pi.     3^  100,  4  3H  58,  23            #£-\  80,  20 

70,  9                 DD^SG,  2.  p.  96,  Qpn.  P-  1]2        NiD'l  P-  179,  2 

P-  117              9,  N  Tin  88,  28             H^D  Hi.  90,  35 

3  80,  13.    JlDni.  f.  P-  150  D31.34,  24.  58,  H^lp.  192,  N 

9  GG' 7        nnn  72, 14  HI.  12             nvn  84, 22 

P-  US             86,  33  ^D1  82,  42        J«j^-)  104,  14 

96,  18          p-j  52,  23  V?"J  84,  4           TOT.  66,  15 

100,  22       ^  f.  23,  23  nOI  f-  P-  163,  3  V\n  p.  96,  N 

V      V  T         T                                                              )        -        T 

38,  37         Q>S.n  P-  174,  4  ntDI  f-  58,  34      ypft  44,  36 

f-  62,  12    [3^  P.  170,  5  QE1  p.  96.  N.     yy^  96,  29 

-   T  -    T                                           |TT 

f-  H2,  5     nil  48,  16.  Pi.  j^OT  p.  169  a.    -|p^  42,  14 

I      -      T  -      T                                                           I    -     T 

Hi.  58,  36      56,  17  nHI  f-  52,  6        y^  58,  32 

tf'p  p.  173,  2    till  74,  17  pn  Pu.  88,  36      y£H  122,  10. 

108,  34      3V)  P-  177,  N.  j;-)  26,  18                 Hi.  66,  22 

1g>'p  70,  13         n^  82,  38.  23,  njH  f-   34,  16.    y$-\  29,  25 

.  p.  108,  I      25  54,  2.  56,  18     J?£H  88 

12-  4.  Pi.  5't,20.  I02,27rn  108,  35 


VOCABULARY    I. 

f.  54,  n.  n  ripe? L  G°>  31  prtnE'  120, 10  n?ttf 54, 34 

^               nSpfc'  f-  64,  22  -]jp  p.  125  ^B>  pi-  26,  41 

52,  32.  84,  JVPIDJP  106,  18  TIB'  56.  2  (33^  Hi.  64,  13 

48                       $yp  62,  43          HB>  86,  45  OSS'  p.  134 

i,  30   $yp  90,  28          JOB*'  44,  9  pjp  40,  42 

'.  p.  118  3?|Bf  29,  11.  Hi.  I-JB?'  42,  4 

T     •' 

58,  18        88,  14,  29  ^jp  27,  38 

c.  27,  23       pB?  102,  16          *nW  1°°>  15  rQilW  f-  108, 

!|B>  36,  22.  38, 3  *)jp  38>  4             JTlE'  90,  20  36 

T  T 

54,  26        rniP  66,  24        ftiB>*  27,  44  DlSt^  31,  10 

T  T                                                       (  T 

110,  7                        p              ^^'  H4,  14  (-[^  40,  26.   Pi. 

26,  35.  Pi.  TJNB''  26,  44       1;3lB'  48,  26  80,  14 

-     T  T  T 

106,  27               SlN^'  66,  11       IB'-JB?'  42,  26  f(1^  p.  117 

76,  20          \XtP  64,  18         niB'  92,  23  rr^jp  Hi.  58,  10 

f.  80,  33    J3NB*  P-  47,  N.   1HB>  42,  S3  Q'SB»  Pi.  56,  3 

92,  40           Itf  B>  Ni.  98,  9   rUl^'P-  103, 12  rhw  52,  31. 

-      T                                                                 T      T  -      T 

38,  25          HD^  P-  103>  N-  DOC''  98,  13  104,  13 

>8,  39         JO^Bf  27,  48.  96,  S(l^'  26,  32  fTJ^Bf'  58^  27 

122,  6            20                       ppB'  96,  46  ufaw  114,  20 

^3Jp  Hi.  70,  3.  *y*3£f  86,  26       IHE'  Pi,  108, 24  DlE'S^  P-  112 

"*    T                                                                :                                                 ""    T  ;      • 

58,  29                D^3^'  96,  39     inill^P-HO,  D£^  54,  39 

108,  10       yytf  Ni.  76,  5         3  b  Qjp  26, 52. 34, 21 

Hit.  60,  12  jftjp  120,  7        nng'  f-  31,  13  I^B*  Ni.54,45 

p.  159,  1    13^'  54,  9.  Pi.    rjt3B>  62,  48  J-JBE'  46,  4 

P  f.  27,  14      p.  46,  2              rrVW  5°'  14  Sx?lDE'  58^  6 

T 

92,  33      HIE'   44,    42.      33 B>'  44,  8  H^VJC''  f-  56, 43 

44,32.  Pi.       120,  IS               S^B'P-ilO^b  Q^B^' 23,  1 
66,  17                ,-\3t!'  ^2,  6         -vi-W  102,  24 


25  fi  .         VOCABULARY     I. 

62,  18     "ip^'  44>  1°     fi^rjifl  ^  i2     GO,  is 

38,  12     npsr  HI.  90,  so  rpn,  rpro  66,  noup  f.  112,  33 


P-  n-         Opjr  Hi.  58,  22       14  ^fi  Pi.  64,  27 

,  21    nroin  f-  56,  25  njjn  HI.  P.  105,  a 

28.  56,  24        -pp  Pi.  64,  24    rOJJIfi  f-  66,  23 

'  29     WVl^  112>  32 

!69,  a      ^n  p.  187,  2 
c.  86,  11    Wjy  p.  44,  3     H^IH  f-  26,  22    ffyjpp  f.  122,  7 

,  5    rrw  Pi.  p.  75,  4  nSnp  f-  no,  2  t^gn  K.  72,  10. 
f  94,  36       nn^  31»  20     n|rrp'D^pP   Pi-  106'  19 

11G3  I1       bntT  108.  6  56,  6  Hipp  f-  78,  4 

~     T  T'    • 

nr^'  f.  86,  25   pn^'  44,  s.     nnn  52,  24.  ss,  n^p^f.i  10,10 

DW^'P-117'8  n  43-   P  102'  12  JP?  102'  8 

nv^'  f.  48,  39    iTNfl  f-  88'  51  n^nnn  P-  ne   n£3ltr'3  ypfi 

'  '^rrr  T  -:  - 

nj;^'  p.  102,  8  rnNp  f.  78,  5  JQ^  P.  m,  n    48,  24,  26 
,  16    ixn  P-  1^7,  7  tri^n  76,  is    nrp^n  f-  P- 

-  62,  6         n  108^  4-  Pi-        !73,  c. 


nn  68,  15  114,  18  TODf!  f-  P- 

'  '•'    "•' 


§^'  42,  28     n»»n  f-  1}-  11G  on  34^  27         175,  3 

s8,  5     *irin  P-  so.  a  oh  p.  176,  5  njjnp  f- 

50,  22.        DlHp  c.  38,  17  Sl^P  P-  1U>  HI       12 

54,  22         nSnn  f-  §4,  23  -ran  76,  si  nn^n  P- 

T    •     :  '    T  T  • 

Hi.  ss,  33  •  n^in  f-  P-  i59'3  o^pn  IOG,  23      n 

106,  14     nnin  f-  27,  10  npn  42,  32. 


V  0  C  A  B  U  L  A  R  Y    II. 


m- 


n-  P-  m- 


m.  a  pool 
fr$  Hi.  to  be  red 
N  ^eddish 
Hi.  to  enlighten 

N(1  to  look 
gracous 
m.  sign 
m.  a  belt,  girdle 

ac*v-  ^ac^ 
*  n.  p.  m. 

adv-  01-  PreP-  after» 
behind 

id- 

in.  a  ram 
f.  oak 

n.  p.  m. 
«  eU>  cubit 
a  maid  servant 
f-  faithfulness 

n-  P-  m- 
think,  either 

followed  by  ^S^- 


or  not 

i.  to  gather  to- 

gether 

^l  D5N  n-  P- 

n-  gentile 
-.- 

to  weave 


1^  interval  (space  be- 
tween  tvyo  things),  du. 


^  m.  length 

length  oflife 
P^-  dunghill, 
dirt-heap 

Pi.  to  guide,  di- 
rect  aright,  to  make 
happy  ^ 

p'N  (fr-  Iw^N'  not 
used,  fortune)  hail! 
happy! 

3 

^3  n"  P-  of  a 
city 

Hi.  cause  to  enter 
J!Q  Hi.  to  know,,  to  un- 
derstand.  Hit.  to  mark, 
attend  to  something 
'l-  to  ^e  despised 

T 

interj.  0  that,  1  pray 


a  champion  who  de- 
cides  between  two 
armies 

DflS  D*3  n'  P*  of  a  citY 
^1^3  m.  the  first  bom 

: 

/t^^J  to  be  lord  over 

intr.  toburn,  tr.  to 
consume 
/^  Pi-  to  split 

valley 

i-  to  seek»  demand 
H")3  to  choose,  select. 


Hi.  to  raise  up, 
make  high 
m.  height 
m.  district,  terri- 
tory 

$  mighty,  hero 
H  m'  crystal 
J  Hi.  to  enclose 

a  kid 
34 


258 


VOCABULARY     II. 


a  company  of  HI!"!    to  stretch  out       h!)|f  to  quake,  to  writhe 


exiles 

lin  *°  lift  UP?    with 

i*ltn  to  see,  especially 

T  T 

MJJ  m.  a  stem 

0^3  to  elevate,  to  honor 

a  vision,  hence  to 

")fJJ  to  cut  in  pieces, 

07*1  adv-  hither 

prophesy 

divide,  Ni.  to'be  cut  off 

H^n  with  7  or  with 

ptll  arrow,  fil/lp  '(1 

s$V|  f.  a  valley 

two  accus.  to  change 

thunder-flash 

*y_  n-  P- 

IHn  t°  conceive,  to 

T  T 

jnff^  to  be  strong,  with 

1          T 

•pjj  m.  a  sinew 

be  pregnant. 

JO  to  be  stronger  than, 

T7J  n-  P-  m- 

6 

i.  e.  to  conquer,  Hi. 

-  :  T 

^OJI  m*  Bulrushes 

3fc$f  m.  a  wolf 

to  lay  hold  of,  to  seize 

7}OJ1  rn-  a  weaned  child 

3^'  to  flow 

ptn  a-  p?n  strong, 

T 

ITT             |    •   T 

3J2TU  n.  p.  m. 

n^lt  anc^  Hit  ^  a  harlot 

violent 

"|j|    n.  p.  of  a  city. 

"1^  intr.  to  be  bound 

NDn  sin^  2)  the  punish 

n 

about,  Ni.  to  turn 

ment  of  sin 

"Ol  rn-  a  thing 

T     T 

aside 

ItDn  a  shoot,  twig 

11  adj.  sick,  ill 

|"|^3f  Hit.  to  cleanse 

f]*ft  f.  a  living  thing, 

T    ~ 

T  T 

T   ~ 

1^1  to  draw,    as 

one's  self 

animal,  beast 

T      T 

water  from  a  well 

jT^^Of  f-  glass,  crystal 

*T||1  m.  the  palate 

)7l  to  pursue  hotly 

l^f  to  remember 

0/n  Hi.  to  cause  to 

-      T 

-  T 

~     T 

Jl  espec.  the  pi.  0*0*1 

Jpf  m.  the  beard 

dream 

T                                                                  •        T 

1  |  TT 

• 

blood-guiltiness 

?pf  an  elder,  chief  of  a 

^>o?n  m-  flint 

ijn  ^  fr.  JTP  Inf- 

T      " 

family,  tribe  or  city 

Y  /n  ^  (°niy  du. 

ITT      . 

knowledge 

t^*")t  m<  seed,  children, 

D^V  /n)  l°inJ  hip 

yn  f.  id. 

posterity. 

p7p7   adj.  smooth 

pi  with  3  ,  to  tread, 

n 

T^^On  m-  a  violent  man, 

e.  g.  a  way 

n*vQn  ^  stripe 

a  robber 

T            - 

I 

£/l  Pi.  to  anoint. 

L^Dn  to  saddle,  Pu. 

/On  to  have  compassion 

•"     T 

n 

to  be  bound  up 

10n  m-  bitumen 

nj"J  to  meditate,  think,  ] 

&£V"tn  the  new  moon 

10n  to  daub 

with  *J  of  the  object     flfj  n.  gent. 


VOCABULARY     11. 


259 


to  Sllffer  want 
'ijn  adj.  free,  exempt 
from  taxes 

the  half>  then  the  /^  Hi-  to 

to  be  content 

-  a  hole  "iN!  m-  a  river'  sPe~ 

n-  P-  of  a  toP  of       cially  the  Nile 
Sinai  ^P^*  n-  Sent- 

to  auake'  to  Si*  or  SDV  a  he-goat, 


i<  to 


fresh-        1       m'  child 


bo™  *•  e-  a 

child 

Hi.  to  suckle 

m- 
dation 

^  adJ-  beautiful 
>  Hi.  to  lead  out, 


tremble 

to  be  kindled, 
with  fttf  the  anger 
was  k. 

m.  a  piece,  a  slice 

pi-  to  upbraid, 
to  'scorn 

f-  reproach, 


hence 
horn 


to  be  dry 


ram's-       to  carry  out 

^    Hit.    to   set    or 
place     one's    self,    to 

stand  firm 

^  precious,  dear 

*Y  to  throw,  to  shoot, 
as  an   arrow,   Ni.  to 


shame 


f.  side,  ^H  T 
a  side,  i.  e.  bank  of 
the  Nile 

>  to  regard,  to  have       be  shot 
respect,  Hi.  to  cause   |"|*V  m-  nionth 


u*n  to  think,  with  7         to  know,  to  inform 
to  count  as,  to  regard  Q£V  by  day,  2)  daily 

trn  to  have  Alight  onv  n-  P-  m- 

in  one,  to  love,  with^  IH'^^    n-  P-  m- 

gent-          3D'  Hi-  to  do  well» 

.  father-in  law         to  do  good 

ut-  nn*1  to  be    HID4'  Ni-  to  dispute 


terrified,  oonfounded. 
19 


with  one  another,  Hi. 


Hi.    to    cause  to 
sit,  to  dwell,  to  let 

dwe11 

\  n-  P-  m- 

*  to  sleep 

n'  P-  m' 

'  f-  honesty,  piety 
Ni.  to  remain 


to    determine,    to   re-      Hi.  to    let    remain 

to  sink,  to  penetrate      prove,    rebuke,  1*VV  "•  P-  rn- 

'ddJ-  ^a'r'  beaut'flll  vb^  to  prevail  over,  to  -j 

m.  the     ,)od.  best       overcome 


VOCABULARY  II. 


heavy,  numerous  to  fight 

"TiD^  m-  honor,  majesty  Vffp  m.  oppression 
b>33  m-  a  young  sheep  tyfy    to    speak   unintel- 
[£'33  m.  an  oven 
I'D  adv.  thus,  |-J3^  j- 

hither  and  thither 
m.  a  helmet 


Ni.  to  be  prepared, 


ligibly,   in   a  foreign 

tongue 

Q^  m-  lightning 

Pi.  to  gather  up, 
to  collect 
£0         m.  a  gleaning 


f-  Ethiopia 
an  Ethiopian 

3  vessel,  apparel, 

instrument 

Ni.  to  be  kindled, 


m.  might,  power 
f-  opening,  hole 

*'•  a  knife 
Ni.  to    he  despi- 
sed  ,  rejected 

(of  compassion)  KlD*J    m-     the    going 

f.  a  wing  2)  the  down,  setting  of  the 
skirt  of  an  upper  sun,  hence  the  west 
garment  -1/P  m-  a"  upper  gar- 

3  f.  palm  of  the  hand,       ment 

7*n    the  sole  of  the  /I'lp  f-  a  measure 
foot  tir?D  Pi-  to  hasten 

55  m.  young  lion       VlO  to    circumcise 

L  f 

S  71  *J  P^p.  before  ^^ 

.  to  be  weary,       over  against,  towards  £ 

to  dislike,  loathe  -y|£  Hi.   to  change,  to 
-  flame  alter*  one's  self 

f>  the  glittering  D^'lO  m.  a  social  circle 

nW  Pi-  to  kill,  slay 
Ni.  to  make  war,  ftpftQ  f.  the  post  of  a 


m.  a  song 
m.  equity,  im 
partiality 

m.  pain,  sorrow 
f.  a  stroke,  a  wound 

m.  a  stumbling- 
block 
Sn  Pi.  to  fill 


JQ  f-  a  night  hut 


f.  kingdom,  dominion 
tD  to  number 

/P    *•  rest,   ease, 
^  water  of  refresh- 
ing;  residence 

ft    m.    a  weaver's 

T 

beam 

D  f-  a  f«"nt,  cast, 

^X  idols 

m.  a  track,  way 

f-  a  round  ram  - 
T-T  :  " 
part 

a  little, 

only   a    little,     i.    e. 
almost 

m.  a  spring 
p  (fr.  n^}  what  is 
above  ^-3  above 


VOCABULARY  IF. 


upon 


from  above' 


f-  (°nly  PL 

f-  array>  aw         a  dwelling» 
generally  grassy  pastures 

-  the  forehead  fifcO  to  commit  adultery 

f-  a  greave  npX,3  f-  a  complaining, 

•  JTT: 

m.  staff,  stick  outcry 

f-  a  field  of  cu-  #^)  Ni.  to  prophesy 
cumbers  "|JjJj  prep,    before,  over 

m-  a  sight'  with      against,  opposite  to 


V  the  view 
to  ^e  rebellious 


to  oppress,  to  ex- 
act  a  task    from  any 


£m,  a  falling,  espec.      one 


a  fatted  calf 
n**"to  n-  P-    °^    a  ^'^ 

T      •  * 

in  Jerusalem 

TWO  to  draw  out 

•n^'n  to  extend,  to  draw 
'I 

'      m-  possession 

m-  a  bearing 
m>  second 

t-  «aPP!)rt> 
staff 

m-  weight 

ra-  drink- 
a  feast  generally 

DHD    m-    uninjured 
mb  (only  du- 

I  V 

the  loins. 


to  thrust,  expel 

a  n°ble,  prince 

to  <^rive  (beasts) 

to  lead 
m.  (pi.  Q^.  and 

river 


-  panther 
D}  m-  a  standard> 

banner 

HDJ  ^-  to  try>  Prove 
to  breath 
to  be  overspread, 
Pi.  to  dash  in  pieces 
Ni-  to  quarrel 
to  watch,  guard,  to 
besiege 

m.  branch 
pure,  innocent 

to  ra^se  UP' 
Q^f)'^    to   accept    the 
person,  i.  e.  to  have  a 
friendly  regard,  with 

. 

7N  to  be  gracious,  with 
or    without    following 
to  lift  up  the  voice, 


to  rest,  Hi.  to  cause       to  utter,  speak 


to  rest,    to    set,    put 

down,  place. 
JJJJ  n.  p.  m. 
y!)^  to  move  to  and  fro, 

be  shaken 
-  a- 

conduct 

D^    to    leave,    (in 

-  T 

charge  of  any  one) 


to    lead   astray, 
to  deceive 

m>  usury'  interest. 


i.to  turn, 
.  to  lead,       back,  to  go  back 

D*OD  m>  a  circuit,  adv. 

.      T 

a.  prep,  round  about, 
around 


VOCABULARY    II. 


m.  thicket 

-  burden,  task 
'  Pure  g°l<l 
fl  xJD  f-  peculiar  prop- 
erty,  treasure 
Pi.  deliver  up 
m.  flags 

to  turn  aside,  draw 
near 

*J*§D  m-  a  sapphire 
7pD  to  stone 
JT1Q  f-  a  turning  away 
(from  the  law,  fr.  God) 

y 
%y   m.  darkness,  thick 

T 

doud 


smoking 
to  oppress 
m.  he-goat 

m-  corps,;  carcass 
as  soon  as 


Pi.  to  glean 
Ni.  to  be  hidden, 
Hi.  to  hide,  conceal 
to  stand 

f-  n-  P-  of  a  citJ 
J-Jj]7  to  testify 

m.  humble,  meek     f  £3  refined  gold 

m.  pi.  wood,  i.  e.     p\1J03  f.  topaz 

sticks  for  fuel  ^  7iD  Hit.  to  pray 

-    T 

m.  bone  f\}£  to  turn,  with  S^ 

•  festive  assem-       to  or  towards 
bly,  a  feast-day  b\33***i)      because  of 


to  bind 
barren,  sterile 


D  m-  Pearls 

m<  carved  image, 


to  become  dark,         or  idol 
Hi.  D"lJTa<lv.  at     -|p      to  think  of,  with 


f-  work,  labor 
with  ^  pref.  be- 

cause  of,  ^IDJ^D?  for 
the  purpose  that    ' 
Hi.  to  cause  to  pass 
f-  assembly,  con- 
gregation 

71J7  m-  c'hild^ 
boy 

y  to  leave,  desert  ^ 
n-  P-  of  a  oity 
y  Hi.    to   bring  up, 
to  offer 


evenng 

m.  the  willow 


a  y°"ng    lul'i 
bullock 

^ 

bear  fruit,  Hi. 


tp  look  after 
*}Q    m.  with    the  art. 
H3*1J^  f-  security,  pledge 

i-  to  make  bare, 
uncover 

to  set  in  order,  to       to  make  fruitful 
array  (a  battle,)   to 


-  foreskin 
m.  neck 
to  fear,  tremble 
to  smoke 


f-  young-  cow 

"•  8'ent- 

m-  a  «iw^/e  ber- 
ry,  Vhich  Jails  off  in 
the  vintage 

3  t()  stretch  out. 
iy*)  to    transgress,  to 


VOCABULARY  II. 

sin,  with  *}  ^D  inward  part, 

-  an  adder    '2  m  tne  midst 

y^fi  near,  kindred 
Hi.  to  make  sue-  Q"p  to  cover 
ceed  pp  m-  horn 

m.  wool  H'^pb'P  f-  the  scale 

f<  a  cry  for  help  of  a  fishj  of  an  ar" 

n-  P-  f-  mor 

to  hide 

m-  a  basilisk 


263 


to  be    hard'  Hi' 
to  harden 


to  be  hostile  to 
adversary. 


m.  grave 
adj.  holy 
in.  helmet 

to  stand  firm,  en-       dren 
dure,  Hi.  perform,  con-  *^^ 
firm 

f-  incense 

D  a-K^P  m-  corn 
roasted 

Pi.  to  sling 

m.  a  sling 

to  bu 


to  look  out,  choose, 
to  perceive,  Ni.  to  be 
seen,  to  appear 

f-  red  coral 
great  grand-chil 


Hi.  to  cry  aloud 

to  mn"  Ho'  to 

quickly 

adj.  wide,  broad 

to  bathe 
HL  to  contend>  to 

conduct  a  cause 

^]3^T  to  be.tender^  li- 

mid'  faint 
DO^T.  to  tread 
y^\  ™.  badness,  wick- 

edness 
J^"|    m.    companion, 

friend 

to  feed 


^   Hi.  to    cause  to 
lie  down 

to    tread    down, 

*•  e-  to  s^ander 

m-  tne  watering 
trough 

Hi-  to  smel1'  with 

to  enjoy  the  odor 

f-  abundance 


"•  P-  m- 

Hi-  to  do  evi1^  to 
act  wickedly 

52^*1  an  earthquake 
H^  to  be  loose^  Hi- 
to  slacken,  to  let  alone, 
forsake 

D*"T*1n-  p.  of  a  station 
a     uilt     one 


"possessor,  master 

to  divine,  spoken  QH  to  be  high,  Part. 
espec.  of  false  prophets       Q^  high,  Hi.  to  lift 


n-  P-  of  a  city 
to  put,  Hi.  with 

™>  bestuw 

i-  lo  act 


VOCABULARY    II . 


to  cause  to  prosper 
TO^  Joyf«l  glad 
f-  lip*  bank 
m-  one  left,  rem- 
nant 

to  burn 


to  ask,  demand 
Dl  WS  '&  to  ask  after 
the  welfare,  to  salute 

to  carry  away 
captive 

'  f-  captivity 

to  turn  the 
c.  i.  e.  to  remove  it 
m.  staff 

m- 


an  ox  fyyy    adv.  the  second 

Hi.  to  corrupt,       time 
act  wickedly  pgf  Pi.    to  inculcate, 

Hi.  to  sing  teach  diligently 

m.  a  song  DDt£>  to  plunder 

'  Hi.  to  cause  to  lie,  y&yy?  to  amuse  one's 
to  lay  down  self,  to  play 

m.  a  gate 
Hi.  to  make  low 
m.  a  weight 
a  coat  of  mail 


m.  vanity,  false- 


Hi.  to  cause  to  re- 
turn,    with    ^^^  to 

answer,  Pi.  with  fctejj 
to  refresh 

f-  a  cry  for  helP 


ty  to  rise  early,  Hi. 
D^Tt    adv.  in   the 

••    ;      — 

morning 

.  welfare 
with  *|*  to  stretch 

-   T  T 

out 

m.  a  table 

m-  peace-offering       plunderer 
to  draw  y^fift      -\  m 

'  grand-children  JlpS 

pf)  to  determine  by 

measure,  to  weigh 

waste  J-|^-j  to  hang  up 

to  understand 
n.  report,  rumor 
to  guard 
scarlet  color 


f.  an  ark 

m.  a    robber, 


-\ 

J  f-  esPec-  the 
cocws  worm 


p.  n.  m. 

^  desolation, 


f-  a  form,   an 
image 

exchange 
the  sheath. 


CONTENTS. 


OF    THE    ELEMENTS. 

CHAPTER   I. 


PAGE. 
§     1.  The  Alphabet 1 

2.  Division   of  Letters 3 

If 

3.  Vowel-Letters  and  Vow- 

If 

el  Signs 3 

„      4.  Sh'va ? 

5.  Composite  Sh'va 8 

„     6.  Patach  Furtive 8 

7.  Dagesh    and  Mappik...  9 
„      8.  Syllables 10 

9.  Accents,  Metheg,  Mak- 
kef 11 

10.  Distinction   of  Kamets 
and  Kamets-Chatuph  .  18 

11.  Distinction  of  Vocal 

and  Silent  Sh'va 19 

CHAPTER  II. 
Peculiarities   and    Changes   of 

Letters  and   Vow  eh. 
§  12.  Changes  of  Consonants  20 
13.  Peculiarities  of  the  Gut 
turals  23 

„    14.  Vowel  Changes 23 

CHAPTER  III. 

§    15.  Servile  Letters   26 

„    16.  The  Prefixes  n^'D  —  27 

„    17.  The  Article  28 

„    18.  The  Prefixes  ^->y\  ...  29 
„    19.  Cases    of    Nouns    and 

Pronouns 32 

CHAPTER   IV. 

Of  the  Pronoun. 
§  20.  The  Personal  Pronoun  34 


PAGE. 

§  21.  Nominal  Suffixes  36 

„   22.  Demonstrative  Pronoun  38 

„  23.  The  Relative 40 

„  24.  The  Interrogative  Pro 
noun  41 

CHAPTER  V. 

Of  the    Verb. 

§  25.  General  View 44 

„  26.  Signification  and  Cha 
racteristics  of  the  Con 
jugations  45 

„'  27.  Inflection 47 

„   28.  Classes  47 

CHAPTER  VI. 

The  Regular    Verb.     Explanation 
of  the  Second  Paradigm, 

§  29.  The    Preterite 48 

„    30.  The   Infinitive 51 

„    31.  The  Future 52 

„    32.  The  Lengthened  Future 

or  Optative 54 

n   33.  Vav  Convorsive 55 

„   34.  The  Imperative 57 

,,   35.  The  Participle  59 

„   36.  Niphal 61 

„    37.  Piel  and  Pual  64 

„    38,  Hiphil   and  Hophal...  67 
„   39.  Hithpael  70 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Tlie  Gutturals. 

§  40.  Verbs  Pe  Guttural....  Tl 
41.  Verbs  Ayin  Guttural.  74 
35 


266 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

42.  Verbs  Lamed  Guttural  TO 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

The  Suffixes  of  the    Verb. 
In  General  .............  78 

43.  The      Preterite     with 
Suffixes...  ...............  79 

44.  The  Future  with  Suf 
fixes  ......................  80 

45.  The     Infinitive     with 
Suffixes  ..................  82 

46.  The    Imperative    with 
Suffixes  ..................  83 

47.  The     Participle     with 
Suffixes  ..................  84 

CHAPTER  IX. 

Irregular    Verbs. 

48.  Verbs   #"£  .............  86 

40.  Verbs  N"^  .............  87 

50.  Verbs  f"£  ...............  89 

51.  Verbs  V'£  ...............  91 

52.  Verbs  $»y  .............  94 

53.  Verbs  \ry  and  vy  ...  98 
51.  Verbs  pV'1?  ............  101 

55.  Verbs  Doubly  Anom 

alous  ...................  105 

CHAPTER  X. 


§  46. 


58. 
59. 
60. 


„   61. 

„   02. 

„   63, 


In  General.  Formation 
and  Inflection  .........  108 

The  Gender  ...........  113 

The  l^ural  and  Dual  116 
The   Construct   State  119 
Rules  for   the  Inflec 
tion     of      Masculine 
Nouns  ..................  121 

Declension  of  Mascu 
line  Nouns  ............  122 

First   Declension.....  123 

Second  Declension  ...  1  24 


PAGE. 
§  64.  Third  Declension 128 

„   65.  Fourth  Declension...  130 

„    66.  Fifth  Declension  133 

„    67.  The      Formation     of 

Feminine  Nouns 138 

„  68.  Declension  of  Femi 
nine  Nouns 138 

„   69.  First  Declension  139 

„    70.  Second  Declension...  140 

„    71.  Third  Declension 143 

„    72.  Fourth  Declension...  144 

„   73.  Irregular  Nouns 147 

„    74.  The  Numerals 149 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Particles. 
§  75.  In  General  153 

IP-^LH-T   II. 

SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER   I. 

The  Essential  Parts  of  a  Sentence. 

§  76.  The   Subject 157 

„   77.  The  Copula 158 

„  78.  The  Predicate  and  its 
Agreement  with  the 

Subject 159 

„    79.  Verbal   Arrangement  161 

CHAPTER  II. 

Syntax  of  the  Parts  of 

Speech. 

§    80.  The  Article 162 

The  Noun. 

§    81.  Gender 164 

„    82.  Number  164 

„  83.  The  Cases.  Construct 
State  and  the  Geni 
tive  166 

,    84,  Dative..  .  168 


CONTEXTS. 


PARE. 

85.  Accusative 168 

86.  The  Absolute  Case..  170 

87.  Apposition 171 

88.  Duplication  of  Nouns  171 

89.  Substantives   used   in 
the   place    of  Adjec 
tives  171 

90.  Adjectives  172 

91.  Comparison 172 

92.  Numerals 173 

Pronouns. 

93.  Personal  Pronoun....  174 

94.  Demonstrative 175 

95.  Interrogative 177 

96.  Relative 177 

97.  Reflexive    and  Recip 
rocal  178 

98.  Other  Pronouns 179 

The   Verb. 
99.  In  General 180 

100.  The   Preterite 180 

101.  The  Future 182 

102.  The  Conversive  Vav.  183 

103.  Paragogic  and  Apo 
copated  Future 184 

104.  The  Imperative 184 

105.  Infinitive  Absolute  .  185 

106.  Infinitive  Construct.  186 


PAGE. 

§  107.  The  Participle 189 

Particles. 

„   \  08.  Particles  of  Negative 

Sentences 190 

„  109.  Particles    of    Inter 
rogative  Sentences  .  192 

„    110.  Particles  of  Optative 

Sentences 192 

„    111.  Particles  of  Objective 

Sentences  193 

„    112.  Particles     of    Final 

Sentences  193 

„    113.  Particles  of  Inferen 
tial  Sentences 194 

„    114.  Particles  of  Tempo 
ral  Sentences 194 

„   115.   Particles   of    Causal 

Sentences 194 

„    116.  Particles   of  Condi 
tional  Sentences 194 

„    117.  Particles  of  Disjunc 
tive  Sentences 196 

„    118.  Particles   of  Adver 
sative  Sentences  ....  196 

§    119.  Iiitajections 196 

Paradigms  197 

Chrestomathy 220 

Vocabulary    I.  242 

Vocabulary   II. 258 


ABBREVIATIONS  ANTD  CORRECTIONS. 
LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


abs.  —  absolute 

fut.  --  future 

pers.  ? 

abstr.  -  abstract 

gen.  --  genitive 

>  person 

ace.  —  accusative 

fen.  —  generally 

part.  -  participle 

act.  --  active 

li.  -  Hipbil 

pass.  -  passive 

adj.  —  adjective 

Ho.  --  Hophal 

in  p.  --  in  pause 

adv.  —  adverb 

Hit.  --  Hithphael 

Pi.  -  Piel 

apocop.  —  apocopated 

i.  e.  --  id  est 

PI.  }    ,       . 

art.  --  article 

ib.  —  ibidem 

pi.  )  ' 

const,  st.  > 
>  construct  state 

C.  St.            \ 

imp.  —  imperative 
inf.  —  infinitive 

proh.  —  probable 
prop.  —  properly 

comm.  -  common 

interj.  —  interjection 

Pu.  --  Pual 

comp.  —  compare 
conj.  —  conjunction 
e        ?  exempli  gratia 
"  °'  5     for  example 

masH  masculine 
m.       5 

Ni.  —  Nipbal 
N.  --  Note 

reflex.  -  reflexive 
sc.  —  scilicet 

sinof.  >    .       , 
"   >  singular 

'  >•  feminine 

n.  p.  --  proper  name 
obj.  --  object 

subst.  -  substantive 
suf.  —  suffix 

fr.  b.  —  from  bottom 

orig.  —  originally 

tr.  -  transitive. 

fr.  t.  —  from  top 

p.  -  page 

CORRECTIONS. 


PAGE 

LINE. 

READ.                 PAGE. 

LINE.           READ. 

7. 

1,  fr.  b. 

httv           <&, 

2,  fr.  b.     £»VTT 

v  T      ^: 

VT     :     T 

12, 

1,  fr.  b. 

niWflnpi      73> 

iG,  fr.  b.  ri&nn 

14, 

7,  fr.    t. 

1,  14                       85, 

12,  fr.    t,     -)XK 

15, 

13,  fr.  b. 

**?!??                96' 

3,  fr.    t.     ^njflfi 

17, 

2,  5,  fr.    t. 

afformatives              97, 

9  fr.  t.  miripfi 

'27, 

13,  fr.  b. 

T 

4.  fr.  b.    f|V-,  n1^3J1 

31, 

3,  fr.  b. 

njpga          119> 

o,  fr.  b.  n^no 

51, 

3,  fr.  b. 

nna*            12()' 

T    ~; 

10,  fr.    t.     riD^DD 

53, 

1,  fr.  b. 

4,  fr.    t.     jTJXto*D 

50, 

7,  fr.  b. 

tDN1?                   !4i, 

14,  fr.  t.  rosno 

59, 

14,  fr.  b. 

t^iDH                   ^^' 

17;  fr.    t.     for  step-father, 

», 

13,  fr.  b. 

bHjD 

read  :  father-in  law 

01, 

4,  fr.  b. 

,     for  larger  type, 

18,                mother-in-law 

read  :  asterisks       107, 

9,  fr.  b.     $  90,  4 

05, 

0,  fr.  b 

r^rrin         1G9' 

2,  fr.    t.     J?3£?" 

00,, 

2,  fr     t. 

*iy                   180, 

10,  fr.  t,  ^^sti^t3 

jfer     OP  THE        ^ 

^    *»• 

((USI7EHSITY1) 

14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 

subject  to  immediate  recall. 


DOT  4    '6/1-1 PM 


LD  2]A-40m-ll,'63 
(E1602slO)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


